Digital PDFs

AA-D0O23A-TE

August 1978

388 pages

Original

18MB

view download

OCR Version

16MB

view download

Document:	VAX/VMS Command Language User's Guide
Order Number:	AA-D0O23A-TE
Revision:	0
Pages:	388
Original Filename:

OCR Text

August 1978

The manual
provides

describes the

detailed

reference

VAX/VMS command
information

and

language, DCL.

examples

of all

It .

non-

privileged commands available to general users.

VAX/VMS
Command Language
User's Guide
Order No. AA-DO23A-TE

SUPERSESSION/UPDATE INFORMATION:

This is a new document for this release.

OPERATING SYSTEM AND VERSION:

VAX/VMS V01

SOFTWARE VERSION:

VAX/VMS V01

To order additional copies of this document, contact the Software Distribution
Center, Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts 01754

digital equipment corporation - maynard, massachusetts

First Printing,

August 1978

The information in this document is subject to change without notice
and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment

Corporation.

Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility

for any errors that may appear in this document.

The software described in this document is furnished under a license
and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such
)

license.

No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on

equipment that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.

1978 by Digital Equipment Corporation

The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future documentation.

The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

DIGITAL
DEC

DECsystem-10
DECtape

MASSBUS
OMNIBUS

DECUS
UNIBUS
COMPUTER LABS

EDUSYSTEM
FLIP CHIP
FOCAL

PHA
RSTS
RSX

VAX

VMS

DECnet

IAS

PDP

COMTEX
DDT
DECCOMM
ASSIST-11

DIBOL

INDAC
LAB-8
DECSYSTEM~20
RTS~8

0s/8

TYPESET-8
TYPESET-11
TMS-11
ITPS-10
SBI

9/79-14

CONTENTS

Page

viii

PREFACE

Manual Objectives
Intended Audience

3
4

Structure of this Document
Associated Documents
Conventions Used in this Document

WO 00

Function Keys
Characteristics
DCL COMMANDS

FILE

SPECIFICATIONS

FILE

SPECIFICATIONS

AND

LOGICAL

NAMES

Network Nodes
Devices
Directories
File Names, File

Types,
Version Numbers

Defaults

for

File

Specifications

Wild Cards

@
s

NAMES

Logical
How

Logical
Default
Logical
AND

Name

Tables

Specify

Logical Names
Translation

Name

Logical

Names
TAPE

PROTECTION
Volume and

Names

for

Program

VOLUMES

File

Protection

Device Allocation
VOLUME INITIALIZATION

iii

Input/Output

| et

CHARACTERISTICS

HoNooututnd s WNHH

Procedures
SYSTEM

wWwWhNhNH

=
N

[
.
O

L)
L]
o

LANGUAGE

Commands

Special Terminal
Setting Terminal
SUMMARY OF VAX/VMS

LOGICAL
W
N -

L)
*
LN

NN
-

NMNDNMNNDDNDNDNDDNDND

DCL

e i
e
e e el
|
1
I
11
11

FILE

COMMAND

for

L)
e

Command
TERMINAL

1
1.1
1.2

THE

Synonyms
THE

w
L]
*
.

wwww

COMMAND

EXTENDING

DISK

MESSAGES

HELP

COMMANDS
PROMPTING

SYSTEM

N
@
.

ENTERING

THE

.1
.2
3
4

SYSTEM
ENVIRONMENT

COMMAND

and

CHAPTER

THE

COMMAND

YOUR

COMMAND LANGUAGE

ACCESSING

- CHAPTER

THE

OVERVIEW

CHAPTER

USING
[

et b e b bt e
et
e
.
L]
.
.
.
[
L]
.
L]
L)
L]
L)
L)
HFHOWOWONNNIOAOd
W

PART

1
2

3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.4
3.4.1

MOUNTING VOLUMES ON DEVICES
Requesting Operator Assistance
Dismounting Volumes
USING DISK AND TAPE VOLUMES
Using Disks

3-5
3-5
3-6

3.4.3
3.5

Multivolume Tape Sets
ACCESSING DEVICES IN BATCH JOBS

3-10
3-12

PROGRAMMING WITH VAX/VMS

4-1

4.1

COMMANDS FOR PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT

4-1

3.4.2

CHAPTER

4.1.1

4.1.2

Using Tapes

3-9

4-3

Program Libraries

Controlling Program Updates

4-4

and Modifications

4,2
4.2.1
4,2.2
4.2.3
4.3
4.3.1
4,3.2
4.4
4,4.1
4.4.2

DEBUGGING
Symbolic Debugging
Debugging with Virtual Addresses
Interrupting Program Execution
EXIT HANDLERS AND CONDITION HANDLERS
Exit Handlers
Exception Conditions
PROCESS CONCEPTS
Priorities, Privileges, and Quotas
Input, Output, and Error Streams

4-4
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-9

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

5-1

5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.3.1

CREATING COMMAND PROCEDURES
Entering Data in Command Procedures
Command Procedures without Commands
EXECUTING COMMAND PROCEDURES INTERACTIVELY
Input and Output Devices
Verification of Command Procedure Execution
BATCH JOBS
Submitting Batch Jobs from the Terminal

5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5

5.3.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
5.6.5
5.6.6

Input and Output Devices
COMMAND LEVELS
THE LOGIN.COM FILE
USING SYMBOLS IN COMMAND PROCEDURES
Local Symbols
Global Symbols
Symbol Substitution
Passing Parameters to Command Procedures
The INQUIRE Command
Deleting Symbols

4.4.3

CHAPTER

3-7
3=-7

5.3.2

5.7

5.7.1
5.7.2

5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.9

5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.9.4

4-11

Processes and Subprocesses

Submitting Batch Jobs through the
Card Reader

COMMANDS TO CONTROL THE EXECUTION OF

A COMMAND PROCEDURE

The IF Command
The GOTO Command

The EXIT and STOP Commands
Testing Status Values
The SYNCHRONIZE and WAIT Commands
READING AND WRITING FILES
Reading and Writing Process Permanent Files
File Formats
LEXICAL FUNCTIONS

FSMODE and FS$SVERIFY
FSEXTRACT, FSLOCATE, FSLENGTH, and FSTIME
FSDIRECTORY, F$PROCESS, and FSUSER

FSLOGICAL

5-6

5-7
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-14
5-14
5-14

5-15
5-16

5-16
5-17
5-20
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-22

5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26

II.

Comparisons

Rules for Specifying String Comparisons
Rules for Specifying Arithmetic Operations
Rules of Precedence in Expressions
RULES FOR SPECIFYING LEXICAL FUNCTIONS

6.8
6.8.1
6.8.2

RULES FOR ENTERING DATES AND TIMES
Absolute Times
Delta Times

COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
=
@

(Assignment Statement)
(Execute Procedure)

ALLOCATE
APPEND

ASSIGN
BASIC

CANCEL

COBOL/RSX11
CONTINUE

COPY
CREATE

DEALLOCATE

DEASSIGN

DEBUG
DECK

DEFINE
DELETE

DELETE/ENTRY
DELETE/SYMBOL
DEPOSIT

DIFFERENCES
DIRECTORY

DISMOUNT
DUMP
EDIT

EOD
EOJ
EXAMINE

EXIT
FORTRAN

GOTO
HELP

—

wWWwhN

(o))
mo\ol\m
|
|

[

Rules for Specifying Logical Operations
Rules for Specifying Arithmetic

6.6.4
6.6.5
6.6.6
6.7

HH 000D

.6.2
.6.3

Rules for Determining Qualifier Defaults
Rules for Entering Qualifier Values
Rules for Entering Output File Qualifiers

[I T

W o W e W e M o) o) I o Re)]
[e) W o)W

PART

3.1
.3.2
.3.3

RULES FOR ENTERING CHARACTER STRING DATA
RULES FOR ENTERING NUMERIC VALUES
RULES FOR FORMING EXPRESSIONS
Rules for Entering Operators

6.1.2
6.1.3
6.2
6.2.1

RULES

O\ O\ O) OY OY OY O

.4
.5
.6
.6.1

1.1

FOR ENTERING COMMANDS
Rules for Continuing Commands on More
than One Line
Rules for Entering Comments
Rules for Truncating Keywords
RULES FOR ENTERING FILE SPECIFICATIONS
Rules for Entering File
Specification Lists
RULES FOR ENTERING QUALIFIERS

o O
L]
L

GRAMMAR RULES

(=)

CHAPTER

INITIALIZE
INQUIRE

JOB
LIBRARY
LINK

LINK/RSX11
Login Procedure
LOGOUT
MACRO

MCR
MOUNT

ON
OPEN
PASSWORD
PRINT

PURGE

READ
RENAME
REQUEST

RUN
RUN

(Image)
(Process)

SET
SET

CARD_READER

SET

CONTROI,_Y

SET

DEFAULT

SET MAGTAPE
SET

SET

PROCESS

SET

PROTECTION

SET

QUEUE

SET

RMS_DEFAULT

SET

TERMINAL

SET VERIFY
SET WORKING_SET

SHOW

SHOW DAYTIME
SHOW DEFAULT

SHOW DEVICES

SHOW LOGICAL
SHOW MAGTAPE
SHOW NETWORK
SHOW

PRINTER

SHOW PROCESS
SHOW PROTECTION
SHOW QUEUE
SHOW

RMS_DEFAULT

SHOW

STATUS

SHOW

SYMBOL

SHOW

SYSTEM

SHOW TERMINAL
SHOW TRANSLATION

SHOW WORKING_SET

SORT/RSX11
STOP

SUBMIT
SYNCHRONIZE
TYPE

UNLOCK

WAIT
WRITE
INDEX

FIGURES

PART

Figure

PART

2-1
4-1
4~2

A Directory Hierarchy
Steps in Program Development
An Interactive Process

5~1
5-2

Command Levels
Testing Parameters
Procedure

Passed

2-5
4-2
4-1
5-9

a Command
5-1

Figure

Sample Output of DIFFERENCES Command

Sample Output of DIRECTORY Command

TABLES

PART

Table

1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6

1-7
1-8

PART

Table

Terminal Function Keys
Commands for Terminal Communication and
Control
Commands for File Manipulation
Commands for Device Handling
Commands for Program Development and Control
Commands

for

Command

Procedures

and

1-8
1-11
1-12

1-13
1-14

Batch

Jobs
User

,
1-16
1-18

Privileges
Resource Quotas

1-19

2-1
2-2
2-3

Device Names
Default File Types
File Specification Defaults

2-3
2-6
2-8

2—-4

Default Process Logical Names

2~-16

5-1

Summary

5-22

6-1

Nonalphanumeric Characters

6-9

LIBRARY Command Qualifiers

118

SET

3
4

Default Characteristics
SHOW Command Options

Lexical

Functions

Command

Options

vii

186

for

Terminals

209
215

PREFACE

0.1

Manual Objectives

This manual describes
the
VAX/VMS
command
language,
DCL
(DIGITAL
Command Language), and provides usage and reference information on the
command

0.2

language.

Intended Audience

This manual is intended for all users of the VAX/VMS operating system,
including applications programmers, system programmers, operators, and
managers.

The VAX/VMS Primer is a tutorial manual that
introduces
the
VAX/VMS
operating
system
and the use of the command language.
General users
who are not familiar with interactive computer systems should read the
Primer before using this command language user's guide.
The VAX/VMS Summary Description introduces operating
system
concepts
of
general
interest.
It is recommended that system programmers and

managers be familiar with the

material

the

before using this command language user's guide.

0.3

Structure of

The manual

Part

has

Using

description

this Document

two parts:

the Command Language

This part is
tutorial;
it
provides
language and operating system concepts.
®

summary

an
overview
of
the
command
Part I contains six chapters:

Chapter 1, "Overview" describes how to access the
system
and
enter
commands.
At
the end of Chapter 1, on colored pages,
are tables that
summarize
the
DCL
commands
1in
functional
categories.

Chapter 2, "File Specifications and
Logical
Names"
explains
the device and file naming conventions of the operating system
and describes how to assign and use logical
devices and files in commands and programs.

names to refer

Chapter 3, "Disk and Tape Volumes" discusses concepts
related
to
accessing
files
on
disk
and tape volumes, and provides
examples of initializing and using disks and tapes.

viii

Chapter
program

describes

an overview of
DCL
commands

the

execute.

environment

Chapter 5, "Command Procedures and Batch Jobs" explains how to
create
command
procedures
to execute sequences of commands,
how to submit command procedures for execution as batch
Jjobs,
and
how to use some of the language features available in DCL
to construct complex procedures.

Chapter 6, "Grammar Rules" describes the syntax of the command
language
and defines the rules for entering commands, command
parameters and qualifiers, numeric values and expressions, and

II.

This

data.

Command Descriptions

part

commands

contains
are

detailed

1listed

appearing at the top of
command' description.

0.4

in which programs

the
and

character
Part

"Programming with VAX/VMS" gives
development
tools
provided
by

descriptions

alphabetical

the

first

and

each

order,

every

with

page

command.
the

The

command

the

name

individual

Associated Documents

See the VAX-1ll
documents
and
this book.

0.5

Information
to
obtain

Conventions

used

(CRET )

Directory
the order

for
a
description
of
related
numbers of manuals referred to in

this Document

A
symbol
with
a
oneto
three-character
abbreviation
indicates
that you press a key
on

CTRL/x

the

terminal,

The phrase
press

for

CTRL/x

the

example,

(wr

indicates

key

that

labeled

CTRL

you

must

while

you

simultaneously press another key, for example
CTRL/C,
CTRL/Y,
CTRL/O.
In examples, this
control

key

example

“C,

sequence

system echoes

$ SHOW TIME
05-jun-1978

"Y,

1is

"0,

control

key

Command examples show
11:55:22

prompting

characters

shown

because

output
the

or
displays
in
black
user~entered
commands
are
letters.

$
$

FORTRAN MYFILE
LINK MYFILE

Examples
enclosed

showing the
in boxes.

Vertical

series

all

“x,

for

is how the

sequences.

all
that

that

lines

system
letters.
in

All
red

shown

contents

prints

files

are

$ RUN MYFILE
$

TYPE MYFILE.DAT

not

periods,

that

would display in response to
command
1is shown;
or, that
a user would enter is shown.

the

data

ellipses
that

the

mean
system

the
particular
not all the data

file-spec,...

Horizontal ellipses indicate that
additional
parameters,
values,
or
information
can be
entered.

[logical-name]

Square brackets indicate
that
the
enclosed
item
is optional.
(Square brackets are not,
however,
optional
in
the
syntax
of
a

directory
name in a file specification or in
the syntax of a substring specification in an
assignment

guotation marks
apostrophes

statement.)

The term quotation marks
double
quotation
marks

apostrophe

(')

quotation mark.

is used to refer
to
(").
The
term

1is used to refer to a single

PART 1

USING
THE COMMAND LANGUAGE

CHAPTER 1
OVERVIEW

The DCL command language
of commands for:

Interactive

Device

Interactive

and

provides VAX/VMS

users

with

extensive

set

program development
data

and

file

manipulation

batch program execution and

control

The following sections show how to access the system and describe
how
the
system
processes
commands
interactively.
These
sections are
followed by tables, on colored pages, that describe all
the
commands
available
to
general
users.
The commands are listed in functional
categories to provide a quick overview of VAX/VMS capabilities.

1.1

ACCESSING THE

SYSTEM

When a terminal is physically connected
attention
and
signal
that
you
want
pressing the RETURN or CTRL/Y key.
The
you

for

user

name.

After

enter

your

password.

Username!

FATTIT

prompts

your
you

you

to the system, you can get its
to begin a terminal session by
system responds
by
prompting

enter
For

your

user

name,

the

system

example:

RET

Fassworadl

When you enter the password,
system
accepts
the
input

the system does not echo it, that is,
1line,
but
does
not
display
it on

the
the

terminal.
During this sequence, known as login,
are
authorized
to
use
the system.

the system
validates
that
When the login is complete,

system may display messages telling you about
the
system.
the system indicates that it is ready to accept commands by
the prompting character, a dollar sign ($), as shown below:
WELCOME

VaX suME

RELEASE

you
the

Finally,
displaying

1.2

YOUR COMMAND ENVIRONMENT

When you have logged into the system,
accept
commands,
the
system defines
to

your

requests.

This

the
system
1is
ready
environment within which

environment

et
!
=

responds

and
the

1is

called

to
it

process.

OVERVIEW

Associated

with

your

among which are the

process

are

following:

various default characteristics,

An account number, which your

A user identification code (UIC), which provides
you
with
a
group
number
and
a
member
number within the group.
Other
users can have the same group number.
Within
groups,
users
are allowed to share files or system resources more freely.

A default disk device and directory
name,
which
the
system
uses to locate and catalog files that you create or use.

Default devices for the input, output, and
error
streams
of
the
process,
from which the system reads command and program

of the computer

installation uses to keep

resources used.

track

input and to which the system writes messages.

A set of privileges
and
resource
quotas
that
define
what
system
resources
or
system
functions
you, or programs you
execute, will be allowed to use.
Tables 1-7 and
1-8
at
the
end
of
this
chapter
summarize
the specific privileges and
quotas

the system defines.

A
command
interpreter -- the
operating
system
component
responsible
for
reading
and
translating
your
typed-in
requests.
This
manual
describes
only
the
DCL
command
interpreter.

The system obtains the characteristics unique to your process from the
user authorization file.
The user authorization file is a list of all
users who can access the
maintains this file.

1.3

system;

the

system

manager

operator

ENTERING COMMANDS

Commands consist of
English-language
names
(generally
verbs)
that
describe
what
you
want
the
system to do.
Commands can optionally
contain
qualifiers
and
parameters.
Command
qualifiers
modify
a
command:
they
provide the system with additional information on how
to execute the command.
Command parameters describe the object of the
command:
in some cases, a parameter is a keyword;
in other cases, it
is a file or a device to manipulate or

a program to execute.

The following example shows a PRINT command,
terminal:

$ FRINT/COFIES=2 MYFILE.DAT
Joh

210

enmtered

eueue

as it would appear

Print the file

LFROZ

Notes:

The system prompt for command
input;
a
dollar
sign
means
that the command interpreter is ready for you to
type a command,

FRINT

The command name, requesting the system to queue a file
for printing on the system printer.

OVERVIEW

/COPITES=2

A qualifier

to the PRINT command,

requesting

that

two

MYFILE.DAT

The command parameter, naming the file to
be
printed.
In
this
command,
as
for
many
DCL
commands,
the
parameter is a file specification.
At least one
blank
space must always immediately precede a parameter.

copies
of
the
specified file be printed.
Qualifiers
are always preceded with slash characters (/), and,
1if
they
require
a
value
(as
1in
this
example),
the
qualifier name is separated from the value with
either
an equals sign (=) or a colon (:).

(rer)

The carriage return.

Pressing this key after

entering

a
full command line terminates the command input;
the
system
begins
processing
the
command.
Note
that
examples
1in
this
manual
do
not explicitly show the
lines
unless

following commands;
shown
in examples
stated otherwise.

you
can
assume
that
must be terminated with

all

Job 210 enmtered on cueue LFRO:
A message from the PRINT command, indicating
that
the
command
completed
successfully;
the
command
interpreter gave the print job an identification number
and queued it to the system printer named LPBO.
%

The next $ prompt, indicating that
the
PRINT
command
has completed successfully;
that is, two copies of the
file MYFILE.DAT were queued for printing and the system
is ready to accept another command.

Fyeint

Chapter

file
A comment.
The command interpreter
beginning with an exclamation point.

the

"Grammar Rules"

contains complete

rules for entering commands,

parameters,

ignores

details

and qualifiers,

Continuing commands on more than one

line

Shortening command and other

names to

keyword

any

the

data

syntax

including:

four

fewer

characters

1.4

Specifying values

for qualifiers

COMMAND PROMPTING

When you enter a command at the
terminal,
you
need
not
enter
the
entire
command
all
at
once.
If you enter a command that requires
parameters and do not specify any parameters, the command
interpreter
prompts
you
for
all
remaining
parameters,
including
optional
parameters.
$

For

FRIMT/COFPIES
=2

$.Filel

Job

211

. .DaT
MYFILE
sntered orn cuesue LFAL

this example,

file

example:

no parameter

specification.

system 1s

in prompt mode.

1line

entered,

beginning

the

with

system prompts

for

$_ indicates that the

OVERVIEW

When you are prompted for an optional parameter, you can
press
to
complete the command sequence without specifying the parameter,
the following example illustrates:
¢

ALLOCATE

levice!

$.l.og..Name:

ALLOCATED

SIMEBLD

In the
above
example,
the
ALLOCATE
command
is
entered
with
no
parameters;
the
command
interpreter
begins
prompting
for
all
parameters.
The
second
prompt,
$_Log Name:,
is
for
an
optional
logical
name
parameter.
A null entry, signaled by <RET>, terminates
the

command

1.5

entry.

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When you enter a command incorrectly, the command interpreter issues a
descriptive error message telling you what was wrong.
For example, if
you specify more than one parameter
for
a
single parameter, you receive the message:
ANCL~W-MAXFARMy
You

must

Other

then

retype

maximum
the

rarameter

count

command

accepts

exceeded

command.

error messages may occur during execution of a

messages

that

command.

These

can indicate such errors as a nonexistent file or a conflict

in qualifiers.

Not all messages from the system indicate errors;
some
messages
informative, or merely warn you of a particular condition.
Messages

have

the general

3XXX~-L-CODE,

are

format:

text

where XXX is a mnemonic for
the
operating
system
facility
or
program
issuing
the
message, L is a severity level indicator (S
success, I for informational, W for warning, E for error,
and
F
fatal), and CODE is a shorthand code for the message text.

the
for
for

Because the messages are descriptive, you can usually
need to do when you issue the command again.

what

you

The VAX/VMS System Messages and Recovery Procedures Manual
1lists
system messages and describes what you can do to correct an error.

the

tell

1.6

THE HELP COMMAND

When you are using the system, you may not
always
have
this
user's
guide available at your terminal when you need a summary of the format
of a particular command or a list of its valid qualifiers.
The
HELP
command
provides you with this information.
For example, if you type
the

command:
¢

HELF

FRINT

OVERVIEW

The system responds by displaying an abstract of the PRINT command and
keywords
you
can
enter
as parameters to the HELP command to obtain
more information about PRINT.
If you enter the following:
$
The

HELF

HELP

FRINT

QUALIFIERS

command

displays

description

each

command

qgualifier.

1.7

EXTENDING THE COMMAND LANGUAGE

Beyond the normal syntax and acceptable command names and
VAX/VMS
lets
you
define
synonyms
for
command names,
commands by writing command procedures.

1.7.1
You

can

create

with

synonyms

symbol

name

LIST

the

LIST

substitutes

equated

equate

For

example,

string.

real

names.

that
DCL

command

You

define

symbol

you

name

could

symbolic

name

define

follows:

3= DIRECTORY
of

the

first

the

can

FLOEL

terminal

word

symbol

also
$=

with

contain

DELETE

assignment

command

symbolic

the

session,

when you

command

line,

the

string

DIRECTORY

enter

the

command

and

symbol

interpreter

executes

the

command.

symbol

This

the

DIRECTORY

using

statements

a character

remainder

assignment

numeric value or

"create"

Synonyms for DCL Comménds

names

For

parameters,

and

command,

for

example:

SYS$FRINT/ENTRY:

statement

necessary

portion

equates

delete

the
entry

symbol
from

the

name

PDEL

printer

with

queue,

the

except

that the required value for the /ENTRY qualifier is omitted.
When you
use
this
symbol
as
a
command
synonym, you must also type the job
identification number assigned to the entry, as shown below:
¢

FDOEL

210

When the command
symbol PDEL with

DELETE
For

in Part

1.7.2
A

this
then

line, it
executes

substitutes
the command:

the

SYSS$PRINT/ENTRY=210

additional

synonyms,

interpreter processes
its current value and

see

information
the

description

defining
the

symbols

(Assignment

DCL

command

Statement)

for

command

Command

command

commands,

procedure.
qualifiers
"programs”

Procedures

procedure
some

1is

which

a
can

file

that

contains

conditionally

control

a
the

sequence
execution

of
of

DCL
the

By
placing
sets
of
frequently
used
commands
and/or
in
command procedures, you can construct command language
from DCL commands.
After you create a
command
procedure,

OVERVIEW

you can execute all the commands in it with a single command. For
example, suppose a procedure named TESTALL.COM contains the command
lines:

RUN WEEKCALC
RUN TIMECARDS

$
$

$ PRINT WEEKCALC.OUT,TIMECARDS.OUT

You can execute the three commands in this file by entering:
$

BTESTALIL

You can also use the SUBMIT command to request the system to process a

command
for

procedure

as a batch job, so that your terminal remains free

interactive work.

Chapter 5, "Command Procedures and Batch Jobs"
interpreter's symbolic
command
the
using
developing and using command procedures.

1.8

THE

FILE

provides details
capabilities and

on
on

SYSTEM

Using DCL commands, you can create, access, and update data files and
The VAX-1l1 Record Management Services (RMS) provide the
programs.
access and control capabilities that are called by the DCL commands
you

request.

You can also define and access files from within your programs by
using RMS or by using the input/output services of the VAX/VMS
operating system directly.

Chapter 2, "File Specifications and Logical Names" describes how to
It also describes the directory
identify and refer to files.
structure of the files on disk volumes and explains how to create a
hierachy of directories to catalog and maintain files.

Table 1-3, at the end of this Chapter, lists

the

DCL

commands

that

Each of these commands is
provide file manipulation functions.
For a 1list of
manual.
this
of
1II
Part
in
described in detail
additional manuals that contain information on file services and
utilities, see the VAX-ll Information Directory.

1.9

TERMINAL CHARACTERISTICS

Your terminal keyboard is the means by which you communicate with the
command interpreter or enter data solicited by a command or program.
Although a terminal keyboard is similar to that of a typewriter, there

are several differences between the way a typewriter and your terminal
accept and display data that you type. These differences include:

interpretation

The

The type—ahead buffer

Special

uppercase

and

alphabetic

lowercase

characters

function keys

When you type input lines to the command interpreter from

terminal

that displays lowercase letters, the command interpreter translates
all lowercase characters to uppercase before it executes a command,
unless you enter character strings enclosed in quotation marks.
1-6

OVERVIEW

After

you enter
responding
to

a
it

command,
and
while
or executing it, your

the
command
interpreter
is
keyboard is not locked;
that

is, you can continue typing.
The system saves what
you
type
this
time
1in a special buffer called the type-ahead buffer.

not, however, echo what you type.
executed
completes,
the
command
typed.

during
It does

When the
command
currently
being
interpreter displays what you have

If you typed
interpreter

a full command
1line,
including
a
<RET>,
the
command
executes
the command after displaying it.
Otherwise, it
displays what you have typed and waits for you to enter
the
rest
of
the
line.
If
you
have
entered
more
than
one complete line, it
displays each line just before executing it.
Some

the

special

terminal

functions,
so
you
it to the
command
processing.
Some

function

section.
terminal

1.9.1

Special Terminal

Function Keys

type

program

you

advantage
type

commands

them.

several

Thus,

keys

you

the

1.9.1.1

Deleting

Characters

the

recently

entered

After

return

data

that

make

pressing

most

keys

provide

line-editing

can correct or cancel what you type before passing
interpreter.
Other
keys
can
interrupt
system
of the line-editing keys are described in the next
Table 1-1 (at the end of Section 1.9.2)
1lists
all
of
the
function keys and describes their use.

let

the

you

mistake,

key.

- The
character

terminal,

make
you

you

changes
can

can

lines

correct

take

(DELETE) key backspaces
deletes it.
For example:

and

you

before

over

PRO (o) INT

incorrectly

and

terminal,
characters
$

then

typing

the

continue

letter

your

the
letters
deleted
so you can see what is

"O",

you

can

input by typing
are

being

displayed

deleted.

delete

"INT".

pressing

On a hardcopy

between

For

backslash
example:

FRONONINT

On a display terminal, pressing
from
the
screen
and
moves the
that performs the delete function

1.9.1.2

Deleting

Lines

actually
erases
the
character
cursor backwards.
Note that the key
is marked RUBOUT on some terminals.

cancel

entire

line,

you

can

use

the

1line

and

CTRL/U
key
sequence.
To use the CTRL key, you must press it at the
same time you press the other letter (in this case, U).
For
example,
if
you make many mistakes on a particular line and want to cancel the
line and reenter it, use CTRL/U as shown below:
¥

FRNT/ZCIFY=2"U
$ FRINT/COFIES=2

When

you

prompts

cancel
you

for

line

the

MYFILE.DAT

with

CTRL/U,

line.

the

system

ignores

the

OVERVIEW

1.9.1.3 Canceling Commands - If you are entering commands in response
to prompts and want to discard the entire command you have entered so
far (not just the most recently entered line), use CTRL/C or CTRL/Y,
as

shown below:

$ FRINT/COFIES=3

"C
MYFILE.DAT

$_File?

In this example, the PRINT command was entered correctly, and the
system prompted for the name of a file to print. However, while
entering the file name, the user decided not to enter the command at
all, and used CTRL/C to discard the entire command.

Setting Terminal Characteristics

1.9.2

There are many types of terminal, and each has its own operating
You can change some of these characteristics, based
characteristics.
on your requirements, with the SET TERMINAL command. To determine the
current

command,

characteristics
as shown below:

FSHOW

TERMINAL

Each of the parameters displayed can

parameters for the SET TERMINAL command.
$GET

issue the SHOW TERMINAL

terminal,

your

changed

with

For example:

corresponding

TERMINALZLOQWERCASE

After you issue this command, all lowercase alphabetic characters

displayed

lowercase

lowercase letters).

(if

your

are

terminal is capable of displaying

Table 1-1
Terminal Function Keys

Function

Key

RETURN

Carriage
to
line

the current
transmits
return;
(On
for processing.
system
the

some terminals,

1labeled

1is

the RETURN key

CR.)

1login

initiates

Before a terminal session,
sequence.

Control keys

Define functions to be performed
CTRL

key

and

simultaneously.

another

key

All CTRL/Xx

are

key

are echoed on the terminal as "x.

when

the

pressed

sequences

(continued on next page)

OVERVIEW

Table 1-1 (Cont.)
Terminal Function Keys

Key

Function

CTRL/Cl

During

command

entry,

processing.
Before

terminal

cancels

session,

command

initiates

1login

sequence.

CTRL/I

Duplicates

CTRL/K

Advances
vertical

CTRL/L

Form

CTRL/O

Alternately

function of

the
current
tab stop.

Restarts

1line

suppresses

output

terminal

Retypes
the

the

current

cursor

Suspends

input

positioned

terminal

output

Discards

CTRL/X

Discards the current line
in the type-ahead buffer.

CTRL/Y

Interrupts

DELETE

the

current

command

control

Signals

end-of-file

suspended

and

the

until

input

returns

continues

line
at

CTRL/U

the

that was

pressed.

CTRL/Z

key.

terminal.

output

line.

CTRL/S

and

the

by CTRL/S.

CTRL/R

the TAB

feed.

display

CTRL/Q

the

1leaves

end

the

CTRL/Q

line.
and

deletes

program execution

the

command

for

data

the

last

character

terminal
and backspaces
terminals,
the
DELETE

and

interpreter.

entered

from

terminal.

Deletes

data

entered

over

it.

key

the

(On

some
labeled

RUBOUT.)

ESCAPE

Has

special

programs,

uses
but

particular

generally

commands

performs

the

or
same

function as RETURN.
(On
some
terminals,
the ESCAPE key is labeled ALTMODE.)
TAB

Moves

the

printing

element

cursor

the

terminal
to
the
next
tab
stop
on
the
terminal.
The system provides tab stops at
every 8 character positions on a line.

Certain system

respond
program

CTRL/Y

that

and

CTRL/C

does

echoes

not

user

programs

interrupts.
handle

"Y.

provide

If CTRL/C

CTRL/C,

CTRL/C

special

is pressed
has

the

routines

same

interrupt

effect

OVERVIEW

1.10

SUMMARY OF VAX/VMS DCL

Tables 1-2 through
1-6
commands are grouped by

Note

COMMANDS

summarize
functional

the
VAX/VMS
DCL
commands.
category, as follows:

Commands

for

terminal

Commands

for

file manipulation

Commands

for

device

Commands

for

program

development

Commands

for

command

procedures

that

several commands
cases,
listed
with
particular function.

for

and

control

handling

are

some

Commands

communication

The

listed

and

control

batch

in more

qualifier

than

that

Table 1-2
Terminal Communication

Command

jobs

one

table

required

and

and,

request

Control

Function

String

assignment;

synonym

defines

for

all

local
a

symbol

portion

command

String

assignment;

synonym

defines

for

all

global

a global

name

symbol

portion

DCL

name
a

DCL

command

DELETE/SYMBOL

Deletes

HELP

Displays

command

LOGOUT

local

information
parameter

Terminates

symbol

about

qualifier

command
on

communication between

system
MCR

Passes

command

Migration
MCR

line

Executive,

command

the

mode

definition

the

user

RSX-11M

places

terminal

the

and

the

Application

terminal

REQUEST

Displays a message at an opéfator's terminal

SET

Enables

CONTROL_Y

the

interrupt

use

the

CTRL/Y

function

image

NOCONTROL_Y

Disables the
interrupt an

SET

TERMINAL

Defines the characteristics of
the
the duration of a terminal session

use of
image

the

CTRL/Y

function

SHOW DAYTIME

Displays
terminal

SHOW

Displays current local or global

SYMBOL

strings

SHOW TERMINAL

Displays
terminal

current date

values

the

assigned

current

1-11

key

SET

the

and

time

terminal

day
‘

symbols

the

and

the

them

characteristics

for

OVERVIEW

1-3

Table

Commands for File Manipulation

Function

Command

files

the

one

APPEND

Adds the contents of one or more

COPY

Copies one

CREATE

Creates a file from data entered at the terminal

end of another

additional

in the

CREATE/DIRECTORY | Defines a

file

files

into

files

input stream

new

cataloging files

directory

for

subdirectory

DELETE

Removes a directory entry for a

file

files

DELETE/ENTRY

Deletes an entry from a

printer

batch

job

DIFFERENCES

Compares the contents of files and

reports

the

DIRECTORY

Displays information about a file or a group

DUMP

Displays data in ASCII, hexadecimal,

octal,

EDIT

Begins an interactive editing session to

EDIT/SLP

Provides input to the batch editor, SLP

Queues a copy of a file for printing on a system

PURGE

Deletes all

RENAME

Changes the name of a file or a group of files

SET DEFAULT

Changes the default directory and/or disk device

SET PROTECTION

a
file or
Changes the protection applied to a
files, restricting or allowing access
group of

and makes any data in the file(s)

inaccessible

gueue or stops processing of the current job
differences between them

files

decimal

format

or modify a

create

file

printer

but

the

most

recent

versions of a specified file or files

version

used to locate and catalog files

to the file by different categories of user

SET QUEUE/ENTRY

SET

RMS_DEFAULT

SHOW DEFAULT

Changes the attributes or status of an entry

the printer queue

and
multi-block
default
Defines
counts for RMS file operations

multi-buffer

Displays the current default directory and

disk

device

(continued on next page)

OVERVIEW

Table 1-3 (Cont.)
for File Manipulation

Commands

Function

Command

SHOW

PRINTER

Displays

characteristics of

SHOW

PROTECTION

Displays the default
files created

SHOW

QUEUE

Displays
the
names
current
and
pending
batch job queues

line

protection

and
jobs

printer

applied

new

identifications
in
the printer

of
and

multi-block
operations

and

SHOW RMS_DEFAULT

Displays
the
current
multi-buffer counts for RMS

SORT/RSX11

Creates a sorted copy of
arranged in a particular

a
file,
with
records
collating sequence

TYPE

Displays
terminal

UNLOCK

Allows
closed

the

access

Commands

contents

file

Table 1-4
for Device

Command

file

that

was

files

not

the

properly

Handling

Function

ALLOCATE

Reserves a device for
optionally, assigns a

ASSIGN

Defines a file specification
be associated with a logical
use in commands or programs

DEALLOCATE

Relinquishes
device,
thus
other users

DEASSIGN

Cancels

use
of
making

use by a single
logical name to

or a device name to
name for subsequent

a
previously
allocated
the
device
available to

logical

name

ALLOCATE,

ASSIGN,

DEFINE,

assignment
or

MOUNT

made

with

the

commands

DISMOUNT

Releases the
disk or tape
a device

INITIALIZE

Deletes all existing data, if
any,
storage
volume,
writes
a label on
and readies the volume for new data

MOUNT

Makes a
reading

disk
and

user
and,
the device

connection between
a
user
and
volume that is currently mounted

on
the

a
on

a
mass
volume,

or tape volume
available
for
the
writing
of files and, optionally,

assigns a logical name
the volume is mounted

the

device

(continued

which

next page)

OVERVIEW

Table

Commands

1-4

(Cont.)

for Device Handling

Function

Command

SET MAGTAPE

Defines the density of
rewinds a tape

SHOW

Displays

DEVICES

a magnetic

the status of devices

tape device or

in the

system

SHOW LOGICAL

Displays current logical name assignments for
a
particular logical name or for all logical names

SHOW MAGTAPE

Displays

characteristics

magnetic

tape

device
SHOW TRANSLATION

Searches all three logical
logical
name
and displays
of the first match found

Table

Commands

for

1-5

Program Development and Control

Command

ASSIGN
BASIC

name
tables
for
a.
the equivalence name

Function

Defines a file specification
with a specific

logical name used

associated

in a program

Invokes the PDP-11 BASIC~PLUS-2/VAX compiler

enter

and

compile

BASIC

language

source

statements

CANCEL

COBOL/RSX11

Halts periodic execution of an
for

execution

Invokes

compile

the

a process

PDP-11

set

1image

COBOL-74/VAX
COBOL

scheduled

compiler

1language

source

statements

CONTINUE

Resumes execution

DEASSIGN

Cancels a logical name assignment

DEBUG

program,

interrupted

command,

command procedure

Invokes the VAX-11 Symbolic Debugger to begin or

continue

interactive debugging

DEFINE

Equates

with

file

DEPOSIT

Replaces the contents of a location
in
memory with new data or instructions

virtual

EDIT

character

specifications

strings

logical

names

Invokes an editor to create or modify

program or

data

file

source

(continued on next page)

OVERVIEW
Table

Commands

for

1-5 (Cont.)
Program Development

Command

EXAMINE

and

Control

Function

Displays

the

contents

location

virtual

memory

FORTRAN

Invokes

the

compile

VAX-1l

FORTRAN

set

modifies

IV-PLUS

FORTRAN

compiler

language

source

statements
LIBRARY

Creates

macro

library

of object modules
LINK

Binds

one

executable

LINK/RSX11

Invokes

the

RUN

(Image)

Invokes

the

assembly

Places

current

RUN

(Process)

Creates

PROCESS

Defines

SET

WORKING_SET

Establishes
executed in

execution

Displays
names

assemble

execution

process

1in

the

execute

characteristics

current

equivalence

DEFINE,

MOUNT

PROCESS

Displays

SHOW

STATUS

Displays information about
executing in the process

made

process

for

assignments
names

SHOW

images

of
1logical
the ASSIGN,

commands

information about the current
process,
including
subprocesses, privileges, guotas, and
accounting information

SHOW TRANSLATION

Displays the result of logical
of a specific logical name

name

Displays
limits

set

current

Halts execution
or a subprocess

status

image

Displays the
the system

the

current

the

SHOW SYSTEM

STOP

assemble

a default working
size
the current process

the

and

ALLOCATE,

SHOW WORKING_SET

one

image

program

image

separate

image

SET

LOGICAL

link

process

specified

SHOW

Builder

assembler

language

executable

into

into an executable

MACRO-1l1

PDP-11

library

image

Invokes the VAX-11 MACRO assembler
VAX-1l assembly language program

MACRO/RSX11

modules

program

RSX-11lM Task

more objéct modules
MACRO

object

shareable

working

command

all

currently

processes

translation

default

procedure,

and

program,

OVERVIEW

Table

1-6

Commands for Command Procedures and Batch Jobs
Function

Command

@file-spec

Execute procedure;
.executes a command procedure
in a command file in the input
data
places
or
stream

symbol
1local
equates a
Arithmetic assignment;
name to an arithmetic expression or constant
symbol
equates a global
Arithmetic assignment;
name to an arithmetic expression or constant
equates a local symbol
String assignment;
to any character string
equates a global
String assignment;
to any character string
label:

Defines

Cancels an input or output path to a
file or

statement

name

symbol name

label

sequential

device

Requests continuation of the current procedure

CONTINUE

Marks the beginning of records to be read as the
stream for a command (required only
data
input
first
the
in
when data contains a dollar sign

DECK

position of any record)

DELETE/ENTRY

Deletes
a job from a printer or batch job queue

DELETE/SYMBOL

Deletes one or more symbol names from the

EOD

Marks the end of an input data stream begun with

EOJ

Signals the end of a batch job submitted through

or global

tables

for

local

the process

the DECK command

symbol

system card

reader

current

level

Transfers control

GOTO

the

Terminates command procedure processing

EXIT

another

statement

command procedure
IF

...

THEN

Compares expressions consisting of
literal

values

command

symbolic

program status

values and performs a stated action based on the
result of

INQUIRE

the

test

Requests interactive assignment
value

for

symbol

variable

name

(continued on next page)

OVERVIEW

Commands

for

Table 1-6 (Cont.)
Command Procedures

Command

JOB

Marks the beginning of
...

THEN

OPEN

system

input

Reads

path

output

Provides
entered

READ

card

batch

job

submitted

reader

Defines the action to be taken when a command or
program
incurs
errors
of
particular severity
levels, or when the CTRL/Y function key is used
Establishes

PASSWORD

Batch Jobs

Function

through

and

the

and

password

through

device

file

device

for

operations

associated

system card

record

equates

from

the

with

. a

job

reader
sequential

record

data

file

symbol

name

SET

CARD_READER

Defines

the

SET

NOON

Suppresses

following

translation mode

Suppresses display
command procedures

SET

Restores

command

procedure

SET QUEUE/ENTRY

Changes

the

SET

Causes all command lines in
subsequently
executed
to

VERIFY

terminal
STOP

Terminates
level

command
interpreter
command execution

SET NOVERIFY
ON

for

attributes

command

and

error

reader
checking

of command lines executed
subsequently executed

interpreter

printed

card

the

error

queued

batch

job

command
procedures
be
displayed at the

batch

procedure

returns

checking

1in

job

log

processing

control

the

file
at

any

command

interpreter
SUBMIT

Queues

SYNCHRONIZE

Places the current
command
procedure
1in
state until a specified batch job completes

WAIT

Places

command

the

specified
WRITE

Writes

procedure

current

period
single

character
sequential

process

1-17

batch

wait

job

queue

state

wait

for

time

record

strings
file or

consisting

or
evaluated
device

one

symbols

more
to

OVERVIEW

Table 1-7
User Privileges

Name

Privilege

ACNT

Create a process for which no accounting records

ALLSPOOL

Allocate

spooled devices

Increase

the base

ALTPRI

are made

execution

priority

for

any

process

BUGCHK

Make bug check error

log entries

CMEXEC

Change mode

CMKRNL

Change modé‘to kernel

DETACH

Create deta&hed processes

DIAGNOSE

Issue diagnostic I/0 requests

EXQUOTA

Exceed

GROUP

Control execution of other processes

to executive

resource quotas

in the same

group

GRPNAM

Enter

names

LOG_IO

Perform logical

MOUNT

Execute a mount volume

NETMBX

Create a

OPER

Perform operator

functions

PHY IO

Perform physical

I/0

PRMCEB

Create permanent common event

PRMGBL

Create permanent

PRMMBX

Creafe permanent mailboxes

PSWAPM

Disable

SETPRV

Grant a created process any privileges

SYSGBL

Create system global

SYSfiAM

Enter names in the system logical name table

TMPBMX

Create temporary mailboxes

VOLPRO

Override protection on a volume

WORLD

Control the execution
system

in the group logical name table

network

swapping

I/O

functions

I/0 function

device

functions

global

for

flag clusters

clusters

)

any process

sections

any

process

1in

the

OVERVIEW

Table

1-8

Resource

Name

Quotas

Quota

ASTLM

AST

(Asynchronous

BIOLM

Buffered

I/0

limit

BYTLM

Buffered

I/0

byte

CPULM

CPU

limit

DIOLM

Direct I/O limit

FILLM

Open

PGFLQUOTA

Paging

PRCLM

Subprocess

TQELM

Timer

WSDEFAULT

Default

working

WSQUOTA

Working

set

time

file

System

Trap)

count

(buffer

quota

file

queue

quota
quota

entry

size

quota

set

size

quota

limit

space)

quota

CHAPTER
FILE

SPECIFICATIONS

AND

LOGICAL

NAMES

A file
1is
a
1logically
related
collection
of
records.
information
that
the
operating system reads and writes on
users' requests is defined in terms of files and records.

Files
data

are

identified

transfer

(reading

Mass

storage

Record-oriented

the
or

hardware device

writing).

Devices

that performs
are

All
the
behalf of

the

classified

actual

as:

devices
devices

Mass storage devices provide a way to save the contents of files on
a
magnetic
medium,
called
a volume.
Files that are thus saved can be
accessed at any time and updated,
modified,
or
reused.
Disks
and
tapes are mass storage devices.
Record-oriented devices read and write only single physical
units
of
data
at a time, and do not provide for permanent storage of the data.
Terminals, printers, and card
readers
are
record-oriented
devices.
Printers and card readers are also called unit record devices.

This

chapter
®

How

discusses:
to

specify devices

to construct
devices

and

use

files when you

logical

names

enter

DCL

commands

refer

files

and

You can find additional specific information
about
how
to
use
DCL
commands
to
manipulate files in the command descriptions in Part II.
Table 1-3 lists the commands that provide file handling
capabilities.
Chapter 3, "Disk and
handle files on mass

2.1

FILE

Tape Volumes" provides
storage devices.

information

how

SPECIFICATIONS

File specifications
needs to identify a

provide the
unique file

File

have

specifications

the

system with
or device.

all

format:

node::device: [directory]filename. type;ver

the

information

FILE

SPECIFICATIONS AND LOGICAL NAMES

The punctuation marks and brackets are required to separate the fields
of

the

file specification.

The

fields

Field

Contents

node
device
directory
filename
type
ver

Network node name
Device name
Directory name
File name
File type
File version number

are:

File names, file types, and version numbers apply
only
to
files
on
mass
storage
devices.
For record-oriented devices, only the device
name field in the file specification is required.
Additional notes and syntax requirements for

each

field

file

specification are discussed below.
Note that you do not have to enter
a complete file specification each
time
you
specify
a
file;
the
system
supplies
defaults
for
unspecified
fields.
Section 2.1.5,
"Defaults for File Specifications” describes defaults in more detail.

2.1.1

Network Nodes

A node name is a l- to 6-alphanumeric character name that identifies a
location
on
the network, if your system is connected to one.
If you
specify a node name, you can optionally include a 1lto
30-character
access control string, in the format:
'
node"access-control-string"::

Enclose the remainder of the file specification
in
quotation
marks.
The
file specification is passed intact to the network node specified
and is interpreted there.
The portion on
the
right
of
the
double
colon

(::)

can have up to

125

characters.

on
information
and
For details on the syntax of file specifications
using DCL commands for network operations, see the DECnet-VAX User's
Guide.

2.1.2

Devices

Each physical hardware device in the system is uniquely identified
a device name

specification

in the

format:

the

device

devcu:

where dev is a mnemonic
designation and u

for

a unit number.

type,

1is

controller

Table 2-1 lists the valid device types and their mnemonics.

The controller and unit number identify the
1location
of
the
actual
device
within
the hardware configuration of the system.
Controllers
are
Unit numbers
are designated with alphabetic letters A through Z.
decimal numbers

from 0

through 65535.

The maximum length of the device name field, including controller
and
unit
number,
1is
15
characters.
When
you
specify a device name,
terminate

it with a colon

(:).

FILE

SPECIFICATIONS AND LOGICAL NAMES

Table 2~-1
Device Names

Mnemonic

complete

device

Device Type

Card

Reader

RP04,

RP05,

RK06,

RKO7

RMO3

DX
LP
MB
MT

Floppy Disk
Line Printer
Mailbox

RPO6

Disk

NET

TE1l6 Magnetic Tape
Network communication

TT
XM

Interactive
DMC~11

name

specification

device

terminal

called

physical

device

You
can
specify physical device names to indicate an input or
device for a command or program.
Or, you can equate a physical
name
to
a
logical name and use a logical name
Logical names are described in detail in Section
Some

commands

allow

you

specify

device
name is one in which
not specified.
When you use

generic

locates

2.1.3

command

and

available

specify

device

name.

device.

generic

the controller and/or the unit number are
a generic device name, the system locates

an
available device whose physical name
generic device name that are specified.
ALLOCATE

to refer
2.2.

name.

output
device

only

that

satisfies the portions of
For example, if you issue

device

type,

the

ALLOCATE

the
an

command

type.

Directories

A directory is a file that lists the identifications and locations
of
files on a disk device that are owned by a particular user.
Directory
names apply
formats:

only

1l-

two-part

files

disk

9-alphanumeric
number

devices.

character

the

format

directory

[122,1]

specification

1is

in the preceding example.

equivalent

To specify a subdirectory, separate directory level
periods.

For

the

specification

identifiers

with

example:

[MALCOLM.TESTFILES]
[122001.TESTFILES.DATA]

the directory
if
format
You cannot specify a directory name in UIC
If you
subdirectory, for example [122,1.SUB] is invalid.
a
includes
have a UIC directory, you must specify it in alphanumeric format when
you are specifying subdirectories.

2.1.3.2
Directory Hierarchies - You must have at least one directory,
provided
by
the
system manager,
before you can create and catalog
own
1in your
create,
can
you
Optionally,
files on system disks.
directory, one or more directory level hierarchies.

The CREATE command
following command
named

MALCOLM:

the
example,
For
can create a subdirectory.
creates a second-level directory for the directory

CREATEADIRECTORY

DMALCOLM. SUE]

in
This command places an entry for the directory file SUB.DIR
can use
vyou
Subsequently,
MALCOLM.
directory
first-level
subdirectory name [MALCOLM.SUB] in a file specification.

the
the

that
directory;
another
for
an entry
A subdirectory can contain
directory
can contain an entry for another directory, and so on.
The
maximum number of levels, including
the
first
1level
directory,
is
Figure 2-1
This structure constitutes a directory hierarchy.
eight.
illustrates directory hierarchies.

of directories
There is no maximum on the number of hierarchies
can create and access beginning with your own directories.

you

FILE

SPECIFICATIONS AND LOGICAL NAMES

A volume’s Master File Directory (MFD)

LEVEL

contains entries for the user file

directories (UFDs) on the volume.

MALCOLM.DIR

301300.DIR

/HIGGINS.DIR

301301.DIR
*
L]

$ DIRECTORY [HIGGINS]

Each UFD lists the files belonging

to that directory, and can contain
efitries for additional directories,

PAYROLL.DIR

called subdirectories

USER.DOC
MEMO.LIS
LOGIN.COM

$ DIRECTORY [HIGGINS.PAYROLL]

INFO.COM

SOURCE.DIR —]
LISTINGS.DIR
~
DATA.DIR

DIRECT.DOC

A subdirectory can catalog files

and/or additional subdirectories.
The subdirectory file named

HIGGINS.PAYROLL.DIR lists
additional subdirectory files.

The subdirectory file named HIGGINS.PAYROLL.DATA.DIR
lists additional subdirectory files.

$ DIRECTORY [HIGGINS.PAYROLL.DATA] g
L JANUARY.DIR

$ DIRECTORY [HIGGINS.PAYROLL.LISTINGS]

- FEBRUARY.DIR

| MARCH.DIR

$ DIRECTORY [HIGGINS.PAYROLL.SOURCE]

FICA.LIS

TAXES LIS
.

FICA.FOR

TAXES.MAR

PAYROLL.FOR

$ DIRECTORY [HIGGINS.PAYROLL.DATA.MARCH]

FICA.DAT

STATETAX.DAT
FICA.DAT

FEDTAX.DAT

FICADAT

STATETAX.DAT

EMPTTL.DAT

STATETAX.DAT

FEDTAX.DAT
EMPTTL.DAT

FEDTAX.DAT
[

EMPTTL.DAT

)

.
o

nextlevel.DIR

.
®

L]
*

Figure

2-1

A Directory Hierarchy

FILE SPECIFICATIONS AND LOGICAL NAMES

File Names, File Types, and Version Numbers

2.1.4

File names, file types, and version numbers
within directories.

uniquely

files

identify

When you
A file name is a 1- to 9-character string name for a file.
create a file, you can assign it a file name that is meaningful to
you.

A file type is a 1- to 3-character string that usually identifies
file

the

in terms of its contents.

The valid characters in file names and file types are A-Z and 0-9.
(.).

File types must be preceded with a period

By convention, VAX/VMS uses a set of standard file types to identify
various classifications of files, and to provide default file types in
many commands.

Table 2-2 lists these file types.

Version numbers are decimal numbers from 1 to 32767 that differentiate
between versions of a file. When you update or modify a file and do
not specify a version number for the output file, the system saves the
original version for backup and increments the version number by 1.
Note, however, that on Files~1l Structure Level 2 disks, the file
system deletes the lowest numbered versions of a file after more than
approximately 60 versions of the file exist.

semicolon

Version numbers must be preceded with a

(;)

period

(.).l

Table 2-2
Default File Types

Contents

File Type

B2S

Input source file

compiler

PDP-11

the

for

BASIC~PLUS-2/VAX

CMD

Compatibility mode indirect command file

COM

Command procedure file to
(Execute

Procedure)

executed

with

the

command, or to be submitted for

batch execution with the SUBMIT command

CBL

Input

file

containing

source

PDP-11 COBOL-74/VAX compiler

statements

for

DAT

Input or output data file

DIF

Output listing created by the DIFFERENCES command

DIR

Directory file

DMP

Output listing created by the DUMP command

the

(continued on next page)

When the system displays file specifications, it generally displays

a semicolon in front of the file version number.

FILE

SPECIFICATIONS AND LOGICAL NAMES

Table

2-2

Default

File Type

Executable

FOR

LIS

file

FORTRAN-IV-PLUS

containing

source

file
created
by
assembler;
default
input

LST

Compatibility mode

MAC

MACRO-11

MAP

Memory

allocation

MAR

VAX-11

MACRO

MLB

Macro

library

OBJ

Object

ODL

Overlay

OLB

Object module

OPT

Options

file

for

STB

Symbol

table

file

job

output

source

file
assembler

enter

for

device

and

language
file
type

for

the

compiler
for PRINT

or
and

commands

Batch

Defaults

statements

compiler

Listing

LOG

you

image

Input

let
the

file

listing

file

file
map

source

created

the

language

compiler

file

library
input

created

the
by

LINK

command

the

linker

can

omit

Specifications

specification,

you

the system supply values for
system are called defaults.

directory

linker

file

created

description

File

file

specification
and
values supplied by
The

program

VAX-11l

TYPE

When

Types

Contents

EXE

2.1.5

(Cont.)

File

names,

omitted,

fields

these

default

the

fields.

The

your

current

default disk and directory name.
These are initially established when
you log in, based on an entry under
your
user
name
in
the
system
authorization file.
You
SHOW

can

determine

your

DEFAULT

command.

DEFAULT

SHOW

default
For

disk

and

directory

name

issuing

example:

the

NDEALICRARRIT

This response indicates that
directory name is RABBIT.

the

current default

disk

is DBAl

and

the

FILE SPECIFICATIONS AND LOGICAL NAMES

You can change the disk and directory defaults during a terminal
For
in a batch Jjob by using the SET DEFAULT command.
session or
the
in
shown
as
are
directory
and
disk
default
the
if
example,
response to the SHOW DEFAULT command above, the following SET DEFAULT
command would change the default directory to a subdirectory:
$ SET DEFAULT CRABRIT.SURI

system
The device and directory are not the only fields for which the
Table 2-3 summarizes the defaults, if any,
supplies default values.
applied to each field in a file specification.

Table 2-3
File Specification Defaults

Defaults

Field
node

Local system.

device

Device

in,

(usually a disk) established at log

by the SET DEFAULT command.

If a controller designation is omitted, it defaults
If a unit number is omitted, it defaults '‘to
A.
to
commands,
DEVICE
SHOW
and
ALLOCATE
(The
0.

treat a device name that does not contain
however,
device
controller and/or unit numbers as a generic
see the discussions of
more details,
For
name.
these commands

directory

in Part II.)

Directory name established at log in or by the

SET

DEFAULT command.

If a first- or sub-level directory name is omitted,

defaults

the

current

directory names, as long as the

default next higher

default

directory

was specified in alphanumeric format.
string
name
a
with
preceded
be
must
name
The subdirectory
period,

file name

name

Most commands apply
file specification.
input
an
default output file names based on the file name of
input

file.

Various commands apply defaults
file
standard
the
on
based
summarized

file version

[.SUB].

No defaults are applied to the first file
an

file type

for example

in Table 2-2.

For input files, the

system

file types,
for
conventions
type

assumes

the

highest

version number.

highest
For output files, the system increases the
by 1 for existing files,
number
version
existing
and supplies a version number of 1 for new files.

FILE

SPECIFICATIONS AND LOGICAL NAMES

2.1.5.1
Temporary Defaults - All DCL commands that
accept
1lists
of
input
files
apply
temporary
defaults when you enter a command line
that contains more
than
one
input
file
specification.
Temporary
defaulting
lets you name a device, directory, file name, or file type
that all the files you
specify
have
in
common.
The
system
uses
temporary
file
specification
defaults
only
to
interpret
file

specifications
for
defaults are applied

If a

a
single
to:

Node

Device

Directory name

File

file

name,

execution

command.

name

and

file

type

specification explicitly
specifications

interpretation of

subsequent

includes

become

file

the

a device and/or
temporary

command.

defaulted,

For example, assume that the current default disk
name
are
DBB2:[MONROE].
The
following
PRINT

defaults

are

applied

list

file

directory

defaults

specifications within

File names and file types can also

temporary

Temporary

name

these

specific

the

for

the

list.

depending

the

device and directory
command
shows
how

specifications

parameter:

$ FRINT DEALICADAMSITESTL.DAT.
B
TEST2,
$..
LJACKSONISUMMARY
. TSTy -

$..

The

DRE2FINAL

command

prints

the

files:

DBAl: [ADAMS]TEST1
.DAT
DBAl: [ADAMS]TEST2.DAT
DBAl: [JACKSON] SUMMARY.TST
DBB2: [JACKSON] FINAL.TST

To override

directory,

you

FRINT

temporary
can

default

specify

the

no directory name
current default directory.

fields

Null

following

specify
as

your

shown

current

default

below:

LCALFHAITEST.DATLITEST

Brackets with

2.1.5.2

directory

File Names

file

are

valid

and

indicate

system

use

your

name

and

file

type

example,

the

‘

File

Types

specification
file

the

can

The

file

null.

For

specifications:

. TMP
TEMP.

When you specify a file
the
period
following
type.
FOR.

For example,
The following

in a DCL command, you must
a file name if the command

the FORTRAN

commands

FORTRAN TEMF
$ FORTRAN TEMF,

command

produce

uses

different

be careful to
uses a default

default

results:

file

type

omit
file
of

FILE SPECIFICATIONS AND LOGICAL NAMES

In the first example, compiler looks for a file named TEMP.FOR because
In the second example, the compiler looks
file type was omitted.
the
file name
following the
a period
because
"TEMP."
named
file
a
for
indicates a null file type.

2.1.6

Wild Cards

Many DCL commands accept a special character, called a wild
card,
in
Wild
The asterisk (*) represents a wild card.
file specifications.

file
or
file type,
file name,
cards are valid in the directory,
the wild card depends on
The precise meaning of
version fields.
whether the file specification is for an input or an output file.

2.1.6.1

Wild Cards for Input Files - When

wild

card

replaces

file specification, the system locates all files
input
in an
field
whose identifications satisfy the fields that are specified.
file
The DIRECTORY command accepts the file specification of an input
The
terminal.
the
at
file
the
about
information
displays
and
DCL
how
1illustrate
command
DIRECTORY
the
of
examples
following
commands interpret wild cards in input file specifications.
Explanation

Example

DIRECTORY

DBB2:[*]FILES.DAT

Displays the highest version of the

1in all first level
FILES.DAT
file
the
on
directories
file)
(user

device DBB2

DIRECTORY

Displays

*_.LIS

the

highest

version

the

highest

version

the

file

with a file type of LIS
file
each
and
disk
from the current default

directory

DIRECTORY

Displays

TEST.*

file from the current default
each
file
disk and directory that has a
name

DIRECTORY

TEST.FOR;*

TEST

Displays all versions of
TEST.FOR
disk

from

and directory

wild
Wild Cards for Output Files - When a
2.1.6.2
the
specification,
file
output
an
in
field

corresponding field in the input file specification

wild card field of the output file.

the current default

a
replaces
card
the
system uses

fill

the

The COPY command copies the contents of a specified input file into a
command
following examples of the COPY
The
file.
output
new
file
in output
interpret wild cards
illustrate how DCL commands
specifications.

FILE

SPECIFICATIONS AND

LOGICAL NAMES

Example

COPY

TEST.DAT

COPY

[CHEVY]*.,FOR

Explanation

*.0OLD

Copies the highest version
file
TEST.DAT
from
the
default disk and directory
file named TEST.OLD

of
the
current
into
a

Copies the highest version of
each
file with a file type of FOR in the
directory

CHEVY

the

current

default
disk
to
new files
current default directory
Particular

uses

commands.
wild usage

The command descriptions in Part
where applicable.
Note that not

of wild

cards

in DCL

commands vary with

the

individual

II of this manual describe
all
DCL
commands
accept

wild
cards;
moreover,
wild
cards
are
always
1invalid
in
files
specified for network operations, and within the specification of
any
portion of a directory name string that contains a subdirectory name.

2.2

LOGICAL NAMES

Logical names allow
you
to
keep
programs
and
command
procedures
independent
of
physical
file
specifications.
They also provide a
convenient
shorthand
way
to
specify
files
that
you
refer
tc
frequently.

The ASSIGN command equates a physical file specification to a
name,

that

1is,

character

string

name

that

you

logicalh

supply.

For

example:

§ ASSIEN DRAZICSITMMONS IMARITIGOLL.DAT

TEST

This ASSIGN
command
equates
the
1logical
name
TEST
to
the
file
specification
DBA2:[SIMMONS]MARIGOLD.DAT.
This file specification is
called the equivalence name for the logical name.
Subsequently,
you
can
refer
to
this
file
by
1its
1logical
name when you type a DCL
command.

For

¢ TYFE

When
TEST

example:

TEST

the system processes this command, it replaces the
1logical
with its equivalence name, and displays the contents of the

MARIGOLD.DAT

You

assign

can

DEFINE,

2.2.1

also
or

the

MOUNT

Logical

terminal.

logical

names

to devices when you

issue

ALLOCATE,

commands.

Name

The system maintains
logical name tables:
®

name
file

Tables

logical

name

and

equivalence

name pairs

three

Process

logical name table -- contains
logical
name
entries
are
local
to
a
particular
process.
By default, the

that
ASSIGN

name

command

table.

places

logical

name

the

process

1logical

FILE SPECIFICATIONS AND LOGICAL NAMES

Group logical name table -- contains logical name entries that
These entries can be
are qualified by a group number.

group
same
the
accessed only by processes that execute with
number
in their user identification codes as the process that
assigned the logical name.
You must use the /GROUP
qualifier
to make an entry in the group logical name table.

be
can
that
entries
table -- contains
System logical name
accessed
by
any
process
in
the
system.
You must use the
name
/SYSTEM qualifier to make an entry in the system logical

table.

The user privileges GRPNAM and SYSNAM are required to place entries in
the group or system logical name tables,

2.2.2

respectively.

How to Specify Logical Names

Logical names and their equivalence
name
strings
can
each
have
a
maximum
of
63
characters,
and can be used to form all or part of a
file specification.
If only part of a file specification is a logical

it must be the left-most component of the file specification.
name,
1in
You can then specify the logical name in place of the device name
(:).

terminated by a colon

subsequent file specifications,

For example, a logical name can be

assigned

device

name,

follows:
$

ABSIGN

DMAL:

RACKUF?:

After this ASSIGN command, you can use
the
1logical
name
BACKUP
in
For
field when referring to the device.
name
the device
of
place
example, the following COPY command transfers files from
the
current
default
disk
and
directory to a directory with the same name on the
volume on the device DMAl by using the logical name BACKUP.
$

COPY

%ok

BACKUFS

A logical name can also contain both a device name and directory name.
For

example:

ASSIGN

DMALIIMAGGIED

BCRATCH

This ASSIGN command assigns the logical name SCRATCH to the
directory
You can now use the logical name
the device DMAl.
on
MAGGIE
named
SCRATCH
$

in a file specification,

FPRINT

in the example below.

. DAT
SCRATCHIPAYROLL

The PRINT command prints
[MAGGIE]

on DMAl.

the

file

PAYROLL.DAT

from

the

directory

must
When you specify an equivalence name for the ASSIGN command, you
specify
it
wusing
the
proper
punctuation
marks (colons, brackets,

the
terminate
specify only a device name,
If you
periods).
if you specify a device
equivalence name parameter with a colon (:);
and directory name, or a full file specification, do not terminate the
equivalence name with a colon.

FILE

SPECIFICATIONS AND LOGICAL NAMES

You can optionally terminate
however,
the ASSIGN command

in the logical name table.l

2,2.2.1
command
example,

the logical
removes the

name parameter with a
colon;
colon before placing the name

Displaying Logical
Name
Table
Entries - The
SHOW
LOGICAL
displays
current
entries
in
the logical name tables.
For
to display the logical name
SCRATCH,
you
would
enter
the

command:

SHOW

LOGICAL

SCRATCH

DMALIIMAGGIED

(rrocess)

The SHOW LOGICAL command displays the logical
name,
1its
equivalence
name, and the logical name table in which it found the name.
You can also request the system
to
display
specified logical name table.
For example:

SHOW

When

Logical
the

the

entries

1in

LOGICAL/ZGROUF

This SHOW LOGICAL command
in the group logical name

2.2.3

all

results
table.

a display

all

current

entries

Name Translation

system reads

device

name

file

specification,

examines the file specification to see if the left-most component is a
logical name.
If it is, the system substitutes the
equivalence
name
in the file specification.
This is called logical name translation.
For

example:

$
$

TYFE ALFHA
TYFE DISKIALFHA

When the system reads
the
file
specification
ALPHA
in
the
first
example,
it checks to see if ALPHA is a logical name because ALPHA is
the left-most (and in this example, the only) component
of
the
file
specification.
In
the
second
example, the system checks to see if
DISK is a logical name because it is the left-most component.
It does
not check ALPHA.
When the system translates logical names,
group,
and
system tables, in that order,
finds.

it
and

searches
uses the

If you are ever in doubt about the current equivalence
to a logical name, use the SHOW LOGICAL command.

the
process,
first match it

name

assigned

The DEFINE command, which also creates logical name table

entries,

does
not
remove
colons,
recommended that you do not

assignments.

if
use

specified,
the DEFINE

from logical
command
for

names.
device

It is
name

FILE

SPECIFICATIONS AND LOGICAL NAMES

2.2.3.1
Recursive Translation - When the
system
translates
logical
names
in
file
specifications, the logical name translation is often
recursive.
This means that after the system translates a logical name
in
a
file
specification,
it repeats the process of translating the

file specification.

For example, consider logical name table

made with ASSIGN commands as follows:

entries

DISK
$ ASSIGEN DRALS
¢ ASSIGN DISKIWEATHER.SUM REFORT

The first ASSIGN command equates the device DBAl to the
logical
name
DISK.
The
second
ASSIGN command equates the logical name REPORT to
the file specification DISK:WEATHER.SUM.
In subsequent
commands,
or
in
programs
you
execute,
you can refer to the logical name REPORT.
For

example:

$ TYPE REFORT

When the system translates the
1logical
name
REPORT,
if
finds
the
equivalence
name
DISK:WEATHER.SUM.
It
then
<checks
to see if the
portion to the left of the colon
in
this
file
specification
is
a
logical
name;
if
it is (as DISK is in this example), it translates

that

1logical

complete,

name

also.

When

the

1logical

the translated file specification is:

name

translation

OBRAL SWEATHER
. SUM

Note that when you assign one logical name to
another
1logical
name,
you
must
terminate
the equivalence name with a colon (:) if you are
going to use the logical name in a file specification in
place
of
a
device

name.

For

example:

& ASHSIGEN

DRALE

TEST

$ ABSTIGN TEST:
GO
& TYFE GOINEW.DAT

The TYPE command types the file NEW.DAT from the disk
omit
the colons from either of these ASSIGN commands,
not be able to form a proper file specification.

DBAl.
If
vyou
the system will

2.2.3.2
Applying Defaults - When the system completes the translation
of
a
logical name, it uses defaults to fill in any still unspecified
fields in the file specification.
1In the above examples,
the
system
completes
the
file
specifications
by supplying the current default
directory and a version number according to whether it is an input
or
an output

file.

Many system commands create output
files
automatically
and
provide
default
file types for the output files.
When you use a logical name
to specify the input file for a command, the command uses the
logical
name
to assign a file specification to the output file as well.
Thus
if the equivalence name contains a file name and file type, the output
file is given the same file name and file type as the input file but a
higher

version number.

For example, the LINK command creates, by default, an executable image
file
that has the same file name as the input file and a default file
type of EXE.

If you make a logical name

LINK command as
$ ABBTEN

shown below the

RANDOM. ORJ

¢ LINK TESTIT

TESTIY

results

assignment

and

invoke

are not as you would

the

expect:

FILE

SPECIFICATIONS AND

LOGICAL NAMES

The linker translates the logical
name
TESTIT
and
links
the
file
RANDOM.OBJ.
When
it
«creates the output file, it also uses the same
logical name for the output file.
Because the equivalence name has
a
file type, the LINK command does not use the default file type of EXE.
In this example, the executable image is named RANDOM.OBJ and it has a
version number one higher than the version number of the input file.

2.2.3.3
Logical Names in Input
that
accepts
multiple
input

specifications of one or more
of each logical name provides
$ SET

DEFAULT

you issue a
command
logical names in the

files in the list, the equivalence
a temporary default.
For example:

name

DRA2ILCASEY]

$ ABSIGN

DRALIIMALCOLMI

% ABBIGN

[HIGGINSDT

$ FRINT

File Lists - When
files and you use

MAL

HIG

ALPHAy
-

$. MALIBETA
-~
$.. HIGIGAMMA
The

command

looks

for

the

files:

DBA2: [CASEY]ALPHA.LIS
DBAl: [MALCOLM]BETA.LIS
DBAl: [HIGGINS] GAMMA.LIS
The device name in the equivalence string for
the
logical
name
MAL
defines
DBAl
as the temporary default device for this PRINT command.
Temporary defaults are decribed
in
Section
2.1.5.1.
For
complete

details

Management

file

specification

Services

Reference

defaults,

see

the

VAX-11]

Record

Manual.

2.2.3.4
Bypassing Logical Name Translation - Most DCL commands
check
file
specifications
you enter as command parameters or as values for
qualifiers to see if the file specification contains a
logical
name.
When
to

you

not

enter

a device

translate

the

specification with
% ALLOCATE

When you
check to

2.2.4

name

command,

preceding

underscore

character

you

can

request

the

device

(_).

For

the

name

system

file

does

not

example:

0IMAZ23

specify an ALLOCATE command as
see if DMA2 is a logical name.

Default Logical

shown,

the

system

Names

The operating system and many of its facilities use logical
names
establish
default
devices
for
input
and
output
operations.
convention, logical names
defined
for
VAX/VMS
functions
have
format:

to
By
the

XXxSname

where xxx
that uses

is
the

three-character
name.

logical

prefix

identifying

the

system

component

FILE SPECIFICATIONS AND LOGICAL NAMES

2.2.4.1

system,
process.
listed

Default Process

Logical

Names - When

you

1log

the

the
system creates
logical
name
table
entries
for your
These logical names, which all have a
prefix
of
§8Y¥S,
are

in Table 2-4.

Table 2-4
Default Process Logical Names

Logical Name
SYSSINPUT

Equivalence Name
Default input stream
for
the
process.
For
an
interactive
user,
SYSSINPUT
1is
equated
to the
terminal.
In a command procedure
or
batch
job,
SYSSINPUT
is
equated
to the input file or batch
input

stream.

SYSS$OUTPUT

Default output stream for
the
process.
For
an
interactive
user,
SYSSOUTPUT
1is
equated to the
terminal.
In a batch job, SYSSOUTPUT
1is
equated
to the batch job log file.

SYSSERROR

Default
device
to
which
the
system
writes
messages.
For
an interactive user, SYSSERROR is
equated
to
the
terminal.
In
a
batch
job,
SYSSERROR is equated to the batch job log file.

SYS$COMMAND

Original SYSS$INPUT device for an interactive

SYS$DISK

Default device established at login,

or batch

job.

the SET DEFAULT command.

user

or changed by

The
equivalence
names
for
SYS$INPUT,
SYSSOUTPUT,
SYSSERROR
and
SYSSCOMMAND define files that remain open for the life of the process.
These files, called process-permanent files, can be
read
or
written
from programs.

2.2.4.2
Using
Default
Logical
Names - The
default
1logical
name
assignments
are
provided
for
your convenience, and do not normally

need to be reassigned.

The system always uses SYS$INPUT,

and SYSSERROR to read and write commands,

data,

SYSSOUTPUT,

and messages.

You can take advantage of the default
assignments
when
you
specify
files
1in
commands.
For example, to place input data in the command

stream for a command or program, you can
specify an
input
file
as
SYSSINPUT.
The
following example shows a FORTRAN command that could
be executed

in a batch

job:

FOFORTRAN SYS$TNFUTIWEATHER
When this command executes,

command

stream;

this

the compiler reads the input file from the

Jjob

is submitted through the system card

reader, the cards containing the source program
must
follow
in
the
card
deck.
The file name WEATHER in the file specification provides
the compiler with a default
file
name
for
the
output
files:
it
creates WEATHER.OBJ

and WEATHER.LIS.

2-16

FILE

To request
job output

SPECIFICATIONS

compiler creates
batch job output

2.2.4.3
names

entries

the file WEATHER.OBJ,
log.

for

into

the

batch

BYSEINPUT
I WEATHER

Default System Logical

contains

LOGICAL NAMES

that the listing file be written directly
log file, you could specify:

% FORTRAN/LIST=8YSS0UTFUT
The
the

AND

Names

system-wide

but

The

logical

prints

system

names.

the

1listing

logical

Among

name

these

table

logical

are:

SYSSLIBRARY

Device

SYS$SYSTEM

Device and directory of
and

2.2.5

directory name of

system libraries

operating

system

programs

procedures

The system manager at your
logical
name
table
that

particular

and

installation
correspond

can place names in the
system
to
default
devices
on
your

system.

Logical Names

for

Program

Input/Output

Logical names are also used to establish the correspondence between
a
file name or logical unit number in a program and a physical device or
file specification.
Each programming
language
provides
conventions
for
identifying files within programs;
the operating system provides
the logical name mechanism for
equating
these
files
with
physical
device or file specifications.
For

example,

FORTRAN

program

refers

file

using

logical

unit

number.
FORTRAN
run-time
procedures
associate
the
1logical
unit
numbers with logical names:
1logical unit 1
is
associated
with
the
logical
name
FOR0O0l,
1logical
wunit 2 is associated with the logical
name FOR002, and so on.
Before running a program that reads
from
or

writes
unit to

to
1logical unit 1, you can make an assignment of that logical
a device with the ASSIGN command, as shown
in
the
following

example:
& ASSIGN

$ RUN

PAYROLLDAT

Before

you

execute

programs

steps

ensure

that

requires are online
prepare

and

FOROOL

FICAH

use

disk

and
and

the

read

data

available.
tape

and

write

volumes

The

volumes.

files,

you

must

devices

that

your

chapter

discusses how

take

program

CHAPTER

DISK

You

can

use

circumstances,
own

you do not

files.

Occasionally,
users,

you

chapter
®

may

the

files

system volumes.

need

also

transfer

How

the

The

access

from

files
volumes

directory.

vyou
your

to other users as well;
Under normal operating

to perform any special

need

files

belonging

operating

system

protects

and devices

Volume

Mounting

®¢

The

action

to access

belonging
other

these

than

other

the

system

cases,

special

and

restricts

access

disk

and

initialization

steps

tape

3.1

to catalog the files that
disk volume that contains

describes:

files

VOLUMES

volume containing your default
action may be required.

This

TAPE

your default disk directory
regular basis.
The physical

default directory contains
such
volumes
are
known
your

AND

volumes

necessary

devices
to

transfer

files

volumes

Accessing

files

from batch

and

from

jobs

PROTECTION
operating

system protects

against
accidental
two levels:
e

the

volume

is protected
®

3.1.1

At the
device

Volume

device
in use

data

unauthorized

and

file

disk

and

access.

level

level to ensure
by one user

ensure

that

tape

volumes

Protection

that

data

other

users

ensure

volume

provided

can

access

and File Protection

Disk and tape volumes, and individual files on disk volumes, including
directories,
are
protected
by
means
of
a
protection
code.
The
protection code indicates who is allowed access for what purposes.

DISK AND TAPE VOLUMES

These are:

Four categories of user are defined according to UIC.

SYSTEM -- all users who have group numbers

are

numbers

group

These

(octal).

through

for

generally

system

Users who have
managers, system programmers, and operators.
the user privileges LOG_IO and PHY_IO are also
of
either
included

in this category.

person

who

<created,

therefore

and

OWNER -- the UIC of the

GROUP -- all users who have the same

WORLD -- all users who do not fall into any of the other three
categories but including all users in the other categories

owns,

the volume or

file

UICs as the owner of the file,

group

the

Each of these categories of user can be allowed or denied one
following

their

number

including the owner

types of access:

files

READ -- the right to examine, print, or copy a file

WRITE -- the right to modify the file or to write files

EXECUTE -- the right to execute files that contain executable
images (when applying protection to an entire volume,
program
the
this field is interpreted as the right to create files on

on a volume

volume

volume)

DELETE -- the right to delete the file or files on the volume

The system provides a default protection code for

files

you

create.

When you create a file or prepare a disk or tape volume for private
Some
use, you can define the protection you want to be applied.
examples of specifying protection codes for individual files are shown
examples of volume protection are shown in
in the following section;
"Using Disk and Tape Volumes." For details on how to
Section 3.4,
specify protection codes,

command

see the description of

the

SET

PROTECTION

in Part II.

own
1its
has
a disk
on
file
Disk File Protection - Each
3.1.1.1
you can specify a protection code when you create a
protection code;

For example, you can use the /PROTECTION qualifier to define
file.
the protection for a file you create with the COPY command, as shown
below:

$oOFEY DRALICFAYDATAIFAYROLL.DAT FAYSORT.DAT APROTECTION= (SYSTEMIRWy OWNER I RWEX » GROUP SRW s WORLID
...

to your default
This COPY command copies a file from the device DBAl:
The protection code defines the protection for the
disk directory.
users with system UICs can
newly created file PAYSORT.DAT as follows:
have all types of access;
owner)
(the
you
file;
the
write
read and
and all other
other users in your group may read and write the file;
users

(the world)

are permitted no access.

DISK

You

can

also

PROTECTION

SET

$..

you

change

the

command.

AND

TAPE

protection

For

existing

file

with

the

FROTECTION=(SYSTEMIRWE
s OWNERIRWED GROUF IRE »WORLIIY

SET

FAYSBORT
. EXE

not

PROTECTION

define

protection

code

SHOW

file

when

you

create

the

FROTECTION

response

access,
access,

for

protection.
The default protection
user authorization file.
You
can
that is applied by issuing the SHOW

command:

SYSTEM=RWEDy

This

example:

file, the system applies a default
is determined from an entry in the
determine
the
current protection

for

VOLUMES

OWNER=RWEDy

indicates

that
other
and that all

that

wusers
other

GROUF=RE,

the

WORL =R

system and

in the
wusers

owner

have

owner's group have
(the
world)
are

all

types

read and execute
permitted
read

access.

determine the current protection associated with a specific file or
files, use the /FULL qualifier on the DIRECTORY command.
For example:
$

DIRECTORY/FULL

DIRECTORY

FERSONNEL
., REC

URAL LLCRAMER]

G JUL-19786

123031

FERSONNEL cRECHS

320,201
TOTAL

You

can

(3725+12)

8:/710

Q3~JUL~1978

13114

LRUWEDy RWETy RWy R
€.710.

change

the

BLOCKS

default

FILE

protection

applied

files

that

you

create

during
a
terminal
session with the SET PROTECTION command.
Use the
/DEFAULT qualifier on the SET PROTECTION command to indicate that
the
protection
code
you
specify
1is to be applied to all files that you
subsequently create during the terminal session or batch job.

3.1.1.2
volume
applies

Tape File
Protection - The
protection
applied
applies
equally
to all files on the volume.
The
read and write access
restrictions
with
respect

execute

the

and

owner

what
you
the group

3.1.2
In

delete

access

are

always

given

both

specify
or world,

in a
read

meaningless.

read

and

Moreover,

write

access,

protection code.
1If you
access is also allowed.

give

the

system and
regardless
of
write access to

Device Allocation

most

installations,

private
access
user

are

to
a
tape
system only
to
tapes;

disk
to

can

mechanism

these
access

many

drives

and

devices

users

tape
that
and

called

device

allocation.

ALLOCATE

For
example,
to use the
following ALLOCATE command:

command

ALLOCATE

allocates

TMMTERI?

ALLOCATEDR

the

The

you

device

it.
the

SMTERLD

while

the

The

must

drives.
volume

device

tape

are

limited

using

mounted

and

drive

operating

gives

labeled

number

device,
it.

you

Bl,

system controls
no

This

other

control

exclusive

you would

use

issue

DISK AND TAPE

VOLUMES

The response from the ALLOCATE command indicates successful allocation
of
the
device
you
requested.
You
can
also use the SHOW DEVICES
command to find out what devices are available.
For example:
SHOW

DEVICES

DIM3

This command requests a display of all RK06 and RKO7 devices
attached
The response from the command shows the devices that
system.
the
to
are currently allocated to other users, and devices
that
are online
and available.

If you want td allocate any device of a particular type, use a generic
A generic device name is one
the ALLOCATE command.
in
name
device
that does not specify a controller and/or a unit number.
For example,
if
you
want
to
use an RK06 device and do not know which drives are
available, you would issue the ALLOCATE command as follows:
$

ALLOCATE

SOMAZ2E

DM:

ALLOCATED

The ALLOCATE command locates an available RK06 device;
indicates that the device DMA2

response

the

is allocated.

Note that tape devices can never be shared;

thus,

when

you

use

tape, the system automatically allocates it for you when you mount it.

You can,

than

one

however,

allocate a tape device when you want to

volume

mount

on the same device and retain control of the device

between mounts.

3.2

VOLUME

INITIALIZATION

Before a volume can be used to contain files,
The

INITIALIZE

it must be

initialized.

command:

the

volume,

Invalidates all existing data

Writes an internal label on the volume to identify it

Defines the owner UIC and protection for

formats

any,

and

the volume with a particular data structure

the volume

If a disk or tape volume has never been used before, no special
steps
However, if the volume has previously
initialize it.
to
needed
are
from
you
it may prevent
on
contained data, the protection code
Or, in the case of a tape,
the volume and initializing it.
accessing
files on the volume may not have reached their expiration dates.
If either
privilege
volume or
does
who
give the
specify:

user
the
have
not
do
of these conditions exists and you
to override volume protection, the previous owner of the
example)
for
another user (the system manager or operator,
When you
have read/write access must initialize it for you.
should
you
initialization,
for
wuser
another
to
volume
-

The data format you require

The label you want to have written on the volume

The protection code and owner UIC you want assigned to it

DISK

When you obtain a
place

label

tape
on

the

AND

disk

TAPE

VOLUMES

volume,

outside

you

the

should

volume

also

that

remember
can

easily

identified.

3.3

MOUNTING VOLUMES ON DEVICES

Mounting
device,
Mounting
involves
@

is the mechanism that provides a 1link
between
a
volume,
a
and
your process so you can perform input/output operations.
and using a physical
volume
(a
disk
pack
or
tape
reel)
two distinct operations:
Place the
pressing

volume
on
the
1load

the
device
and
ready
the
device
by
button
or
performing equivalent startup

procedures.
®

Issue

the

MOUNT

command

gain

access

the

data

the

device.
The
MOUNT command compares your UIC with the UIC of
the volume's owner to verify your right to access the
volume;
it also verifies the label on the volume against the label you
specify.

The order
the
way

in which these
in
which
the

allocated

physically

device

1load

operations are performed
device
1is
being used.

using

the

explicit

device

before

varies according
to
If you have already

ALLOCATE

issuing

the

command,

MOUNT

you

can

command.

For

example:
$

MOUNT

DMA2:

TESTLFILES

AMOUNT
- L-MOUNTEDy

this

example,

the

INFILE

TEST.FILES

MOUNT

mounted

command

orn

specifies

DMAIL

the

name

allocated

device
(DMA2),
logical name for
optional.
Note

the
volume
1label
on the volume (TEST_FILES), and a
the device (INFILE).
The logical name
parameter
is
that
you
can assign logical names to disk and tape

devices when

mount

you

them,

and

then

use

the

logical

the
device
name
in
subsequent
commands.
logical name, the MOUNT
command
assigns
the
DISKSTEST FILES to the device DMAZ.

3.3.1

name

If you do
default

rather

than

not specify a
1logical
name

Requesting Operator Assistance

At some installations, operators are provided to perform the
physical
chores
of
mounting
and dismounting both system and private disk and
tape volumes.
When this is the case, you can:
e

Allocate

Send

device

message

device
you
the physical

required

operator

type.
of

the

allocated
and the volume you want mounted.
identification on the outside of the
volume

Give
and

operator

the

tell

the

where

the

Wait
that

until the operator responds
the volume is mounted.

specifying

volume

the

name

is.

with

message

indicating

DISK AND TAPE VOLUMES

The
REQUEST
command
sends
a
message
to
an
operator.
If
vyour
installation
has
more
than one operator, they may be designated for
specific functions -- one
operator
to
handle
requests
for
disks,
another
for
tapes,
and
so
on.
Options
for
the REQUEST command
qualifier /TO -- for example, DISKS and TAPES ~-- route your request to
the

proper

operator.

Assume, for this example, that there
1is
an
operator
designated
to
mount
and
dismount
disks.
To
request
this operator to mount the
volume TEST_FILES on the device DMA2, you could issue the command:
$

REQUEST/ZTO=0TISKS/REFLY

$_ "Flease mount TEST.FILES

The /REPLY qualifier
operator
You

indicates

(shelf slot &B)

that

you

on DMAZ®

want

wait

until

the

completes the request.

receive

the message:

ZOPCOM-S-0FRNOTIFy

orerator

notifiedr

waiting,..131142826

The operator locates the physical volume, places it on the device, and
types
a
message indicating that the request is satisfied.
Then, you
receive

the messages:

Z0FCOM-S~-RASTOMFLTEy

ZOFPCOM~S-DFREPLYy

reauest

comelete

"G0e e

The text of the second message optional text typed
Now, you can mount and begin using the volume.

3.3.2

the

operator.

Dismounting Volumes

When you no longer need access to the
files
release the volume with the DISMOUNT command.
¢

DISMOUNT

and makes

you

can

DMAZS

The DISMOUNT command ensures that all
before the dismounting is complete.

By default,

on
a
volume,
For example:

files on the volume

are

closed

the DISMOUNT command also unloads the volume on the device

the device not

ready.

If you allocated the device before using it, and no
1longer
need
the
device,
deallocate
it
so
that other users can obtain access to it.
The DEALLOCATE command deallocates the device.
For example:
4

DEALLOCATE

DMag?

If you had operator assistance in mounting
the
volume,
remember
to
request
the
operator to physically dismount the volume and return it
to its place.

DISK

3.4

AND

TAPE

VOLUMES

USING DISK AND TAPE VOLUMES

When a volume has been mounted, you can execute programs that
perform
input/output
operations to the volume, or you can use DCL commands to
read and write files.
Note the following restrictions on the
use
of
DCL commands for files on disk and tape volumes:
e

The

devices.

and

You

SUBMIT

can

commands

cannot

volumes if you mount the volume
print
or
submit
a
file on a
file to a shared disk volume.

The

following

commands

PURGE

DIFFERENCES

RENAME

LIBRARY

RUN

LINK

SET

files

allocated

on private disk

as
a
shareable
volume.
tape volume, you must copy

cannot process

DELETE

access

submit

files

on magnetic

To
the

tapes:

PROTECTION

UNLOCK

You can execute a command procedure that exists on a
magnetic
tape
volume,
as
1long as the procedure does not invoke other
procedures and does not issue any GOTO commands
referring
to
labels that precede the command.

Note, also, that you cannot use DCL commands to read
that
are
not
1in
the
standard
formats supported
formats are described in greater detail, below).
To

and
write
files
by VAX/VMS (these
execute
programs

to read and write files not in the standard format, you must mount the
volume with the /FOREIGN qualifier.
The
following
sections
provide
complete

examples

the

steps

prepare

and

use

disk

and

tape

volumes for file storage and to access existing files.
The
examples
show
how
to prepare and use RK06/RK07 disk packs and magnetic tapes;
however, the procedures outlined are applicable to
other
devices
as
well.

3.4.1

Using Disks

Disks are random-access
devices,
and
files
must
be
cataloged
1in
directories.
Therefore, after you initialize a disk, you must create
a directory before you can write any files on the disk volume.
The following example shows
how
initialize
and
mount
a
volume
files on the volume.

ogHoW DEVICES Dt

Nevics
Mame

to
on

Nevice

Stetus

Characlteristics

IMAO:

lirme

MNT

IMal?

lime

MNT

min3:

line

allocate
it, create

an
RKO06/RK07
device,
a directory, and write

ALL

$ ALLOCATE IMAZ:
SOMA3

ALLOCATED

This example
1illustrates
the
SHOW
DEVICES
command;
the
command
requests
a
display
of the current status of RKO06/RK07 devices.
The
response from the command indicates that
the
device
named
DMA3
is
available.
The ALLOCATE command allocates the device so you can place

the

volume

it.

DISK AND TAPE VOLUMES

$ INITIALIZE DMA3:
FPUBS.BACKUF -~
$../FROTECTION=(SYSTEM
RWED » OUNER $RWELD y GROUF RWED » WORLIDITR)
MOUNT IMA33
PFURS.BACKUF
CREATE/ZDIRECTORY IMA3ILFURS]
ASSTGN IMAZILFURST
P
CORY

X.%

COPY
COFY

EPRIMERIX.X
P23
CCOMMANDSIX.
X F3

The INITIALIZE command initializes the volume
and
writes
the
1label
PUBS_BACKUP on it.
The protection code allows group members and users
with system UICs all access and restricts access by all other users to
reading.
The
MOUNT
command
mounts the volume.
The CREATE command
with the /DIRECTORY qualifier creates a directory file named
PUBS
on
the
device
DMA3.
The COPY commands copy the highest versions of all
files in the current default directory and in the
directories
PRIMER
and COMMANDS to the directory just created.
Note the use of the ASSIGN command to assign a logical
device and directory name on the RK06/RK07 volume.

name,

the

3.4.1.1
Copying Files from Files~ll
Structure
Level
1
Disks - The
default
format
for files on disks is called Files-1l1l Structure Level
2.
You can also initialize disks in the Files~1ll
Structure
Level
1
format.
Structure
Level
1
1is
the
format
used
by other DIGITAL
operating systems, including RSX-11M, RSX-11D, and IAS.

To initialize a Structure Level 1 disk, use the /STRUCTURE=1 qualifier
on
the
INITIALIZE
command.
When you use the MOUNT command to mount
the volume, the MOUNT command will internally identify the volume as a
Structure
Level
1
volume.
Subsequently,
all
commands you use to
access files (COPY, DELETE, and so on) will default the file format to
Structure
Level
1 automatically.
Note that directories on Structure
Level 1 disks must have names in UIC format to be readable
by
RSX-11
or

IAS.

3.4.1.2
Sharing
Volumes - System
disk
volumes
containing
users'
default
directories
and
other volumes containing files belonging to
more than one user are designated, at the time that they are
mounted,
as
shareable.
The devices on which these volumes are mounted are not
allocated, thus allowing access by other system users.
These
volumes
are
physically
1loaded
and
mounted by system operators and managers
with the /SYSTEM qualifier of the MOUNT command;
you need
not
issue
an
explicit MOUNT command to access files on these volumes (you must,
however, have access privileges as defined in the volume's
protection
.
code)

Other volumes can be designated as shareable among
many
users;
use
the
/SHARE
qualifier
on
the MOUNT command when you want to mount a
device for other users to access.
For example:
$

MOLUNT/SHARE

OMAZSY

PURBS.LEBACK

This MOUNT command indicates that other users can
access
the
volume
PUBS_BACK.
Each user who wants to access the volume must also issue a
MOUNT command with the /SHARE qualifier.
Note that if the device
was
allocated
before
the
MOUNT command was issued, the /SHARE qualifier
deallocates the device.

DISK AND TAPE VOLUMES

Access to the volume is restricted according to the protection code on
the
volume.
The
system
identifies the volume by its volume label,
rather than by the device on which it is
mounted.
Other
users
who
want to access the volume do not need to know the physical name of the
device, but only the generic device type and volume label.

For example, another user who wants to use the volume mounted
example above would issue the MOUNT command,
$ MOUNT/SHARE

DiM:

PURS.BACK

as follows:

the

FURS

Thereafter, the device can be referred to by the
1logical
name
PUBS;
the sharer does not need to know the name of the physical device.
Because the system uses volume labels to identify shared volumes,
two
volumes that have the same label cannot be mounted with the /SHARE (or
/SYSTEM or /GROUP) qualifier at the same time.

3.4.2

Using Tapes

The default format for reading and writing tapes is the ANSI X327-1977
Magnetic
Tape
Labels
and File Structure for Information Interchange
standard.

The following examples show how to allocate,
initialize,
and
use
a
The procedures are similar to those
backup your disk files.
to
tape

outlined above for using disk volumes.

However, tapes are

access devices and do not have directories.
$

ALLOCATE

LMTO20

sequential

MT?
ALLOCATED

the
The ALLOCATE command requests the allocation of any tape device;
now
is
and
available
was
MTA2
device
the
that
indicates
response
You can now physically load the tape on the drive.
allocated to you.
initialize

Next,

the tape:

INITIALIZE

MTA2:

GMROOL

IRy WORLID
TION=
(GROUF
$./FROTEC

The INITIALIZE command specifies the device name

(MTA2)

and the volume

The /PROTECTION qualifier defines
label for the tape volume (GMB00l).
allowing no
a protection code restricting group access to read and
You can now use the MOUNT command to mount the
to the world.
access
volume and write files to it:
£ MOUNT

MTaAZl

GMBOOIL

YMOUNT
- T-MOUNTEDy
&

DOFY

d.%

GMBOOL

mounted on MTAHZ2

MTO2:

the
of
label
The MOUNT command specifies the device name and volume
volume on the device.
The COPY command copies the highest versions of
all files in your default directory onto the tape.
The file names and
file types of the output files default to the same file names and file
types as the

input files.

To verify that the files were successfully copied,
DIRECTORY
¢

command:

DIRECTORY

MTA23S

you

can

use

the

DISK AND TAPE VOLUMES

The DIRECTORY
on the tape.

command

lists

When you have finished
as shown below:
$

DISMOUNT

DEALLOCATE

the

using

file

the

names

tape,

and

dismount

file

types

and

all

files

deallocate

it,

MTAZ2:
MTAZ!

If you do not dismount
automatically when you

and
log

deallocate
out.

the

tape,

the

system

does

3.4.2.1
Reading
and
Writing
Tape
Files - A
magnetic
tape
1is
a
sequential device.
With DCL commands, you can write new files only at
the end of existing data on the tape and you cannot delete files
from
a

tape.

The

You

tape;

can,

all

APPEND

however,

files

command

expired.
If you
re—-initialize it.

want

append

that

will

not,

data

the

appended

however,

overwrite

end

overwrite

tape

file
a

existing

file

are

overwritten.

file

that

completely,

has

you

not

must

When you want to copy files from an existing tape, you can selectively
copy
files from the tape by specifying the file name and file type of
the file you want to copy, as shown below.
$

MOUNT

COPY

MTEZ2!
GMEOOIL
MTR2IASTRO.SRC

ASTRO.OLI

COPY

MTRIASTROLFOR

ASTRO2.FOR

UTESMOUNT

The COPY
request,

MTR2!

commands copy specific files from the tape.
the COPY command leaves the tape positioned

After
at the

each
copy
end of the

file it has just
copied.
When
1t
1looks
for
the
next
file,
it
continues
searching
until
the end of the tape;
if it does not find
the file, it rewinds the tape and searches until it either locates the
file or returns to the point on the tape at which it started.

3.4.2.2
Version Numbers for Tape Files - Files that
you
write
onto
tape
with
DCL
commands are written in sequential order and all have
version numbers of 0.
If you want to read a file from a tape and
you
do
not
specify
a
file version number, the command locates the next
file with that file name and file type that is physically on the tape.
If you write a file
number, the version

3.4.3

onto a
number

tape and request the next
highest
associated with the file is 0.

Multivolume Tape Sets

The VAX/VMS

operating

system allows you

that
span
more
than
one
multivolume set has a unique
within the set.

Processing
operator

command

version

of
or

multi-volume
wuser

files

respond

program attempts

create

and

access

files

physical
tape
volume.
Each volume in a
volume label and a relative volume number

read

requires
requests

write

the

attendance

switch

beyond

volumes;

the

end

when

an
a

tape,

DISK AND TAPE VOLUMES

the
system
automatically
sends
a
message to the system operator's
console (or to a terminal designated as an operator's terminal).
The
message indicates:
®

The

device

name

The

relative

volume

number

the

volume

the

volume

set

The

label,

known

Before processing can continue, the operator must physically mount
volume,
place the device online, and type a reply to the message.

no operator is
to the message

the
1If

available, you can load the volume yourself
and
reply
from the operator's console or an operator's terminal.

When you issue the MOUNT command to
begin
processing
a
multivolume
file,
you
can specify the labels on each of the volumes in the MOUNT
command.
For example, after physically loading the
first
volume
on
the device MTAO, you can issue the MOUNT command as follows:
$

MOUNT

MT:

GMEROOLy

GMEOO2,

GMROO3

The MOUNT command verifies the label
on
the
volume
message
indicating
successful
completion
if
the

and
returns
volume
1label

a
is

correct.

Subsequently,
automatically

when
sends

the
a

volume labeled GMB00O2.
look like the following:
Orcomy

0201824801y

Orcoms

MOUNT

After loading
the message:
¢

the

tape
reaches
end-of-tape,
the
system
request
to
the system operator to mount the
The messages the operator
receives
typically

GEQFF

relative

volume

and

Acert=TEXTFROC
2

(GMEBOOGE)

readying

the

Rerlu-ID=131084

MTab:

device,

the

operator

types

REFLY/TO=131084

The system verifies the reply~-ID and then verifies
correct volume is mounted, processing continues.

the volume.

At the end of that tape, it sends a message to mount
No more explicit MOUNT commands are required.

the

label

1If the

GMB003.

3.4.3.1

Creating a Multivolume Tape Set - When you initially create
a
file
that
spans tape volumes, you may not know that multiple volumes
are required.
If, while you are writing to the tape, the tape reaches
end-of-tape,
the
system
suspends
processing to notify the operator
that a new volume is required.
1In this case, the system does not know
the
volume
label.
The
operator
must mount a volume and enter the
volume label on the REPLY command as shown below.
$

If
by

REFLY/TO=196420

"GMROO4

the tape is a new tape, operator can request that it be initialized
specifying /INITIALIZE following the label.
For example:
¢

REFLY/TO=196620

"GMBOOA/INITIAL
TZE

DISK

AND TAPE

VOLUMES

The system performs normal protection
and
expiration
checks
before
initializing
the
volume.
The
operator
can also specify /BLANK to
override the checking for protection information on
tapes
that
have
been read by a verifying machine.

3.4.3.2
volumes
MOUNT

Using Multiple Tape Drives - You can overlap the mounting
in a multivolume set by specifying more than one drive in

command.
$

MOUNT

For

of
the

example:

MTAOQL»MTALY

GMROOLy

GMBOOZy

GMROO3Z

The MOUNT command verifies the volume on MTAO.
If the
volume
GMB002
is
located
on
the
device MTAl when the end-of-volume is reached on
GMB001l, processing continues.
However, when the end-of-volume
occurs
on
GMB002,
the
first
volume is dismounted from MTAO0 and the system
sends a message to the operator to MOUNT the third volume on MTAOQ.

3.5

ACCESSING DEVICES

IN BATCH JOBS

You

can
write
command
procedures
to
mount
volumes,
execute
DCL
commands
oOr your own programs to write or access files on the volume.
By using logical names to refer to devices and files, you can use
the
same
command
procedures
without
modification each time you want to
access a volume.

$
$
$
$
$
S
$

TRY:
RK
DM:
ALLOCATE
THEN
S$STATUS
IF
00:05
WAIT
TRY
GOTO
OKAY

\nNnnnvnnn

For example, if you use the same RK06 disk pack to back up your
files
on
a
weekly basis, you can submit as a batch job a command procedure
like the following:

MOUNT

GOTO

REQUEST/REPLY /TO=DISKS

'PLEASE

MOUNT
RK

RK06

OKAY

BACK_UP_GMB

''F$LOGICAL("RK")'

BACK_UP_GMB

COPY/REPLACE

*_*
“RK:*,
*
DIRECTORY/FULL/OUTPUT = BACKUP.LOG
DISMOUNT
PRINT

RK:

BACKUP.LOG

DEALLOCATE

REQUEST/TO = DISKS

"All

done,

thanks..."

In this job, the procedure
places
itself
1in
a
wait
state
1if
RKO6/RK07
1is
available
and
1loops
to repeat the request.
When
ALLOCATE command completes successfully, a
message
1is
sent
to

no
the
the

operator.

The logical name, RK, assigned on the ALLOCATE command is used in
subsequent
commands.
The
lexical function FSLOGICAL is used 1in
REQUEST command;
this function translates the
1logical
name
RK
substitutes
the
equivalence
name
in
the
message displayed at
operator's console.

When the REQUEST command notifies the operator to
volume, the job waits until the operator responds

mount
the
correct
before continuing.

For more information on how to create and execute command
see Chapter 5, "Command Procedures and Batch Jobs."

3-12

all
the
and
the

procedures,

CHAPTER

PROGRAMMING WITH VAX/VMS

The
VAX/VMS
operating
system
provides
concurrent
time-shared
multiprogramming
and
batch job processing:
many users can be logged
in at terminals to create
and
test
new
programs
and
applications
interactively
at
the
same
time
that
production
applications and
time-critical process control applications are running.
This

chapter

describes:

Commands

for

Debugging

Exit

Process

program development

programs

handlers

and

condition

handlers

concepts

Table 1-5 in Section 1.10, "Summary of VAX/VMS DCL Commands" lists
commands described in this chapter.
For details on the parameters
qualifiers for any of these commands, see the command descriptions
Part

II.

4.1

COMMANDS

the
and
in

FOR PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT

Figure 4-1 illustrates
programs in VAX/VMS.

the

steps

required

create

and

execute

The following example illustrates the DCL commands you
would
use
to
create,
compile,
1link,
and
execute a FORTRAN program named AVERAGE

using DCL
¢

commands:

EDET

AUVERAGE
. FOR

Troseat S DEAL T LMALCOLMIAVERAGE
. FORS 1

Q010G

irenl

source

statemernts

ESC

FORTRAN

#LIMK

RUM

AVERAGE

AVERALE

PROGRAMMING WITH VAX/VMS
Use the editor to create
a disk file containing your

Source

source program statements.

program

Specify the name of this file
when you invoke the compiler
or assembler.

The FORTRAN and MACRO
commands invoke language

Compiler

processors that check syntax,

create object modules, and

Assembler

if requested, generate
program listings.

If a processor signals any
errors, use the editor to

Errors?

Correct the

yes

source program

correct the source program.

The linker searches the system
libraries to resolve references
in the object module and create

an executable image. Optionally,

Link the

you can specify private libraries

object module

to search, and request the linker
to create a storage map of
your program,

The linker issues diagnostic

messages if an object module
refers to subroutines or symbols

that are not available or
undefined.

If the linker cannot

Errors?

locate a subroutine, you must

Dm = e e e e

—

- —— >

reissue the LINK command
specifying the modules or
libraries to include.

If a

symbol is undefined, you may

need to correct the source program.
The RUN command executes a
program image. While your
Run the

program is running, the system

executable

may detect errors and issue

image

messages. To determine if your
program is error-free, check
its output.

If there is a bug in your
program, determine the cause

Bugs?

of error and correct the

yes

source program,

SUCCESS

Figure

4-1

Steps

in Program Development

PROGRAMMING WITH VAX/VMS

Note that the EDIT command invokes the
default
system
editor,
SOS.
SOS
prompts
for
input lines until you use (Gsc) to terminate input.
Then, the E (Exit) command requests SOS to write the input
data
onto
disk.
The FORTRAN command invokes the VAX-11
compile the source statements.
If

you

file
file.
All

are

a VAX-11]

type

the

simplest

MACRO programmer,

MAR,

commands,

and

use

EDIT,

you

the MACRO

FORTRAN,

forms, without qualifiers.

type of FOR in the
input
and
output
and RUN commands.

FORTRAN

LINK,

IV-PLUS

would

give

command

and RUN,

the

are

The
or

shown

file

the

input

their

file creation, you can allow the
files to assume the defaults for

file types of
the
the FORTRAN, LINK,

and

lists

the

sections discuss DCL commands and
system
programs
that
in developing, testing, and maintaining your programs.

Program Libraries

LIBRARY
macros.

listing

command creates and maintains libraries of object
modules
A
library
1is
a
file
that contains its own directory

the entries

4,1.1.1
Object
convenient
for
programs.
TIMER,

using

For

CALC,

contains.

Module
storing
example,
and

the LIBRARY
g

Libraries
routines

- Object
that are

you

have

compiled

SWITCH,

you

could

create

command

LIBRARYCREASTE

COMMON

module
libraries
called frequently by
the
a

object

library

modules

named

LEINK

are
many
named

COMMON.OLB

follows:
TIMER,UALC»SWITCH

When you issue a LINK command to link an object module that
of
these routines, you can specify the library as a linker
using the /LIBRARY qualifier:

When
the

By giving the source file a file

can find a description of each of these commands,
valid qualifiers, in Part II of this manual.

4.1.1

input

assemble

You

The next few
can help you

compiler

calls
input

any
file

TESTFROG«COMMONSLIRRARY

the linker links the module TESTPROG, it
library
COMMON.OLB
when
it
encounters

automatically
any undefined

searches
external

references.

The system library
STARLET.OLB
contains
system
routines
that
are
called
frequently.
The
1linker
automatically searches this library
after searching
any
private
1libraries
you
specify
for
undefined
external references.

PROGRAMMING WITH VAX/VMS

4.1.1.2

Macro Libraries -

If you

are a MACRO programmer,

you

can

also

use
the
LIBRARY
command
to catalog macros that you use frequently.
For example, to create a macro library from the
macros
contained
in

the

files

command:
$

DESCRIPTOR.MAR,

LIBRARY/CREATE/ZMACKRO

TRANSLATE.MAR,

and RANDOM.MAR,

LOCALMAC DESCRIFTOR

issue the

TRANSLATE » RANDOM

To assemble a program that invokes any of these
macros,
specify
the
name
of the library on the MACRO command with the /LIBRARY qualifier,
as

shown below:
$

MACRO

L.OCALMAC/LIBRARY4HRUNTEST

ZORJECT

This
MACRO
command
indicates
that
there
are
two
input
LOCALMAC.MLB, a library;
and the source file, RUNTEST.MAR.

files:

The system library STARLET.MLB contains system macros.
The
assembler
automatically
searches this library to locate macro definitions after
searching any private libraries you specify, as in the above example.

4.1.2

Controlling Program Updates and Modifications

VAX/VMS provides several commands and programs you can
and control updates that you make to your programs.

4,1.2.1
program,

Updating Source
Programs - To
update
you
can
use
the interactive editor,

use

track

or
modify
a
source
SOS.
Because SOS, by

default, creates a new file (with a higher version number)
each
time
you edit a file, you can keep previous versions of a file for back up.
SOS does not, however, provide you with a record of the
changes
that
you

have made.

VAX/VMS also provides a batch editor, SLP.

With SLP, you can

insert,

delete, or replace lines in a file and create a new file incorporating
your changes.
SLP also creates a record of all the modifications that
you

made.

Both SOS and SLP are invoked with the EDIT
command.
Both
of
these
editors
are described in detail in the VAX-1ll Text Editing Reference
Manual.

4.1.2.2

Comparing Versions of Files - The DIFFERENCES command

invokes

a
file
comparison program that compares the contents of two files to
determine what differences, if any, exist between
them.
DIFFERENCES
creates an output file that summarizes the differences.
The DIFFERENCES command

4.2

is described

in Part II.

DEBUGGING

The VAX~11l Symbolic Debugger is an interactive debugging program.
It
has
an extensive set of commands that allow you to examine and modify
a program in memory while it is executing.

PROGRAMMING WITH VAX/VMS

The

debugger

uses

Local

Global

Traceback

When you
you
can

three

symbol

sets

table

symbol

information:

information

use DCL commands to compile or assemble and
control what information, if any, you want

1link
a
program,
to include in the

image.
If

you

request

local

symbol

table

information

you

can

refer

actual

variable names and statement labels when you issue DEBUG commands.
If
you request traceback information, the debugger
can
trace
the
call
stack

when

error

occurs

during

image

execution.

By
default,
the
FORTRAN
IV-PLUS
compiler
and
the
VAX-11
MACRO
assembler
generate
traceback
information,
but
not local or global
symbol information,
in
the
object
module.
The
linker,
also
by
default,
includes the traceback information in the image file so that
you receive a symbolic traceback when an error occurs.

4.2.,1

Symbolic

Debugging

If you want to use
you
must
request

program.
a FORTRAN

the complete symbolic capabilities of the debugger,
the
debugger when you compile and when you link a

The following example shows
program with the debugger:

FORTRANZDERBUG/NOOFTIMIZE

LINK/ZRERUG

RUN

the

commands

compile

and

arnd

module

link

PRECIP

FRECIP

FRECIF
NDEGUE

Vereiorn

ANERBUG~T-TINITIALy

1.0

landguadge

FORTRANy

that

the

score

set

CRRECTRS
NG

The

FORTRAN

command

requests

traceback

information

/NOOPTIMIZE

qualifier

source

program

ensures

statements

The LINK command requests
global symbol definitions

When you
debugger,

issue
the

the RUN

and

1in

a one-to-one
the

machine

inclusion of
in the image.

command

debugger

included

receives

the

correspondence
code

the

execute

control,

In
it

RUNSNODEBUG

this case,
by issuing

the

table

(the

between

the

object

and

1image

1linked

identifies

and

module

debugger

prompts for you to begin entering DEBUG commands.
the
debugger
to
prompt
when
you
execute
an
command as follows:
$

symbol
object

module).

1local

and

with

the

1itself,

and

If you do not
want
image, issue the RUN

FRECIF

the debugger does not prompt;
however,
the DEBUG command when an error occurs.

you

can

invoke

For complete descriptions of the DEBUG commands and considerations for
using the debugger, see the VAX-11] Symbolic Debugger Reference Manual.

PROGRAMMING WITH VAX/VMS

Note that symbol table information and, to a lesser extent,
traceback
information
increase
the
size
of
an object module.
When you have

debugged a program, you can recompile or reassemble without the symbol
table
information,
retaining
traceback
information in the event of
unexpected errors in the

future.

You can also exclude
traceback
information
from
modules
that
you
catalog
in
object
module
libraries.
Otherwise,
the
traceback
information is included in all modules
that
1link
with
the
1library
module.

4.2.2

Debugging with Virtual Addresses

You can debug an image that was
not
compiled
and
1linked
with
the
debugger
symbol
table.
The
/DEBUG
qualifier
on
the RUN command
requests the debugger
$

RUNZDERBUG

at run time.

For

example:

ORION

To specify memory locations for the debugger, you
must
have
both
a
machine
code
1listing
of
the
object module and a full map from the
linker.
The map gives the virtual address (in
hexadecimal)
of
each
module, global symbol, and PSECT in the image.
If you do not link or run an image with the debugger, you can debug
a
program
using
virtual
addresses
with
the DCL commands EXAMINE and
DEPOSIT.
The EXAMINE command
displays
the
current
contents
of
a

location
or
range
of
1locations;
the
DEPOSIT
command modifies a
location.
These commands provide a
useful,
but
1limited,
debugging
capability when you need to debug a program that has not been linked
or run with the debugger.
The
DEPOSIT
and
EXAMINE
commands
are
described

4,2.3

in detail

in Part II.

Interrupting Program Execution

When you use the RUN command to execute an
1image
interactively,
you
cannot
execute
any
other
images
or
DCL
commands until the image
completes;
that is, until the image exits.
If you
enter
a
command
line, the system saves the line in the terminal type—ahead buffer, but
does not echo the line or begin to execute the command until the image
exits.

If you need to interrupt an image while it is executing, press

CTRL/Y.

Generally,

CTRL/C

the effect of both of these CTRL key sequences

the image is interrupted (but unchanged), the type-ahead
is the same:
buffer is purged, and the command interpreter receives control.

Note:

Some

system

CTRL/C

has

the

application

programs

may

contain

special

routines
coded to receive control when CTRL/C is entered.
If you use
CTRL/C to interrupt
such
a
program,
the
CTRL/C
handling
routine
receives
control, rather than the command interpreter.
Use CTRL/Y to
bypass a CTRL/C handling routine when you want to interrupt a
command
or
program
to enter a DCL command.
If you use CTRL/C to interrupt a
command or program that does not have a CTRL/C handling routine,
then

same

effect

CTRL/Y

and

echoes

information on how to code a CTRL/C handling routine,

I/0 User's Guide.

see the

For

VAX/VMS

PROGRAMMING WITH VAX/VMS

The

following

example

shows

interrupt a program that
$

RUN

CTRL/C

CTRL/Y

being

pressed

looping:

NAMETGT

ENTER

YOUR

NAME?

ENTER

YOUR

NAME?

ENTER

YOUR

NAME

The dollar
After
you
you

sign ($) prompt indicates that you can enter a DCL command.
have
interrupted an image (or a DCL command) with CTRL/Y,

can:

Terminate the
STOP
command

image,
or by

that

is,

force
RUN

entering

exit
to

by entering the
execute another

command

image.
e

Issue the
The image

CONTINUE command to resume
resumes execution from the

Issue

DEBUG

the

command,

the
/DEBUG qualifier.
debugger.
You

can

also

issue

any

other

DCL

the

image

The DEBUG

execution of
the
image.
point of interruption.
was

linked

command gives

command.

Most

DCL

commands

at CTRL/Y level have the same effect as the RUN command;
current image is forced to exit before the command
can
However,

the

interpreter

following

and

thus

commands

not

affect

are

the

performed

image

For

ASSIGN

SHOW

INQUIRE

SHOW STATUS

DEALLOCATE

OPEN

SHOW

DEASSIGN

READ

SHOW TIME

DEFINE

SET

DEFAULT

SHOW

DEPOSIT

SET

PROTECTION/DEFAULT

WAIT

EXAMINE

SET

VERIFY

WRITE

EXIT

SET

UIC1

you

could

command,

RUN

GRADES

SHOW

TIME

and

interrupt
then

any

continue

command
the

image,

the

command

PROTECTION
SYMBOL
TRANSLATION

program,
as

enter

TIME

SHOW DEFAULT

example,

you

the

interrupted:

GOTO

SHOW TIME

with

that is, the
be
executed.

within

that was
SHOW

ALLOCATE

run

control

issue

the

follows:

s Y

Q7 JUN-1978

Note that
suppress,
you

can

not

This

10154

CONTINUE

you
or

for

can also use CTRL/O, CTRL/S, and
continue
terminal output from a

the

affect

output

the

command

program

DCL

command.

These

CTRL/Q
program

to
interrupt,
image, just as

control

key

image.

is described

the VAX/VMS

Operator's Guide.

functions

PROGRAMMING WITH VAX/VMS

4.3

EXIT HANDLERS AND CONDITION

HANDLERS

Programs written in VAX-11l FORTRAN IV-PLUS and VAX-11] MACRO
can
take
advantage
of operating system services that allow an image to respond
to special situations.

4.3.1

Exit Handlers

When you write a program to execute on VAX/VMS, you
can
provide
the
program
with
an
exit handler.
An exit handler is a special routine
that receives control when the image
exits.
The
exit
handler
can
determine whether the image is exiting normally;
that is, whether the
program completed successfully,
condition.

exited as

the

result

error

If you have used the RUN command to execute an image that has an
exit
handler,
and
you
interrupt
the
image with CTRL/Y, you can control
whether the exit handler is actually given control.
1If you issue
the
STOP
command,
the
exit
handler
1is not executed.
If, on the other
hand, you issue another DCL command or
the
RUN
command
to
execute
another image, the exit handler in the interrupted image is allowed to
execute before the specified command is performed.

For information on how to code
an
exit
VAX/VMS System Services Reference Manual.

4.3.2

handling

routine,

see

the

Exception Conditions

The system
interrupts
image
execution
when
the
1image
incurs
an
exception condition;
that is, it attempts an illegal operation.
Some
examples of situations that cause these conditions, called exceptions,
are:

Arithmetic overflow or

underflow

A memory access violation

invalid operation code

invalid argument

list

to the math

library

When an exception occurs, the system searches for a routine
that
can
respond
to the condition;
these routines, called condition handlers,
can be declared from user programs.
If
no
user-declared
condition
handlers
are
located, or if a user-declared condition handler cannot

respond to a particular situation,
the
system
gives
control
to
a
default
handler.
This handler terminates the image;
obtains as much
information as it can about the
exception
condition,
including
any
available
traceback
information;
and summarizes the information for
you.

4.4

PROCESS

CONCEPTS

The executable program image created by the linker executes within the
context
of
the
process
created for you at login.
This process can
execute, serially, many different images during your terminal session.
When
you
1issue
the LOGOUT command to end your terminal session, the
system deletes

the process.

PROGRAMMING WITH VAX/VMS

The VAX/VMS operating system manages all users'
requests
to
execute
images
in
terms
of
the processes issuing the requests.
The system
provides each process with
a
unique
process
identification
number
(PID),

character

string

process

name,

and

distinct

Figure 4-2 illustrates the relationship of
a
terminal
process that the system creates and the images executed
by the RUN command.

4.4.1

Priorities,

Privileges,

environment.

wuser
in the

to
the
process

and Quotas

The characteristics of an individual process -- that is, the process's
context —-- determine the nature of the images that the process will be
allowed to execute.
Most of these characteristics are
obtained
from
the
user
authorization
file.
When
you
1log
in,
the
defaults
established for you by the system
manager
are
associated
with
the
process that the system creates for your terminal session.
These

defaults
®

The

determine:

base

process

execution

priority

executes.

general,

are

given

control applications
jobs and interactive

users.

Resource

limit

quotas

that

given

the

higher

restrict

the

that
and

priorities

of
a
particular
system
resource
any
example, an open file quota
1limits
the
process can have open at any one time.

1images

communications

than

frequency

1image

can

number

the

process

batch

amount

use.

For

files

User
privileges
specific
system

to
perform
system
functions
or
to
call
services.
For example, the ability to place
names in the group or system logical name tables is controlled
by a privilege.

The base priority, resource quotas, and privileges granted to
general
users
are adequate for time-sharing program development requirements.
In fact, many of the
DCL
commands
you
execute
perform
privileged
functions
on your behalf, so you do not require the privilege.
Note,
however, that
a
particular
descriptions,
You can
process

for

some

commands,

qualifier.
These
as appropriate.

must have a

restrictions

determine the current privileges and
by issuing the following command:

$SHOW

are

user

privilege

noted

quotas

Input,

also

the

available

Output,

and

privileges

Error

and

quotas

defined

use

command

vyour

establishes

the

Streams

The base priority, quotas, and privileges assigned to a
creation
are
only
one
aspect of the context created
system

PROCESS/FRIVILEGES/QUOTAS

Tables 1-7 and 1-8 list the
VAX/VMS operating system.

4.4.2

you

equivalences

for

default

process at
at login.

process

its
The

1logical

names,
including SYS$INPUT, SYSSOUTPUT, and SYSSERROR.
These logical
names provide permanent associations for the process's
input,
output
and
error
streams.
For an interactive process, these logical names
are initially equated to the terminal, and are
used
by
the
command
interpreter
to
read
command
1lines
and to display output and error
messages.

PROGRAMMING WITH VAX/VMS

User

Authorization File

When you log In, the system creates

a process, and assigns it a unigue

process identification number.

The system obtains the
default
® priority
Username:

Password:

® resource quotas

® privileges

: /P
1

for your process from
the user authorization
file.

L.__lLr'—:;t;:::;:dfiH

$ RUN PROGRAMA

The process’s vital address space

includes space occupied by

$ RUN PROGRAMB

system contro! areas and the
command interpreter.

PROCESS

$ TYPE OUTPUT.B

Each image executes in

the context of the process.

$ LOGOUT
When you log out, the
system deletes the process.

Figure 4-2

An Interactive Process

4-10

PROGRAMMING WITH VAX/VMS

These

logical

executes.

requests

names

For

are

also

example,

through

RMS

available

program

(Record

that

all

images

performs

Management

that

the

explicit

Services)

process

input/output

macros

system

services
can
write records to SYS$SOUTPUT.
If you execute this image
interactively, the output is directed to your
current
terminal;
if
you
execute
the
image in a batch job, the output is directed to the
batch job output log.

4.4.3
A

Processes

process

can

and

Subprocesses

execute

only

one

program

image

time.

Some

applications may require concurrent execution of cooperating programs.
Because
the
system
uniquely
identifies
every
process,
an
image
executing
in
one
process
can
communicate
with or control another
process by referring to that process's identification number.

Processes executing with the same group number in their UICs can
also
refer to one another by process name, that is, a character string name
assigned to the process.
When you first
1log
into
the
system,
the
system gives your process the same name as your user name.
If you log
in at more than one terminal, processes
after
the
first
are
given
names based on the name of the terminal at which you logged in.
Most processes in the system are
execute
independently
of
one
creates
a

for

process

The

process

The

owner

you

create

another

that

creates

subprocess

processes;

another.

detached

can

detached

The process

process.

type

process,

subprocess

called

that
that

image

called

the

executing
a

owner

1is,
they
the system
in

subprocess.

process.

can:

Define the base priority, privileges, and resource gquotas that
the
subprocess
will have.
Some of these resource quotas are
deducted from the owner's quotas.

Specify the
subprocess,

Obtain
system

Generally, a
exits,
the

name of an executable image to be executed
and control the execution of the image.

information
resources

about

the

has

used.

status

the

subprocess

the

and

the

subprocess executes a single image, and
when
the
image
system
deletes
the subprocess.
If the owner process is

deleted (for example, if you log out) and
the system also deletes the subprocess.

subprocess

still

exists,

If you plan to develop an application to
use
cooperating
processes,
you
should
be familiar with the VAX/VMS system services that provide
process communication
and
control
functions.
These
services
are
described in detail in the VAX/VMS System Services Reference Manual.

In conjunction with the system services
that
control
processes
and
subprocesses,
you
can
use the RUN command to create a subprocess to
execute a particular image.
For details, see the description
of
the

RUN

(Process)

command

Part

II.

CHAPTER 5

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

A command procedure is a file
containing
DCL
commands,
command
oOr
program
input
data,
or
Dboth.
You
can
use command procedures to
catalog sequences of commands you frequently use during an interactive
terminal
session;
or,
if
vyou are a batch user, to submit all your
jobs

for processing.

In its simplest form, a command procedure
consists
of
two
or
more
command
lines
that
the
command
interpreter executes.
In its most
complex form, a command procedure resembles a program written
in
a
high—-level
programming
language:
it
can establish loops and error
checking procedures;
call other procedures;
pass
values
to other
procedures
and
test
values
set
in
other
procedures;
perform
arithmetic calculations and input/output operations;
and manipulate
character

string data.

This chapter describes:
e

Creating

command procedures

Executing command procedures

Submitting batch

Command levels

The LOGIN.COM file

Using

Commands to control

the execution of a command procedure

Reading and writing

files

Lexical

symbols

interactively

jobs

in command procedures

functions

Table 1-6 in Section 1.10 "Summary of VAX/VMS DCL Commands" lists
the
commands
described
in
this
chapter.
For
complete details on the

parameters of any of these commands, see the command
Part

II.

5.1

CREATING COMMAND PROCEDURES

descriptions

You can create a command procedure using any method or media available
to
you:
if
you
are
an
interactive terminal user, use the CREATE
command or the editor to create the command
procedure
interactively;
if
you
are
a batch job user, punch the cards containing the command
procedure using a card punch.

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

Each line in a command procedure represents a line that you
want
the
system
to process.
You enter the lines into the file in the order in
which you want the system to process them.
For example, to
create
a
command
procedure
named
TESTALL.COM
that
contains RUN commands to
execute the program images named TESTA.EXE, TESTB.EXE, and
TESTC.EXE,
you would create a file containing the following lines:

$ RUN TESTA
$ RUN TESTB
$

RUN TESTC

Note that
you
must
precede
each
1line
containing
a
DCL
command
(including
comment lines) with a dollar sign ($);
you can precede or
follow the dollar signs with none or one or more blank spaces or tabs.
If
you
continue
any
command
on
more
than
one
1line
using
continuation
character,
a hyphen (-), the lines after the first
must not contain a dollar sign.
For example:

the
line

$ PRINT TEST.OUT /AFTER=18:00

/COPIES=10 /QUEUE=LPBO0:

The qualifiers for this PRINT command are placed on separate lines
1in
the command procedure for readability, with continuation characters to
indicate that the command is entered
on
more
than
one
1line.
The
spaces
preceding
each
qualifier
are
not
required,
but
are also
included to make the command procedure more readable.
\

5.1.1

Entering Data

in Command Procedures

When the system executes a command procedure, either interactively
or
as
a
batch
Jjob,
it
associates the command procedure file with the
logical name SYS$INPUT.
Therefore, if a command procedure executes
a
DCL
command
or
a
program
that
reads from SYS$SINPUT, the input is
actually read from the command procedure.
For example, when you issue the CREATE .command, the system reads input
lines
for
a
file
from
the command input stream.
If you issue the
CREATE command interactively,
the
command
input
stream
(that
1is,

SYSSINPUT)
1is your
by pressing CTRL/Z.

terminal.

You

indicate the end of

the data

stream

When you use the CREATE command in a command procedure file, the input
stream
1is
the
command procedure;
thus, you place the input for the
file specified in the command procedure, as follows:

$ CREATE WEATHER.DAT

JAN
FEB
MAR

39
42
50

3
1
20

DEC

$ RUN WEATHER

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

In a command procedure, the end of
the
input
data
for
the
CREATE
command
(or
any
command
or
program that is reading input data) is
indicated by a line that begins with the dollar sign character, or
by
the
physical
end-of-file
of
the
command
procedure.
1In the above
example, the end of input is signaled by the RUN command line.

If any data lines you place in the
input
stream
begin
with
dollar
signs ($), you must delimit the data stream with the DECK and EOD (End
of Deck) commands.
This technique is particularly
useful
for
batch
users
who
submit
all
work
through
the
system
card reader.
For
example, if you use the CREATE command to write
a
command
procedure
into
a
disk
file,
you would use the DECK and EOD commands as shown
below:
(| $@WEATHER

(// sEOD
/ $ RUN WEATHER
// $LINK WEATHFR

// $ FORTRAN WEATHER

/ $ DECK
// S CREATE WEATHER.COM
(/ $PASSWORD HENRY

/"$ 408 HIGGINS

This procedure creates and executes the procedure WEATHER.COM.

5.1.2

Command Procedures without Commands

You can construct command procedures that contain only data to be read
by
a
command
or
program;
or
that
contain
only
qualifiers
or
parameters for a command;
or both.
When you specify
the
@
in
any
place

in a command,

input

from

that
contains a number of qualifiers you frequently use together
you issue a LINK command, as shown below:

when

the procedure file.

the command

interpreter

begins reading

For example, you could create a command procedure

/DEBUG /SYMBOL_TABLE /NOSUPPRESS=SYSLIB /MAP/FULL/CROSS_REFERENCE

If this procedure is named DEFLINK.COM, you can
subsequently
request
these
gqualifiers on a LINK command line by executing the procedure as
follows:

$ LINK

SYNAPSECDEFLINK

Note that no space precedes the at sign (@) in the above example.
If
you
type
a space before the at sign, the command interpreter assumes
that the command file contains
a
parameter
for
the
LINK
command.
Because
the
LINK
command
allows only one parameter, an error would
result.

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

5.2

EXECUTING COMMAND PROCEDURES

INTERACTIVELY

When you execute a command procedure, give the file
specification
of
the
command
procedure
following the at sign.
The @ command assumes
current disk and directory defaults, and the default file type of COM.
For
example,
to
execute
the
command procedure WEATHER.COM in your
default disk directory, issue the command:
$ CWEATHER
To execute a command procedure
that
1is
not
in
your
default
directory, give the complete file specification as follows:

disk

$ GDRE2:CCOMMONISETUFFIL
This @ command executes a command procedure named SETUP.FIL
in the directory COMMON on the disk DBB2.

cataloged

For command procedures that you execute frequently, you can
define
symbol name as a synonym for the @ command line.
For example:

$ SETUF

5.2.1

= GDERE2:CCOMMONISETUF.FIL

Input and Output Devices

When you use the @

logical

command

interactively,

the

system

device SYSS$SINPUT with the command procedure file.

equates

the

SYSSOUTPUT

and
SYSSERROR
remain
assigned
to
your
terminal
so
that
output
resulting
from
command
or program execution and system messages are
displayed at your terminal.

If you want a permanent record of the output from the execution
of
a
command procedure, you can use the /OUTPUT qualifier of the @ command.
The /OUTPUT qualifier defines an equivalence name for the logical name
SYSSOUTPUT.
For example:
$ GTESTALL/0UTFUT=TESTALL +L.0G
If you execute this command, all the data normally displayed
on
your
terminal during the execution of TESTALL.COM is instead written to the
disk file named TESTALL.LOG.
Error and warning messages are displayed

on your

terminal as well.

To determine
TYPE command

5.2.2

the outcome of
to display the

the command procedure,
you
can
use
file or the PRINT command to print it.

the

Verification of Command Procedure Execution

Generally, the output
procedure includes:
®

Responses

All

and

from

the

messages

data
messages
SYS$SOUTPUT

interactive
«
from DCL

displayed

execution

command

commands

programs

that

write

If you also want to see the lines in the command
procedure
displayed
at
the
terminal
as
they are executed, you can issue the SET VERIFY
command.
You can issue the SET
VERIFY
command
within
the
command
procedure,
or
at the interactive command level;
the command affects

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

all

command procedures you
subsequently
execute.
By
default,
the
system
does not display lines in a command procedure that you execute
interactively.
You can reverse the effect of SET VERIFY with the
SET
NOVERIFY

command.

For example, to display lines in a particular command
procedure,
you
could
place the SET VERIFY command at the beginning of the procedure,
and place the SET NOVERIFY command at the end
of
the
procedure,
as
follows:

$
$
$
$
S

SET
RUN
RUN
RUN
SET

VERIFY
TESTA
TESTB
TESTC
NOVERIFY

The SET NOVERIFY command at
verification for subsequent

5.3

the
end
of
procedures.

this

procedure

suppresses

BATCH JOBS

You can submit command procedures for processing as batch
jobs.
The
format
of
a
batch
job
command
stream
is identical to the format
described for command procedures.
A batch job is, in fact, a
command
procedure.
Batch
job queues are set up and maintained by the system
manager;
in most cases, at least one of these queues
will
be
named
SYS$SBATCH.

5.3.1

Submitting Batch Jobs

from the Terminal

If you use the @ command to execute a command procedure interactively,
you
cannot
enter other commands to do other work while the procedure
is executing.
If you create and use procedures that
require
lengthy
processing
time -- for
example, the compilation or assembly of large
source programs -—- you can submit the procedure
for
execution
as
a
batch
job.
Once the job is queued, your terminal is free for you to
continue interactive work.
The

SUBMIT

command

requests

the

system

enter

command

procedure

the
batch
job
queue.
The
SUBMIT command assumes current disk and
directory defaults, and it assumes the default file type of COM.
For
example,
to execute the command procedure TESTALL.COM in your default
disk directory, issue the command:

$ SUBMIT TESTALL
Job

210

entered

queue

SYSSEBATCH

When you submit a job, the system displays a message showing that
the
job
1is queued, gives you the job identification number (jobid) it has
assigned to the job, and displays the name of the batch job
gqueue
on
which it entered the job.
You can specify qualifiers with the SUBMIT command to control when the
job
1s
actually
available for processing, or you can specify a name
for the job, overriding the default file name (the file
name
of
the
command procedure file).
For example:

¢ SUBMIT/NAME=RATCH25/HOLD
Jobr

203

entered

aueue

TESTALL
SYSSRATCH

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

This SUBMIT command
submits
the
file TESTALL.COM
for
processing,
placing
it
in a hold
status.
The system will not execute the job
until you specifically release it.
The /NAME qualifier assigns a name
to the job;

the batch job log file will be named BATCH25.LOG.

The system identifies all
batch
jobs
by
their
job
identification
numbers (jobids).
You can query and change the status of your jobs by
referring to these numbers.
After you have submitted a batch job, and
before
it
completes execution, you can use the SHOW QUEUE command to
determine

its place

in the queue.

For example:

$ SHOW QUEUE/RATCH/FULL
X Ratch Queue

"SYS$BATCH"

Joblim=és

Current Job 201 WILSON
Current Job 202 HARRIS
Holding Job 203 HIGGINS

Inis-~i=4y

BATCHO1
FORCLG
BATCH25

Swar

12-JAN-1978 14115
12-JAN—-1978 14320
12-JAN-1978 14122

DRALITESTALL
.COM# 3

If you entered the job in the queue with the /HOLD qualifier, you
release it for processing with the SET QUEUE command, as follows:
% SET QUEUE/ENTRY=203/RELEASE

SYS$RATCH

You can also delete it, either before it is processed or while
For example:
Use the DELETE/ENTRY command.
executing.
$ DELETE/ENTRY=203

For details on the SHOW,
command descriptions

5.3.2

can

see

the

SYS$EATCH

SET,

in Part II.

and

DELETE/ENTRY
\

commands,

Submitting Batch Jobs through the Card Reader

When you submit a batch job through the system card reader,
you
must
the command procedure with cards
containing
the card deck
precede

name and
containing JOB and PASSWORD commands that specify your user
The last card in the deck should contain the EOJ command.
password.

For

example:

d input stream

/s PASSWORD HENRY

/S JOB HIGGINS

When the system reads a job from the card
reader,
it validates
the
user name and password specified on the JOB and PASSWORD cards. Then,
it copies the file into a temporary disk file
named
INPBATCH.COM
in
your
default directory and
gqueues
the
job
for
batch execution.

5-6

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

Thereafter,

processing is the same as for jobs submitted interactively
with
the
SUBMIT
command.
When the batch job completes, the system
deletes the temporary file.

When

two

the system reads input
special types of card:

Translation mode

EOF

from

the

card

reader,

also

recognizes

cards

Translation
mode
cards
in
the
input
stream
change
the
current
translation mode.
The translation mode is based on the device type of
the card punch on which the cards
were
punched.
An
026
punch
is
indicated
by
an
026 translation mode card (12-2-4-8 overpunch).
An
029 punch is indicated by an 029 translation mode
card
(12-0-2-4-6-8
overpunch).
The
default
mode
can
be set with the SET CARD_READER
command.
An EOF card (12-11-0-~1-6-7-8-9
the
end
of the job.
You can
of an input stream when
card reader.

5.3.3
When

you

overpunch) or an
also use the EOF

copy

file

read

EOJ
card

command
to signal

data

directly

signals
the end
from

the

Input and Output Devices
the

system executes

job
queue,
This process

command

procedure

submitted

the

batch

it
creates
a
detached process to execute the commands.
receives your disk and directory defaults, and
the
same

resource
quotas
and privileges assigned to your interactive process.
This process is given a name in the format _JOBnnn where
nnn
1is
the
job
identification
number assigned to the job.
The process executes
under your UIC.
The

batch

job

input

stream,

SYSSINPUT,

equated

the

disk

containing
the
command
procedure.
The output stream, consisting of
messages written to SYSSOUTPUT and SYS$SERROR, is equated
to
a
batch
job
1log
file.
The
system
catalogs this file in your default disk
directory, giving it a file specification of "name.LOG" where name
is
the
file
name
of
the
procedure
(you
can
also specify the /NAME
qualifier on the JOB command to specify an alternate name).
When
the
batch

job

completes,

printing;

when

The batch job

the

1log

the

system

automatically queues

file

has printed,

file

includes,

the

system deletes

default,

all

log

file

for

it.

command

1lines

executed
in
the command procedure, system and user-program output to
SYSSOUTPUT, and SYSSERROR, and job termination accounting information.
Note

that

the

batch

job

log

file

does

not

print,

and

if
the
Jjob
terminates
abnormally.
For
example,
DELETE/ENTRY or STOP command to stop the job, the log
your

default

5.4

COMMAND LEVELS

One

command

directory.

procedure

can

invoke

another

procedure

not

1if
file

with

the

deleted,

you

use

the

remains

command.

In this case, the command interpreter reads input from the second file
until it reaches the end of the file or until
that
procedure
exits,
and then returns to the outer procedure.

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

The maximum number of command procedures you can nest in this way
|is
eight.
For
each procedure,
the
command interpreter redefines the
equivalence name for SYS$INPUT, equating it to the file from which the
current procedure is read.
If the /OUTPUT qualifier is specified with
an @ command, the command
interpreter
redefines
the
1logical
name
SYSSOUTPUT as well.

The logical names SYS$ERROR, SYSSDISK, and SYS$COMMAND do not change.
if you
is always equated to the initial command level:
SYSSCOMMAND
to
equated
always
execute a procedure interactively, SYS$SCOMMAND is
if you submit a batch job, SYSSCOMMAND is always
terminal;
your
equated to the initial batch input file.
Figure 5-1 illustrates logical name
levels.

5.5

THE

assignments

various

command

If you create a file named LOGIN.COM in your default disk directory,
the command interpreter automatically executes the procedure each time
you log in and at the beginning of each batch job you submit.
of
sequences
to execute any commands or
Use the LOGIN.COM file
that you normally would want to execute at the start of each
commands
DCL
for
synonyms
you define
if
example,
For
terminal session.
the global assignment statements for the
you can place
commands,
command name synonyms in the LOGIN.COM file so they will be available
during
every
terminal
session.
For example, a LOGIN.COM file could
contain the
$ QP
$ QB

following

statements:

:== SHOW QUEUE/DEVICE
:== SHOW QUEUE/BATCH

$ TIM

:== SHOW TIME

Note that these symbols are defined as global symbols,
not be deleted when the procedure finishes executing.

they

will

A LOGIN.COM
file can also
contain commands
to
set
up
terminal
1logical names, run programs, execute command
assign
characteristics,
procedures,

or display message files.

You can update your LOGIN.COM file at any
time
to
change,
add,
or
delete
commands.
When you first create the LOGIN.COM file, or after
you update it, you can execute it with
the
@
command
so
that
the
commands it contains become effective.

5.6

USING SYMBOLS

IN COMMAND PROCEDURES

symbol
An assignment statement (= command) equates a character string
You can use
value.
arithmetic
or
string
character
a
with
name

string
perform
in command procedures to
assignment statements
and logical
arithmetic operations,
substitution and manipulation,
compar isons.

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

User name: HIGGINS

Password:
input

a output

TTB3:

error

TTB3:

command

TTB3:

$ @PROC1

PROC1.COM
input

= DBA1:PROC1.COM

output

TTB3:

command

TTBS3:

e error

= TTB3:

$ @PROC2/0UTPUT=PROC2.0UT

PROC2.COM

T
$EXIT

input

output

= DBA1:PROC2.COM

= DBA1:PROC2.0UT

error

= TTB3:

command

TTB3:

$ @DBB2:PROC3

DBB2:PROC3.COM

$ EXIT

input

° error

output

DBA1:PROC2.0UT

command

TTB3:

DBB2:PROC3.COM

= TTB3:

$EXIT

$ SUBMIT BATCH1

$ next-command

—

——

—

et ——

— o

BATCH1.COM

= DBA1:BATCH1.LOG

DBA1:BATCH1.COM

error

= DBAI1:BATCHI1.LOG

command

DBA71:BATCH1.COM

$ @BATCH2

BATCH2.COM

—_—

input

= DBA1:BATCH2.COM

error

= DBA1:BATCH1.LOG

command

= DBA1:BATCH1.COM

output

= DBA1:BATCH1.LOG

$ @BATCH3/OUTPUT=BATCH3.0UT

BATCH3.COM

output
error

command

Key:

input

Input stream (SYSSINPUT)

output

Output stream (SYSSOUTPUT)

error

Error stream (SYSSERROR)

command

Command stream (SYS$COMMAND)

sy
ot

Transfer of control
Command Level
Execution occurs in a separate process

Figure

5-1

Command Levels

DBA 1:BATCH3.COM

input

output

DBA1:BATCH1.LOG |

DBA 1:BATCH3.0UT

DBA1:BATCH1.COM

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

5.6.1

Local Symbols

You can define symbols interactively
or
within
command procedures.
The command
interpreter maintains a symbol
table for each active
command level, including the interactive command level.
These
tables
are
called
1local symbol tables, and the symbols they list are called
local

symbols.

To define a symbol as a local symbol, use a single equals sign
an assignment statement.

$ COUNT = 1
$ OUTDAT

For example:

(=)

"Beginning tests...."

These assignment statements define local symbols.
The first statement
equates
the symbol named COUNT with a numeric value of 1.
The second
statement equates the symbol named OUTDAT with a
string value;
the

string
is
enclosed
in quotation marks because it contains literal
lowercase letters.
A colon (:) in an assignment statement indicates a
character string assignment.

A local symbol exists as long as the command level
at which
it was
defined
remains active,
unless
the symbol is specifically deleted.
For example,
if you define
the
symbol
COUNT
interactively,
any
procedure you subsequently execute can refer to the symbol COUNT and
obtain its current value.
contains:

As another

example,

the

procedure

A.COM

$ TOTAL = 1
$ @B
The procedure B.COM contains the line:

$ NEWTOTAL = TOTAL + 1

When B executes, the symbol
name TOTAL
1is
accessible
and
can
be
substituted,
because
the command
1level
at which procedure A is
executing is still active.

Local symbols
are deleted
when
the procedure
that defined
them
finishes executing.
In the above example, the symbol NEWTOTAL defined
by B

is deleted when B

5.6.2

Global

completes.

Symbols

In addition to the local symbol tables,

the command

interpreter

also

maintains a global symbol table.
A global symbol exists for the life
of the job, unless specifically deleted,
and
is
recognized
at
any
command
level.
To define a global symbol, use two equals signs (==
in the assignment statement.
$

== 350
FILENAME &==

For example:

RESULT

MYFILE.DAT

These assignment statements define global

5-10

symbols.

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

5.6.3

Symbol Substitution

To request symbol
for example:

$ TYPE
You

substitution,

enclose

a symbol

name

apostrophes,

'FILENAME'

can omit

trailing

apostrophe

The command
interpreter
context of an arithmetic

the

end

command

automatically
substitutes
expression.
For example:

line.

symbols

the

$§ TOTAL = COUNT + 1
No

apostrophes

are

needed

request

substitution of

the

symbol

COUNT

in
this
arithmetic
assignment
statement
because
the
command
interpreter
automatically
substitutes
symbols
while
it
executes
arithmetic
assignments.
Note,
however,
that
you
must
use
an
apostrophe in a string assignment statement:
$

OLDSTRING

Otherwise,
OLDSTRING

For

character

symbol

'FILENAME'

the command
interpreter
would
equate
the
with
the
1literal
string
FILENAME, rather

current value

Within

symbol
named
than using the

FILENAME.

strings

substitution

enclosed

in quotation marks,

by preceding

symbol

name

with

you can
two

request

apostrophes.

example:

§$
Only a

PROMPT_STRING
single

"Creating

apostrophe

file

required

''FILENAME'.TST"

to delimit

the

end

the

symbol

name.

When the
searches

You
any

command interpreter
performs
symbol tables in the following

substitution
order:

The

current

Local

The

local

symbol

table

for

the

command

symbol
tables
for
each
previous
searching backwards from the current level

global

symbol

symbols,

level

command

level,

table

can use the SHOW SYMBOL command to display
symbol.
The SHOW SYMBOL command uses the

locate symbol definitions,
tables,
then
the
global

that
1is,
it
symbol table,

the
same

searches
to locate

current
order of

value
search

the
1local
a specified

of
to

symbol
symbol

name.

For

complete

substitution,
command)

operations
6.6, "Rules

details

see

the

Part

II.

the

For

syntax

assignment

description
additional

details

you can perform on symbols
for Forming Expressions."

5-11

the

and

statements

Assignment
on

arithmetic

literal

values,

and

symbol

Statement

and

logical

see

Section

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

5.6.4

Passing Parameters to Command Procedures

in a
You can write generalized command procedures that may perform
The command interpreter
time you execute them.
different way each
defines eight special symbols for use as parameters within command

1local symbols are named Pl1, P2, P3, and so on, to
These
procedures.
P8;
they are all initially equated to null
strings.
You
can
pass
numeric
or
character
string
values
for
these parameters when you
execute a procedure with the @ command or submit it as a batch
job
with

the SUBMIT command.

For example,
S ASSIGN

$ ASSIGN

the procedure named RUNTEST contains the lines:
'P1'

'P2'

$ RUN SORTER

INFILE

OUTFILE

and
The program SORTER.EXE reads a file using the logical name INFILE
To assign
writes an output file using the 1logical name OUTFILE.
Pl
for
equivalences to these logical names, you must provide values
and

when you execute the procedure.

with the @ command, you could enter
command parameters,
$

GBRUNTEST

as follows:

the

If you execute the procedure

values

for

and

INSORT.DAT OUTSORT.DAT

This @ command line gives the symbol name Pl a value of INSORT.DAT and
the symbol P2

a value of OUTSORT.DAT.

To pass parameters
qualifier,

with

as follows:

the

SUBMIT

command,

use

the

/PARAMETERS

$ SUEBMIT RUNTEST/FARAMETERS=(INSORT.DAT»QUTSORT.DAT)

them
When you specify more than one parameter, separate
and enclose them in parentheses as in the above example.

with

commas

parameters
Note that in both of the above examples the values for the
are
assigned
according
to the order in which you specify them, that
is, the first parameter you enter is Pl, the second is P2, and so on.
Figure 5-2 illustrates a command procedure testing the parameters that
The procedure establishes a symbol named COUNT and
passed to it.
are

each
test
to
procedure
the
is
If this procedure, named MASTER.COM,

P
1letter
the
COUNT with
concatenates the value of
passed,
1is
parameter
invalid
an
If
parameter.

constructs an error message.
invoked with the line:
$

EMASTER

FURGE

RENAME

files
.a group of
It performs its main function, that is, concatenates
However, when
single file, and it performs its PURGE option.
a
into
the value of COUNT reaches 2, it checks the value of P2 and determines
Then, it uses a WRITE command to issue
that it is not a valid option.
the

error

message:

Had rarameter

"RENAME®

The WRITE command is described later in this chapter,
"Reading and Writing Files."

5-12

in Section

5.8,

RS PIH

COMMAND

SET

NOVERIFY

PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

Ensure

that

verification

off

Concatenates

and

ortionally

a8ll

the

file

TXT

files

into

srints

the

filer

rrotection

single

rurdes

master

earlier

file

ramed

versiornsrs

MASTER.DOC

and

chandes

code.

FRAH ABFTR
AR
AER

Firsty

concatenate

311

existing

files

into MASTER

COFY/ZLOG

X.TXT/CONCATENATE

!
!

Loor

I
U

Parameters
commarvd i

check

for

can
the

MASTER.DOC

kewsword

rarameters

FRINTy

be entered in any order. The
loor checks for 8 nullsy when

rarameterss

the

rrocedure

FROTECT»

first
there

FURGE

are

exits.

COUNT = 0
LOOF

COUNT
IF

COUNT

F’COUNT.EQS.""

THEN

EXIT

Use

lodgical

cam

any

S fod rom

BRFTARHAEARPRA RS

FRAAPRAA R AR AAPPRD AP RSO

the

AND

oreration

valid

hegwwordsy

test

issue

current
an

error

rarameters
messadge

and

contirnue

rot
loorindg,.

.F F/COUNT .NES. "FRINT® .AND.F/COUNT.NES.
"FURGE" . ANLI. ~
‘COUNT
NES. "FROTECT"
Use

commands

rrovide

THEN

GOTO

check

the

arrrorriate

P/COUNT.EQS. "FPRINT®

BADFARAM

current

rarameter

adainst

each

kewword

branch.

THEN

GOTO

FRINT

iF F/COUNT.EQS,. *PROTECT® THEN GOTO FROTECT
!
IF
!
U

F/COUNT.EQS, "FURGE"
IF

any

rarameter

THEN

GOTO

FRINT:

FURGE

srint

the

document

file

FRINT:
FRINT/COFIES=20/AFTER=17100

MASTER .DOC/NAME=DNOCUMENT..REVIEW
GOTO L.OOF
I Go check

for

rarameters

amy

rarameter

FROTECTy

chande

file

rrotection

]

FROTECT
SET

PROTECTION

GOTO

MASTER.DOC/FROTECTION=(GROUFRWEL)

LOgF

checlk

FURGE

then

for

rarameters

anyg rarameter

surde

old

files

FURGE¢
FURGE

GOTO

%.TXTyMASTER.DOC

LOOF

check

for

BALIFARAM?

Construct

rarameters

FARM = F’COUNT’
WRITE SYS$OUTFUT
GOTO

*Bad

rarameter

error messasge

","" "'y PARM’,""""

LOOF

Figure

5-2

Testing

Parameters

Passed

to a Command

Procedure

and

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

5.6.5

The INQUIRE Command

When you execute a command procedure interactively, you
can
use
the
INQUIRE
command
to
define
a value for a symbol while the procedure
executes.
When
the
INQUIRE
command
1is
executed,
the
command
interpreter
1issues
a
prompting message to SYSSCOMMAND, that is, the
terminal;
the text of the message is taken from the
INQUIRE
command
line,

shown in the example below.

”v»nnnn

The procedure RUNTEST contains the lines:
INQUIRE IN INPUT FILE
INQUIRE OUT OUTPUT FILE

ASSIGN 'IN' INFILE
ASSIGN 'OUT' OUTFILE
RUN SORTER

When you execute this procedure, the terminal interaction might appear
as follows (if SET NOVERIFY is in effect):
$

@RUNTEST

INPUT

FILE?

DE1:INSORT,DAT

OQUTPUT FILE?

DE2:0UTSORT.DAT

When these INQUIRE commands are executed, the prompting messages INPUT
FILE
and OUTPUT FILE are displayed, and you must enter values for the
symbols IN and
OUT
before
the
command
procedure
continues.
The

prompting
strings
INPUT FILE and OUTPUT FILE are optional parameters
for the INQUIRE command;
if you do not specify them, the command uses
the symbol names IN and OUT to prompt for values.

5.6.6

Deleting Symbols

The DELETE/SYMBOL command deletes a local symbol from the local symbol
table
for the current command level and global symbols.
For example,
the following command deletes the local symbol named TOTAL:
$

DELETE/SYMEROL TOTAL

The /GLOBAL qualifier

indicates a global symbol

is to be deleted.

For

example:

DELETE/SYMEOL/GLOBAL/ALL

This

command deletes

5.7

COMMANDS TO CONTROL THE EXECUTION OF A COMMAND PROCEDURE

Normally,

the

command

all

global

symbols.

interpreter

executes each command

command

procedure
in
sequential
order,
and
terminates
processing when it
reaches the
end
of
the
command procedure
file.
However,
using
combinations
of
the following commands, you can control the sequence
in which lines are executed;
conditionally execute lines;
construct
loops;

and handle errors

EXIT

GOTO

STOP

in command procedures:

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

Some

techniques

following

command

5.7.1

for

sections.

using each of

descriptions

The

For

in Part

these

additional

commands

examples,

are

see

shown

the

individual

II.

IF Command

The IF command tests a symbol value or an
arithmetic
expression
and
-executes
a
given
command
if
the result of the given expression is
true.
The following
examples
show
valid
expressions
used
in
1IF
commands.
Example

IF A+ B

.EQ.

THEN

IF A THEN command

Explanation

command

Executes the given command
if
the
sum
of the defined symbols A and B
is 10
Executes
symbol

the given command
A

has

an odd

numeric

the
value

or is equated to a character string
that begins with the letter Y (yes)
or the letter T (true)
$

.NOT.

A THEN

COUNT.LE.100

Pl.EQS."TYPE"

command

Executes the given command
if
the
symbol
A has an even numeric value
or is equated to a character string
that
begins with the letter N (no)
or the letter F (false)

THEN

Executes the given command
1if
the
symbol
COUNT
has
a current value
less than or equal to 100

THEN

command

Executes the given command
1if
the
first
parameter
passed
to
the
command procedure was the word TYPE

The target command of an IF command can be any valid DCL command;
you
can
optionally
precede
the
command
with
a
dollar
sign.
If the
specified expression is true, the command
interpreter
processes
the
command:
it
substitutes
symbol
names,
if any, with their current
values;
checks the command qualifiers and
parameters
for
validity;
and
executes
the
command.
If the expression is false, the command
interpreter does not process the command but continues processing with
the next line in the file.
Note

that any symbols you use in expressions in the IF command must be
previously defined;
1if a symbol is undefined, the IF command issues a
warning message and does not execute the target command.
For a complete list of the operations you can
perform
in
arithmetic
expressions,
see
the
description of the IF command in Part II.
See
Section 6.6 "Rules for Forming Expressions" for additional information
on the syntax of expressions.

5-15

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

The GOTO Command

5.7.2

in a command
to a labeled 1line
The GOTO command passes control
Labels must appear as the first item on a line and must be
procedure.
terminated with a colon

(:).

For example:

S GOTO BYPASS

$ BYPASS:

The GOTO command is especially useful as the target command of
an
IF
command:
you
can
cause
a
procedure to branch forward or backward
according to variable conditions, or according to parameters that
you
pass

the

procedure.

For example, when you use parameters in a
good
practice
to
test
the
parameters
procedure.
A procedure that you
execute

with

the

lines:

command
procedure,
it
is
at
the
beginning
of
the
interactively
could
begin

$ IF P1.NES."" THEN GOTO OKAY

$ INQUIRE Pl ENTER FILE SPEC
S OKAY:
$ PRINT/HOLD/COPIES=10/FORMS=B

'P1l'

In this example, the IF command checks that Pl is not
a
null
string
(remember,
the command interpreter initially defines Pl through P8 as
null strings).
If Pl is a
null
string,
the GOTO command
1is
not
executed
and the INQUIRE command prompts you to enter a value for the
parameter.
Otherwise, the GOTO command causes
a
branch
around
the

INQUIRE
command.
In
either
case, the procedure executes the PRINT
command following the line labeled OKAY.

5.7.3

The EXIT and STOP Commands

The
EXIT
command
terminates
execution
of
the
current
procedure,
and
returns control to the calling command level.
execute the procedure interactively, the EXIT command returns

the

interactive

another procedure,

level;

command
TIf you
control

1if you execute the procedure from within

control returns to the nextmost outer procedure.

The EXIT command is useful for writing procedures that have more
one execution path.

For example:

$ START:
$ IF Pl1.EQS."TAPE".OR.P1.EQS."DISK" THEN GOTO
$

INQUIRE Pl

EXIT

ENTER DEVICE

than

'Pl'

(TAPE OR DISK)

$ GOTO START
S TAPE:
!
PROCESS TAPE FILES

$ DISK:

PROCESS DISK FILES

$ EXIT

To execute this command procedure, you must enter either TAPE or

DISK

as
a
parameter.
The
IF
command uses a logical OR to test whether
either of these strings was entered.
If so, the GOTO command branches

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

appropriately,
using
the
parameter
as the branch label.
neither TAPE nor DISK, the
INQUIRE
command
prompts
for
parameter;- the GOTO START command establishes a loop.

1If Pl was
correct

The commands following each
of
the
1labels
TAPE
and
DISK
provide
different paths through the procedure.
The EXIT command following the
commands after the label TAPE ensures that after
these
commands
are
processed, the commands after the label DISK are not executed.
Note that the EXIT command at the end of the procedure is not required
because
the
end-of-file
of
the
procedure
causes an implicit EXIT
!
command.
The STOP command also terminates execution of a
procedure;
however,
when
a
STOP
command
1is executed in a nested command procedure, the
outer procedure(s) are also terminated.
If you execute the
procedure

interactively,
control
returns to the interactive command level;
you execute the procedure in a batch job, the batch job terminates.

5.7.4

Testing Status Values

When a DCL command,
user
program,
or
command
procedure
completes
execution,
the
command interpreter saves the completion status value
in a reserved global symbol named $STATUS.
For example, if
an
error
occurs
following
a TYPE command, the value in SSTATUS represents the
error

code

returned

completes

the TYPE

successfully,

command.

When a

$STATUS has a value of

command

%X00000001.

the command interpreter always maintains the current value of

program

Note

that

$STATUS

in hexadecimal.

You cannot explicitly set a
value
for
$STATUS
with
an
assignment
statement, but you can set a value for $STATUS on an EXIT command that
returns control to a previous command level.
For example, suppose the
procedure A.COM contains:

$ @B

S$STATUS

.EQ.

THEN GOTO CONTROL

The procedure B.COM can contain the

line:

$ EXIT 2

This EXIT command places the value 2

which

the

global

is tested by the calling procedure, A.COM.

5.7.4.1

Severity Levels - The

low-order

three

bits

symbol

the

$STATUS,

status

value
contained
in $STATUS represents the severity of the completion
status.
The reserved global symbol
$SEVERITY
always
contains
only
this
portion
of
the
status
value.
These values, and the severity
levels

they

Value

represent

are:

Severity
Warning
Success

Error

Information
Severe, or fatal,

error

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

Note that since successful codes have odd numeric values
and
warning
and
error
codes
have
even
values, you can test for the successful
completion of a command or program with
IF
commands
testing
either
value, as in the following examples:

|$ IF SSEVERITY THEN ...
$ IF SSTATUS THEN ...
If the current value in $SEVERITY or S$STATUS is odd, then the
command
or
program
completed
successfully
and the IF expressions are true.
Otherwise, the IF expressions are false.

5.7.4.2
The ON command - During the execution of a command procedure,
the
command interpreter checks the return status from each command or
program that executes.
With the
ON
command,
you
can
establish
a
course
of
action
for the command interpreter based on the result of
the check.

By default, the command interpreter executes an EXIT command
when
an
error
or severe error occurs, and continues when warnings occur.
You

can override this default with the ON command.
For
example,
want a procedure to exit when warnings occur, use the command:

1if

you

S ON WARNING THEN EXIT
If you want the procedure to continue
use

the

if a warning or

an error occurs,

command:

S ON ERROR THEN CONTINUE
An ON command action is executed only once;
thus, if
you
have
used
the
above
command,
the command interpreter continues after an error
occurs, but resets the default condition.
If a second
error
occurs,

and no other ON command is executed,

the procedure exits.

If you nest command procedures,
you
can
establish
a
different
ON
condition
for
each procedure.
An ON condition in an outer procedure
does not affect the execution of a nested procedure.
You can request the
command
interpreter
to
not
returned from any commands with the SET NOON (that
For

check
the
status
is, no ON) command.

example:

$ SET NOON

$ SET ON
In the above example,
the
SET
NOON
command
interpreter to perform no action if any type of

ON command
restores
the
whatever
condition
was

regquests
the
command
error occurs.
The SET
current
ON
condition
action;
that
1is,
1in
effect
before
the SET NOON command was

executed.

5.7.4.3 System Status Values - When control returns to the DCL command
level,
the
command
interpreter
always
tests
the current value of
SSTATUS.
If it contains an even numeric value, and if the
high-order
digit
1is
0,
the
command interpreter displays the system warning or
error message associated with that status code.

5-18

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND

BATCH JOBS

Note that normally when a command procedure exits following a
warning
or
error condition, the command interpreter sets the high-order digit
of $STATUS to 1, leaving the remainder
of
the
value
intact.
Many
system
programs
that
issue
their
own messages set this field to 1
also, so that the command interpreter does not redisplay the messages.
However,
1if
a
command
procedure
contains
an
EXIT
command
that
explicitly uses the current value of $STATUS as the exit status
code,
the
command
interpreter does display the message associated with the
status code.
For

example,

a command procedure

$ ON WARNING THEN EXIT

can contain

the

line:

'$STATUS'

When any warning, error, or severe error occurs during
the
execution
of
this
procedure,
the
procedure
exits
with the unchanged status
value.
Because
any
of
these
conditions
normally
cause
system
messages,
the command interpreter will display the message associated
with the status value.
Most DCL commands invoke system utilities that generate unique
status
values and error messages based on different results.
Please note the
following exceptions:
1.

The commands listed below, on successful completion,
change the current value of S$SSTATUS or SSEVERITY:
CONTINUE

GOTO

DEPOSIT

HELP

EOD

EXAMINE

SHOW

EXIT

not

STOP

WAIT

2.,

If any of these commands results in a
nonsuccessful
however,
that
status
value
1is
placed in $STATUS,
severity level is placed in S$SEVERITY.

status,
and the

The commands
of $STATUS;

portion

listed below set only the severity level
they also change the value of $SEVERITY:

COBOL/RSX11

LINK/RSX11

DIFFERENCES

MACRO

DUMP
EDIT

The commands listed below always
SSEVERITY to a successful code:
CREATE
DIRECTORY

LIBRARY

set the value of

$STATUS

and

RENAME
SET PROTECTION

SORT/RSX11
UNLOCK

The programs

invoked by the commands listed in (2) and (3) above issue
their own error messages.
The message code associated with the status
values returned by these commands is EXITSTATUS.

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

5.7.5

The SYNCHRONIZE

and WAIT Commands

The SYNCHRONIZE and WAIT commands both place a job in
a
wait
state:
the SYNCHRONIZE
command waits for the completion of another job;
the
WAIT command waits for a specified period
of
time
to
elapse.
For

example,

functions,

Jjobs

are

submitted concurrently to perform cooperative

one job can contain the command:

$ SYNCHRONIZE BATCH25
After
this
command
1is
executed,
the
procedure
cannot
continue
execution until the job identified by the job name BATCH25 completes.
The WAIT command is useful
shared
system
resource,

for procedures that must have access
to
a
for
example
a
disk
or
tape drive.
The

VLnnnnnn

following example shows a procedure that requests the allocation of
a
tape
drive;
if
the
command
does
not
complete successfully, the
procedure places itself in a wait state, and then retrys the request:
TRY:

ALLOCATE

DM:

RK:

IF S$STATUS THEN GOTO OKAY
WAIT 00:05
GOTO TRY
OKAY:

REQUEST/REPLY/TO=DISKS - 'Please mount BACK_UP_GMB on

''FSLOGICAL("RK")'

The IF command following the ALLOCATE
request
checks
SSTATUS.
If
successful,
the
procedure
continues.
issues the WAIT command;
the WAIT command specifies a

the
value
of
Otherwise, it
time
interval

of
5
minutes.
After
waiting 5 minutes, the next command, GOTO, is
executed, and the
request
1is
repeated.
This
procedure
continues
looping
and
attempting
to
allocate
a device until it succeeds, or
until

the batch job

is deleted or

stopped.

The REQUEST command in the above
example
illustrates
the
FSLOGICAL
lexical function, which translates the logical name RK assigned to the
allocated device.
Lexical functions are described in Section 5.9.

5.8

READING AND WRITING

FILES

With the DCL command interpreter, you
can
read,
write,
files.
The basic steps to read and write files are:

and

create

Use the OPEN command
to
open
a
file.
The
OPEN
command
assigns a logical name to the file, and specifies whether the
file is to be read or written.
A file cannot
be
both
read
and written at the same time.

Use the READ or WRITE command to read or write the file.
The
READ
and
WRITE
commands
use command symbols as buffers to
contain input and output records;
the READ command
reads
a
record into a symbol and the WRITE command writes one or more
symbols or literal character strings into a single record
in
an output

file.

Use the CLOSE command to close the file.
After
a
file
has
been
opened
with
the
OPEN
command, it remains open until
specifically closed.

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

- -n-n-nnnnn

The following example shows a procedure
coplies each record into an output file.

that

reads

input

file

and

OPEN/READ INFILE DATA.TST
OPEN/WRITE OUTFILE DATA.OUT
READLOOP:

READ/END_OF _FILE=FINISH
WRITE

OUTFILE

INFILE RECORD

RECORD

GOTO READLOOP

FINISH:

INFILE
OUTFILE

The OPEN commands open the files DATA.TST and DATA.OUT for
input
and
output,
respectively.
The
READ
command specifies the /END_OF_FILE
qualifier so that the GOTO command that causes a loop is skipped
when
the end-of-file is reached on DATA.TST.
Each READ command changes the
value of the symbol RECORD;
the WRITE command writes the record
into
the file DATA.OUT.
When

all

FINISH,

5.8.1
You

records
where

Reading

can

also

current

The

SYSSCOMMAND,
you refer to

been

read,

the

commands

procedure
the

the

READ

device

process

and

WRITE

commands

write

permanent

goes

the

1label

files.

and Writing Process Permanent

use

1input

device.

have

the

Files
to

read

messages

files

data

from

the

the current output

SYSSINPUT,

SYSSOUTPUT,

and SYSSERROR do not have to be explicitly opened
them in READ or WRITE commands.
For example:

before

$ READ SYSSCOMMAND TESTID
This READ command results in a read to the current device SYS$COMMAND;
thus, when the procedure is executed interactively, the read is issued
to
the
terminal.
When
the
READ
command
executes,
the
command
interpreter displays the following prompt at the terminal:
liatal
Whatever you type in
symbol named TESTID.

response

this

Similarly, you can write a line of
the current output device is, with

$ WRITE SYSSOUTPUT
Before this line is
is substituted with

5.8.2

"Count

prompt

then

equated

the

data to the terminal,
or
whatever
the WRITE command.
For example:

''COUNT'...

displayed on the terminal,
its current value.

continuing..."
the

symbol

named

COUNT

File Formats

When you

create a file with
attributes
for
the
file:
file in print file format,
following each record.

the WRITE

the

with

command, you cannot specify
any
command interpreter always creates a

carriage

control

bytes

preceding

and

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

These files are therefore not compatible with
files
created
by
the
default
system editor
SOS,
or
RSX-1llM
utilities
invoked
by DCL
commands, for example, SORT-11 (invoked by
the
SORT/RSX1ll
command).
If you
create a file with the DCL command WRITE and you wish to use

the file as input to another program or command, you

can

perform

intermediate
step
to
convert
the
file
to a suitable format.
One
simple way to do this to invoke the SOS editor to edit
the
file
and
then write the file back onto disk.
SOS removes the carriage control
bytes from each record as it writes the output file.
For example:
$

OPEN/WRITE OUTFILE DATA.OUT

$ CLOSE OUTFILE
$

EDIT/NOLINES

DATA.OUT

the
to
file
input
After a file is closed, you can specify it as an
the /NOLINES qualifier in this example indicates to SOS that
editor:
the file does not have line numbers associated with the records in the
The SOS command EB follows the EDIT command in the input stream
file.
the EB command writes the file onto disk without
for the procedure:
incrementing the version number.

5.9

LEXICAL

FUNCTIONS

The command interpreter recognizes a set of functions, called lexical
and
strings
information about character
that return
functions,
attributes of

the current process.

You can use lexical functions in any context in which you normally use
In command procedures, you can use lexical
symbols or expressions.
string
perform character
names,
logical
translate
to
functions
and determine the current processing mode of the
manipulations,
procedure.

Table 5~1 summarizes the
valid
functions,
their
formats,
and
the
information
returned
by each.
Some
examples of
wusing
lexical
functions
are given
1in
the
next
few
subsections.
The
syntax
requirements
for specifying lexical functions are described in detail
in Section 6.7 "Rules for Specifying Lexical Functions."
Table 5-1
Summary of Lexical Functions

Function

Value Returned

F$CVSI (bit~-position,count,integer)

Signed value extracted from

F$CVUI (bit-position,count,integer)

Unsigned value extracted

the specified integer,
converted to an ASCII
literal

from the specified

converted
literal

integer,

to an ASCII

(continued on next page)

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

Table 5-1 (Cont.)
Summary of Lexical Functions

Function

FSDIRECTORY ()

Value Returned

Current default directory
name string,
brackets

FSEXTRACT (offset,length,string)

including

Substring beginning at
specified offset for length
specified of indicated
string

FSLENGTH (string)

Length of

FSLOCATE (substring,string)

Relative offset of specified
substring within string
indicated;
or, the length
of the string if the
substring is not found

FSLOGICAL (logical-name)

Equivalence name of
specified logical name
(first match found in
ordered
group,

name

search
and

or,

if no match

logical
a null

found

Message text associated with
the specified
code value

FSMODE ()

string

of process,

system

tables);

string

F$SMESSAGE (code)

specified

numeric

One of the character
INTERACTIVE

Current process

FSTIME ()

Current date
in

the

strings

BATCH

F$PROCESS ()

day,

status

name

and

time

string
of

format

dd-mmm-yyyy hh:mm:ss.cc

FSUSER()

Current user
code

(UIC),

identification
in

the

format

[g,m]
FSVERIFY ()

5.9.1

The
when

FS$SMODE

A numeric value of 1 if
verification is set on;
numeric value of 0 if
verification is set off

and FSVERIFY

FSMODE function is useful in procedures that must
executed in batch mode and interactively.

act

differently

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

For example, you could create a LOGIN.COM file that tests whether

the

is being executed as a result of an interactive login or at
procedure
the beginning of a batch job by using the F$MODE function, as shown in
the following example:

"''FSMODE()'"

INTDEF:

.EQS.

"BATCH" THEN GOTO BATDEF

$ EXIT
$

BATDEF:

All function names must be preceded with the substitution operator (')
include parentheses as argument delimiters even when the
and must
function requires no arguments, as in the above example.

Note that the function name F$SMODE in the above example is enclosed in
Lexical
guotation marks, and that it is preceded by two apostrophes.

functions are performed before the command string
1is
parsed.
Thus,
when a lexical function is used in an expression which normally causes
symbol values to be substituted, and the output of
the
function
is
being
used
as a
literal
character
string,
the
function must be
enclosed in quotation marks.
Because
the
function
1is
used
within
quotation marks, two apostrophes are required.

based
1,
or
The FSVERIFY function returns a value of 0
verification of command procedures is off (0) or on (l).
For
this function to test or to save the current setting.
the current setting before changing
procedure can save

on whether
You can use
a
example,
it and then

restore the setting:

later

SAVE_VERIFY =

IF SAVE_VERIFY THEN SET VERIFY

$ SET NOVERIFY

'F$VERIFY()'

The assignment statement saves the current setting of verification
Later, the
command sets verification off.
SET NOVERIFY
the
before
if it is true, that is, if it has a
value of SAVE_VERIFY is tested;
previously on.
verification was
that
indicates
it
1,
of
value
Otherwise, verification was initially off and remains off.

5.9.2

FS$SEXTRACT, FSLOCATE,

FSLENGTH,

and FSTIME

to
you
allow
functions
FS$SLENGTH
and
FSLOCATE,
FSEXTRACT,
The
The following example shows a procedure
manipulate character strings.
named TYPE.COM that accepts a file specification as a
parameter.
It
uses the FSLOCATE function to determine whether the file specification
contains a period (.), indicating that a file
type
1is
present.
If
not, it provides a default file type defined by the symbol FTYPE.
$

FTYPE

$ IF

.TXT

'FSLOCATE(".",Pl)'

THEN Pl :=
$ TYPE 'Pl

'Pl'FTYPE

.EQ.

'FSLENGTH(P1l)'

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

In this example, the FSLOCATE function locates a period;
if no period
is
present,
the
function
returns
the
1length
of the string.
The
function returned is compared with the function F$LENGTH which
always
returns

the

invoked
$

@TYPE

Note that
contain a

The

below,

string.

types

the

this

command

function returns

shows

that

the

procedure

the

file

specification

current date

that

checks

hours

from

and
the

the

$ WRITE SYS$SOUTPUT
$ EXIT
LUNCH:

WRITE

"Not yet,

SYSSOUTPUT

"Go

does

not

time.

The

following

time

date

and

$ MORNING:

current

TIME := 'FSTIME()"'
HOUR = 'FSLOCATE(" ",TIME)' + 1
HOUR_LENGTH = 'F$SLOCATE(":",TIME)' - HOUR
IF 'FSEXTRACT (HOUR,HOUR_LENGTH,TIME)' .GT.

procedure

file ALPHA.TXT:

ALFHA

locating and extracting
returned by FS$TIME:
$
$
§$
$

the

this example assumes
directory string.

F$TIME

example

1length

shown

time

day

string

THEN GOTO LUNCH

sigh...."

lunch..."

$ EXIT
The string returned by FSTIME always contains one
blank
between
the
date and time field.
The FSLOCATE function locates the hours field of
the date and time string by adding 1 to the
1location
of
the
blank.
The next assignment statement determines the end of the hours field by
locating the colon (:) that delimits the hours from the seconds,
then
subtracts
HOURS)

the

from

the

value

location

the
of

the

beginning
colon

the

determine

field

(in

the

length

the

symbol
of

the

hours
field.
Last, the current hour is extracted from the string by
using the values obtained from the FSLOCATE functions, and the
result
is compared with the number 12.
Note

that all arguments specified for lexical functions are candidates
automatic substitution.
Thus, the symbols HOUR, TIME, and so on,
substituted
before
the
function
1is
performed.
All
1literal

for
are

characters
or
character
quotation marks.

5.9.3

The

FS$SDIRECTORY,

about

the

current

name,

and

the

strings

F$PROCESS,

1in

functions

and

FSUSER

functions

process:

the

current

default

These

placed

and FS$USER

F$PROCESS,

UIC.

must

functions

are

all

return

information

directory,
returned

the

process

character

strings,
so
you must enclose the functions in quotation marks if
want to use them as literal character
strings
in
expressions.

you
For

example:

"''FSDIRECTORY()'"

.EQS.

"[''FSPROCESS()'l"

THEN

...

This IF command tests whether the current default directory string
is
the same as the current process name.
You could also test whether the
current default directory is the same as the current UIC, as follows:

"''FSDIRECTORY()'"

.EQS.

"''FSUIC()'"

THEN

...

COMMAND PROCEDURES AND BATCH JOBS

You can also use the FSDIRECTORY function to save the current

default

directory:

$ SAVE_DIR :=
$ SET DEFAULT

'F$DIRECTORY()'
[MALCOLM.TESTFILES]

$ SET DEFAULT

'SAVE_DIR'

this

example,

the

assignment

statement

equates

the

current

directory to the symbol SAVE DIR before the SET DEFAULT command
Later, the symbol SAVE_DIR is
establishes a new default directory.
used in the SET DEFAULT command that restores the original default
directory.

In this example, quotation marks are not required around the lexical
function F$SDIRECTORY because these commands do not automatically

evaluate expressions, but accept character string data literally.

5.9.4

F$LOGICAL

the
returns
1logical name and
The FSLOGICAL function translates a
For
1is not recursive.
the translation
equivalence name string;
the current
function to save
the F$LOGICAL
example, you can use

equivalence of a logical name and later restore it. The following
example shows how the technique for saving a directory string shown in
the preceding section can be amplified to save the default disk device
as well:

$ SAVE_DIR :=

() '
'FSLOGICAL ("SYS$DISK") ' 'FSDIRECTORY

two lexical
the results of
This assignment statement concatenates
1is enclosed in
1logical name SYSSDISK
Note that the
functions.
character
any
The command interpreter assumes that
guotation marks.
specified as an argument to a lexical function that is not
string
if the symbol is undefined,
enclosed in quotation marks is a symbol;
the command interpreter replaces it with a null string.

CHAPTER 6
GRAMMAR RULES

This chapter describes
the
syntax
language, including rules for:

6.1

Entering

commands

Entering

file

Entering qualifiers

Entering

character

Entering

numeric

Forming

Specifying

Entering date

rules

for

the

string

data

values

expressions

lexical
and

functions
time

values

RULES FOR ENTERING COMMANDS

a command, including
and file qualifiers,

if any.

general

format of

command
Because
command

you can
string

command

is:

continue

parameter[/qualifiers...][...]

command

The

command

least

from
each

one

command

than

must

blank

interpreter

one

1line,

ignores

properly delimited,

character

must

separate

the first parameter, and at least
additional
parameter
from
the

Multiple
spaces
and
tabs
single blank is required.
®

on more

the

term

is used to define the entire command that is passed to
You can optionally precede any command line with a dollar

item
®

name[/qualifiers...]

the system.
sign (§) character.

Each

c¢ommand

specifications

A command string is the complete specification of
the command name, command qualifiers, parameters,

The

VAX/VMS

Each

qualifier

can

spaces,

the

tabs.

sign.

follows:

the

command

name

one blank must separate
previous
parameter.

are permitted

in all

must be preceded with a slash (/).
preceded
or followed with none, one, or

dollar

cases where a

The
slash
more blanks,

GRAMMAR RULES

If a label precedes the command, the label must be
terminated
with
a colon (:).
The colon can be preceded or followed with
none, one, or more blanks, spaces, or tabs.

In addition, any special characters you enter
on
a
command
can
be
treated as delimiters, depending on the context of the command.
These
characters are listed in Table 6-1.

6.1.1

Rules for Continuing Commands on More than One Line

You can enter a command string on more than one
1line
by using
the
continuation character, a hyphen (-), as the last element on a command
line.

Command line continuation
is
especially
useful
when
you
enter
a
command
and
want
to
specify many
qualifiers, or when you place a
command in a command procedure file and want
to make
the
procedure
more readable.
$§

For example:

PRINT MYFILE /AFTER=17:00 -~
/COPIES=20 /NAME="COMGUIDE"

Note that when you continue a command,
required space before each parameter.

you

must

still

provide

the

There is no restriction on the number of continued lines you
can
use
to
enter
a
command.
However, the maximum number of characters that
you can enter in any entire command string is approximately 500.

NOTE

Some DCL commands invoke RSX-11M utility
programs.
These
commands are actually
"back
translated"
to
form
command
strings
for
the
11-M
utility.
The
maximum length
of
these
1lines,
after
they
have
been
back translated, is 80
characters.

6.1.2

Rules

for Entering Comments

Indicate a comment by preceding the comment with an
Comments are valid:

(!).

mark

As the first item on a command line;
in this case, the entire
line
1is
considered
a
comment
and
1is not processed by the
command

exclamation

interpreter

Following the last character

hyphen in a command

line

in a command string,

Some examples of valid placement of comments

follow:

$ ITHIS ENTIRE LINE IS A COMMENT
$ PRINT MYFILE - !
PRINT COMMAND COMMENT
$../COFIES=3
I
3 COFIESs FLEASE

after

GRAMMAR RULES

When you enter a command interactively an?
continue
the
command
on
more
than
one
1line,
the
command.interpreter uses the $_ prompt to
indicate that it is processing a command.

6.1.3

Rules

for Truncating Keywords

All keywords that you
truncating letters on
Command
Command

enter as command input
can
be
the right.
You can truncate:

names
keyword

abbreviated

parameters

Qualifiers
Qualifier keyword values
All command name keywords are unique when
truncated
to
four
characters.
All keywords recognized by individual

their
first
commands are
similarly unique with respect to other keywords recognized by the same
command.
Any
keyword can be truncated to fewer than four characters
as long as the truncation
1is
wunique.
In
fact,
when
the
command
interpreter
reads
a
command
1line,
it only examines the first four
characters of each keyword you type.

For example, the DEALLOCATE and DEASSIGN commands
three
1letters.
These commands can be truncated

have the same
first
to a minimum of four

letters.
The TYPE command, however, is the only command
letter
"T."
Therefore,
the TYPE command has
one letter.

that
begins
with
the
a minimum truncation of

When you type commands in command procedure files, you
should
always
use
at least a four-character truncation, to ensure the compatibility
of your command procedure for future releases of the
systenm.
It
1is
recommended that in command procedures you always use the full command
name,

for

readability.

Exceptions:
truncation
letter:

The following commands
rule.
You can truncate

are
exceptions
to
any of these commands

the
minimum
to its first

CONTINUE
DEPOSIT
EXAMINE
RUN

6.2

RULES

FOR ENTERING FILE

SPECIFICATIONS

The format of VAX/VMS file specifications is described
Chapter
2,
"File
Specifications and Logical Names."
for

all

files you

specify

parameters

that
all
file
specifications
commands or as qualifier values
e
e

DCL

that you enter
can be subject

in
Use

detail
in
this format

commands.

as parameters
to:

Remember

system

Logical name translation
The application of defaults

Some commands perform only a single level of logical name translation;
that
1is,
translation
1is
not recursive.
When this is the case, the
parameter description indicates that fact.

GRAMMAR RULES

In many cases, a command applies a unique default file type
to
input
or
output
file
specifications.
The parameter descriptions indicate
the default file type, if any.

The parameter descriptions also indicate whether you can specify
cards in a field in the file specification.

6.2.1
An

wild

Rules for Entering File Specification Lists

input

file parameter

for many commands has

the

format:

file-spec,...

This

format

specification.
(,)

indicates

or plus signs

You

(+).

that

you

None,

one,

can

enter

than

one

file

can separate the file specifications with commas
or more blanks

tab

characters

can
precede
or
follow
the
commas or plus signs.
The list of file
specifications is treated as a single parameter;
the
system
applies
temporary defaults to the files specified in the list.
The parameter description always states how the command interprets
list:
1in most cases, commas and plus signs are egquivalent.

6.3

RULES

Commands
e
e

FOR ENTERING QUALIFIERS

can take one or

both of

the

following types of qualifier:

Command qualifiers
File qualifiers

Command qualifiers have
appear
following
the
For

the

the same meaning regardless
of
whether
they
command name or following a command parameter.

example:
$

FRINT/HOLD

FRINT

SFRING.SUMsFALL
.SUM

SFRING.SUM»FALL.SUM/HOLD

The /HOLD qualifier is a command qualifier;
commands
shown above are equivalent.
Both

therefore, the two
PRINT
files are placed in a hold

status.

File qualifiers, however, sometimes have different meanings
depending
on
where
you
place
them
in the command.
If specified immediately
after a file specification parameter, they affect only the
file
they

follow.

specified
For

specified

parameters.

after the command name,

they affect all

files

example:
$

PRINT/COFPIES=2

FRINT

SFRING.SUMsFALL.SUM

SFRING.SUM/COFIES=2sFALL.SUM

The first PRINT command shown above requests two copies of each of
files
SPRING.SUM and FALL.SUM.
The second PRINT command requests
copies of the file SPRING.SUM, but only one copy of FALL.SUM.

the
two

GRAMMAR RULES

Some file qualifiers can be applied only to
the
specification
of
a
parameter
and
cannot
be specified following the command name.
When
this is
the
<case,
the
qualifier
description
indicates
that
the
qualifier is associated with a file parameter.
1In all other cases, if
you specify a file qualifier following the command name, the qualifier
is applied to all files specified (if you specify more than one).

6.3.1

Rules

for Determining Qualifier

Qualifiers fall
®

in the

Qualifiers
example:

Defaults

following general categories:

with

simple

positive

and

negative

forms,

for

/DELETE
/NODELETE

These qualifiers
Part

II,

with

are

their

listed

in the

default

value,

/ [NO] DELETE

command
as

format

keyword

/NODELETE

Qualifiers that require a numeric or character
or

boxes

follows:

value.

For

/COPIES=n

The default values

for

string variable

example:

these qualifiers are

shown

Part

as:

/COPIES=n
e

/COPIES=1

Qualifiers that accept a file
also have a negative form, for

specification
example:

value

and

format

boxes

that

/DEBUG
/NODEBUG

/DEBUG[file~-spec]

These qualifiers are
Part

listed

in the

command

/[NO]DEBUG[=file-spec]
Defaults

1in

follows:

are provided,

/NODEBUG

where possible.

NOTE

Certain qualifiers that
request
output
files
accept
file-specification values
and
apply
defaults
for
these
specifications
in
a
special
way,
as
described in Section 6.3.3.

Qualifiers

that

example:

/PROCESS
/GROUP
/SYSTEM

are

overridden

other

qualifiers,

for

GRAMMAR RULES

The default action is
the list, as follows:
/GROUP
/PROCESS
/SYSTEM

shown

in Part II

with each qualifier

1in

/PROCESS
/PROCESS
/PROCESS

Qualifiers that affect command execution
only
if
explicitly
present and have no corresponding default, for example:
/RSX

No defaults are given for

this

type of qualifier.

When you enter a command, if you specify the same qualifier more
than
once,
both
a
positive
and
negative form of the same qualifier, or
qualifiers that override one another, the command interpreter
accepts
only the last specification.
For example:
$

FRINT

MYFILE

/COPIES=3/RBURST/COFIES=2/NOBURST

For this PRINT command,
/NOBURST qualifiers.

the command accepts only the /COPIES=2

and

the

If you
enter
conflicting
qualifiers
for
a
command,
the
command
interpreter
generally
1issues
an
error
message.
If
a
qualifier
conflicts with another qualifier, the descriptions of these qualifiers
indicate the conflict.

6.3.2

Rules

for Entering Qualifier Values

Many
qualifiers
accept
keywords,
file
specifications,
character
strings,
or
numeric
values.
For
keywords,
follow
the rules for
truncating keywords (Section 6.1.3);
for other types of value, follow
the
rules
for
entering file specifications (Section 6.2), character
data (Section 6.4), or numeric values (Section 6.5).
You must separate qualifiers and their values either with equal
signs
(=)
or
colons
(:).
For
example, the, following specifications are
equivalent:
/OUTPUT=DBAl :NEW.DAT

/OUTPUT:DBAl :NEW.DAT

Many qualifiers accept one or more keyword or
syntax is represented in the format as:

variable

values.

The

/qualifier=value
For

example:

/COPIES=3
/OVERRIDE=EXPIRATION
When more

than one value

accepted,

the

syntax

is:

/qualifier=value,...

If you want to specify more than one value for a qualifier,
you
separate
the values with commas and enclose them in parentheses.
example:

/ENTRY=(1,2,3)
/PARAMETERS=
(3, "CYGNUS,LYRA" ,PRINT)

6-6

must
For

GRAMMAR RULES

In the second example, the second parameter is
marks because it contains an embedded comma.

Some qualifier keyword values require
keyword from its data with a colon or

enclosed

additional data.
an equals sign.

quotation

Separate
the
For example:

/PROTECTION=GR:RW
/PROTECTION:GR:RW
/PROTECTION=GR=RW
/PROTECTION :GR=RW
These
which

expressions are
require values,

all equivalent.
To
specify
multiple
keywords
enclose the list in parentheses.
For example:

/BLOCKS= (START:0,END:10)
/PROTECTION=(GR:RW,OWN:RWD)

6.3.3

Rules

for

Entering Output File Qualifiers

Some qualifiers request output from a command and optionally accept
a
file
specification
value.
For
example,
the
/LIST
and
/OBJECT
qualifiers for the
compilers
and
the
assembler,
as
well
as
the
/EXECUTABLE
qualifier for the linker, are output file qualifiers that
fit into this category.

The default file specification for output
files
requested
by
these
qualifiers
depends
on the placement of the qualifier in the command.
The

rules

are:

If the gqualifier
1is
present
by
default,
the
output
file
specification
defaults
to
the
current
default
device and
directory, and the file name of
the
first,
or
only,
input
file.
The
qualifier
provides
a
default
file type.
Some
examples are:
Command

Output
A.EXE

LINK

A,B

A.EXE

LINK

[TESTI]A,I[]B

A .EXE

LINK

A.OBJ

A.EXE

File

If the qualifier is present following the
command
name,
and
the
qualifier
does not specify an output file specification,
the output file specification defaults to the current
default
device and directory, and the file name of the first, or only,
input file.
The qualifier provides a default file type.
Some
examples are:

Command

Output

LINK/EXE A
LINK/EXE A,B
LINK/EXE A.OBJ

A.EXE
A.EXE
A.EXE

File

GRAMMAR RULES

If the qualifier is present following the specification of
an
input
file, and the qualifier does not specify an output file
specification, the output file specification defaults
to
the
device,
directory, and file name of the immediately preceding
input file.

examples are:

The qualifier provides a default file type.

Command

Some

Output File

FORTRAN A,B/LIST
B.LIS
FORTRAN A+C/LIS,B/LIST+D C.LIS and B.LIS
FORTRAN [MAL]A/LIST+[]B
[MAL]JA.LIS

LINK A+[TEST]D/EXE

[TEST]D.EXE

If the qualifier specifies a file specification for the output
file,
then
any
fields entered in the file specification are
used to name the output file, and
no default
file
name
is
supplied.

Some examples are:

Command

Output File

LINK A+B/EXE=C
FORTRAN/LIST=A B+C
FORTRAN/LIST=A B,C
LINK/EXE=[TEST] A

C.EXE
A.LIS
A.LIS (2 versions)
[TEST] .EXE

In all cases, the version number of the
output
file
1is
always
one
greater than any existing file with the same file name and file type.

Note
that when a
1logical
name
1is
wused
for
any
input
file
specifications,
the
entire
equivalence
name of the logical name is
used to determine the output file specification.
If a logical name is
used
for an input file and its equivalence name contains a file type,
then the same file type is used for the output file.

6.4

RULES

FOR ENTERING CHARACTER STRING DATA

When you enter commands, you can use any combination of uppercase
and
lowercase
letters.
The
command
interpreter
translates
lowercase
letters to uppercase letters and compresses multiple blank
spaces
or

tabs

to a single blank, except when a character string is enclosed in

quotation marks

(for example,

"This is

Enclose character string data
in
contains
any
of
the
following
interpreter
e
®

The

translate

them:

Literal lowercase letters
Required multiple blanks or

quotation marks when
the
string
and
you
do
not want the command

tab characters

Any nonalphanumeric character
the command

interpreter

alphanumeric characters

a string.").

that has special significance to

are:

Table 6-1 lists the nonalphanumeric characters the command interpreter
recognizes
and describes their meanings.
The characters described as
"reserved special characters" can be used in character strings without
being
enclosed
in
quotation marks.
Other
characters may require
quotation marks depending on the context
of
the
command.
When
1in
doubt,

use quotation marks.

GRAMMAR RULES

Table 6-1
Nonalphanumeric Characters

Symbol

Meaning

Name

sign

Places

the contents of a command
procedure file in the command input
stream

Colon

1. Device name
specification;
is a node name

delimiter
a double
delimiter

in a file
colon (::)

2. Qualifier value delimiter;
separates a qualifier name from a
keyword, value, file specification,

character

3. Symbol
character

Slash

string

name delimiter in
string assignment

Label

Qualifier

delimiter

2. Division operator in an
arithmetic expression
Plus

sign

Parameter

concatenation

operator

2. A unary plus sign or addition
operator in an arithmetic expression
Comma

List delimiter for parameters
qualifier value lists

Hyphen

Continuation

unary

operator

()

Parentheses

for

character

minus

sign

subtraction

arithmetic

1. List delimiters
value list

for

expression

qualifier
'

2, Operation precedence indicators
in an arithmetic expression
3. Lexical
delimiters

[

]

Square

brackets

function

argument

1. Directory name delimiters
file specification

2, Substring specification delimiter
in an assignment statement
Angle

brackets

directory

file

name

when

name,

the

(,)

plus

type,

and/or

you

specify

type,

and/or

output

file

qualifier.

command creates multiple
field of each input file

output files, it uses
the
to name an output file.

COPY

command

output

the

output

field

COPY

command

input

file

uses

the

name

creates
file

single

file

specification contains

corresponding

the output

field

the

for

which

any

a wild

card,

first,

only,

the

input

and

output

file.

Use the /LOG qualifier when you specify multiple
files to verify the files actually copied.

Version Numbers:
If no version numbers are specified
for
input
and
output files, the COPY command, by default, gives the output
file a version number of 1, or increments by 1 the version number
of
an
existing
file with the same file name and file type.
1If
explicit version numbers or wild cards are
specified
for
input
files,
the
COPY command, by default, gives the output files the
same version numbers as
the
associated
input
files.
In
the
latter
case,
1if
an
equal or higher version of the output file
already
does

not

exists,
copy

the

COPY

command

file.

issues

warning

message

and

COPY

Command Qualifiers
/CONCATENATE
/NOCONCATENATE

Controls, when a wild card is used in any component of the output
file specification, whether a single output file is to be created
from all files that satisfy the input file specification.

By default, a wild card in an input file specification results in
a
single
output file consisting of multiple files that match in
one or more fields of the file specification.

When you concatenate files from On-disk Structure Level 2
disks,
the COPY
command
concatenates the files in alphanumeric order;
if you specify a wild card in the file version field,
files
are
copied
in
descending
order
by
version
number.
When
you
concatenate files from On-disk Structure Level 1 disks, the COPY
command concatenates the files in random order.
/LOG
/NOLOG

Controls

whether

the

COPY

command

specifications of each file copied.

displays

the

file

If you specify /LOG, the COPY command
displays,
for
each
copy
operation, the file specifications of the input and output files,
the number of blocks or the number of records
copied
(depending
on
whether
the
file
is
copied
on
a
block-by-block
or
record-by-record basis),
and
the
total
number
of
new
files
created.

File Qualifiers
/ALLOCATION=n

Forces the initial allocation of the output file to the number of
512-byte blocks specified as n.

If not specified, the initial allocation of the
output
determined by the size of the input file being copied.

file

/CONTIGUOUS
/NOCONTIGUOUS

Indicates whether the output file is to be contiguous,
that
Iis,
whether the file must occupy consecutive physical disk blocks.

By default, the COPY command creates an output file in

the

same

If an input file is
file.
input
format as the corresponding
contiguous
a
create
to
attempts
contiguous, the COPY command
not report an error if there is not
it does
but
file,
output
different
files of
input
If you copy multiple
enough space.
output file may or may not be contiguous.
the
formats,
/CONTIGUOUS
qualifier
to
ensure
that
files
are
contiguously.

Use the
copied

The /CONTIGUOUS qualifier has no effect when you copy files to or
from
tapes
because
the
size
of
the
input
file
cannot
be
determined.
If you copy a file from a tape and want the file
to
be
contiguous,
use
two COPY commands:
once, to copy the file
from the tape, and a second time to create a contiguous file.

COPY

/EXTENSION=n
Specifies the number of blocks to be added
each time the file is extended.

the

output

file

If you do not specify /EXTENSION, the default extension attribute
of
the
output
file is determined by the extension attribute of
the corresponding input file.

/FILE_MAXIMUM=n
Specifies the maximum number
file can contain.

logical

records

that

the

output

This qualifier is valid only for relative files.
For information
on
creating
and
using
relative
files,
see the VAX-1ll Record
Management Services Reference Manual.

/OVERLAY
/NOOVERLAY
Requests that data in the input file be copied into
an
output file, overlaying the existing data.
The physical
of the file on disk does not change.
The /OVERLAY qualifier is ignored
to a non-file-structured device.
/PROTECTION=code
Defines the protection

to be applied

the output

the

file

output

existing

location

written

file.

Specify
the
protection
code
using
the
standard
rules
for
specifying protection (these rules are given in the discussion of
the SET
PROTECTION
command).
specified
are
taken
from
corresponding input file.

Any
protection
attributes
the
current
protection
of

not
the

/READ_CHECK
/NOREAD CHECK
Requests

input

the

COPY

file(s)

command

twice

read

verify

each

that

record

all

the

records were

specified

correctly

read.

/REPLACE
/NOREPLACE
Requests that if
a
file
already
exists
with
the
same
file
specification
as
that entered for the output file, the existing
file is to be deleted.
The COPY command allocates new space
for
the output file.
By

the

default,

file

the

COPY

command

already exists,

creates

incrementing

new

the

version

file

|if

version number.

/TRUNCATE
/NOTRUNCATE
Controls whether the COPY command truncates an output file at the
end-of-file
when
copying it.
By default, the COPY command uses
the allocation of the input file to determine
the
size
of
the
output file.
/WRITE_CHECK
/NOWRITE_CHECK
Requests

after
copied

the

COPY

command

read

each

record

the

output

file

it
was written to verify that the record was successfully
and that the file can subsequently be read without error.

COPY

Examples

TEST . DAT

COPY

NEWTEST.DAT

file TEST.DAT
the
The COPY command copies the contents of
file named
a
into
and directory
from the default disk
If a file named NEWTEST.DAT already exists, the
NEWTEST.DAT.
COPY command creates a new version of it.
2,

%
%

ALFPHACTXT
ALFHA.TXT

COPY
COFY

TMF
. TMF

file
The first COPY command copies the file ALPHA.TXT into a
The COPY command uses the file type of the
named TMP.TXT.
input file to complete the file specification for the output
second COPY command creates a file named
The
file.
ALPHA.TMP. The COPY command uses the file name of the input
file to name the output file.

3.
$

COPY/LOG/REFLACE

TEST.DAT

NEWTEST.DAT:1

%COFY-I-REFLACED, DRA2ICMALCOLMINEWTEST,DAT?1 beind rerlaced

%ZCOFY-S-COPIED, DRA2ICMALCOLMITEST.DATS1 coried to DEA2!LMALCOLMINEWTEST.DATi1 (1 block)
ZCOPY-S~NEWFILESy

file created

replace
to
The /REPLACE qualifier requests the COPY command
the output file with the new file.
an existing version of
is
The first message from the COPY command indicates that it
The version number in the output
replacing an existing file.
otherwise, the COPY command creates a
file must be explicit;
new version of the file NEWTEST.DAT.
¢

%,.COM

COPY

LMALCOLM. TESTFILES

the
The COPY command copies the highest versions of files in
file type of COM to the
current default directory with a
subdirectory MALCOM.TESTFILES.

COFY/LDG

X, TXT

X,0LD

YCOPY-S~COFIEDN, DRA2!LCMALCOLMIALFHA.TXTi2 coried to DEA2IMALCOLMIALFHA.OLDF2 (1 block)
%COPY~S~COFIED, DRA2ICMALCOLMIBETA.TXTi2 coried to DRARILMALCOLMIEBETA.OLDF2 (1 block)
TXT$2 coried to DEA2:ILCMALCOLMIGAMMA.OLDF2 (4 blocks)
%COPY~S-COFIED, DRA2CMALCOLMIGAMMA.
UCOFY-S~-NEWFILESy

files crested

files with
The COPY command copies the highest versions of
Each new file has the same
file types of TXT into new files.
The
file name as an existing file, but a file type of OLD.
last message from the COPY command indicates the number of
new files that it created.

6.
$

COPY/LOG

AJDATsEB.MEM

CoX

YCORY-S~COFPIEDs DRA2ICMALCOLMIAJDATSS coried to DRA2ILCMALCOLMIC.DAT#11 (1 block)
YCOPY~S-COFIEDy DNRA2:LMALCOLMIE.MEM;2 coried to DBARILMALCOLMIC.MEMi24 (58 records)
%UCOFY-S—-NEWFILESy

2 files created

The input file specifications are separated with a

comma

The wild card in the
request that two files be copied.
output file specification indicates that two output files are
each copy operation, the COPY command
For
to be created.
uses the file type of the input file to name the output file.

COPY

7.
$

*XeTXT

COPY/LOG

TXT.SAV

ZCOFY-S-COPIEDy DBA2!LMALCOLMIALPHA.TXT$2 coried to DRA2ICMALCOLMITXT.SAVi1 (1 block)
ZCOFPY-S—-APPENDEDy DERA2!LMALCOLMIBETA.TXT#2 arrended to DBA2!IMALCOLMITXT.SAVi1 (3 records)
ZCOFPY-S—~AFPPENDED, DBA2:[MALCOLMIGAMMA.TXT;2 arrended to DBA2ICMALCOLMITXT.SAVi1 (S1 records)
ZCOPY-S—-NEWFILESy 1 file created

The COPY command copies the highest
versions
of
all
files
with file types of TXT to a single output file named TXT.SAV.
After the first input file is copied, the messages
from
the
COPY
command
indicate
that
subsequent
files
are
being
appended to the output file.
Note that if you specify /NOCONCATENATE in this example,
the
COPY command creates multiple versions of the file TXT.SAV.
$

COPY

MASTER.DOC

DMALICBRACKUR]

The COPY command copies
the
highest
version
of
the
file
MASTER.DOC
to
the device DMAl.
1If no file named MASTER.DOC
already exists in the directory BACKUP, the COPY command uses
the version number of the input file.
%

MOUNT

MTal

COPY

TAPEX.
%

VOL.OZS

TAFE?

The MOUNT command requests that the volume labeled VOL025
be
mounted
on the tape device MTAl and assigns the logical name
TAPE to the device.
The

COPY

command

uses

the

logical

name

TAPE

for

the

input

file
specification, requesting that all files on the tape be
copied to the current default disk and
directory.
All
the
files copied retain their file names and file types.
10.

ALLOCATE

SCRAOT

CRS:
ALLOCATED

COFY

DEALLOCATE

CRACT

The ALLOCATE

CARDS
. OAT

CRAOS
command

allocates

system

card

reader

for

exclusive use by the process.
The response from the ALLOCATE
command indicates the device name of the card reader, CRAQ.
After

the

card

reader

allocated,

you

can

place

deck

cards in the reader and issue the COPY command specifying the
card reader as the input file.
The COPY
command
reads
the
cards
into
the file CARDS.DAT.
The end-of-file in the card
deck must be indicated with an
EOF
card
(12-11-0-1-6-7-8-9
overpunch).
The DEALLOCATE

command

relinquishes use of

the

card

reader.

CREATE
Creates a sequential disk file from records that follow the command
the input stream, or creates a directory file.

Format

CREATE

file-spec

Command Qualifiers

Default

/DIRECTORY

/OWNER_UIC=uic
/PROTECTION=code

Prompts

File:

file-spec

Command Parameters
file-spec

Specifies the name of the

input file or directory to be created.

If you omit either the file name or the
file
type,
the
CREATE
command does not supply any defaults;
the file name or file type
is null.
If you do not specify a file version number, and a file
already
exists with the same file name and file type as the file
specification, the CREATE command creates a new
version
of
the
file.

No wild cards are allowed

in the

file specification.

If you specify /DIRECTORY, the file specification must contain
a
directory
name,
and optionally can contain a device name.
When
you create a subdirectory, separate the names
of
the
directory
levels with periods

(.).

Command Qualifiers
/DIRECTORY
Indicates

that a directory or

subdirectory is to be created.

To create a first level directory,
you
must
be
allowed
write
access
to
the
master file directory on the volume on which you
are creating the directory.
system
UIC
to
create
a

On a system volume, you must have
a
first
1level
directory.
To create a

subdirectory, you must be allowed write access to the first level
directory or have an appropriate user privilege.

CREATE

/OWNER_UIC=uic
Specifies the user identification code to be associated with
directory being created.
Specify the UIC in the format:

the

[g,m]
g

is an octal
number.
is an octal

member

number

in range

number

the

0-377

representing

range

0-377

the

group

representing

the

number.

The brackets are

required.

If
you
do
not
specify
an
owner
UIC
subdirectory,
the command uses the owner
level directory.

/PROTECTION=code
Defines the protection

to be applied

when
you
UIC of the

the

file or

create
a
next highest

directory.

Specify the code according
to
the
standard
syntax
rules
for
specifying
protection.
These rules are given in the description
of the SET PROTECTION command.
Any attributes not specified
are
taken from the current default protection.
If
you
do
not
specify
a
protection
when
you
create
a
subdirectory,
the
command uses the protection in effect for the
next
highest
1level
directory.
The
default
protection
for
directory files on system volumes is read, write, and execute.

Examples
1.

CREATE

fr. 08T

Trowud

Lirme

OM@s ..

Lewat

Lime

twoe..

After

you

issue

system reads

CTRL/Z

the CREATE

input

terminates

lines

the

command

into

input.

the

from

the

sequential

terminal,
file

A.DAT

the
until

CREATE

...input data...

$ RUN WEATHER

/'$ LINK WEATHER

/$ FORTRAN WEATHER
...source

stat

$ CREATE WEATHER.FOR

(/8 PASSWORD HENRY
/'$ JOB HIGGINS

r__

When you issue the CREATE command from
a
command
procedure
file,
the
system
reads all subsequent lines in the command
procedure file into the file, until it
encounters
a
dollar
sign
($)
1in
the first position in a record.
1In this batch
job example, the CREATE
command
creates
a
FORTRAN
source
file.
The next commands compile, link, and run the file just
created.
Input data follows the RUN command.
( $@WEATHER
// sEoD

//$ RUNWEATHER
/S LINK WEATHER
// $ FORTRAN WEATHER

/ $ DECK
/ $ CREATE WEATHER COM

(// $PASSWORD HENRY

/" JOB HIGGINS

hparnd

This batch job example illustrates using the
CREATE
command
to
create a command procedure from data in the input stream.
The DECK command is required so that
subsequent
1lines
that
begin
with
a
dollar sign are not executed as commands, but
are accepted as input records.
The EOD command
signals
the
end-6f-file
for
the
data
records.
Then, the procedure is
executed with the @ (Execute Procedure) command.

tOCREATE/DIRECTORY

OMA2 3 IMALCOLMY

The CREATE command creates a directory named MALCOLM

the

device DMA2,

£ OCREATE/DIRECTORY
EMALCOLM. GUERD
BOQET DEFAULT [MALCOLM. SURD
The CREATE command creates a subdirectory named
MALCOLM.SUB.
This directory file is placed in the directory named MALCOLM.
The SET DEFAULT command changes the current default directory
to
this
subdirectory.
All
files subsequently created are
cataloged in MALCOLM.SUB.

DEALLOCATE
Returns

device

available devices

that was

the

reserved

for

private

system.

use

the

pool

Format

DEALLOCATE

[device-name[:]]

Command

Qualifiers

/ALL

Prompts

Device:

Command

device—name

Parameters

device-name
Specifies
name

can

the
be

name

the

physical

device

name

be
or

If you omit the controller designator
default to controller A and unit 0.

Command

deallocated.
a

logical

and/or

The

device

name.

unit

number,

they

Qualifiers

/ALL
Requests

that

all

devices

deallocated.
If

you

specify /ALL,

you

cannot

have

currently

specify

a device

allocated

name.

Examples

DEALLOCATE

LIMEBLE

The

DEALLOCATE command deallocates unit 1 of the RK06
device
controller B.
The underscore character in the device name
indicates that it is a physical device name;
the
DEALLOCATE

command
2,

does

ALLOCATE
SMTELS

not

check

MT$

see

logical

name.

TARE?2

alLOCATE

DEALLOCATE

TAPE

The

ALLOCATE command requests that any magnetic tape drive be
allocated
and
assigns
the logical name TAPE to the device.

The

response

the

ALLOCATE

command

allocation
of
the
device
MTBl.
specifies the logical name TAPE to

indicates

The

release

the

successful

DEALLOCATE

the

tape.

command

DEALLOCATE

Note that a colon was specified on the logical name TAPE in
but that the colon can be omitted on
the ALLOCATE command,
the DEALLOCATE command.
$

DEALLOCATE /ZALL

The DEALLOCATE

command

currently allocated.

deallocates

all

devices

that

are

DEASSIGN
Cancels

1logical

ALLOCATE,

name

assignments

made

with

the

ASSIGN,

DEFINE,

MOUNT commands.

Format

DEASSIGN

[logical-name[:]]

Command Qualifiers

Default

/ALL
/GROUP
/PROCESS
/SUPERVISOR__MODE
/SYSTEM
/U‘SER_MODE

/PROCESS
/PROCESS
/SUPERVI SOR_MODE
/PROCESS
/SUPERVISOR_MODE

Prompts

Log_Name:

Command

logical-name

Parameters

logical-name
Specifies a 1- to 63-character logical name to be deassigned.
1If
the
1logical name contains any characters other than alphanumeric
or underscore characters, enclose it in quotation marks (").
If you terminate the logical-name parameter with a colon (:), the
command interpreter ignores it.
(Note that the ASSIGN, ALLOCATE,
and MOUNT commands remove a trailing colon, if
present,
from
a
logical name before placing the name in a logical name table.) If
a colon is present in the actual logical name, you
must
specify
two
<colons
on
the
1logical-name
parameter
for
the
DEASSIGN
command.
The

logical-name parameter

required

the

unless you

specify /ALL.

Description
If you

enter

/SYSTEM, only the
for the specified
table,
the
name
table.

than

one

qualifiers

/PROCESS,

/GROUP,

last one entered is accepted.
1If entries exist
logical name in
more
than
one
1logical
name
is deleted only from the specified logical name

The command interpreter deassigns all supervisor mode entries
1in
the process logical name table when you log off the system.
User
mode entries are deassigned when any image exits.
Names
in
the
group
or
system
logical
name
tables
must
be
explicitly
deassigned.

DEASSIGN

Command Qualifiers
/ALL

Specifies that all logical names in the
specified
1logical
name
table
are to be deleted.
If no logical name table is specified,
all process logical name table entries are deleted.
If you specify /ALL, you cannot enter a logical-name parameter.

/GROUP

Indicates that the specified logical name is in the group logical

name

table.

The user privilege GRPNAM is required to delete entries from
group logical name table.

/PROCESS

Indicates that the specified
logical name table.

This

1logical

name

is the default.

1in

the

process

You cannot deassign logical name table entries that were made

interpreter, for example SYSSINPUT, SYS$SOUTPUT, and
command
the
SYSSERROR.
However, if you
assign
new
equivalence
names
for
you can deassign the names you explicitly
names,
logical
these
created.

/SUPERVISOR_ MODE

Indicates, for entries in the process logical name table, that an
entry
exists
in
supervisor
mode.
This
1is
the
default;
/SUPERVISOR_MODE deletes both user and supervisor mode entries.

/SYSTEM
Indicates that the
logical name

table.

1logical

specified

name

1in

the

system

The user privilege SYSNAM is required to delete entries from
system logical name

the

table.

/USER_MODE

Indicates, for entries in the process logical
name
table,
that
the entry exists in user mode.
/USER_MODE deletes only user mode

entries.
Examples

% SHOW LOGICAL TEST.CASES
TEST.CASBES = DEALICHARVEYIFILES.DAT
$ DEASETEN

(srocess)

TEST..CASED

% a8HOW LDGICAL

TEST..CABES

Mo tramslation for

logical

mame TEST.CASES

The SHOW LOGICAL command
displays
the
name
for
the logical name TEST_CASES.

current
equivalence
The DEASSIGN command
deassigns
the
equivalence
name;
the
next
SHOW
LOGICAL
command indicates that the name is deassigned.
2.

% ASHIGN

LEALS

B OEASSIGN

COFY

The ASSIGN command equates the logical
name
COPY
with
the
device DBAl and places the names in the process logical name
Note
The DEASSIGN command deletes the logical name.
table.
that a colon was specified on the logical name COPY in the
ASSIGN command, but that the colon
can
be
omitted
on
the
DEASSIGN

command.

DEASSIGN

$ DEFINE

SWITCH:

# DEASSIGN

TEMF

SWITCH?

The DEFINE command places the
process
logical
name table.

logical name
SWITCH:
in
Two colons are required on

DEASSIGN command to delete
this
DEFINE
command
does not remove

the
the

1logical
name
because
the
trailing colons from logical

names.

$ ASSIGN/GROUP DBRE2:
GROUF.DISK
$ DEASSIGN/FROCESS/GROUP GROUF.LDISK

The ASSIGN command places

group

logical

specifies
qualifier

name

the

table.

logical

name GROUP DISK

the

subsequent DEASSIGN command

conflicting
qualifiers;
because
the
/GROUP
is last, the name is successfully deassigned.

¢ DEASSTEN/ALL
The

DEASSIGN

command

deletes

all

names

from

the

process

logical
name
table.
This command does not, however, delete
the names that were placed in the process logical name
table
in
executive
mode
by
the
command interpreter (SYS$INPUT,
SYSSOUTPUT, SYSSERROR, SYSSDISK, and SYSSCOMMAND).

DEBUG
Invokes the
VAX-11
Symbolic
Debugger
after
program
execution
is
interrupted
by CTRL/C or CTRL/Y.
The program image being interrupted
1image
was
1linked
with
the
must contain the debugger, that is, the
/DEBUG qualifier and/or run with the /DEBUG qualifier.

Format

DEBUG

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts

DBG>

Command

Parameters

None.

Description

When a program image is
executing,
it
can
be
interrupted
by
CTRL/C
or CTRL/Y.
Following the interruption, the DEBUG command
can be issued to pass control to the debugger;
this function
1is
useful when a program is in an infinite loop and you want to gain
control and use the
debugger
to
determine
the
cause
of
the
problem.

If no image
operation.

currently executing,

the DEBUG

command performs no

If the interrupted program was not linked with the debugger,
the
DEBUG
command
causes
a
software
exception condition.
If the
image has
not
declared
a
condition
handler,
this
exception
condition may cause the termination of the image.
For complete details on the commands available to debug programs,
see the VAX-11 Symbolic Debugger Reference Manual.

DEBUG

Example
1.

FORTRAN/DERUG/NOOFTIMIZE

LINK/7DERUG

RUN

WINGET

WIDGET

DERUG

Versiorn

ZOERUG-I~INITIALy

1.0

Aus

landguadge

1978

FORTRANy

score

and

module

set

to ‘WINGET’
DRG= GO

ENTER

NAME!?

ENTER
ENTER

NAME:

NAME$

DERUG

LRG:

The

FORTRAN

and

LINK

commands

both

specify

the

/DEBUG

qualifier, to compile the program WIDGET with debugger symbol
table information and to include the debugger
in
the
image
file.
The RUN command begins execution of the image WIDGET,
which loops uncontrollably.
CTRL/Y interrupts
the
program,
and

the

DEBUG

command

gives

control

the

debugger.

DECK
Marks the beginning of an input stream for a command or program.
The
DECK
command
1is
required
in
command
procedures
when
the
first
non-blank character in any data record in the input stream is a dollar
sign ($).

The DECK command must be preceded by a $;
the $ must be in the
character position (column 1) of the input record.

first

Format

DECK

Command Qualifiers

Default

/DOLLARS [=string]

/DOLLARS=SEOD

Prompts
None.

Command Parameters
None.

Description

The DECK command defines an
end-of-file
indicator
only
for
a
single
data
stream;
it
allows
you
to
place
data
records
beginning with dollar signs in the input stream.
You
can
place
one
or
more
sets
of data in the input stream following a DECK
command, each terminated by an end~of-file indicator.

After
an
end-of-file
indicator
specified
with
the
/DOLLARS
gualifier
1is
encountered, the end-of-file indicator is reset to
the default, that is, any record beginning
with
a
dollar
sign
($).
The
default is also reset if an actual end-of-file occurs
for

the current command

The DECK

command

level.

invalid

not preceded by a

execute a command or program that requires

input data.

request

Command Qualifiers
/DOLLARS [=string]

Sets the end-of-file

indicator

If you do not
specify
without
specifying
a

signal the end-of-file.

to the specified string.

/DOLLARS,
or
1if
you
specify
/DOLLARS
string,
you
must use the EOD command to

Specify a string if the input data contains one or
more
beginning with the string $EOD.
The string can have from
characters.
Enclose it in quotation marks if you want to
an
end-of-file indicator that contains literal lowercase
or

multiple blank

spaces

tabs.

records
1 to 15
specify
letters

DECK

Examples
INPUT STREAM

PROGRAM A

1'/

FOR

. fs PRINT SUMMARY.DAT
$ EOD

Lll
// $99.50
v $8642

(// $DECK
/ $ RUN A

/’ SLNKA

]

// $FORTRAN A
’fi

JQ"JH

]’

[lr

The FORTRAN and LINK commands compile
and
1link
program
A.
the program is run, any data the program reads from the
logical device SYSSINPUT is read
from
the
command
stream.
The $DECK command indicates that the input stream may contain
dollar signs.
The SEOD command signals end-of-file
for
the

When

data.

N/ $PRINT RUNTEST OUT

¢/ $EOD

( $ DECK

// $ RUN READFILE
N

_‘.J

// $ ASSIGN RUNTEST.OUT OUTFILE

/ $ ASSIGN SYS$INPUT INFILE
N/

$DECK/DOLLARS = "%

// $ CREATE TEST.COM
P
p
Pa

/’ $J0B HIGGINS

(?) INPUT STREAM FOR CREATE COMMAND
(2 INPUT STREAM FOR PROGRAM READFILE

The
CREATE
command
creates
the
command
procedure
file
TEST.COM
from
1lines
entered
into
the
input stream.
The
SDECK/DOLLARS command indicates
that
the
percent-sign, (%)
character
is
the
end-of-file
indicator
for
the
CREATE
command.
This allows the string § EOD to be read as an input
record, signalling the end of the input for the RUN command.
49

DEFINE
Creates a logical name table entry and
assigns
an
equivalence
name
string
to
the specified logical name.
The DEFINE command is similar
in function to the ASSIGN command;
however, its primary purpose is to

assign
logical
name/equivalence
name pairs for application-specific
uses other than for logical file specification assignments.

Format

DEFINE

logical-name

equivalence-name

Command Qualifiers

Default

/GROUP
/PROCESS
/SUPERVISOR_MODE
/SYSTEM
/USER;MODE

/PROCESS
/PROCESS
/SUPERVISOR_MODE
/PROCESS
/SUPERVISOR_MODE

Prompts

Log_Name:

logical—-name

Equ_Name:

equivalence-name

Command Parameters
logical-name

Specifies a 1- to
63-character
1logical
name
string.
If
the
string contains any characters besides alphanumeric or underscore
characters, enclose it in quotation marks (").

equivalence-name
Defines the 1-

to 63-character equivalence name to be
associated
with
the
1logical
name in the specified logical name table.
If
the
string
contains
other
than
alphanumeric
or
underscore
characters, it must be enclosed in double quotation marks (").

Description

If you enter more than one of the qualifiers /PROCESS, /GROUP, or
/SYSTEM,
or
both
of
the
gqualifiers
/SUPERVISOR
MODE
and
/USER_MODE, only the last qualifier entered is accepted.

For additional information on using loéical
2.2,

"Logical Names."

names,

see

Section

DEFINE

Command Qualifiers

/GROUP
Places the
1logical
name/equivalence
name
logical
name
table.
Other users who have

in their UICs

(user

identification codes)

pair
in
the
group
the same group number
can access the
logical

name.

The user privilege GRPNAM
group logical name table.

required

place

name

pair

the

/PROCESS
Places the logical name/equivalence
name
logical name table.
This is the default.

/SUPERVISOR*MODE
Specifies, for an entry in the process logical name
the logical name be entered in supervisor mode.

the

process

table,

that

This is the default for process
/SUPERVISOR_MODE
qualifier
is
the

group or

logical name table entries.
The
ignored when entries are made in
name tables.

system logical

/SYSTEM
Places the logical
name/equivalence
logical
name
table.
All
system

name
users

pair
in
can access

the
the

system
logical

name.

The

user

privilege

system logical

name

SYSNAM

required
to

place

name

the

table.

/USER_MODE
Specifies, for an entry in the process logical
the logical name be entered in user mode.

name

table,

that

A user mode logical name is practical
for
the
execution
of
a
single
image;
it
allows
an
1image
executing
in
a
command
procedure to redefine SYS$INPUT.
User mode entries
are
deleted
when any image executing in the process exits (that is, after any
DCL

command

user

program

that

execution),

when

a STOP

command

process

default,

logical

name

executes

table

entries

supervisor
mode.
The
/USER _MODE
qualifier
entries are made in the group or system logical

image

completes

issued.
are

made

1is
ignored
name tables.

when

DEFINE

Examples
l.

$ DEFINE
%

RUN

FPROCESS.NAME

LIERA

WAKE

The DEFINE command places the logical
name PROCESS_NAME
in
the process
logical
name table with an equivalence name of
LIBRA.
The program WAKE
can
translate
the
1logical
name
PROCESS_NAME
to
perform
some special action on the process
named

LIBRA.

DEFINE

DEASSIGN

TEMF:

DEREAL3

TEMP!:

The DEFINE
command
logical
name
TEMP:

creates
an
equivalence
and
places
the
name

name
for
the
in the process

logical name table.
The DEASSIGN command deletes the logical
name.
Note that two colons are required on the logical name
in the DEASSIGN command because the DEFINE command
does
not
from logical names, as the DEASSIGN
colons
trailing
remove
command does.

DELETE
Deletes

one

files

from a mass

storage

disk

volume.

If you specify /ENTRY, the DELETE command deletes one or more
entries
from a printer or batch job queue.
If you specify /SYMBOL, the DELETE
command deletes
a
local
or
global
symbol
name
assignment.
The
DELETE/ENTRY and DELETE/SYMBOL commands are each described under their
own headings.

Format

DELETE

file-spec,...

Command

Qualifiers

Default

/BEFORE [=time]
/ [NO] CONFIRM
/CREATED
/EXPIRED
/ [NO] LOG
/MODIFIED
/SINCE [=time]

/NOCONFIRM

/NOLOG

Prompts

File:

file-spec,...

Command

Parameters

file-spec,...
Specifies the names of one or more
files
to
be
deleted.
The
first file specification must contain a file name, file type, and
version number;
subsequent file specifications
must
contain
a
version
number.
You
can
specify
any of these fields as wild
cards.
To

delete more

with

Command

commas

(,)

than

one

file,

separate

plus

signs

(+).

the

file

specifications

Qualifiers

/BEFORE [=time]
Specifies

time

that only the files dated
earlier
be deleted.
You can specify one of the

absolute-time

An absolute date
for

TODAY

The

date

absolute

current
YESTERDAY

The

and

day,

absolute

nanosecond

time

and

date

month,
date

before

midnight.

time.

values

Use

the

specified

and

than
a
particular
following values:

time

year,

and

the

syntax
in

rules

Section

6.8.

representing

time

most

00:00

the

o'clock.

representing

recently

passed

DELETE

If you specify /BEFORE and do not specify

command assumes /BEFORE=TODAY.

value,

the

DELETE

Use the /CREATED, /EXPIRED, or /MODIFIED
qualifiers
to
request
that
only
files
created,
expired,
or
modified
before
the
specified time be deleted.
If none of
these qualifiers
is
specified,
the DELETE
command deletes
all
files created and
modified within the specified time.

/CONFIRM
/NOCONFIRM

Controls whether
the
DELETE
command
displays
the
file
specification
of
each
file before deleting and requests you to
confirm whether or not the file should actually be
deleted.
If
respond to a prompt with a Y,
you must
specify /CONFIRM,
you
the DELETE command will
followed by a carriage return, before
If you enter anything else, the file is not
file.
delete the
deleted.

By default,
files

the DELETE command does not request

confirmation

is deleting.

/CREATED

Specifies, when /BEFORE and/or /SINCE
is
specified,
that
files created within the defined time period be deleted.

/MODIFIED is the default if
/MODIFIED,

or /EXPIRED

none

is specified.

the

qualifiers

only

/CREATED,

/EXPIRED

Specifies, when /BEFORE and/or /SINCE
is
specified,
that
only
that reached their expiration dates within the specified
files
time be deleted.

If any file does not have an expiration date associated with
it,
it
is
assumed to have expired at the time the DELETE command is
issued.
(Files can be assigned expiration dates
when
they
are

created or
/LOG
/NOLOG

Controls

revised with RMS.)

whether

the

specification of each

By default,
files as

DELETE

file

that

command

it deletes.

the DELETE command does

it deletes

them.

/MODIFIED

not

Specifies, when /BEFORE and/or /SINCE are

displays

display

the

specified,

the
names

that

file
of

only

files
that were modified within
the defined
time period be
deleted.
A file's revision date is updated whenever the file
is
accessed and updated.

DELETE

/SINCE [=time]

Specifies that only the files dated later than a particular
be deleted.
You can specify one of the following values:

time

absolute-time

rules
syntax
Use the
An absolute date and time.
for date and time values specified in Section 6.8.

TODAY

The

absolute

YESTERDAY

The

absolute

date

current day, month,

nanosecond

date

before

and

time

and

time

specify

and year,

the

representing

at 00:00 o'clock.

representing

most

the
1

recently

passed

the

DELETE

request

midnight.

If you specify /SINCE and do not

command assumes /SINCE=YESTERDAY.

Use the /CREATED, /EXPIRED, or /MODIFIED

value,

qualifiers

that only files created, expired, or modified after the specified

the
specified,
If none of these qualifiers is
time be deleted.
command deletes all files created and modified within the
DELETE
specified time.

Examples

4 DELETE

. SUME 2
COMMON

The DELETE command deletes .the

file

current default disk and directory.

DELETE

COMMON.SUM;2

files

types of OLD from the default disk directory.
¢ DELETE

the

%.0QLYX1sx%

The DELETE command deletes all versions of
3.

from

with

file

GAMMASX
Xy RETA
ALFPHASTXTiX

files
The DELETE command deletes all versions of the
The command uses the
and GAMMA.TXT.
BETA.TXT,
ALPHA.TXT,
as a temporary default.
file type of the first input file
that version numbers (here specified as wild
however,
Note,
cards)

must be included in each file specification.

¢ DELETE ¥ DATSXK/BEFORE=01~JUN/LOG
SDELETE-T-DELETEDy DRAIDMALCOLMIASSIGN.DATSL deleted
CIFLETE-T-NELETED, DRAZICMALCOLMIBATOHMAVE
.DATH1 deleted
UOELETE«T~DELETEX, DEAZIIMALCOLMICANCEL
.DATS L deleted
YOFLETE-T-DFELETED: DEAZ2IIHMALCOLMIDEFINE
. AT
deleted
SOELETE-T-0FELETED: DRAZICMALCOLMIEXIT.NAT?L deleted

files with
THE DELETE command deletes all versions of all
file types of COM that were either created or updated before
June 1,

this year.

DELETE

$ DELETE/CONFIRM

CMALCOLM.TESTFILESIX.0RJ$X/SINCE=YESTERDAY

DEAZICMALCOLM.TESTFILESIAVERAG.ORJF
1,y delete? (Y or N)IY
NEA2ICMALCOLM
. TESTFILESISCANLINE.ORJF2y delete? (Y or N)IN
DEAIIMALCOLM.TESTFILESIWEATHER.ORJ$3y

The DELETE
types
of

requests confirmation

P DIRECTORY
FIF

N)IY

command examines all versions of files
with
file
OBJ
in
the subdirectory [MALCOLM.TESTFILES], and

locates those that were created or
that is, that were created today.

delete?

that

the

modified since
yesterday,
Before deleting each file,

file

should be deleted.

[.SURTESTI

such

file(s)

% GET PROTECTION SURTEST.DIR/FROTECTION=OWNERID
# DELETE SUBTEST.DIR?1
Before deleting the directory file SUBTEST.DIR, the DIRECTORY
command
1is
wused to verify that there are no files cataloged
in

the

directory.

The

SET

PROTECTION

protection
for the directory file so
then, the DELETE command deletes it.

command

that

redefines

the

it can be deleted;

DELETE/ENTRY
Deletes one or more entries from a printer
/ENTRY qualifier is required.

batch

job

queue.

The

Format

DELETE/ENTRY=jobid,...

queue-name

Additional Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts

Queue:

gueue-name

Command Parameters
queue-name

Specifies

the

name

the queue

in which

the

job(s)

exist.

Command Qualifiers

/ENTRY=jobid,...
Specifies the jobid(s) of one or more jobs to be deleted
from
a
printer
or batch job queue.
If you specify more than one jobid,
separate them with commas and enclose the list in parentheses.

The

job(s)

process

You

to be deleted must have been

any process

can delete

that

are

jobs

that

the

same

have

queued

group

not yet

currently being processed.

the

current

begun processing

current
process.

files

Examples

$ PRINT/ZHOLD
Joir

110

ALFHALTXT

entered

orn

aueude

SYS$SPRINT

[4
¢

DELETE/ZENTRY=110

SYS$FRINT

The PRINT command

queues

HOLD

a copy of

defer

its printing

the

entry

status,

the

file

until

ALPHA.TXT
a

later

time.

a
The

system displays the jobid, 110, and the name of the queue
in
which
the file was entered.
Later, the DELETE/ENTRY command
requests

that

deleted

from

the

queue

SYS$PRINT.

DELETE/ENTRY

B QUBMIT/HOLD/FARAMETERS=8CANLINE

DOFOR

Job 203 entered on aueue SYS$SEBATCH

F GQURMIT/AFTER=18300

WEATHER

Jobh 210 erntered orn aueue SYS$BATCH
¢

$ NELETE/ENTRY=(203,210)

SYS$RATCH

The SUBMIT commands spool the command procedures DOFOR.COM
DOFOR.COM is
and WEATHER.COM for processing as batch jobs.

queued in a HOLD status;
after

6:00

P.M.

Later,

WEATHER.COM is queued for execution
the DELETE/ENTRY command requests

that both these entries be deleted from the queue SYS$BATCH.

DELETE/SYMBOL
Deletes
global
table.

a symbol definition from a local
symbol
table
or
from
the
symbol
table,
or
deletes all symbol definitions in a symbol

Format

DELETE/SYMBOL

symbol-name

Command Qualifiers

Default

/ALL
/GLOBAL
/LOCAL

/LOCAL
/LOCAL

Prompts

Symbol:

Command

symbol-name

Parameters

symbol-name
Specifies the name of the symbol to be deleted.
By default,
the
DELETE/SYMBOL
command
assumes the symbol is in the local symbol
table for the current command procedure.

The

symbol-name parameter

required

unless /ALL

specified.

Description
If you specify both of the qualifiers
the
last
one
entered
1is accepted.
follow the DELETE command name.

/GLOBAL
and
The /SYMBOL

/LOCAL,
only
qualifier must

Command Qualifiers

/ALL

Specifies

that

all

deleted.

you

symbols defined at

the

/GLOBAL
Indicates

that

table

the

for

the

symbol

names

not

current

specified

current

the specified

specify

either

command level

symbol

name

symbol

/LOCAL

table

/GLOBAL,

all

are deleted.

the

global

symbol

process.

/LOCAL
Indicates that the symbol name
the current command level.

in the

local

symbol

table

for

DELETE/SYMBOL

Examples

¢ LDELETE/SYMROL/ALL
The DELETE/SYMBOL command deletes all symbol
the current command level.

definitions

% DELETE/SYMEOL/GLOEBAL FDREL
The DELETE/SYMBOL command deletes the symbol named PDEL
the global symbol table for the process.

from

DEPOSIT
Replaces the contents of a

specified location or

locations

virtual

memory.

The DEPOSIT command,
together
with
the
EXAMINE
command,
aids
debugging
programs
interactively.
The DEPOSIT command is similar
the DEPOSIT command of the VAX-11l Symbolic Debugger.

You can truncate

the DEPOSIT command to a

single letter,

in
to

Format

DEPOSIT

location

= data,...

Command Qualifiers
/ASCI1I
/BYTE
/DECIMAL
/HEXADECIMAL
/LONGWORD
/OCTAL
/WORD

Prompts

None.

Command

Parameters

location
Specifies the starting virtual address of a
locations whose contents are to be changed.

location or

series

The specified location must be within the virtual
address
space
of
the
1image
<currently
running in the process, and it must be
accessible for both reading and writing for user access mode.
You

can
specify
the
1location
wusing
any
valid
arithmetic
expression.
The
expression
can
contain arithmetic or logical
operators or symbol names which have been previously given values
with
DCL
assignment
statements.
The
DEPOSIT
command
automatically substitutes symbols with their current values
when
it evaluates the specified location.
The DEPOSIT and EXAMINE commands maintain a pointer to a
current
memory
location.
The
DEPOSIT command sets this pointer to the
byte following the last byte modified;
you
can
refer
to
this
pointer
using
the
symbol "." in subsequent EXAMINE and DEPOSIT

commands.
If the DEPOSIT command cannot
deposit
the
specified
data,
the pointer does not change.
The EXAMINE command does not
change the value of the pointer.

DEPOSIT

data, ...

Defines the data to be deposited into the specified
1location(s).
If
you
specify
a
1list,
separate
the items with commas;
the
DEPOSIT
command
writes
the
data
1in
consecutive
locations,
beginning with the address specified.

By default, the data is assumed to be in hexadecimal format;
the
DEPOSIT command converts the data to binary format before writing
it
1into
the
specified
1location.
When
non-ASCII
data
is
deposited,
the
DEPOSIT
command
automatically
performs symbol
substitution when

it evaluates data.

Description

When the DEPOSIT
command
completes,
it
displays
the
virtual
memory
address into which data is deposited and displays the new
contents of the location, as follows:
address:

contents

If the address specified can be read, but
not
written,
by
the
current
access
mode,
the DEPOSIT command displays the original
contents of the
location.
If
the
address
specified
can
be
neither
read nor written, the DEPOSIT command displays asterisks
(****)

the data

If you specify a
the
values
may

field.

list
be

of numeric values, some,
successfully
deposited

but
not
all,
of
before
an
access

violation occurs.
If an access violation occurs while ASCII
is being deposited, nothing is deposited.

data

Radix Qualifiers:
The radix default for
a
DEPOSIT
or
EXAMINE
command determines how the command interpreter interprets numeric

literals,
for
example,
256.
The
initial
default
radix
|is
hexadecimal;
all
numeric
literals
in
the
command
1line are
assumed to be hexadecimal values.
If a radix qualifier
modifies
the
command,
that
radix
becomes
the
default
for subsequent
EXAMINE and DEPOSIT commands, until another
qualifier
overrides
it.

For
$

example:

NEFOSIT/DECIMAL

00000388

900

254

206

The DEPOSIT command interprets both
the
location
900
and
the
value
256
as
decimal.
All
subsequent
DEPOSIT
and
EXAMINE
commands assume that numbers you enter for addresses and data are
decimal.
Note
that
the
DEPOSIT
command
always displays the
address location in hexadecimal.

Symbol values defined by = (Assignment
Statement)
commands
always interpreted in the radix in which they were defined.

.are

Note that hexadecimal values entered as deposit locations
or
as
data
to
be
deposited
must
begin
with a numeric character (0
through 9).
Otherwise, the command interpreter assumes that
you
have entered a symbol name and attempts symbol substitution.
You can use the radix operators %X, %D, or
%0
to
current default when you enter the DEPOSIT command.
b

DEFOSTT/ZOECIMAL

#%X900

This command deposits
the
decimal
specified as hexadecimal 900.

override
the
For example:

value

the

1location

DEPOSIT

Length Qualifiers:

The

initial

default

length

unit

for

the

DEPOSIT
command
is
a
longword.
If
a list of data values is
specified, the
data
1is
deposited
into
consecutive
1longwords
beginning
at
the
specified
location.
If
a length qualifier

modifies

the

subsequent

overrides

command,

EXAMINE

and

that

1length

DEPOSIT

becomes

commands,

the

until

default

another

for

qualifier

it.

Restriction on
Placement
of
Qualifiers:
The
DEPOSIT
command
analyzes
expressions
arithmetically.
Therefore,
qualifiers
(which must be preceded by /) are interpreted correctly only when
they appear immediately after the command name.

Command

Qualifiers

/ASCII
Indicates

that

the

specified data

converts
the
data
virtual memory.

its

binary

is ASCII.

The DEPOSIT

equivalent

before

command

placing

When you specify ASCII data, the command
interpreter
compresses
multiple
blanks
to
a
single
blank before writing the data in
memory;
to deposit an ASCII string containing
multiple
blanks,
enclose the string in quotation marks (").

When you specify /ASCII, or when ASCII mode is the
default,
any
literal numeric values you enter are assumed to be hexadecimal.

/BYTE
Requests

If you

that

data

deposited

specify data values

that

one

byte

are

longer

time.

than

a byte,

error

occurs.

/DECIMAL
Indicates
command

that
the
converts the

the
before

DEPOSIT
placing

The

DEPOSIT

before

placing

in virtual memory.

/HEXADECIMAL
Indicates
command

specified data
is
decimal;
data to its binary equivalent

that

the

converts

specified data

the

data

its

hexadecimal.

binary

equivalent

in virtual memory.

/LONGWORD
Requests

/OCTAL
Indicates
converts

that

data

that

the

data

deposited

specified data
to its binary

longword

octal;

equivalent

time.

the DEPOSIT
command
placing it in

before

virtual memory.
/WORD
Requests

that

the

data

deposited

a word

time.

DEPOSIT

Examples

RUN

MYFPROG

+
”~

EXAMINE 2780

000027801
¢ DEFOSIT
000027808
$ CONTINUE

1CHOE344
= 0
00000000

The RUN command executes the image MYPROG.EXE;
subsequently,
CTRL/Y
interrupts
the
program.
Assuming that the initial
defaults of /HEXADECIMAL and /LONGWORD
are
in
effect,
the
DEPOSIT
command
places
a
longword of 0Os in virtual memory
location 2780,

The CONTINUE command resumes execution of the
¢

DEFOSIT/ASCIIT

000020008

2000

FILE?

NAME:

TYFE:?

TYFEI ...

NAME?!

FILE!?

image.

The DEPOSIT command deposits character
data
at
hexadecimal
location 2C00 and displays the contents of the location after
modifying
it.
Since
the
current
default
1length
is
a
longword, the response from the DEPOSIT command displays full
longwords.
Trailing dots indicate that the remainder of
the
last
1longword
of
data
contains
information
that was not
modified by the DEPOSIT command.
¢

EXAMINE

9C0O

Q00009C0:

BLOI7NES

Q0000YC0O:

00000000

Q0000YC4Y

Look

4 DEFPOSIT + = 0

¢ DEFOSIT/ZBYTE

g DEFOSIT

= 1

+2 = 55

Hex

Nerosit

location

longworg

Put 1 bwte a2t next location

Derosit 55 nesxt

QO000PCHT

00000000 0000000 0000000E

DEFOSIT/ZLLONG

00O0OVLTE

200

= OCy

ODy

]

Derosit longwords

The
sequence
of
DEPOSIT
commands
in
the
above
example
illustrates
how
the
DEPOSIT
command
changes
the current
position pointer.
Note that after
you
specify
/BYTE,
all
data is deposited and displayed in bytes, until the /LONGWORD
qualifier restores the system default.

Define 8 base address
P
# BASE = XX200
Define offset from base
I
¢ LIST = BASE+AXA0
g DEFOSIT/DECIMAL LIST = 1,22y333,4444
Q0000001 00000022 00000333 00004444
000002408

¢ EXAMINE/ZHEX LISTILIST + 0C !

Q00002408

000N000L

Disrlaw results in hex

DOVO001LS 00000140 Q0001150

The
assignment
statements
define
a
base
address
in
hexadecimal and a label at a hexadecimal offset from the base
address.
The DEPOSIT command reads the list
of
wvalues
and
deposits
each
value
into
a
1longword,
beginning
at
the
specified
1location.
The
EXAMINE
command
requests
a
hexadecimal display of these values.

DIFFERENCES
Compares the
records that

contents of two
do not match.

disk

files

and

creates

listing

the

Format

DIFFERENCES

input-file~-spec

[compare-file-spec]

Command Qualifiers

Default

/COMMENT DELIMITERS [=characters,...]
/IGNORE=characters,
...
/LINE WIDTH=n

/MATCH=size

/MATCH=3

/MAXIMUM_DIFFERENCES=n
/MERGED [=n]
/MODE=radix, ...
/OUTPUT=file~spec
/SEPARATED
/SLP
/WINDOW=size

/MERGED=1

/MODE=ASCII
/OUTPUT=SYSSOUTPUT
/NOSEPARATED
/WINDOW=15

File Qualifiers

/CHANGE_BAR[=[c]
[, [NO]NUMBER] ]

Prompts

File

input-file-spec

File

compare-file-spec

Command

Parameters

input—-file-spec

Specifies

the name of

the primary

input

The file specification must include a
No wild cards are allowed in the file

file

compared.

file name
and
specification.

file

type.

compare-file-spec
Specifies the name of the secondary input file
to
be
compared.
Any nonspecified fields default to the corresponding field of the
primary input file specification.

If you do not specify a secondary

command

uses

the

lowest

input

version of

file,

the

the primary

DIFFERENCES

input

file.

Description
Use

the DIFFERENCES

command

find

out

whether

two

files

are

identical and, if not, how they differ.
DIFFERENCES compares the
two files specified, on a record-by-record basis, and produces an
output file that lists the differences, if any.

DIFFERENCES

The qualifiers for the DIFFERENCES
according to their

functions,

command

can

as follows.

Qualifiers that request DIFFERENCES
record are:

ignore

categorized

data

each

/COMMENT DELIMITERS
/IGNORE
These qualifiers allow you to define
characters
comments and characters to ignore while comparing

example,

extra blank lines,

By default,

DIFFERENCES

tabs within lines.

compares

every

that
denote
files -- for

character

1in

each

record.

Qualifiers that control the format of the
in the list of differences are:

information produced

/CHANGE_BAR
/LINE_WIDTH
/MERGE
/MODE
/SEPARATED
/SLP

By default, DIFFERENCES merges differences
it
finds
in
the
files
being compared, and lists each record in the input file
that has no match in the output file, followed
by
the
first
record that it finds that does have a match.
You can specify

combinations

qualifiers

request

output
1listing
from DIFFERENCES that includes the comparison
in more than one format.
However, SLP output is
incompatible

with

all

other

Qualifiers

types

that control

output.

the extent of

the comparison are:

/MATCH
/MAXIMUM DIFFERENCES
/WINDOW

By default, DIFFERENCES reads
every
record
in
the
primary
input
file,
and looks for a matching record in the secondary
input file.
It terminates each search if it does not
find
a
match
within 15 records.
Records are considered matched only
if three sequential records are found in each
file
that
are
identical.

DIFFERENCES output is written by default to
the
current
output
device,
that
1is,
to
SYSSOUTPUT.
Use the /OUTPUT qualifier to
request DIFFERENCES to write the output to an alternate
file
or
device.

Command Qualifiers
/COMMENT_DELIMITERS[=characters,...]
Requests that lines that are comments
not
be
included
in
the
comparison.
If
a
specified
comment
character
or characters
appears as the first character in an
input
record,
DIFFERENCES
ignores the record in the comparison.

DIFFERENCES

You can specify up to four
more
than
one,
separate

the

list

comment characters.
the characters with

If
you
commas and

specify
enclose

character

itself

in parentheses.

You can specify characters either by using
or by using one of the following keywords:
Keyword

the

Character

COLON
COMMA
EXCLAMATION
FORM
LEFT
RIGHT
SEMI
SLASH
SPACE
TAB

Colon (:)
Comma (,)
Exclamation point
Form feed
Left bracket ([)
Right bracket (1)
Semi-colon (;)
Slash (/)
Space
Horizontal tab

(!)

If you do not include a comment
character,
DIFFERENCES
assumes
the
following default comment characters for the associated file
types:

File Type

Default Comment Character

CBL

and

;

CMD

and

;

CcOoM

1
and

FOR

All
If

the

others

comment

and

;
character

(either

explicitly

default)

Iis

either
an
exclamation
point
(!) or semicolon (;), DIFFERENCES
also ignores any comments on the right-hand side of a
statement.
If
you also specify /IGNORE=TRAILING_BLANKS, DIFFERENCES ignores
multiple blank spaces or tabs immediately preceding
the
comment
character as well.

/IGNORE=characters,...
Specifies one or more special characters to be ignored during
comparision.
You
can
request
DIFFERENCES
to
ignore

the
the

following:

BLANK_LINES
COMMENTS

Blank

lines

between

data

Lines

beginning with

/COMMENT DELIMITERS

FORM_FEEDS

comment

character

qualifier

non-default

Form

feed
characters
characters before

feed

lines

comment

(use

to designate

the

one or

characters)

(DIFFERENCES
removes
comparing records)

form

TRAILING_BLANKS

Extra blank characters at
text
(DIFFERENCES strips
before comparing records)
SPACING

Extra

blank

spaces

(DIFFERENCES

a
By

default,

each

file

the

and

single

blank

DIFFERENCES

reports

all

tabs

compresses

before

command

of
a
blanks

1line
of
and tabs

within

1lines

multiple

comparing
compares

differences.

the end
trailing

blanks

text

tabs

records)

every

character

DIFFERENCES

/LINE_WIDTH=n

Specifies the width of lines in the output listing.

The minimum value for the line width, n,

is 30.

unless output is
By default, output is 132 characters wide,
1In this case, the output line width is
directed to the terminal.
controlled by the terminal line width.

/MATCH=s1ize

The
Controls the number of records to be included in a match.
size value can be specified as a decimal number between 2 and 20.
By default, after DIFFERENCES finds unmatched records, it assumes
that the files match after it finds 3 sequential records that
match.

Specify a match size to override the default value of 3.
/MAXIMUM DIFFERENCES=n

Specifies that the command is to
records have been found.

after

terminate

unmatching

If you specify /MAXIMUM_DIFFERENCES, DIFFERENCES terminates after
locating n unmatched records. The output file lists differences
only on records compared until the maximum has been reached.

By default, DIFFERENCES compares every record

specified

the

input file.

/MERGED [=n]

that

Requests

the

output

file

contain

merged

list

listing,

with

one

include

The value n is a decimal number from 1 to 10
differences.
indicating the number of matched records to list after each list
of unmatched records.

By default, DIFFERENCES

produces

merged

matched line listed after each set of unmatched records.

Use /MERGED to override the default value of n, or to

merged listing with other types of output.
/MODE=radix,...

Specifies the format of the output listing. You can request that
the output be formatted in one or more radix modes by specifying
the following keywords:
ASCII
HEXADECIMAL
OCTAL

You can truncate any of these keywords to 1 or more characters.
By default, DIFFERENCES writes the output file in ASCII.

specify

you

more than one code, the output listing contains the file

comparison in each output mode.

If you specify /SLP, the /MODE qualifier is ignored.
/OUTPUT=file-spec

Defines an output file to receive the output difference list. By
the output 1is written to the current default output
default,
device (SYSSOUTPUT). When you specify /OUTPUT, you can control
as
the defaults applied to the output file specification,
"Rules for Entering Output File
described in Section 6.3.3,
Qualifiers." The output file type always defaults to DIF.
68

DIFFERENCES

/SEPARATED
/NOSEPARATED
Controls

whether

DIFFERENCES

creates

listing

sequential
1list
of unmatched records.
primary input
file
are
1listed
first,
records in the compare file.
By

default,

DIFFERENCES

creates

that

Unmatched
followed

only

output

file

contains

records in the
by
unmatched

merged

list

suitable

for

differences.

/SLP
Requests

DIFFERENCES

produce

input

to the SLP editor.
If you specify /SLP you cannot specify any of
the
following
output
file
qualifiers:
/MERGED,
/SEPARATED,

/CHANGE_BAR.
Use
SLP
the

the output file produced by the /SLP qualifier
as
input
to
to update the primary input file specified, that is, to make
first input file match the second input file.

When you specify /SLP and you do not specify /OUTPUT,
writes
the
output file to a file with the same file
primary input file and a filetype of DIF.

DIFFERENCES
name as the

/WINDOW=size
Controls
as

the

number

records

before

listing

record

unmatched.

The window size
no maximum.
By default,
15
records

a decimal

number

the window size is
in
the
compare

and

searches
record as

Specify a window
before
1listing
record

a minimum value

15, that is, DIFFERENCES
file
before
1listing
a

unmatched.

with

)

size
the

the

to control the number of records to
search
record as unmatched and continuing with the

input

file.

File Qualifiers

/CHANGE_BAR[=[c]
[, [NO]NUMBER] ]
Requests that the output contain
a
file(s) with a change bar character
that

not

1listing
of
the
next to the lines

associated
in the file

match.

The

change bar
will appear in
match.

character,

By default,
character.

exclamation point

the

You

can

also

You

can

specify:

¢, specifies
left margin next to

control

NUMBER

NONUMBER

whether

not

line

the

one-character
records that do

used

listing

the

includes

code
that
not have a

change

1line

bar

numbers.

numbers

If not specified, NUMBER is
are printed in the listing.

(!)

line

the

numbers

1line

numbers

To specify both a change bar character and to request no
separate
the
options
with
a
comma
and
enclose
parentheses, for example, /CHANGE_BAR=(*,NONUMBER)
.

numbers,
them
in

default;

that

DIFFERENCES

Examples

Figure 1 shows
the
output
from
the
DIFFERENCES
command
examples
described below.
Unless otherwise noted, the output is displayed on
the current SYSSOUTPUT device.
1.

¢ DIFFERENCES COPYDROC.COM

The DIFFERENCES command compares the contents of the two most
the current
in
COPYDOC.COM
file
the
of
versions
recent

DIFFERENCES compares every character
default directory.
every record and displays the results in the terminal.

SFACING) COFYLROC.COM
NORE=
(COMMENTS
$ DIFFERENCES/IG

The DIFFERENCES command compares the same files,

but

ignores

1lines beginning with
all
1is,
(that
lines
comment
all
1in
tabs
exclamation points), and ignores multiple blanks or
input lines.

$ DIFFERENCE /Z0UTFUT

$.. COPYDOC.COM/SEFARATEDN/CHANGE..BAR=NONUMERER
DIF

QUTFUT

FILE

SY:!COPYDOC.DIFs#1

The DIFFERENCES command compares the same files, but requests

one . that lists the differences in each file
two listings:
and one that lists the
separately, rather than merging them;
first input file with change bar characters next to the lines
The
file.
input
second
in the
that do not have a match
thus, only the
is a file qualifier;
/CHANGE BAR qualifier
is
by default)
file COPYDOC.COM;2 (the primary input file,
listed with change bars indicating the lines that do not have
an exact match in the file COPYDOC.COM;1l.

Both types of outpu

are

written

the

requested

file,

COPYDOC.DIF.

4 DIFFERENCES COPYDOC.COM CMALCOLM. TESTFILESI

The DIFFERENCES command compares the
versions of the file COPYDOC.COM in

existing
highest
the current default

directory with the copy in the directory MALCOLM.TESTFILES.

DIFFERENCES

[Output for Examele il
KKK KK KK K K 3K 3K 2K K 3K 3K K 3K KK K K 3K K K 3K ok 3 3K 3K 2K K 3K 3K 3 3K KK 3K 3 3 2K K 0k 3 3K K K 3K 30K KK KK XK K 3 K K 0K 0K 3K KK K K
KRKKAOKKAKKKKOKKKKKKKKKKNkKkX FILE COMPARE UTILITY XKokKKKokodokkkokkkok
Kok Kk kKKK Kk

KRKKKAKKAORKKOKKKKKKKKKKKKKK DIF ~= VERSION 1.0 XRKAKKKK KKK AKAKKKKKK
KK KKK KKKKK
3K K 3K K 3Kk 3K 3K 3K K 3K 3K 3K K 3K K 3K 3K 3 3K 3K 3K 3K 33K K 30K 3K 3K 3 3 3K K 3 KK ok 3k 3 oK K 3K K ok 3 3K 3 KoK K KK K K KK K KK 3K K KK KK Kk 3k K

KKK

K KK 3K 3K KK KK 3K 3K K 3K 3 3K 3K 3K K K 3K 3K K 30K 3K 3 3K oK oK 3K K K 3K 3K oK K

3K o s K e o 3k oK 3 ok ok 3 K 3 ok ok 3k ok Kok

3K ok K 5k Xk ok ok ok

KAKKAKORKKORKKARKKKK
KK KkKkX MERGED LIST OF DIFFERENCES kX30K¥O0KKKKKKK
KKK KK KKK K
KK KK KKK KK KK K KK K K 3K KK 3K oK 3K K 3K K 3K 3K 3K 3 3K 3K K 3K 2K 3K 3K 0K oK 3K 3K o 3K o K 3K 3K K KK KK KK K 3K KK K Kok Kok K kK Kk ok K

FILE

SY:!COFYDOC.COM33

Command

into 2 master

=rocedure to

cory

311l

files with

file

tere

TXT

file named MASTER.DROLC armd to rrint 20 cories

3
% | of MASTER.DOC
KKK K KK K K KO K K K 3K KK KOK 0K K KK K KKK
FILE SY:COPYDOC.COM:2

1
2

4%
¢

'
1

Command Frocedure to cory a8ll files with file ture of TXT
irmto 3 master file mnamed MASTER.DOC anmd to rrint 10 cories

MASTER.DOC

3K ok 3K B 3k 30 o 8 2K 38 K K KK K 3K K K 3K 3 3K K 3K K K K K 3K K K 2K K 3K KK K 3K K K K K K 3K K K K 3K K oK K kK
2K K 30 2K 5K 30 oK K 2K 3 3K K K 2 K 3K 3K K K 3 K K 3K K 3K 3K KK KK K K 3K K K 3K 3K K K 3K K K oK 3 K0k K KK KK K
FILE

SY!COFPYDOC.COM#3

DELETE

PURGE

COFY

MASTER.DOC#x%
X.TXT

%X.TXT

MASTER
. IIOC

9
% PRINT/COPIES=20/L.OWER
20K 3K K 0K K K 3K 3K 3K KK K K K K K K K K KK K KK K
FILE

MASTER.DOC

SY:!COPYDOC.COM32
6

FURGE

COPY

*.TXT
X.TXT MASTER.DOC

FPRINT/COFIES=10/L.OWER

MASTER.DOC

Qutsut for Examrle 24]

KKK KK K K 3K 3K 3K 3K KK 3K K 3K K K K KK 3K 3K 3K K 3 3 3K 30K 3K 3K 300K o 3 oK 3K KK 30K K K K K 38 oK 3K 3K K 3K 3K K0k 3K K K ok K K K K K KoKk K
KRR K KKK IOKKKK KKKk FILE COMFARE UTILITY kokokokokokdkokokkokokokkskskok
dkokk sk kok ok ok
KRKKAOKKIOKAKKIOKKKKKKKNKRKNKRX DIF == VERSTION 1.0 3HK3O0KKKAOKK
KKK KKK KKK K KKK K
3K KKK K KK KK K KK K KKK 3K 30K 3K 3K 3K 3K 30K 30K 3K K K 3K 3K K 0K 30K 5K 30K K 5K 3K 3K 30Kk oK K 30K 3K 30K K K 3K K 3K K KKK K KKK K K K

3K OK 3K KK KKK 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K KK 3K 30K 30K 3K oK 3 5K KK 33K 3K 30K 30K 30K 360K 3K K 3K K 30K 30K 3 oK 3K KK 30K 3K KK KK K KKK 0K KK K K K K
XKKKKOKKIOKKKOKKKKKROK
KKKk MERGED LIST OF DIFFERENCES XX0KKKKAOKKKKKKK
KKK KKK KK
KKK KK K KKK 3K 3K KK K KK 3K 3K 5K 3K 30K KK KK oK 3K 3 K 3 3K 3 K K 30K 3K 3K 3K K 3K 3K K 3K ok 3K 3K 0K K KKK KK KKK K KKK KK KK K K

FILE

SY:COPYDOC.COM33
6

DELETE

7
g

%
%

PURGE %.,TXT
COPY X.TXT

MASTER.DOCS
X

FRINT/COPIES=20/LOWER

MASTER
. DOC

MASTER.DOD

KK KHOK 3K KK K K 3K KKK KK 3K 3K K K KK KKk sk ok K
FILE

SYICOFYDOC.COM$2

FURGE

7
8

%
¢

COFPY X.TXT MASTER.DOC
PRINT/COFIES=10/L0OWER

%*,TXT

Figure 1

MASTER.DOC

Sample Output of DIFFERENCES Command

DIFFERENCES

lOutPut for Examrle 3[
KKK KK 3K K K 3K KK 3K K 30K K 3K 3K K 3K 3 K oK 3K K K 3 K 3K 3K K 30K 33K K 3OK K K K 3K K 3K K KKK KK KK 3K 0K K K K K K K ok oK 3K K Kk XK K
KXRAOKKKRKOKKRRKKKAORXKKKRXRX FILE COMPARE UTILITY XKKKKKKKIOKKNKKKKKAKKK
KKK KKK
KK AR AKRKKKKKKOKKKKR
XK DIF

~—

VERSION

1.0

KK0KKKKKKAOKAKKAKOKK
KK KKK KKK KK

83K 20 3 3K ok 3K oKk 3 3K oK K K K K K KOk KK K 3K K 30K 3K 5K K K K 3k 3K 3K 3K K K K 3K 3K K KK 3K K KK 3 KK 9K 3k B

KK 3K K o

kK K oK K K K 3 K K oK ¢ 3K 3K K oK K 3K K K K

K 3K

3K K K K K oK 3K K Kk K K K Xk

3 K 3 3k KK 3 K KK K K 3K K 2K KK KK KOKOKOK K 3K K 30k ok KK 3k XK K KK XKk Xk

OUTFUT FOR FILE d0RKKKKKRAKOKNKK
KKK AOKK KK KK
KKK KKK OR KKK K AOK KKK KKK K AOKKAKKkKK SYICOPYLOC
. COM#F 3 sokokok 3ok okok ok kok ok ook ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok k ok k
3K 3K 3K 3K ok 3k K oK oK 2Kk K 3K K oK 3K K K 3K K KK K K K K K 3K KK 3K 3K K 3K 30K K 3K K KK KK K KKK KK 3K K K KK KK KK XKk K KK K X K

PR
R ER RS H

okkdokkokkok
KKk KKKkkX KKk CHANGE-ERAR

Commandg

I
1

into 8 master
aof MASTER.DOC

srocedure

file

cory

rnamed

3l1l

files

MASTER.DOC

with
armd

file ture
to

rrint

TXT

cories

!
]

DELETE
FURGE
COPY

MASTER.DOCS
%
X.TXT

%, TXT

MASTER.LOC

PRINT/COFIES=20/L0OWER

MASTER.DOC

K O K K 3 3K 3K oK o K K 3 3K 3 K 3Kk K 3K ok K 3K K KK 3K KK 30K oK 3K 3K K 3Kk K oK K 3K 3K K K K K K K ok K 30K KK K 3K K X oK K K K Xk K

kxR
KKK ROk KKK KkKKKkkk LISTED DIFFERENCES R0KKKKKK
KKK KKAOKAKK K KKK K KK KX
33K K 2K K 3 0K o Kk K 3Kk K 3K 3K K K K 2k 3k 3K K KK KKK KK 30K oK KK 30K K KK XK KK KK 3K 3K K KK KK 3K K K 2K K K XK K XK

RECORDS

WITHOUT

2
6

%! into
% DELETE

Command

FROM FILE

MATCH

rrocedure

a master file
MASTER.DOC#X

cory

SY:COFPYDOC.COM33

FILE

3ll

SYICOFYDOC.COM;2

files

nemed MASTER.DOC

FPURGE

8
?

%
4%

COPY X,TXT
MASTER .1IOC
FRINT/COPIES=20/L.00ER MASTER.DOC

with
and

file
to

ture

rrint

TXT

cories

X.TXT

RECORDS

WITHOUT A

FROM

FILE

MATCH

Command

imto

6
7
8

%
%
%

FURGE X.TXT
COFPY X, TXT MASTER.DOC

Procedure
mester

file

FRINT/COFIES=10/LOWER

cory

SY!CORPYDOC.COM:2

FILE

3ll

SY:!COPYNOC.COM:?3

files

named MASTER.DOC

with
amd

file
to

ture

srint

TXT

cories

MASTER.DOC

Outrut

for

K KK oK K KoK 3K KK K 3K K K K 3K K K K K K 3K K K K 3K 3KOK 3K oK 30K 3K 3K K 3K 3K K KK 3K K oK 3K K K K 3K 30K 3K oKk 3k KoK ok 3 ok ok sk K

3K K 3

KKK KKK O

Exsmele

IR KOK KKK KK

FILE

COMPARE

UTILITY

RO KKK KK HOIOKOKKKIOKAOK
KKK KKK KK DIF ~— VERSTION 1.0
33K 3 3K 3k K 3K 3k 3K 5K 3Kk K 3k 3K 3K 3K 3k 3K 5K 3K 3 3 3K 3k K 3K K oK 3k Sk K K 3K K K K K 3k 3k 3K K ok

kokokokokokok
ok ok ok kok ok sk ok ok kK ok
KKkkdo0kKKK
¥k 3k ok kKK Xk 0k Kk KKk XK Kk
3 3Kk K o 3k k 3K ok ok Kk K 3k ok 3K K K 3K K 3k X0k K ok K
4

KKK KK K KKK K K K

KA KKK KKK

08 K0 K K 80K K ok KK 3K 3K KK K 2K 30K 3K ok oK K 0K oK k0K K K K 3K 3K K 3KOK K KK K K K 30K X K 0K X 0K 0K K

KRR OOkK MERGED

LLIST

KK 3K K K K 3 KKk 5K 3K K AOKOKOK K K 3K K K 3 K 3k K ok ok 3K ok K sk ok ok ok

DIFFERENCES

kKKK
K%K ¥ 0k K K 30K 4 k0K ok Xk &

oK 3K oK oK 3K ok oK ok 3K K K KK K 3K 3K K K S oK 0K K 0K oK K K K K K

NONE

Figure

(Cont.)

Sample Output

DIFFERENCES

Command

DIRECTORY
Provides
files.

list

files

information

about

file

group

Format

DIRECTORY

[file-spec,...]

Command Qualifiers
/BRIEF
/FULL
/OUTPUT=file-spec
/PRINTER

Default

/OUTPUT=SYS$OUTPUT

Prompts
None.

Command

Parameters

file-spec,...
Specifies one or more files to be listed.
specification determines what file(s) are

The syntax of
a
file
listed, as follows:

If you do
not
enter
a
file
command lists all files in your

specification,
the
DIRECTORY
current default directory.

If you specify only a device name,
your default directory name.

Whenever the file specification does not include a
file
name
and
file
type,
all
versions
of all files in the specified
directory are listed.

If a file specification contains a file name and/or file
type
and no version number, the DIRECTORY command lists the highest
existing version.

If a
file
specification
DIRECTORY command assumes

the DIRECTORY

contains
only
a
a null file type.

command

file

uses

name,

the

If
you
specify
more
than
one
file,
separate
the
file
specifications with either commas (,) or plus signs (+).
You can
use wild cards in place of the directory, file name,
file
type,

or
version fields of a file specification
satisfy the components you specify.

list

all

files

that

Command Qualifiers

/BRIEF
Lists only the file name, type,
listed, as shown in Figure 2.

and

version of

each

file

shown

1in

/FULL
Lists

all

Figure

information about

each

file

to be

listed,

DIRECTORY

/OUTPUT=file-spec
Requests that the DIRECTORY command output be written to
specified rather than to the current SYSSOUTPUT device.

the

file

/PRINTER
Queues a copy of the command output to the system
printer.
The
output
file
1is
identified
as
DIRECT.LOG.
If
you
specify
/PRINTER, you cannot specify /OUTPUT.

Examples
l.

DIRECTORY

The DIRECTORY command
disk and directory.

$ DIRECTORY
The

lists

all

files

the

current

default

DIRECTORY

command

lists

all

versions

the

file

$ NTRECTORY ALFPHATXT»RETAyGAMMA
The DIRECTORY command lists the most recent versions
of
the
files
ALPHA.TXT,
BETA.TXT,
and
GAMMA.TXT
in
the current
default directory.

B NIRECTORY/ZFULL/FPRINTER
The DIRECTORY command prints a
the current default directory.

$ ONTRECTORY

full

listing

all

files

1in

QLR
DEAZIIRIRMSLIE,

The DIRECTORY command lists the highest versions of all files
named
RMSLIB.OLB
in all first level (user file) directories
on the disk DBA2.

$ DIRECTORY

L. TESTFILES

Lists
all
files
subdirectory file,
default directory.

The following
in Figure 2.
Disk

notes

are

in
the
subdirectory
TESTFILES.
The
TESTFILES.DIR, is cataloged in the current

keyed

the

sample DIRECTORY command

listings

and directory name

Date and time

the DIRECTORY command was

File

name,

type,

and

File

identification

version number
number

the

issued
each

file

format:

(file-number ,file-sequence-number)
Number
blocks

of blocks
allocated

occupied by
for the file

the

file

and

the

number

DIRECTORY

File

Date

code.

The

Code

Meaning

(null)
C
L

and

time

code

file
file
file
the

one of

the following:

is noncontiguous
is contiguous
is locked
file was

created or

User
identification
code
of
protection code associated with

the
the

last modified

file's
file, in

owner,
and
the format:

the

[group,member] [system,owner ,group,world]
Summary of

information,

TOTAL OF

the

in-use./allocated

format:
BLOCKS

Date and time that this version of
and the revision number

the

IN XXXXX.

file was

FILES

last

revised,

DIRECTORY

AVERAGE.X

DIRECTORY DBA2:CMALCOLMIE))

20-JUN-78

10311

AVERAG
. COM7E1 @)
AVERAGE .DAT s 1
AVERAGE .EXE$ 9

6 25-JaN-78 15:39 @)

45
.

AVERAGE .FOR3$2

22-MAR-78

09327

19-AFR~78

09351

09:50
16127
16%27
10:28

AVERAGE .LIS32

AVERAGE .OR.J3 9

19-AFR-78
12~JUN-78
12-JUN-78

AVERAGE . OUTs 1

19-AFR-78

TOTAL OF 57./100. BLOCKS IN 7. FILESQ

DIRECTORY

AVERAGE .X/BRIEF

DIRECTORY DEAZ:CMALCOLMI @)
AVERAGE
. COMs 1

AVERAGE JDATH 1
AVERAGE EXE$ 9
AVERAGE .FOR$ 2
AVERAGE
LIS #2

AVERAGE
« ORJF 9
AVERAGE .OUT 5 1

DNIRECTORY

AVERAGE «X/FULL

NIRECTORY IIIHA:?:[IMALCULM.’JG
20~ JUN=-78 10:1.1.@

1./5.
@

Q- on-78 16:3w"

1.75.,
19-AF R-78 10128(6.)

22-MAR~78 09:2 7

AVERAGE . COM3 1 @)

(6334,120) @)

AVERAGE + IIAT 5 1

(13123,34)

AVERAGE + EXE 9

(22776124)

AVERAGE o FOR$ 2

(227515 31)

F122y11

CRWEDyRWEDy
RWED, R

[122,11

CRWED,RWEDsRWEDSRI

£122y11

CRWEDsRWEDyRWED
R

[122,17

CRWENyRWEL
RWED R

£122v11

CRWEDNyRWELs
RWED R

£122,11

CRWED
s RWEDy RWEL y K]

12211

[RUWEDyRWEDy RWEDyR]

4%, /770,

19-AFR~78

275,

19-AFR~78 09:50

AVERAGE W L.IS352

(11323156)

5:75,

12~ JUN-78

16327

AVERAGE + DR.J5 9

(13051,71)

2.78,

12+ JUN~-78

16327

AVERAGE » OUT 3 1

(7026741)

1./75,

19-AFR-78

10:28

TOTAL OF S97./7100. BLOCKS IN 7. F'IL.ESO

Figure 2

Sample Output of DIRECTORY Command

DISMOUNT
Releases

volume

previously

accessed

with

a MOUNT

command.

Format

DISMOUNT

device—-name|:]

Command

Qualifiers

Default

/ [NO] UNLOAD

/UNLOAD

Prompts

Device:

Command

device-name

Parameters

device-name
Specifies the name of
specify
a
physical
physical

device
and/or
a
unit
respectively.

the
device
to
be
dismounted.
You
can
device name or a logical name assigned to a
name.
If
you
omit
a
controller
designation
number, they default to controller A, and unit 0,

Description
If

the

until

volume

all

DISMOUNT

was

users

command

device.

mounted

who

/SHARE,

mounted

deassigns

the

not

actually

dismount

it.

logical

name

dismounted

However,

associated

the

with

the

If the device was allocated with an ALLOCATE command, it
remains
allocated
after
the
volume
is
dismounted
with
the DISMOUNT
command.
If the device was implicitly
allocated
by
the
MOUNT

command,

the

DISMOUNT

command

If the volume was mounted
even
if
other users are

SYSNAM

user

volumes,
Note

privileges

deallocates

/GROUP or
currently

are

required

respectively.

that

the

and

dismounting

/SYSTEM,
accessing
to

volume

done

files

the

volume

issuing

it
it.

dismount

is not completed until all open
closed.
Thus, a substantial amount

time
you
dismount.

it.

time

can

1is
dismounted
The GRPNAM and

group

and

system

the

file

system

volume
pass

have

been

between

the

1issue
the
DISMOUNT command and the completion of the
Always wait for the drive to unload before you
remove
(you

can

the SHOW DEVICES

verify

that

command).

dismount

has

completed

DISMOUNT

Command Qualifiers
/UNLOAD
/NOUNLOAD

Controls whether the DISMOUNT command unloads the physical device
on which the volume is mounted and makes the device not ready.
use the
By default, the DISMOUNT command unloads the device;
a ready
in
volume
and
device
the
keep
to
/NOUNLOAD qualifier
state.

Examples

PAYUOL

MT:

MOUNT

ODISMOUNT

TARE

TAPE

The MOUNT command mounts the tape whose volume identification
and assigns the logical name
is PAYVOL on the device MTAO:
the volume is not shareable.
default,
By
device.
the
to
TAPE

releases access to the volume,
command
DISMOUNT
The
deletes the logical name TAPE.
and
device,
deallocates the

% MOUNT/SHARE DRAZ:

DOC.FILES

BODISMOUNT DERA3ZE

The MOUNT command mounts the volume labeled DOC_FILES on

device

DBA3.

the

Other users can issue MOUNT commands to access

the device. The DISMOUNT command shown in this example
deaccesses the device for the process issuing the command.
If other users still have access to the volume, the volume
remains mounted.

% NIKECTORY DMAZIEX]
N

no sueh

files

P UISMOUNT/NOUNLOAL DIMAZRS
RACK.UP
B INTTIALIZE DMAZ2:

The DIRECTORY command ensures that no files remain on the
RKO6/RK07 volume mounted on the device DMA2. The DISMOUNT
dismounts the volume; the /NOUNLOAD qualifier requests that
the volume remain in a ready state. Then, the INITIALIZE
command reinitializes the volume.

DUMP
Displays or prints the contents of a file or volume in ASCII, decimal,
hexadecimal,

or octal data format.

Format

DUMP

file-spec

Command Qualifiers

Default

/ASCII

/HEXADECIMAL

/BLOCKS=(START:n,END:m)
/BYTE
/DECIMAL
/HEADER
/HEXADECIMAL
/LONGWORD
/NUMBER [=n]
/OCTAL

/WORD
/HEXADECIMAL
/HEXADECIMAL
/WORD
/HEXADECIMAL

/OUTPUT [=file~-spec]

/OUTPUT=SYSSOUTPUT

/PRINTER

/RECORDS

/WORD

Prompts

File:

file-spec

Command

Parameters

file-spec

Specifies the file or volume whose contents are to be displayed.

Description

By default, the DUMP command formats its
output
in
hexadecimal
words.
You
can
specify
the
precise
format
of
the dump by
including
a
radix
qualifier
(/ASCII,
/OCTAL,
/DECIMAL,
or
/HEXADECIMAL)
and/or
a
length
qualifier
(/BYTE,
/WORD,
or
/LONGWORD).
The valid combinations of these qualifiers are:
/BYTE/HEXADECIMAL
/BYTE /OCTAL
/WORD/DECIMAL
/WORD/HEXADECIMAL
/WORD/OCTAL
/LONGWORD /HEXADECIMAL

All other

combinations

Dumping Files:

are

invalid.

When you dump files,

you

can

request

that

the

entire
file
be dumped, or you can specify the /BLOCKS qualifier
to indicate a range of virtually contiguous blocks in the file to
be

dumped.

The volume

that contains

the

file must be mounted.

DUMP

Dumping Volumes:
When you dump volumes, the /BLOCKS qualifier is
required;
use
it
to
specify
a range of logically contiguous
blocks to be dumped.
(On a disk volume,
blocks
are
512
bytes
long.

tape

volume,

maximum block

length

The

volume

each

record

that DUMP

dumped

must

individual

can handle

allocated

and

2048

block;

the

bytes.)

mounted

with

the

user

/FOREIGN
qualifier of the MOUNT command.
You must have
privilege LOG_IO to dump the contents of a volume.

Command Qualifiers

/ASCII
Requests that the dump be interpreted as ASCII
data.
When
you
specify /ASCII, the DUMP command prints control characters with a
circumflex
or
up-arrow
(1)
preceding
them,
and
it
prints
lowercase
uppercase
If

you

letters
with
equivalents.

specify

/ASCII,

any

percent

other

sign

(%)

and

length

radix

preceding

their

qualifiers

are

invalid.

/BLOCKS=(START:n,END:m)
Specifies a range of
logical block number

blocks to be
and m is the

By default, the DUMP command
file.
The /BLOCKS qualifier
contents of a volume.

dumped, where n is the
ending block number.

prints
the
is required

entire
when you

starting

contents
of
a
are dumping the

/BYTE
Requests

If you

the

output

specify /BYTE,

/DECIMAL
Requests
If you

that

you

file

cannot

formatted

you

bytes.

specify /DECIMAL.

the dump be printed

specify /DECIMAL,

in decimal

cannot

format.

specify /LONGWORD or

/BYTE.

/HEADER
Requests

file

that

header,

the

dump

include

the

file

header.

dump

only

the

specify /BLOCKS=(END:0).

/HEXADECIMAL
Requests

that

the

dump be

printed

/LONGWORD
Requests

that

the

dump be

formatted

If you specify /LONGWORD,
/ASCII.

you

hexadecimal

cannot

format.

longwords.

specify /OCTAL,

/DECIMAL,

/NUMBER [=n]
Controls line numbers assigned to records as they are dumped.
If
you specify /NUMBER, records in each block are numbered beginning
with 0.
If you specify a value for n, that number is assigned to
the first line in the file.
By default, DUMP numbers all lines
does not number lines according to

in the file consecutively,
the blocks they are in.

and

DUMP

/OCTAL
Requests that the dump be printed
If you specify /OCTAL,

in octal

format.

you cannot specify /ASCII or /LONGWORD.

/OUTPUT [=file-spec]
Requests that the output listing from the DUMP command be written
to
the
specified
file or device.
By default, the DUMP command
displays the output on the current
SYSSOUTPUT
device.
If
you
specify
/OUTPUT
and
do
not include a file specification, DUMP
writes the output to a file with the same file name as the
input
file and a file type of DMP.
/PRINTER

Requests that
output
be
queued
to
the
system
printer.
By
default,
DUMP
writes
to the current SYSSOUTPUT device.
If you
specify
/PRINTER,
the
DUMP
command
names
the
print
job
FILDMP.DMP.
If you specify /PRINTER, you cannot specify /OUTPUT.

/RECORDS
Requests that the dump be printed
a block at a time.

Requests

that the dump be

If you specify /WORD,

formatted

record at a

time,

rather

than

in words.

you cannot specify /ASCII.

Examples
1.

% DUMF

Dume

ORION.EXE

DR1IC122001.SSTESTIORIONJEXEFL17
Virtuzal

3130

block

0038

0+000001

File

size

312.

16379540

3230

0000

0044

0028

007C

0000

0000 0000

0000

0000 0000 0000

0101

0010

butes

The DUMP command displays the contents of the image ORION.EXE
in
hexadecimal format, beginning with the first block in the
file.
2.

% DUMFP/ASCII/ZRECORDS

ALPHA.TXT

Dume of DR1:C122001.CLUGIALFHA.TXT#1 ~ File
Record number 00.

000000

ID 35767y60+0
butes

YA YA YA LA YA T@ TR e e Te Tk Te e e TP e
Record number 01,

000000

- size 5,

- gsize 5.

butes

B B B ZR ZE "€ T@ T@ "@ "@ "e "e "e "e@ "e "e
L]

The DUMP command displays

a record at a time.

the contents of

the

file ALPHA.TXT,

‘

EDIT
Invokes one of
e

SOS

SLP

the

following VAX/VMS editors:

The SOS and SLP editors are described

in detail

the

VAX-1ll

Text

Editing Reference Manual.

Format

EDIT/editor

file-spec

Editors

Default

/SLP
/S0s

/S08

Command Qualifiers
/OUTPUT=file-spec

SLP Qualifiers
/AUDIT_TRAIL=(POSITION:80
SIZE:8)

/ [NOJAUDIT_TRAIL[=options,...]

/[NO]JLIST[=file-spec]
/ [NO] TAB
/ [NO] TRUNCATE [=position]

/NOLIST
/NOTAB
/NOTRUNCATE

SOS Qualifiers
/ [NO]DECIDE
/ INO] EXACT
/ [NO] EXPERT
/INCREMENT=n
/ISAVE=n
/ [NO]LINE
/ [NO] LOWER
/PLINES=n
/[NO]READ_ONLY
/SAVE=n
/START=n
/STEP=n

/NODECIDE
/NOEXACT
/NOEXPERT
/INCREMENT=100
/ISAVE=0
/LINE
/LOWER
/PLINES=16
/NOREAD_ONLY
/SAVE=0
/START=100
/STEP=100

Prompts

File:

file-spec

Command

Parameters

file-spec

Specifies the file to be created or edited
using
the
specified
if you
editor.
Neither editor provides any default file types;

do not
The

include a

file

type,

file must be a disk

null.

file on a Files~1l1l

formatted volume.

EDIT

Command Qualifiers
/OUTPUT=file-spec
Defines the file

_
specification of the output

file created

during

the
editing session, if any.
If you do not specify /OUTPUT, the
output file has the same file name and type as
the
input
file,
and a version number one higher than the highest existing version
of

/SLP

the

file.

Invokes

the source

in batch

language

The EDIT/SLP command
$

input program

(SLP)

to update a

file

mode.

EDIT/SLP

line has

the

format:

file-spec

where file-spec is the name of the file to be edited.
Note
that
SLP
does
not
prompt
for
input;
after you issue the EDIT/SLP
command, you can begin typing input for SLP.
/S0S

Invokes

the default system editor,

SOS.

The command

line has

the

format:
$

EDIT

file-spec

where file-spec is the name of the file to be edited.
The
file
specification
cannot
contain
wild cards.
1If the file does not
currently exist, it is created.

SLP Qualifiers
You can
specify
the
following
qualifiers
when
you
use
the
EDIT/SLP
command
to
invoke
SLP.
These
qualifiers
can
be
overridden in the SLP input file.
For complete details on any of
these qualifiers, see the VAX-11l Text Editing Reference Manual.

/AUDIT_TRAIL[=options,...]
/NOAUDIT,TRAIL
Controls whether records in the output file from SLP
contain
an
audit
trail,
and
optionally
defines the location of the audit
trail.
You can specify one or both of the following options:
POSITION:n

Define

SIZE:n

Define the number of characters in the
audit
by default, the audit trail is 8 characters.

If you
record

the starting character position of
the
audit
trail;
by
default,
the
audit
trail is placed in
column 80.
If you specify this
option,
SLP
rounds
the value, n, to the next highest tab stop.

specify /NOAUDIT_TRAIL,
of changes.

the

output

file

does

not

trail;

contain

/LIST[=file-spec]
/NOLIST
Controls whether SLP creates a line-numbered listing of
a
file.
Use
/LIST
when you want a listing of lines in sequential order.
If you do not specify a file specification,
SLP
uses
the
same
file name as the input file and a file type of LST.
If you enter
a file specification that does not include a file type, SLP
uses
the default file type of LST.

EDIT

/TAB
/NOTAB
Controls whether

SLP places blank character spaces or tabs at the
end
of
each
record
containing
an audit trail.
/NOTAB 1is the
default;
SLP inserts spaces at
the
end
of
each
record
that
contains an audit trail.

/TRUNCATE [=position]
/NOTRUNCATE
Requests SLP to truncate each record

the

input

file

specified column when it creates the output file.
This qualifier
allows you to delete
an
audit
trail
from
a
file
previously
updated with SLP.

If you do not specify a position with
the
/TRUNCATE
qualifier,
SLP
truncates
input
records
at
the beginning position of the
audit trail.

SOS Qualifiers

You can specify the following qualifiers when you
command to invoke SOS.

use

the

EDIT

The
settings
defined
by
some
of
these
qualifiers
can
be
overridden during the SOS session.
For complete details on these
qualifiers, see the VAX-1ll Text Editing Reference Manual.
/DECIDE
/NODECIDE

Controls whether SOS automatically enters Decide
each Substitute command.

mode

following

/EXACT
/NOEXACT

Controls whether
SOS
matches
character
strings
in
Find
and
Substitute
commands
exactly
or
treats uppercase and lowercase
letters

as equivalent.

/EXPERT
/NOEXPERT

Controls whether SOS displays the long form

error

requests
confirmation
of
deletions,
or
displays
informational messages during the terminal session.

/INCREMENT=n

Specifies the line number increment you want SOS to
default when you insert new lines in the file.

/ISAVE=n

Requests SOS to issue a Save World
command
every n new lines of text that you input.

/LINE
/NOLINE

messages,

use

automatically

various

the

after

Indicates whether SOS should use the existing line
numbers
when
you
edit
a file, or should renumber the lines when it opens the
file for editing.
By default, SOS uses the current line
numbers
in

the

file.

EDIT

/LOWER
/NOLOWER

Indicates whether SOS should accept all lowercase letters as they
to
1letters
lowercase
all
translate
should
or
entered
are
The
letters.
lowercase
accepts
SOS
By default,
uppercase.
/JLOWER qualifier
has no effect on data that already exists in a
file.

/PLINES=n

Specifies the number of lines that SOS prints each time you issue
the Print command.

/READ_ONLY
/NOREAD_ONLY

Controls whether SOS opens the input file for reading and writing
By default, SOS opens files for reading and
or only for reading.

writing.
/SAVE=n

Requests SOS to automatically issue a Save
every n SOS commands that change

text.

World

command

after

/START=n

Specifies the line number you want to assign to the first line in
the
file
and
to
each
new page in the file.
This value also
controls the line number increment SOS uses when
you
issue
the
reNumber

command.

/STEP=n

Specifies the line number
increment
existing
to
numbers
1line
assigns
numbers.

for
SOS
to
use when
it
files that do not have line
'

Examples

EDIT/Z0UTFUT=TEST.FOR

ACCOUNT
., FOR/FLINES=10

The EDIT command invokes the default editor, S0OS, to edit the
file
ACCOUNT.FOR.
The
/PLINES
qualifier sets the default
number of lines to print with each Print command
during
the
editing
session.
When
the edit session is terminated,
changes are written into the file TEST.FOR.

EDIT/SLP

the

AVERAGE.FOR

/
$
The command procedure illustrated uses the EDIT/SLP
command;
all
input
1lines for the SLP editor following the command in
the input stream, terminated by the slash character (/).

EOD
Signals the end of a data stream when a command or program is
reading
data
from
an
input device other than an interactive terminal.
This
command is required only if the DECK command preceded
input
data
1in
the
command -stream,
or if multiple input files are contained in the
command stream without intervening commands.
The program
or
command
reading
the
data
receives
an
end-of-file
condition
when the EOD
command is read.
~

The EOD command must be preceded by a $;
the § must be
character position (column 1) of the input record.

the

first

Format

EOD

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts

None.

Command

Parameters

None.

Example

SPRINT TESTDATA OUT
ey

second input data file .

——

_—T-———T

)
e

SEOD

first input data file.

— W

(’SRUNMYPROG
{,SPASSWORDlflENRY
(5 JOB HIGGINS

The program MYPROG requires two input files;
these are
read
from
the
logical device SYSSINPUT.
The EOD command signals
the end of the first data
file
and
the
beginning
of
the
second.
The
next
1line
that
begins with a dollar sign (a
PRINT command in this example) signals the end of the
second
data file.

For

additional

examples,

see

the discussion of

the DECK

command.

EOJ
Marks the end of a batch job submitted through the system card reader.
The
first
non-blank
character
in the command line must be a dollar

sign

($).

The

EOJ

command performs the same functions as the LOGOUT

command.

Format

EOJ

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts

None.

Example

1.
command mput stream

/s PASSWORD HENRY

/S JOB HIGGINS

The

JOB

and

PASSWORD

job submitted through
the end of the job.

commands

the card

mark

the

reader;

beginning

the EOJ command

batch

marks

EXAMINE
Displays the contents of virtual memory at the terminal.

You can truncate the EXAMINE command to a single letter, E.
Format

EXAMINE

location[:location]

Command Qualifiers
/ASCII
/BYTE
/DECIMAL
/HEXADECIMAL
/LONGWORD

/OCTAL
/WORD

Prompts

None.

Command Parameters

location[:location]

Specifies a virtual address or a range of virtual addresses whose
contents
you
want
to
examine.
If
you
specify
a
range of
addresses, separate them with a colon (:);
the
second
address
must be

larger

than

the

first.

You can specify locations using any valid
arithmetic
expression
that
contains
arithmetic
or
1logical operators or symbol names
which have been previously
given
values with
DCL
assignment
statements.

The DEPOSIT and
EXAMINE
commands
maintain
a
pointer
to
the
current
memory
location.
The EXAMINE command sets this pointer
EXAMINE
an
specify
you
when
examined
1location
1last
to the
command.
You can refer to this location using the symbol "." in
a subsequent EXAMINE or DEPOSIT command.

Description

When the EXAMINE command is executed,
memory
address
in
hexadecimal
and
requested as follows:

address:

virtual
the
displays
it
the
contents in the radix

contents

If
the
address
specified
1is
not
accessible
to
asterisks (****) are displayed in the contents field.

user

mode,

EXAMINE

Radix Qualifiers:

The

radix default

for

DEPOSIT

EXAMINE

command
determines
how the commands interpret numeric literals,
for example 256.
The initial default radix is hexadecimal;
all
numeric
literals
in
the
command
1line
are
assumed
to
be
hexadecimal values.
If a radix
qualifier
modifies
an
EXAMINE
command,
that
radix
becomes the default for subsequent EXAMINE
and DEPOSIT commands, until another qualifier overrides it.
For
example:
P

OEXAMINEZDECIMAL

Q0003842

9200
05HA43BP421

The

EXAMINE command interprets the
1location
900
as
a
decimal
number
and
displays
the
contents of that location in decimal.
All subsequent DEPOSIT and EXAMINE commands assume
that
numbers
you

enter

EXAMINE

for

addresses

and

always

displays

command

data

are

the

hexadecimal.
Symbol
always
Note

names defined by =
interpreted in the

decimal.

Note

address

location

commands
defined.

are

(Assignment
Statement)
radix in which they were

that

the

that

hexadecimal values entered as examine locations
or
as
to
be
deposited
must
begin
with a numeric character
(0
through 9).
Otherwise, the command interpreter assumes that
you
have entered a symbol name and attempts symbol substitution.
data

You can use the
current default

radix

when

operators

you

FOEXAMINE /DECIMAL
QOQQOY0O0NL

This

command

location

%X,

the

%D,

EXAMINE

override

command,

for

data

the

example:

%X900

321446536

requests

specified

Length Qualifiers:
EXAMINE command is
one

enter

longword

length
default

at a
qualifier
length of

DEPOSIT

comm?nds,

decimal

display

as hexadecimal

the

900.

the

The
initial
default
1length
unit
for
the
longword.
The EXAMINE command displays data
time, with
blanks
between
longwords.
If
a
a

modifies
the command, that length becomes
a memory location for
subsequent
EXAMINE
until

another

qualifier

overrides

the
and

it.

Restriction on Placement
of
Qualifiers:
The
EXAMINE
command
analyzes
expressions
arithmetically.
Therefore,
qualifiers
(which must be preceded by /) are interpreted correctly only when
they appear immediately after the command name.

Command

Qualifiers

/ASCII
Requests

that

the

data

the

specified

location

ASCII.

displayed

Binary values that do not have ASCII equivalents are displayed as

periods
When

(.).

you

specify

hexadecimal

becomes

/ASCII,

the default

ASCII

radix

mode

for

numeric

the

default,

literals.

/BYTE
Requests

byte

that

data

the

specified

time.

1location

displayed

one

EXAMINE

/DECIMAL

Requests that the contents of the specified location be displayed
in decimal.

/HEXADECIMAL

Requests that the contents of the specified location be displayed
in hexadecimal.

/LONGWORD

location

Requests that data at the specified

displayed

one

longword at a time.

/OCTAL

Requests that the contents of the specified location be displayed
in octal.

/WORD

location

Requests that data at the specified

displayed

one

word at a time.

Examples
1.

RUN

MYFROG

=y Y

EXAMINE

D002E67HY
%

2678

LFACH02S

CONTINUE

While
The RUN command begins execution of the image MYPROG.
MYPROG 1is running, CTRL/Y interrupts its execution, and the
EXAMINE command requests a display of the contents of virtual

memory location hexadecimal 2678.
2,

$ BASE

= ZX1C00

$ REANRUF = RASE + %X350

ko
f

ENDRUF = BASBE
TEST
RUN

ZXA0

$ EXAMINE/ASCTT

QONO1ES08

READEUF CENDERUF

BEGINNING OF FILE MAFFED TO GLORAL SECTION

Before executing

the

program

MYPROG,

symbolic

names

are

defined for the program's base address, and for labels
READBUF and ENDBUF; all are expressed in hexadecimal using
READBUF and ENDBUF define offsets
the radix operator 2%X.
from the program base.

While the program is executing, CTRL/Y interrupts it and the
EXAMINE command requests a display in ASCII of all data
between the specified memory locations.

EXIT
Terminates processing

control

executed from within
calling procedure.

command

procedure was
returns to the

the

current

command

procedure.

the

another

command

procedure,

reserved global

symbol

S$STATUS.

Format

EXIT

[status—-code]

Command

Qualifiers

None.

Prompts

None.

Command

Parameters

status-code

Defines

a numeric

The

value
can
low—-order three

value

the

value
be

the

the
by

bits of the
reserved global

If you do not specify
is
not
changed
and
status

for

tested

most

the

next outer
longword
integer

symbol

level.

The

value

change

the

$SEVERITY.

a status code, the
control returns to

recently

command

executed

current value of S$STATUS
the outer level with the

command

program.

Description

When

a command
command
1level,

$STATUS

procedure

the

locate

the
value,
1if
produce warning,
numeric
values
or

informational

EXIT

command

and display

determine

with

The

command

EXIT

control
interpreter uses

the

system message

the
interactive
current value of

associated

with

any.
Note
that
even numeric values generally
error, and fatal error
messages
and
that
odd
generally produce either no message oOor a success
message.
Example 4, below, shows how to use the

associated

interactive

returns

command

the

hexadecimal

command

performs

message

status
no

and

symbolic

error

name

the

code.

operation

level.

issued

Examples

| $

WARNING

$ FORTRAN

THEN

'P1l'

EXIT

LINK 'P1°
$ RUN 'P1°

The EXIT command is used as the
this
statement ensures that the

whenever any warnings
the procedure.
The

procedure

program

that

exits

with

caused

the

errors

the

target
of
an
ON
command;
command procedure terminates
are issued by any command
1in

status

termination.

value

the

command

EXIT

$ @SUBTEST

$ IF $STATUS .EQ. 7 THEN GOTO PROCESS
$

EXIT

PROCESS:

named
procedure,
second
a
executes
procedure
This
e
procedur
outer
the
s,
complete
COM
SUBTEST.
When
SUBTEST.COM.
tests the value of the symbol $STATUS which may be set by
SUBTEST as follows:
S

PATHl:

$ ERIT 7
$ PATH2:
$

EXIT

IF Pl.EQS."" THEN -

IF Pl.EQS."" THEN EXIT

INQUIRE Pl "Enter File-spec (null to exit)"

$ PRINT 'PI'/AFTER=20:00/COPIES=50/FORMS=6

A command procedure tests whether a parameter was

passed

if not, it prompts for the required parameter. Then it
it;
retests the parameter Pl. If a null string, indicated by a
carriage return for a line with no data, is entered, the
procedure exits. Otherwise, it executes the PRINT command
with the current value of Pl as the input parameter.
$ IF P1.EQS."" THEN INQUIRE Pl "Code"
$ CODE = %X'Pl'
$ EXIT 'CODE'

This short command.procedure illustrates how to determine the
system message, if any, associated with a hexadecimal system
status code. The procedure requires a parameter and prompts
Then, it prefixes the value with the
if none 1is entered.
radix operator %X and assigns this string to the symbol CODE.

Finally,
value.

issues

For example:

$ @

EXIT

the

command with the hexadecimal

wEVOTEM-F-EXAU0TA, exceeded auota

When the procedure exits, the value of S$STATUS is "X1C, which
causes the EXQUOTA message.

FORTRAN
Invokes

the VAX-11

FORTRAN

source

programs.

This

FORTRAN

IV-PLUS

User's

IV-PLUs
1 compiler
command

to compile

described

Guide.

one

detail

or
the

more
VAX-11

Format

FORTRAN

file-spec,...

Command

Qualifiers

Default

None.

File Qualifiers

/ [NO]CHECK [=option,...]
/CONTINUATIONS=n
/[NO]DEBUG[=option]

/CHECK=OVERFLOW
/CONTINUATIONS=19
/DEBUG=TRACEBACK

/[NO]14
/[NOJLIST[=file-spec]
/[NO]MACHINE_CODE
/ [NO]OBJECT [=file-spec]

/14

/ [NO]1D_LINES

/NOD_LINES

/NOMACHINE_CODE

/ [NO]JOPTIMIZE

/OPTIMIZE

/ [NO]WARNINGS
/WORK_FILES=n

/WARNINGS
/WORK_FILES=2

Prompts

File:

file-spec,...

Command

Parameters

file~-spec,...
Specifies

one

you

file

type of

You

file

can

not

FOR.

specify more

specifications

separately.

FORTRAN

specify

you

programs

file

type,

the

than

one

input

file.

1If

(,),

each

‘

with

commas

separate

the

signs
(+),
the
files
input
file,
producing
specified, one listing.

source

file

compiler

compiled.

uses

you

the

1If

default

separate

file

specifications

are concatenated and
one
object
module

Available under separate license

the

compiled

with

plus

compiled as a single
and,
if
/LIST
is

FORTRAN

File Qualifiers

/CHECK [=option,...]

/NOCHECK

Controls whether the compiler produces extra code to check for
program correctness at run time. You can request the following
options:

Produce code to check that all array references are
to addresses within the address boundaries specified

BOUNDS

in the array declaration.

Enable

OVERFLOW

integer

Fixed-point

traps.

overflow

calculations involving BYTE, INTEGER*2, and INTEGER*4

data types are checked for arithmetic overflow.

Note

that

/CHECK=NONE

ALL

Provide both BOUNDS and OVERFLOW checks.

NONE

Provide

/CHECK=ALL is equivalent to /CHECK.

checking.

equivalent to /NOCHECK.

that

Note

By default, the compiler produces code to check only for
overflow

integer

traps.

If you specify either /CHECK=BOUNDS or /CHECK=OVERFLOW, the other
is implicitly canceled.

/CONTINUATIONS=n

Specifies

permitted.

the

maximum

number

continuation

lines

The number of lines, n, is a decimal number from O through 99.
By default, the compiler accepts a maximum of 19 continuation
lines.

/DEBUG [=option]
/NODEBUG

Controls whether the compiler makes local symbol table and
traceback information available to the debugger and the run time
error reporting mechanism.

You can request the following options:

SYMBOLS

Provide the debugger with local symbol definitions

for user-defined variables, arrays, labels on
executable statements, and compiler-generated line
numbers.

TRACEBACK

Provide compiler-generated line

ALL

Provide both

numbers

that

the debugger and the run-time error traceback
into
routine can translate virtual addresses
numbers.
line
and
names
ine
subrout
source program

information.

local

Note

symbol

table

and

traceback

that /DEBUG=ALL is equivalent

to /DEBUG.

NONE

Do not provide either
traceback information.
equivalent to /NODEBUG.

local symbol table or
Note that /DEBUG=NONE is

FORTRAN

default,

the

compiler

produces

only

address

correlation

table.
If

you

other

specify

item

either

/DEBUG=SYMBOLS

/DEBUG=TRACEBACK,

the

implicitly canceled.

For details on how
Symbolic Debugger,

to debug a FORTRAN
program
with
the
VAX-11
see the VAX-11 FORTRAN IV-PLUS User's Guide.

/D_LINES
/NOD_LINES
Indicates whether the compiler reads and compiles lines that have
a
D in column 1 of the source program.
If you specify /D_LINES,
lines that have a D in column 1 are compiled.
By default, the compiler assumes that lines
are comments and does not compile them.

beginning

with

/14
/NOI4
Controls

how
the
compiler
interprets
INTEGER
declarations that do not specify a length.
If you

the
compiler
respectively.
By

default,
INTEGER*4 and

interprets

these

the
compiler
LOGICAL*4.

INTEGER*2

interprets

these

and
LOGICAL
specify /NOI4,

and

LOGICAL*2,

declarations

/LIST=[file~spec]
/NOLIST
Controls

whether

listing

file

produced.

If the FORTRAN command is executed
from
interactive
mode,
the
compiler,
by
default,
does
not create a listing file.
TIf the
FORTRAN command
1is
executed
from
batch
mode,
/LIST
is
the
default;
the compiler gives a listing file the same file name as
the first input source file and a file type of LIS.

When you specify /LIST, you can control the defaults
applied
to
the
output
file specification by the placement of the qualifier
in the
command,
as
described
1in
Section
6.3.3,
"Rules
for
Entering
Output
File
Qualifiers."
The output file type always
defaults

LIS.

/MACHINE_CODE
/NOMACHINE_CODE
Controls whether the
the machine language

listing produced by
the
compiler
code generated by the compiler.

includes

By
in

default, the compiler does not include machine
language
the listing.
The /MACHINE_CODE qualifier is ignored if

not

specified,

either

explicitly or

code
/LIST

by default.

/OBJECT [=file~spec]
/NOOBJECT
Controls whether

the

compiler

produces

output

object

module.

By default, the compiler produces an object module that
has
the
same
file
name as the input source file and a file type of OBJ.
When you specify /OBJECT, you can control the defaults applied to
the
output
file specification by the placement of the qualifier

in the
command,
Entering
Output
defaults to OBJ.

as
described
1in
File
Qualifiers."

Section
6.3.3,
The output file

"Rules
for
type always

FORTRAN

/OPTIMIZE
/NOOPTIMIZE

Controls whether the compiler optimizes the compiled

program

generate more efficient code.

1link
Use /NOOPTIMIZE in conjunction with the /DEBUG qualifier to
debugger so that variables always
the
FORTRAN program with
a
contain their updated values.

/WARNINGS
/NOWARNINGS

Controls whether the compiler produces

warning conditions.

Use /NOWARNINGS to override the compiler
issue warning diagnostic messages.

diagnostic
default,

messages
which

/WORK_FILES=n

Specifies the number of work files that the compiler
during compilation.

1is

should

for
to

use

You can specify 1, 2, or 3.
By default, the
compiler
uses
two
Increasing the number of work files enables larger
files.
work
the
of
speed
the
but may decrease
programs to be compiled,
compilation.

Examples

FORTRAN SCANLINE

The FORTRAN command compiles
the
program SCANLINE.FOR
and
If this command is
an object module SCANLINE.OBJ.
produces
executed in a batch job, the compiler also creates a
1listing
file

named

SCANLINE.LIS.

F FORTRAN A+RBZLISTy

CHO/LIST=ALL/O0RJECT=ALL

For
This FORTRAN command requests two separate compilations.
compilation, the FORTRAN command concatenates the
first
the
files A.FOR and B.FOR to produce an object module named A.OBJ
and a listing file named B.LIS.

For the second compilation, the FORTRAN command
concatenates
the
files
C.FOR
and
D.FOR and compiles them to produce an
object module named ALL.OBJ and a listing named ALL.LIS.

% FORTRANZNOOFTIMIZEZNERUG
$

LINKARDEBUG

DEEGy

DRGSHCAN

Voradion

COERIG-T-TMITTIALy
Lo

SCAN/ORJECT=DRGESCAN

1.0

lamnguade is FORTRAN: score and

module

set

“HCANS

The FORTRAN command compiles the source program SCAN with the
symbol table information and
the
both
including
debugger,
that
requests
the /OBJECT qualifier
traceback information;
The LINK command links
object module be named DBGSCAN.
the
the debugger with the
object
module
and
the
RUN
command
When the debugger prompts, you can begin
executes the image.
entering DEBUG commands.

GOTO
Transfers

control

labeled

statement

in a

command

procedure.

Format

GOTO

label

Command Qualifiers:
None.

Prompts

Label:

Command

label

Parameters

label

Specifies a 1- to 255-alphanumeric character label
appearing
as
the
first
item
on
a
command
1line.
When the GOTO command is
executed, control passes to the command following
the
specified
label.
The label can precede or
command
procedure.
It
may not contain embedded

follow the GOTO statement in the
must be terminated with a colon
blanks.

current
(:) and

Description

Use the GOTO command in command procedures to transfer control to
a
line
that
1is
not
the
next
1line in the procedure.
If the
command stream is not being read
from
a
random
access
device
(that is, a disk device), the GOTO command performs no operation.

The cbmmand interpreter does not check for duplicate labels.
following

rules

apply:

The

If duplicate labels precede and follow the GOTO
command,
control is given to the label preceding the command.

If duplicate labels all precede the GOTO command,
is
given
to
the
most
recent
1label, that is,
nearest the GOTO command.

control
the one

If
is

control

duplicate labels
given to the one

If a label does not exist
procedure cannot continue

all follow the GOTO command,
nearest the GOTO command.

in the
and is

current command
forced to exit.

procedure,

the

GOTO

$
$

IF Pl1.EQS."HELP" THEN GOTO TELL
IF P1.EQS."" THEN GOTO TELL

»»nwn

Examples

EXIT

TELL:

TYPE SYSSINPUT

The IF command checks
the
first
parameter
passed
to
the
command
procedure;
if this parameter is the string HELP or
is not specified, the GOTO command is executed,
and
control
is passed to the line labeled TELL.
Otherwise, the procedure
continues executing until the EXIT commmand
1is
encountered.
At
the label TELL, a TYPE command displays data in the input
stream that documents how to use the procedure.
$ ON ERROR THEN GOTO CHECK

$ GOTO END
$ CHECK:
S END:

EXIT

The ON command establishes an error handling routine.

1If any

command
or
procedure
subseguently
executed in the command
procedure returns an error or severe error return,
the
GOTO
command transfers

control to the label CHECK.

HELP
Displays

the

terminal

information

available

the

system

HELP

files.

Format

HELP

[keyword

[keyword]l...]

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts
None.

Command

Parameters

keyword [keyword]...
Specifies one or more keywords that indicate what information you
Information is located in a hierarchical manner, depending
want.
on the level of information required.
The levels are:
l.

<NULL> - describes the HELP command, and lists
keywords
you can specify to obtain information about commands and
programs that are documented.
Each item in this list is
a
keyword
1in
the second level of the hierarchy.
Most
keywords
are
names
of
DCL
commands,
but
other
information
1is
provided.
For
example,
the
keyword
SPECIFY
1is
at
the
first
1level
of
a
hierarchy
of
information.
Command-name

or program-name
describes
the
command
function
and
format
and
1lists additional information
available.
This list of information
provides
keywords
for

the

level.

Command name or program-name followed by a specific item
provides
descriptions
of
command
parameters,
or
particular keywords or qualifiers.
If you specify a wild
command displays

HELP

card in the place
of
any
parameter,
the
all information available at that level.

HELP

Examples

HELF

ASSIGN

The HELP command displays an abstract of the ASSIGN
command
format, and lists the keyword options you can
its
function,
type to obtain more information.
%

HELF

ASSIGN

PARAMETERS

The HELP command displays a description of the parameters for
the ASSIGN command.
$ HELF

SFECIFY

LEXICAL FUNCTIONS

The HELP command lists the lexical command functions.
$

MELF

Z6FTER

The HELP command lists the information
/AFTER qualifier of the PRINT command.
%

HELF

SUBMIT

available

about

the

SUBMIT
the
about
information
displays
command
HELP
The
command
available
at
the
second
1level,
that
1is,
the
of
information that would be displayed if you specified each
the keywords listed when you issued HELP SUBMIT.
HELF

SET

TERMINAL

The HELP command lists information about the TERMINAL keyword
option of the SET command.

100

IF
Tests the value of an expression and executes a command if the test is
true.
Any arithmetic or logical expression is considered true if the
result of the expression is an odd numeric value;
an
expression
is
false if the result is an even-value.

Format

expression THEN

[$]

command

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts

None.

Command

Parameters

expression
,
Defines the test to be performed.
The expression can consist
of
one or more numeric constants, string literals, or symbolic names
separated by logical, arithmetic, or string operators.
The logical, arithmetic, and string operators are
1listed
below.
Combinations
of
operations
are
evaluated
in
the
order
of
precedence indicated, where 1 is the lowest precedence and
6
is
the
highest.
You
can
use
parentheses
to
group items in an
expression
to
override
the
order
in
which
operations
are
evaluated.
Operator
.OR.
.AND.
.NOT.
.EQ.

Precedence
1
2
3

Operation
Logical
Logical
Logical

sum
product
complement
Arithmetic equal to

.GE.

4
4

Arithmetic

greater

than

.GT.

Arithmetic

greater

than

.LE.

Arithmetic

LT,
.NE.
.EQS.
.GES.
.GTS.
.LES.

4
4
4
4
4
4

less than or equal to
Arithmetic less than
Arithmetic not equal to
String equal to
String greater than or equal to
String greater than
String less than or equal to

.LTS.
.NES.

4
4

String
String

Arithmetic

difference

*
/

6
6

Arithmetic
Arithmetic

product
quotient

For further
specifying

less than
not equal

equal

sum

details on the syntax requirements and valid
expressions,
see
Section
6.6
"Rules
for

Expressions."

101

ways
of
Forming

command

Defines the action to take

if the result

the

expression

|is

true.

You can specify any valid DCL command following the keyword THEN.
Optionally, you can precede the command with a dollar sign.

Examples

1. | $

COUNT =

$ LOOP:
$ COUNT = COUNT + 1

$ IF COUNT.LE.10 THEN GOTO LOOP

$ EXIT

This example shows how to
establish
a
1loop
in
a
command
procedure using a symbol named COUNT and an IF statement that
checks the value of COUNT and performs an EXIT
command
when
the value of COUNT is greater than 10.
$ IF P1l.EQS."" THEN GOTO DEFAULT
$ IF P1.EQS."A" .OR. Pl.EQS."B" THEN GOTO 'P1l'
$ WRITE SYSSOUTPUT "Unrecognized parameter option
$ EXIT
$ A: !
Process option a

$ EXIT
$ B: !

Process option b

$ EXIT
$

''Pl'

DEFAULT:

Default processing

$ EXIT
This example shows a command procedure that tests
whether
a
parameter
was
passed;
if
not, the IF statement assigns a
value to Pl to provide a default processing option.
The GOTO
command
passes
control
to
the
1label
specified
as
the
parameter.

If the procedure is
uses that parameter
example:
@TESTCOM

executed with a parameter, the
procedure
to determine the label to branch to.
For

When the procedure executes, it determines
that
Pl
null,
and
branches
to
the
1label
A.
Note that
command causes an exit from the procedure before the

102

1is
not
the EXIT
label B,

$ SET NOON
LINK CYGNUS,DRACO,SERVICE/LIBRARY
IF .NOT.$STATUS THEN EXIT
RUN

CYGNUS

A command procedure uses the
SET
NOON
command
to
disable
error
checking
by
the
command
procedure.
Then,
the IF
command is used following the execution of a LINK command
to

test the value of

the

LINK command returns
procedure exits.

reserved global symbol

error

103

status

$STATUS.

value,

the

1If the

command

INITIALIZE
Formats and writes a

label on a mass

storage volume.

Format

INITIALIZE

device~-name|[:]

volume~label

Command Qualifiersl

Default

/OWNER_UIC=uic
/PROTECTION=code
Qualifiers

for

Tapes

/DENSITY=n

/OVERRIDE=options,...

Qualifiers

for Disks

/ACCESSED=n
/BADBLOCKS=list

/ACCESSED=3

/L .USTER_SIZE=n
/DATA_CHECK[=options,...]

/DIRECTORIES=n
/EXTENSION=n

/DIRECTORIES=16
/EXTENSION=5

/FILE~PROTECTION=code
/GROUP

/HEADERS=n
/INDEX=position

/HEADERS=16
/INDEX=MIDDLE

/MAXIMUM_FILES=n

/ [NO] SHARE
/STRUCTURE=level

/SHARE
/STRUCTURE=2

/SYSTEM
/USER_NAME=string
/ [NO]VERIFIED

/VERIFIED
/WINDOWS=7

/WINDOWS=n

Prompts

Device:

device-name

Label:

volume-label

Command Parameters
device-name

Specifies the name of the
initialized

device

is physically mounted.

which

The device does not have to
be
currently
this is the recommended practice.

the

volume

allocated;

Por convenience, qualifiers that are applicable only to
tapes are listed separately.

alphabetical order,

however.

however,

disks

and

All qualifier descriptions appear in

104

INITIALIZE

volume-label
Specifies

the identification to be encoded on the volume.
For
a
disk
wvolume,
you
can
specify
a
maximum
of
12 alphanumeric
characters;
for a tape volume, you can specify a
maximum
of
6
alphanumeric characters.

Description

The default format for disk
volumes
in
the
VAX/VMS
operating
system is called the Files~11l Structure Level 2.
The default for
tape volumes is ANSI standard labels, ANSI X3.27-1977, level 3.
The
INITIALIZE
command
Files~1ll Structure Level

can
also
format.

initialize

volumes

1in

the

You do not need any special privileges to initialize a blank disk
or
tape
volume.
If
a
volume
has
previously
been written,
however, your UIC must match the owner UIC
on
the
volume,
the
protection code on the volume must allow you write access, or you
must have
the
user
privilege
to
override
volume
protection
(VOLPRO)
.
For examples of initializing
and
using
Chapter 3, "Disk and Tape Volumes."

disks

Many

allow

the

INITIALIZE

parameters

that

information on

command

can

qualifiers

maximize

these parameters,

Record
Management
Reference Manual.

Services

and

input/output

see

the

VAX-1ll

and

tapes,

you

Record

specify

efficiency.

Introduction

Management

see

For

VAX-11
Services

Command Qualifiers

/ACCESSED=n
Specifies,
maintained

for disk volumes, the
number
of
in system space for ready access.

directories

The
wuser
privilege
OPER
1is
required
to
use
the
/ACCESSED
qualifier.
Legal
values for n are 0 through 255.
TIf /ACCESSED
is not specified, the INITIALIZE command uses the
default
value
of

/BADBLOCKS=list
Specifies, for

disk

volumes,

specific

areas

are
faulty.
The INITIALIZE command marks
so that no data will be written in them.

the

areas

volume
that
as allocated

You can specify one or more areas, using either or
both
of
the
formats shown below.
If you specify more than one area, separate
the
specifications
with
commas
and
enclose
the
list
in
parentheses.
lbn[:count]

Specify

logical

block

number

the

disk

volume,

marked

and optionally a count of logical blocks beginning

with the logical
allocated

block

specified,

sector.track.cyl[:count]

Specify a specific sector, track, and cylinder
on
the disk volume, and optionally a count of blocks,
beginning with the first block
specified,
to
be
marked

allocated

105

INITIALIZE

Use of this qualifier is device-dependent.
It
is
not
required
for RK06/7 or RMO3 disks;
nor is it required for disks that have
been scanned for bad block data with the BAD utility program.
For information on how to
Operator's Guide.

run

the BAD

utility,

see

the

VAX/VMS

/CLUSTER_SIZE=n
Defines, for

disk
volumes,
the
minimum
allocation
wunit,
in
blocks.
The
maximum size you can specify for a volume is 1/100
the size of the volume;
the minimum
size
you
can
specify
1is
calculated with

the

formula:

disk size
255%4096

If not specified,

default

values:

the

Device

Default

RKO6
RKO7
RMO3
RP04/5
RPO6

2
4
6
6
11

The default value of

INITIALIZE

structure level

command

1 disks

uses

the

following

is always 1.

/DATA_CHECK [=options,...]

Defines a default for data check operations following
all
reads
and/or
writes
to the volume.
You can specify either or both of
the following options:

READ

Perform checks following all

read operations

WRITE

Perform checks following all write operations

If you specify /DATA_CHECK
without
specifying
an
option,
the
system
assumes
/DATA_ CHECK=WRITE.
If
you
do
not
specify
/DATA_CHECK, the
system
performs
no
checking;
this
is
the
default.
You
can
override
the
checking
you
specify
at
initialization for disks when you issue a MOUNT command to
mount
the

volume.

/DENSITY=n

Specifies, for tape volumes, the density in bits per
inch
(bpi)
at which the tape is to be written.
You can specify a density of
either

800

1600.

If you do not specify a density for

a blank tape,

the system uses

a default density of 1600.
If you do not specify a density for a
tape that was previously written, the system uses the density
at
which the tape was last written.
/DIRECTORIES=n

Specifies,
for

user

for disk volumes,

directories.

the number of entries to preallocate

The legal values are in the range of 16 through 16000;
if you do
not
specify
a
value,
the
INITIALIZE command uses the default
value of

16.

106

INITIALIZE

/EXTENSION=n
Specifies, for disk volumes, the number of blocks
to
use
as
a
default
extension
size
for
all
files
on
the
volume.
The
extension default is used when a file increases to a size greater
than its initial default allocation during an update.
You can specify a value in
do
not
specify a default
uses a value of 5.

the range of 0 through 65535;
extension size, the INITIALIZE

/FILE_PROTECTION=code
/
Defines, for disk volumes, the default protection
to all files on the volume.

if
you
command

applied

Specify the code according
to
specifying
protection.
(These

the
standard
syntax
rules
for
rules are given in the discussion
of the SET PROTECTION command.) Any attributes not specified
are
taken from the current default protection.
Note that this attribute is not used when
the
volume
1is
being
used
on
a VAX/VMS system, but is provided to control the use of
the volume on RSX-11lM systems.
VAX/VMS always uses
the
default
file
protection;
the
protection
can
be changed with the SET
PROTECTION/DEFAULT command.

/GROUP
Defines a disk
volume

volume
defaults
to

command

and

a member

as a group volume.
the
group
number
number of 0.

This qualifier defines the
system, owner and group.

/HEADERS=n
Specifies,

/INDEX=position
Requests,

for

directory
volume.
You

can

disk

specify

command

volumes,

structure

one

number

file

allocates

that

the

placed

the

following

index

file

headers

for

the

INITIALIZE

the

RWED

you
the

the

volumes,

default,

disk

protection

the
the

allocated
1initially
for
the index file.
The minimum value
can specify is 16;
the maximum value is the value set
with
/MAXIMUM_FILES qualifier.
By

for

volume

The owner
UIC
of
of the user issuing

file

for

specific

headers.

the

Place

the

index

file

the

beginning

MIDDLE

Place

the

index

file

the

middle

the

END

Place

the

index

file

the

end

the

BLOCK:n

Place

the

index

file

the

beginning

block

specified

By default,

the

INITIALIZE

command

volume.

107

the

options:

BEGINNING

middle

volume's

location on

places

the

volume

index

the

file

1logical-

the

INITIALIZE

/MAXIMUM FILES=n

Restricts, for disk volumes, the maximum number of files that the
volume
can
contain, overriding the default value.
The defaults
are:

Default File Maximum

Device

4000
8000

RKO6
RKO7

15000
25000

RP04/RPO05S
RP0O6

15000
123

RMO3
Floppy

is
volume
The maximum size you can specify for any
size, in blocks, divided by (cluster factor plus 1);

volume
the
the minimum

value is 0. Note, however, that you should specify a 1low file
Once set, the maximum
maximum only after careful consideration.
can only be increased by re-initializing the volume.

/OVERRIDE=options,...

volume
tape
Requests the INITIALIZE command to ignore data on a
You can specify one or
that protects it from being overwritten.
both of the following options:

(the
volume
the
Override the expiration date on
by the expiration date of the
indicated
1is
date

EXPIRATION

first

file on the volume)

Override a non-blank accessibility

ACCESSIBILITY

VOL1

VAX/VMS,

HDR1

but

1label

may

(this field

set

field

the

set by

operating

other

is never

systems)

user
the
have
or
volume
tape
the
of
You must be the owner
(VOLPRO) in order to
volume protection
to override
privilege
initialize a tape that has not reached its expiration date or has
a non-blank accessibility field.

/OWNER_UIC=uic

Specifies the user identification code to be
in

the

ownership

assigned

of the volume and of system files on the volume.

Specify the UIC

format:

[g,m]

the

is an octal number in range 0 through 377

representing

is an octal number in the range 0 through

377

representing

UIC

group number.

the member

number.

The brackets are required.

If you do not specify /OWNER _UIC, your current

ownership of

the volume.

108

assigned

INITIALIZE

/PROTECTION=code
Specifies the protection
protection
on

the

controls who

volume.

to
be
can read,

you

not

protection
defaults
to
all
Note that the /GROUP, /SHARE,
used to define protection for

When you
access

The

PROTECTION
no access.

(execute)

system only

respect

applies

tapes;

Any

code

indicates

read

protection

code,

the
standard
syntax
rules
for
rules are given in the discussion

command.)

specify a protection

type

specify

The
files

access
to all categories of user.
and /SYSTEM qualifiers can also
be
disk volumes.

Specify the code according
to
specifying
protection.
(These
of the SET
default to

applied
to
the
volume.
write, create, and delete

and

create

attributes

for

create

write

and

entire

specified

disk

volume,

access.

access

delete

Moreover, the system and the owner are
write
access
to
tapes,
regardless
protection code.

not

restrictions

access

are

with

meaningless.

always given both read and
of
what
vyou specify in a

/SHARE
/NOSHARE
Controls whether a disk volume is shareable.
The protection code
for the volume defaults to all types of access for all categories
of user.
If you specify /NOSHARE, the protection
code
defaults
to no access for group and world.

/STRUCTURE=level
Specifies,
formatted

disk
If

for
in

volumes
you

disk

Files-11

are

volumes,

whether

Structure

Level

formatted

specify

qualifiers

allowed.

structure level 1 disk is all
and group, and read access to

/SYSTEM

Defines a disk volume
volume
defaults
to
types

access

Files-11

/STRUCTURE=l,

not

the

No user privilege is
however,
only
users

the

Structure

the

/CLUSTER

The

default

all

should

level
and

default,

/DATA_CHECK

protection

types of access to
all other users.

as a system volume.
[1,1]
and
default
volume

volume

level

system,

The owner
protection

for

owner,

UIC
of
provides

the
all

users.

required
to
use
with system UICs

the
/SYSTEM
qualifier;
can create directories on

system volumes.

/USER_NAME=string
Specifies, for
to

command

disk
recorded on
uses

the

volumes, a user name of up to
the volume.
1If not specified,

user

name

under

which

you

logged

12
the

characters
INITIALIZE

in.

/VERIFIED
/NOVERIFIED
Indicates, for disk volumes, whether the disk has bad block
data
on it.
/VERIFIED is the default;
the INITIALIZE command assumes
that disks contain bad block data and uses the data to
mark
the
bad
blocks
as allocated.
to ignore bad block data on

Use

/NOVERIFIED

the

disk.

109

request

INITIALIZE

/WINDOWS=n

Specifies,

for disk volumes,

the number of mapping pointers to be

allocated
for
file windows.
When a file is opened, the file
You
system uses the mapping pointers to access data in the file.
specify a
value in the range of 7 through 80.
The default
can
number of pointers is 7.

Examples
l.

ALLOCATE

DMAZE

TEMP

LIMAZ2E

ALLOCATED

MOUNT

TEMF

$
$

CREATE/DIRECTORY
TEMPILARCHIED]
COPY X.%
TEMPILARCHIE

BACK.UP.FILE

TEMP

INITIALIZE

BACK.UP.LFILE

T RACK.UF_.FILE mourted on _DMAZZ
T -MOUNTEDy
UMOUN

an
initialize
to
how
The above sequence of commands shows
RK06/7 volume for backup.
First,.the device is allocated, to
ensure that no one else can access it.
Then, when the volume
is physically mounted on the device, the INITIALIZE command
initializes it.
When the volume is
1initialized,
the
MOUNT
Before you can
the file structure available.
command makes
a directory,
place any files on the volume, you must create
as
shown
in
the CREATE command example.
Finally, the COPY
command copies the highest existing versions of files on
the
default disk to the backup disk.

ALLOCATE MT:
aALLOCATED
AMTRLY

INITIALIZE

MOUNT

MTRL:

MTRLS

UMOUNT
=T -MDUNTEDy
$

COPY

¥.FOR

DIRECTORY

DTSMOUNT

SOURCE

SOURCE mownted on MTEILZ

MTRLE
MTRILG

MTRI

These commands show the procedure necessary to
initialize
a
tape.
After
allocating
a drive, the tape is loaded on the
device and the INITIALIZE command writes the label SOURCE

it.

Then,

the

can be written on

MOUNT command mounts the tape so that files
it.

110

INQUIRE
Requests interactive assignment of a
value
for
a
symbol during the execution of a command procedure.

1local

global

Format

INQUIRE

symbol-name

[prompt-string]

Command Qualifiers

Default

/GLOBAL
/LOCAL

/LOCAL
/LOCAL

Prompts

None.

Command

Parameters

symbol-name

Specifies a 1 - to 255-alphanumeric character symbol to be

given

a value.

prompt-string

Specifies the prompt to be displayed at
the
terminal
when
the
INQUIRE
command
1is executed.
1If the prompt string contains any
lowercase characters or multiple blanks or tabs,
enclose
it
in
quotation marks.

When the system displays the prompt string at
places a colon (:) at the end of the string.
If you do not specify a prompt string,

uses the

symbol name to prompt

for

the

a value.

the
command

terminal,

interpreter

Description

The INQUIRE command displays the prompting message to
and
reads
the
response
from the device SYSSCOMMAND.
This means that when
the INQUIRE command is executed in a command
procedure
executed
interactively,
the
prompting message is always displayed on the
terminal,
regardless
of
the
1level
of
nesting
of
command
procedures.
When
an
INQUIRE command is issued in a batch job,
the command reads the response from the next line in the
command
procedure;
if procedures are nested, it reads the response from
the

first

level command procedure.

Command Qualifiers

/GLOBAL
Specifies

that the symbol be placed

/LOCAL

Specifies that the symbol be placed
the current command procedure.

This

the

default,

111

in the global symbol table.
in the local

symbol

table

for

INQUIRE

Examples

$
$

INQUIRE CHECK "Enter Y[ES]
IF .NOT.CHECK THEN EXIT

The INQUIRE command displays
at the terminal:

Ernter

YIES]

continue"

the

following

prompting

message

to comntinue!

The IF command tests the value entered.
If you enter an
odd
numeric
value or any non-quoted character string that begins
with either
a
"T"
or
a
"Y"
the
symbol
CHECK
will
be
considered
true
and
the procedure will continue executing.
If you enter an even numeric value, any
nonquoted
character

string
that
begins
with either an "N" or
string, the symbol will be considered false
will exit.
$

INQUIRE

an "F," or a null
and the procedure

COUNT

IF COUNT.GT.10 THEN GOTO SKIP

S SKIP:
The

INQUIRE

command

prompts

for

count

with

the

message:

COUNT?2

Then,

the command procedure uses
the
value
of
the
symbol
COUNT
to
determine
whether to execute the next sequence of
commands or to transfer control to the line labeled SKIP.

IF P1.EQS.""

S FORTRAN
The

'Pl'

command

THEN

INQUIRE

checks

whether

FILE NAME

parameter

was

passed

the

command
procedure
by checking if the symbol Pl is null;
if
it is, it means that no
parameter
was
specified,
and
the
INQUIRE command is issued to prompt for the parameter.
If Pl
was specified, the INQUIRE command is not executed,
and
the
FORTRAN
command compiles the name of the file specified as a
parameter.

112

JOB
Identifies the
card reader.

beginning

a batch

job

submitted

through

system

Format
JOB

user-name

Qualifiers

Default

/AFTER=absolute~time
/ [NO]DELETE

/DELETE

/PARAMETERS=parameters,
...
/PRIORITY=n
/QUEUE=gueue-name
/[NO]TRAILING_BLANKS

/QUEUE=SYSSBATCH
/TRAILING_BLANKS

/NAME=7job-name

/NAME=INPBATCH

Prompts

None.

Command Parameters
user-name

Identifies the user name under
which
the
Jjob
is
to
Specify the user name just as you would enter it during

be
the

procedure.
the job is

otherwise

All qualifiers must
not submitted.

the

user-name;

system

through

run.
login

Description
All

batch

jobs

submitted

the

reader
must
be preceded by
JOB card identifies the user

followed

PASSWORD

card

a JOB card.
submitting

giving

the

The
the

the
§ is
job,

system

card

required.
and
must

The
be

password.

The user
name
and
password
are
validated
using
the
system
authorization
file
in
the same manner as they are validated in
the login procedure.
The process that executes the batch job
is
assigned
the
disk
and
directory
defaults
and
privileges

associated with
executed at the
The
card

end

the account.
start of the

batch

job

(12-11-0-1-6-7-8-9

If a LOGIN.COM
job.

signaled

overpunch),

the

file

EOJ

exists,

command,

another

JOB

EOF

card.

Command Qualifiers
~

/AFTER=absolute-time
Requests that the

job

held

until

after

specific

time.

Specify the time
value
according
to
the
rules
for
absolute times (these rules are given in Section 6.8).

If the specified time
immediate processing.

has already passed,

113

the

job

entering

gqueued

for

JOB

/DELETE
/NODELETE

Controls whether the batch input file is saved after the
job
is
processed.
By default, the job, which is saved for the duration
of
the
job,
1is
deleted
after
processing.
If
you
specify
/NODELETE,
the
file
1is
saved
under the name INPBATCH.COM, by
default.
If you specify the /NAME qualifier, the
file
name
of
the file is the same as the name you specify with /NAME.

/NAME=job—-name

Specifies a 1- to 8-alphanumeric character file name string to be
used
as
the job name and as the file name for the batch job log
file.
By default, the system gives the output log
file
a
file
name

INPBATCH.

/PARAMETERS=parameters,...

Specifies from 1 to 8 optional parameters to
be
passed
to
the
command procedure.
The parameters define values to be equated to
the symbols named Pl, P2, P3, and so on, in the batch
job.
The
symbols are local to the initial input stream.

1f you specify more than one parameter,

and enclose them

in parentheses.

The commas delimit the parameters.
contains
any
special
characters
parameter in quotation marks.
/PRIORITY=n

Specifies the priority for

separate them with commas

To specify a
parameter
that
or
delimiters,
enclose
the

the specified job.

The priority, n, must be in the range of 0
the lowest priority and 31 is the highest.

through 31,

where

By default, jobs are assigned the same priority as
your
current
process's
base
priority;
the user privilege ALTPRI is required
to set
a
priority
value
that
1is
higher
than
your
current
process's
base
priority.
If you specify a higher priority than
your current base priority and you do not
have
this
privilege,
the job is given your current base priority, by default.
/QUEUE=queue-name

Spec1f1es the name of a particular batch job queue in
which
the
job is to be entered.
If you do not specify /QUEUE, then the job
is placed in the default system batch job queue, SYS$SBATCH.

/TRAILING_BLANKS

/NOTRAILINGBLANKS

Controls whether input cards in the card
image
form
or
if
input
records
are
non-blank character.
By
default,
the
trailing
blanks
from
the records read
Use
the
/NOTRAILING_BLANKS
qualifier
records be

truncated.

114

deck are
read
1in
card
truncated
at
the last
system
does
not
strip
through the card reader.
to
request
that
input

JOB

Examples

(seoa
SPRINT AVERAGE

mput data

(/S RUN AVERAGE
S LINK AVERAGE
source statements

SFORTRAN SYSSINPUT AVERAGE

(S ON WARNING THEN EXIT
(S PASSWORD HENRY
/S JOB HIGGINS

The JOB and PASSWORD cards identify and
authorize
the
user
HIGGINS
to enter batch jobs.
The command stream consists of
a
FORTRAN
command
and
FORTRAN
source
statements
to
be
compiled.
The
file
name AVERAGE following the device name
SYSSINPUT provides the compiler with
a
file
name
for
the
object
and listing files.
The output files are cataloged in
the user HENRY's default directory.
If the compilation is successful, the LINK command creates an
executable image, and the RUN command executes it.
Input for
the program follows the RUN command in
the
command
stream.
The last command in the job prints the program listing.

command mnput .

S PASSWORD HENRY

/ PARAMETERS = (A, TEST)

(S JOB HIGGINS,NAME = BATCH1 —

The /NAME qualifier on the JOB card specifies a name for
the
batch job.
When the job completes, the printed log file will
be identified as BATCH1.LOG.
The JOB card is continued
onto
a
second
line
with
the
continuation
character (-).
The
/PARAMETERS qualifier defines Pl as A and P2 as TEST.

115

LIBRARY
Creates or modifies an object module library or a macro
1library;
or
inserts, deletes, replaces, or lists modules, macros, or global symbol
names

in a library.

Format

LIBRARY

library

[file-spec,...]

Command Qualifiers

Default

/COMPRESS [=options,...]
/CREATE [=options,...]
/DELETE=module,...
/EXTRACT {=module,...]
/FULL
/ [NO] GLOBALS
/INSERT

/REPLACE
/REPLACE
/REPLACE

/MACRO
/ [NO]NAMES
/OBJECT
/OUTPUT=file~spec

/OBJECT
/NONAMES
/OBJECT

/[NO]JLIST[=file-spec]

/GLOBALS
/REPLACE

/NOLIST

/REMOVE=symbol,
...

/REPLACE
/RSX11
/SELECTIVE_SEARCH
/SQUEEZE

/REPLACE

Prompts

Library:

library

File:

file-spec

Command

Parameters

library

Specifies the name of the library to be created or modified.

Wild cards are not allowed in the library file specification.
.If
the
file specification does not include a file type, the LIBRARY
command assumes
a
default
file
type
of
OLB
if
/OBJECT
is
specified
either
explicitly
or
by default;
or a default file
type of MLB if /MACRO is specified.
file-spec,...

Specifies the names of one or more files that contain modules
to
be inserted in the specified library.
This parameter is required
when you specify /INSERT or /REPLACE;
it is
optional
whep, you
specify /CREATE.
Note that the default operation for the LIBRARY
command is /REPLACE;
if you do
not
specify
a
gqualifier *that
requests
a
specific
operation,
you
must
enter the file-spec
parameter.

116

LIBRARY

If you do not specify any of the qualifiers /REPLACE,
/CREATE, the file-spec parameter is invalid.

If you specify more than one file,

you

signs
plus
either
with
specifications
either case, the contents
of
each
file

can

specified library.

No wild cards are allowed in the input file
any

/INSERT, or

the

file

specifications.

separate

(+) or commas
are
inserted

file specification does not include a file type,

(,).
1in

1In
the

the LIBRARY

command assumes a default
file
type
of
OBJ
when
/OBJECT
is
specified
either
implicitly
or by default;
a file type of MAR
when /MACRO is specified and /RSX1ll is not specified;
and a file
type of MAC when /MACRO and /RSX1ll are specified.
Description

Libraries are files that contain one or more entries, or modules,
of a similar type;
and directories, or tables, that indicate the
locations of individual modules within the
1library.
There
are
two

types of library:

Object
module
1libraries
that
catalog
frequently
called
routines;
you
can use object module libraries as input to
the linker.
The linker searches the object
module
1library
when
input

it
encounters
a reference
files specified.

it cannot resolve from the
:

Macro libraries that catalog macro definitions;
you can use
macro
libraries
as
input to the assembler.
The assembler
searches the macro library when it encounters a
macro
that
is not defined in the input file.

Both object module libraries and macro libraries have a directory

called

module name table

(MNT)

that lists the modules

(or,

the case of macro libraries, the
macros)
in
the
1library.
An
object
module
1library also contains a global symbol table (GST)
that lists the global symbols defined in each of the
modules
in
the

library.

When the LIBRARY command adds a file to an object module library,
it
catalogs
the module according to its module name, and not by
the file name of the file containing the module.

The
LIBRARY
command
creates
libraries
and
modifies
their
contents.
You
can
use DCL commands to manipulate a library in
its entirety, for example, the DELETE, COPY, and RENAME
commands
can delete, make copies of, or rename libraries, respectively.
When you use the LIBRARY command, you can specify qualifiers that
request
more
than
one
function in a single command, with some
restrictions.
The qualifiers
that
perform
LIBRARY
functions,
related
qualifiers,
and
qualifier
incompatibilities
are
summarized

in Table 1.

117

LIBRARY

Qualifier

Related Qualifiers

Incompatible

/COMPRESS

/OUTPUT

/CREATE,

/CREATEL

/SQUEEZE 2, /GLOBA%S3

/COMPRESS, /EXTRACT

/SELECTIVE_SEARCH

/DELETE

Functions

/EXTRACT

/OUTPUT

/COMPRESS, /CREATE, /DELETE
/INSERT, /LIST, /REMOVE,
/REPLACE

/INSERT

/SQUEEZEZ, /GLOBALS3

/EXTRACT

JLIST

/FULL, /NAMES>

/EXTRACT

/SELECTIVE_SEARCH3

/REMOVE3

/REPLACE

Table 1
Command Qualifiers

The

/EXTRACT

/SQUEEZEZ2, /GLOBALS3

/EXTRACT

/SELECTIVE_SEARCH3

/CREATE,

/INSERT,

and

/REPLACE

qualifiers

are

not

incompatible;

however,
1if
more
than one is specified, /CREATE takes precedence
over /INSERT and
/INSERT
takes
precedence
over
/REPLACE.
The
related qualifiers for /CREATE are applicable only if you enter one
or

input

files.

1Indicates

a qualifier

that

applies

only

to macro

Indicates

that

applies

only

qualifier

libraries

object

module

libraries

Command Qualifiers

/COMPRESS [=options,...]
Requests
library

the LIBRARY
resulting

/COMPRESS,

command
to
from
module

recover
unused
space
deletion.
When
you

1in
the
specify

the LIBRARY command by default creates a
new
library
one higher than the existing library.
Use
to
specify
an
alternate
name
for
the

with
a version number
the /OUTPUT qualifier
compressed library.
You

can optionally specify one or more of the
following
options
to
increase
or decrease the size of the library, overriding the
values specified when the library was created:
BLOCKS:n

Specify
for the

the number
library

512~byte

blocks

allocated

GLOBALS:n Specify
the
maximum
number
of
global
symbols
the
library can contain (for object module libraries only)
MODULES:n Specify the maximum number
library can contain

modules

macros

If you specify more than one option, separate them with
plus signs and enclose the list in parentheses.

118

commas

the

LIBRARY

/CREATE [=options,...]
Requests the LIBRARY command to create a new library.
When
you
specify
/CREATE,
you can optionally specify a file or a list of
files that contain modules to be placed in the library.
By default, the LIBRARY command
specify /MACRO to indicate that

Specify one or more of the
of the library, overriding

BLOCKS:n

creates an object module library;
the library is a macro library.

following options to
the system defaults:

control

the

size

Specify the number of 512-byte blocks to
be
allocated
for
the
1library.
By
default,
the
LIBRARY command
allocates 100 blocks for a new library.

GLOBALS:n Specify
the
maximum
library
can
contain.
sets a maximum of 275
module
global

macro

library.
(A
macro
library
symbol directory;
therefore

libraries

If you
global
MODULES:n

defaults

the

contain.
maximum of

maximum number

maximum

modules

the

number

1library

can

By
default,
the
LIBRARY
command
sets
a
75 modules for an object module library
and

modules

MODULES
4096.

does
not have a
the
maximum
for

0.)

specify /RSX1ll, the default
symbol table entries is 128.

Specify

275

number
of
global
symbols
the
By default, the LIBRARY command
global
symbols
for
an
object

for

option,

the

macro

library.

If you

maximum

wvalue

allowed

specify
for

the
is

If you specify /RSX11l, the default
maximum
number
of
modules
for
an
object
module
1library
1is 512;
the
default maximum number of macros for macro libraries is
256.

If you specify more than one option, separate them with
plus signs and enclose the list in parentheses.

commas

/DELETE=module,...
Requests the LIBRARY command to delete one or more modules from a
library.
You must specify the names of one or more modules to be
deleted from the library.
If you specify more than
one
module,
separate
them
with commas or plus signs and enclose the list in
parentheses.
When

the

issues

LIBRARY

MODULES

Then,
The

deletes

modules

from

1library,

DELETEDS

lists

LIBRARY

library,

Use

command

the message:

the

command

but

names

does

not

rather

have

been

it has

physically

deletes

the /COMPRESS qualifier

modules

its

deleted.

119

entry

compress

successfully deleted.

remove

module

from

the module

name

table.

library

from

which

LIBRARY

/EXTRACT=module,
...

Copies one or more modules from an existing library
into
a
new
file.
If
you specify more than one module, separate the module
names
with
commas
or
plus
signs
and
enclose
the
1list
in
parentheses.

If
you
specify
the
/OUTPUT
qualifier
in
conjunction
with
/EXTRACT,
the
LIBRARY
command
writes the output into the file
specified by the /OUTPUT qualifier.
If you specify /EXTRACT
and
do
not specify /OUTPUT, the LIBRARY command writes the file into
a file that has the same file name as the library and a file type
of OBJ, MAR, or MAC, depending on the /OBJECT, /MACRO, and /RSX1ll
qualifiers.

If you specify /EXTRACT in
conjunction
with
/RSX1ll,
then
the
module
name
on the /EXTRACT qualifier is optional:
all modules
in the specified library are concatenated into a single file with

file

type

of OBJ or MAC, depending on the /OBJECT and /MACRO

qgualifiers.

If you do not specify /RSX1ll,
module

/FULL

you

must

specify

1least

one

name.

Requests a full description of each module
in
the
module
name
table.
Use
this
qualifier
in
conjunction
with
the
/LIST
qualifier to request LIBRARY to list each module in
the
library
in

the

format:

entry SIZE:nnnnn

INSERTED:dd-mmm-yyyy

/GLOBALS
/ [NO] GLOBALS
Controls,

global

included

for object
module
symbols
in
modules
in the global

symbol

IDENT:nn

1libraries,
whether
the
names
of
being
inserted
in the library are
table.

By default, the LIBRARY command places all global symbol names in
the global symbol table.
Use /NOGLOBALS when you do not want the
global

symbol names

/INSERT
Requests

in the global

the LIBRARY

command

symbol

add

the

table.

contents

one

files to an existing library.
If an object module file specified
as input consists of concatenated
object
modules,
the
LIBRARY
command
creates
a
separate entry for each object module in the
file;
each module name table entry reflects an individual module
name.
If a macro file specified as input contains more than one
macro definition,

the LIBRARY command creates

separate

entry

for each macro, naming the module name table entries according to
the names specified on the .MACRO directives.

When
the
library,

LIBRARY
command
inserts
modules
into
an
existing
it
checks
the module name table before inserting each
module.
If a module name, macro
name,
or
global
symbol
name
already
exists
in
the
1library,
the
command
issues an error
message and does not add the module to the library.
One or
more
modules may be successfully inserted before the error occurs.
To

insert or

there

1is

qualifier.

replace a module

current

in a

library regardless of

entry with the same name,

120

whether

use the /REPLACE

LIBRARY

/LIST[=file-spec]
/NOLIST
Controls whether or
the contents of the

not the LIBRARY
library.

command

creates

listing

/NOLIST is the default.
If you specify /LIST without including a
file specification, the LIBRARY command writes the output file to
the
current
SYSSOUTPUT
device.
If
you
include
a
file
specification that does not have a file type, the LIBRARY command
uses

the

default

file

type

LIS

(LST

/RSX1ll

specified.)

If you specify /LIST in conjunction with qualifiers that
perform
additional operations on the library, the LIBRARY command creates
the listing after completing all the other
requests;
thus
the

listing

reflects

the

status

the

library after

all

changes

have

been made.

When you specify /LIST, the LIBRARY
the following information about the
GIRECTORY

FILE

default,

the

library

file-swrec

File name, file
being listed.
Libraru-~ture

command provides,
library:

LIBRARY

type,

and

CREATED

version

RBY:

LIB

number

vvwvyy

The type of library (OBJECT or MACRO) and the version number
of
the librarian that created the library.
(If you specify
/RSX11, the name of the librarian is LBR.)
LAST

INSERT

The
MNT

QUCURRKRED

date

ENTRIES

and

dd-mmm-wwww

time

at which

ALLOCATED!

rmms

the

hhiimnlos

last

AVATLARLE?D

insertion was
mm

The

current status of the module name
table:
number
of entries that can be entered in the
the number of entries that are unused (mm).

GST

ENTRIES

ALLOCATEDI?

rnd

AVATLABLED

made.

the
table

maximum
(nn) and

The current status of the global symbol table:
the
maximum
number of entries that can be entered in the table (nn), and
the number of entries that are unused
(mm).
"For
a
macro

library,
this line
FILE

SFACE

The

both values are always 0.
(If you specify /RSX11,
lists the entry point table (EST) entries.)

AUVATLARBLE?

amount

nrmmnn

space

WORDS

available

121

the

library

for

new

files.

LIBRARY

nnmnn WORDS

RECOVERARLE DELETED SFACE!

The amount of space occupied by modules whose entries have
To recover this
been deleted from the module name table.
space, use the /COMPRESS qualifier.

module

e
moacisl
L4
*

The names of all the entries in the module name table.

If you specify /LIST, you can also specify /FULL
request additional information in the listing.

and

/NAMES

/MACRO

Indicates that the library is a macro library. When you specify
the file type of the
/MACRO and you do not specify /RSX1ll,

input

files

If you specify /MACRO in conjunction with /RSX1l, the input

file

library defaults to MLB and the file types

default

any

MAR.

to MAC.

type defaults

/NAMES
/NONAMES

library,
Controls, when /LIST is specified for an object module
whether the LIBRARY command lists the names of all global symbols
in the
in the global symbol table as well as the module names
module name table.

/NONAMES is the default;

each

/NAMES,

specify

you

entry name is displayed in the format:

module

E
et ru-name
MORUL

swmiaol

sumiag

aumhol

swmtaol

sumbol

swmiacl

If the library is a macro library

symbol names are displayed.

and

specify

you

/NAMES,

This

/OBJECT

Indicates that the library is an object module library.
the default.

/OUTPUT=file-spec

qualifiers
/COMPRESS
when the /EXTRACT or
Specifies,
specified, the file specification of the output file.
For /EXTRACT,
library;
a

are

the output file contains the modules extracted from
the
contains
file
the output
/COMPRESS,
for

compressed library.

/REMOVE=symbol,
...

Requests the LIBRARY command to delete entries for
global symbols from the global symbol table.

When you

specify

/REMOVE,

the

LIBRARY

command

one

displays

the

message:

GLOEAL

Then,

SYMBOLS

DELETEDS

it displays the names of

deleted.
122

global

symbols

successfully

LIBRARY

/REPLACE
Requests the LIBRARY command to
replace
one
modules
1in a library with the modules in the
specified.
The LIBRARY command first deletes

if
any,
for
each
module or macro in the
corresponding global symbols, then
inserts
macro in the library.

or
more
existing
input file or files
an existing
entry,

input
the

file(s) and
new
module

the
or

This

is the default operation;
if
you
specify
an
input
file
parameter
and
do not specify /CREATE, /INSERT, or /REPLACE, the
LIBRARY

command

the modules

replaces

the

files

When you use

the /REPLACE

the

each

names

MODULE

existing

module(s)

the

file

with

specified.
function,

module

replaced,

"module-mame®

the LIBRARY command
in

the

displays

format:

REPLACED

/RSX11
Indicates that the specified
object
modules
in
RSX~-11M

1library
format,

is
a
1library
containing
or macros for the MACRO-1l1

Assembler.

/SELECTIVE_SEARCH
Defines
the
1input
files
being
inserted
into
a
1library
as
candidates
for selective searches by the linker.
If you specify
/SELECTIVE_SEARCH, the modules are selectively
searched
by
the
linker
when
the
1library
1is
specified as a linker input file:
only

the

other
image

global

modules
file.

symbols

are

the

module(s)

included

the

that

symbol

are

referenced

table

the

output

/SQUEEZE
Requests

that

the

LIBRARY

command

compress

individual

macros

before
adding
them
to
a
macro
library.
When
you
specify
/SQUEEZE,
trailing
blanks,
trailing
tabs,
and
comments
are
deleted from each macro before insertion in the library.

Use /SQUEEZE
1in
conjunction
with
the
/CREATE,
/INSERT,
/REPLACE qualifiers to conserve space in a macro library.

and

Examples

% LIBRARYZCREATE TESTLIR ERRMSG» STARTUR
The

LIBRARY

TESTLIB.OLB

the

command
and

The

TERMTEST

LIBRARY

the

object

modules

module

ERRMSG.OBJ

1library
and

named

STARTUP.OBJ

library.

% LIRRARYZINSERT
FOLINK

creates

places

command

adds

TESTLIB.OLB.

linker

command.

TESTLIR SCANL INE
TESTLIR/LIRRARY

using

the

The

the

module

1library

/LIBRARY

SCANLINE.OBJ

specified

qualifier

TERMTEST.OBJ

refers

on
to

any

the

input

the

LINK

routines

or global symbols not defined in TERMTEST,
the
1linker
will
search
the
global
symbol
table
of library TESTLIB.OLB to
resolve the symbols.

123

LIBRARY

$ FORTRAN
$ LIBRARY
MODULE

SCANLINE
TESTLIR

SCANLINE

"SCANLINE"

REFPLACED

The
FORTRAN
command
compiles
a
source
program
named
SCANLINE.FOR
and creates an object module SCANLINE.OBJ.
The
LIBRARY command in this example uses
the
default
function,
/REPLACE,
to
replace
the
module
SCANLINE
1in the library
TESTLIB.OLB with the new version.
$

LIBRARY/ZDELETE=8TARTUF

MODULES

TESTLIR

DELETEDS

STedRTUR
$

LIRRARYLIST/NAMES

TESTLIR

DIRECTORY OF FILE TESTIB.OLRBSZ
VUX129.0
ORJECT MODULE LIBRARY CREATED RY LIER:
LAST INSERT QUCURRED 10-JUN-78 AT 16:41:23
73
25 AVATLABLED
MNT ENTRIES alLLOQCATED:
270
AVAILARLES
2785
GST ENTRIES ALLOCATEDD
FILE SPACE AVATLARLED
18347 WORDSG

RECOVERARLE DELETEX SFACED
ok

MODULE
D ERRMEG

ERRMESE

¥k

00134 WORDS

ERREERROR

ERREFATAL

ERREWARNING

S SCANL TNE
MODULE
SCAMLTNE

¢ LTERARY ZCOMPRESS= (RLOCKEIH0)
b FURGE TESTLIROLR

TESTLIR

The LIBRARY command
deletes
the
module
STARTUP
from
the
library
TESTLIB.OLB.
The
next
LIBRARY command requests a
listing of the contents
of
the
1library
TESTLIB.OLB.
The
/NAMES
qualifier
requests
a
list
of
each
of the global
symbols

the modules.

The listing indicates that the deletion of the module STARTUP
resulted in unused space;
the /COMPRESS function deletes the
space and requests
that
50
blocks
be
allocated
for
the
library.
By default, /COMPRESS creates a new version of the
library.
The PURGE command purges the earlier version.

ORy
RUTERM » WRTERM
g L LRRARY AEXTRACT=(MESCRIPT
AT RUT=TEME

QUALMAT « MLE
L TRNWIN
MBI LGOO

The
/EXTRACT
qualifier
names
three
RDTERM,
and
WRTERM,
to
be
copied

macros,
DESCRIPTOR,
from the macro library
[GOODWIN.LIB]
on
the
disk

LOCALMAC.MLB in the subdirectory
DBB2.
The
/OUTPUT
qualifier requests that the output file
have a file name of TEMP.
The
LIBRARY
command
writes
the
output
to the file TEMP.MAR in your current default disk and
directory.

124

LIBRARY

$ LIBRARY/ZMACRO/CREATE=
(RLOCKS 40 MODULES?100)
. MYMAL

TEMP

$ MACRO MYMAC/LIBRARY+HCYGNUS/0RJECT
The

LIBRARY

from
room

command creates a macro library
named
MYMAC.MLB
the
macros
in the file TEMP.MAR.
The new library has
for 100 modules in a 40-block
file.
Although
only
a

single

1input

file

macros.

Each

macro

The

MACRO

command

1is

specified,
entered

assembles

the

new

source

file

contains

three

library.

file

CYGNUS.MAR;

the

/LIBRARY
gqualifier
specifies
the
1library
MYMAC.MLB as an
input file.
If the source file
CYGNUS
contains
any
macro
calls not defined within the file, the assembler searches.
the
library.
$ LIBRARY/ZLIST=MYMAC, LISAFULL

The LIBRARY command requests a
library
MYMAC;
the
output
MYMAC.LIS.

125

MYMAD
., MLE

full
1listing
1is
written
to

of
a

the
file

macro
named

LINK
into a
Invokes the VAX-1ll Linker to link one or more object modules
program image and defines execution characteristics of the image.
This command is described in detail in the VAX-1ll Linker Reference
Manual.

If you use the /RSX1ll qualifier, the LINK command invokes the RSX-11M
The LINK/RSX1l command 1is described under its own
Task Builder.
heading.

Format

file-spec,...

LINK

Default

Command Qualifiers
/BRIEF

/ [NO] CONTIGUOUS
/ [NO] CROSS_REFERENCE
/ [NO]DEBUG [=file~-spec]
/ [NO]EXECUTABLE [=file-spec]

/NOCONTIGUOUS
/NOCROSS_REFERENCE
/NODEBUG
/EXECUTABLE

/ [NOIMAP [=file-spec]
/ [NO] SHAREABLE [=file-spec]
/ [NO]SYMBOL_TABLE [=file-spec]
/ [NO]SYSLIB
/ [NO] SYSSHR
/ [NO]SYSTEM [=base-address]
/ [NO] TRACEBACK

/NOMAP
/NOSHAREABLE
/NOSYMBOL_TABLE
/SYSLIB
/SYSSHR
/NOSYSTEM
/TRACEBACK

/FULL

File Qualifiers
/INCLUDE=module-name,...
/LIBRARY
/OPTIONS
/SELECTIVE_SEARCH

Prompts

file-speC,...

File:

Command

Parameters

file-spec,...

The input files can be object
Specifies one or more input files.
to be searched for external
1libraries
1linked,
be
modules to
references or from which specific modules are to be included,

shareable images to be included in the output image, or option
If you specify multiple input
files to be read by the linker.
ns with commas (,) or plus
specificatio
file
the
separate
files,
signs (+). 1In either case, the linker «creates a single image
file.

If you do not specify a file type in an input file specification,
the 1linker supplies default file types, based on the nature of
the file. All object modules are assumed to have file types of
OBJ.

126

LINK

Command Qualifiers

/BRIEF
Requests

file.

the

linker

/BRIEF

A brief

produce

is valid

form of

only

brief

if /MAP

map

(memory

is also

allocation)

specified.

the map contains:

)

summary of

)

list of

summary of

the

all

image

characteristics

object modules
link-time

included

performance

the

image

statistics

/CONTIGUOUS
/NOCONTIGUOUS
Controls
default,

whether
the image

the
file

output
is not

image
file
contiguous.

1is

contiguous.

/CROSS_REFERENCE
/NOCROSS_REFERENCE
Controls whether the memory allocation listing (map)
contains
a
symbol
cross
reference.
/CROSS_REFERENCE is valid only if /MAP
is also specified and /BRIEF is not specified;
/CROSS_REFERENCE
must follow /MAP in the command line.
A

symbol

the
it.

cross

1image,

reference

its

value,

/DEBUG [=file-spec]
/NODEBUG
Controls

lists

and

each

global

all

modules

included

symbol

the

referenced

image

that

refer

1in

whether

debugger

the

output

image.

If the object module contains local symbol table and/or traceback
information
for
the debugger, you can specify /DEBUG to include
the information in the image as well.
If the object module
does
not

contain

symbol

specify /DEBUG,
debugging.

table

only global

The /DEBUG qualifier

and/or

symbols

traceback

are

information,

available

optionally accepts the name

for

and

you

symbolic

an alternate,

user-specified debugger.
If a file specification is
it does not contain a file type, the linker assumes

entered, and
the
default

file
type
of
OBJ.
If
you
specify
/DEBUG
without
a
file
specification, the default VAX/VMS Symbolic
Debugger
1is
1linked
with
the image.
For information on using the debugger, see the
VAX-1l1l Symbolic Debugger Reference Manual.

/EXECUTABLE [=file-spec]
/NOEXECUTABLE
Controls

whether

gpiionally

the

provides

1linker

creates

file

executable

specification

for

the

image

output

and

image

ile.

By default,
file
name

the linker creates an executable image with the
same
as the first input file and a file type of EXE.
When
you specify /EXECUTABLE, you can control the defaults applied
to
the
output
file specification by the placement of the qualifier
in the
command,
as
described
in
Section
6.3.3,
"Rules
for
Entering Output File Qualifiers."

Use /NOEXECUTABLE to determine
modules, without incurring the
an image file.

the outcome of linking
a
set
of
linker overhead required to create

127

LINK

/FULL

(memory
Requests the linker to produce a full map
/FULL is valid only if /MAP is specified.
listing.

allocation)

A full listing contains the following information:

)

All the information included in the brief listing

)

Detailed descriptions of

)

Lists of global symbols by name and by value

section in the

image file

each

program

section

and

image

/MAP[=file-spec]

/NOMAP

1is produced
(map)
Controls whether a memory allocation listing
If you specify
and optionally defines the file specification.
to
/MAP, you can also specify /BRIEF, /FULL or /CROSS_REFERENCE
of
any
specify
not
do
you
If
map.
the
of
contents
the
control
these qualifiers,

the map contains:

)

All the information contained in a brief listing

)

A list of user~defined global symbols by name

)

A list of user-defined program sections

When you specify /MAP, you can control the defaults applied to
as described in Section 6.3.3,
the output file specification,
"Rules for Entering Output File Qualifiers."

/SHAREABLE [=file-spec]
/NOSHAREABLE

Requests the linker to produce a shareable image file rather than
an executable image.

Shareable images cannot be run with the

RUN

command.

However,

they can be 1linked with object modules to create executable
If
By default, the linker creates an executable image.
images.
/SHAREABLE,
and
/EXECUTABLE
qualifiers
the
of
you specify both
the /SHAREABLE qualifier always takes precedence.

When you specify /SHAREABLE, you can control the defaults applied
the
file specification by the placement of
to the output
qualifier in the command, as described in Section
for Entering Output File Qualifiers."

6.3.3,

"Rules

/SYMBOL_TABLE [=file-spec]

/NOSYMBOL_TABLE

Requests the linker to create a separate file containing symbol
definitions for all global symbols in the image. The output file
will be

in object module

format.

If you also specify /DEBUG, the linker includes the global symbol
1image for wuse by the debugger, and also
definitions in the
creates a separate symbol table file.

input to subsequent LINK
The symbol table file can be used as
commands, to provide the symbol definitions to other images.
By default, the linker does not create a symbol table file.
the defaults
you can control
When you specify /SYMBOL TABLE,
applied to the output file specification, as described in Section
output
The
6.3.3, "Rules for Entering Output File Qualifiers."
file type always defaults to STB.
128

LINK

/SYSLIB
/NOSYSLIB

Controls whether the default shareable image and
system
library
are to be automatically searched for unresolved references.
By default, the linker
searches
the
default
system
shareable
image
SYSSLIBRARY:VMSRTL.EXE and then the default system library
SYSSLIBRARY:STARLET.OLB when it cannot resolve
references
using
the input file(s) specified in the command.

If you specify /NOSYSLIB,

neither VMSRTL.EXE nor

STARLET.OLB

searched.

/SYSSHR

/NOSYSSHR

Controls whether the linker searches the default system shareable
image
when
it
cannot
resolve
references in the input file(s)
specified.

By default, the linker
searches
the
default
system
shareable
image
SYSSLIBRARY:VMSRTL.EXE and then the default system library
SYSSLIBRARY:STARLET.OLB when it cannot resolve
references
using
the
input
file(s)
specified.
Use
the /NOSYSSHR qualifier to
request that only the default system library be searched.
/SYSTEM[=base-address]
/NOSYSTEM
Requests the linker to produce
a
system
image
and
optionally
defines
a
base address for the image.
A system image cannot be
run with the RUN command;
it must be bootstrapped
or
otherwise
loaded into memory.

The base address specifies the virtual memory location
at
which
the
1image
1is
to
be
1loaded.
The address can be expressed in
decimal, hexadecimal, or octal, using the
radix
specifiers
%D,
$X,
or
%0, respectively.
If you do not specify a base address,
the linker uses the default address of %X80000000.
If you

specify /SYSTEM,

you cannot

specify either

/SHAREABLE

/DEBUG.

System
images
are
intended
for
special
purposes,
such
as
standalone operating system diagnostics.
When the linker creates
a system image, it orders the program
sections
in
alphanumeric
order and ignores all program section attributes.
/TRACEBACK
/NOTRACEBACK
Controls whether the linker includes traceback information in the
image
file.
By
default,
the
1linker
1includes
traceback
information so that the system can trace the call stack
when
an
error
occurs.
If
you
specify
/NOTRACEBACK,
no
traceback
reporting when an error occurs.
If you

specify /DEBUG,

/TRACEBACK

129

is assumed.

LINK

File Qualifiers

/INCLUDE=module-name,...

Indicates that the associated input
file
is
an
object
module
library,
and
that
only
the
module
names specified are to be
unconditionally included as input to the linker.

If you specify more
At least one module name must be specified.
than
one
module name, separate them with commas and enclose the
list

in parentheses.

If you specify /INCLUDE, you can also
specify
/LIBRARY;
then,
the library is subsequently searched for unresolved references.
/LIBRARY

Indicates that the associated input
searched
for
modules
to
resolve
files.

input

file
1is
a
1library
to
be
any undefined symbols in the

a
include
not
If the associated input file specification does
You
type, the linker assumes the default file type of OLB.
file
also
cannot specify a library as the first input file unless you
specify the /INCLUDE qualifier to indicate which modules in the
library are to be included
in
the
input.
You
can
use
both
/INCLUDE
and
/LIBRARY to qualify a file specification.
In this
the
then
first,
case, the explicit inclusion of modules occurs
library is used to search

for unresolved references.

/OPTIONS

Indicates that the associated
input
file
contains
a
1list
of
options
to control the linking.
If you specify /OPTIONS and the
associated input file specification does not include a file type,
the linker uses the default file type of OPT.

For complete details on the contents of an options file,

VAX-11 Linker Reference Manual.

see

the

/SELECTIVE_SEARCH

Indicates that the associated input file is an object module, and
that

any symbols defined

in the module that are not necessary to

resolve outstanding references should be excluded from the symbol
table
of
the
output
image file and also from the symbol table
file, if /SYMBOL_TABLE is specified.
The
binary
code
in
the

object module

is always

included.

Examples

LINK ORION

The linker links the object module in the file ORION.OBJ and
creates an executable

image named ORION.EXE.

LINKZMAFAFULL DRACQ CYOGNUS s LYRA

The linker links
the
modules
DRACO.OBJ,
CYGNUS.OBJ,
and
LYRA.OBJ
and
creates
an executable image named DRACO.EXE.
The /MAP and /FULL qualifiers request
a
full
map
of
the
image,
with
descriptions of each program section, lists of
global symbols by name and by value, and a
summary
of
the
The map file is named DRACO.MAP.
image characteristics.

130

LINK

$LINK LSSTESTISERVICE/INCLUDE=DRACOy,
$LICYGNUS/EXECUTARLE
The

LINK

command

links

the

object

module

DRACO

from

the

library
SERVICE.OLB in the directory SSTEST with the module
CYGNUS.OBJ in the current default directory.
The executable
image is named CYGNUS.EXE.
The placement of the /EXECUTABLE
qualifier provides the output file name defzult.

$LINK/MAP/ZCROSS CREFERENCEZEXECUTE=DRGWEATH ~
B/ DERLIG ~
$UWFEATHER
s MATHL IR/L IRRARY
B RUN DROGWEATH
LERUGs

Version

ADERUG-T-INITIAL»
to

1.0

lanmsuadge

FORTRANy

score

and

module

set

‘WEATHER‘

nDRG:

The linker links the
object
module
WEATHER.OBJ
with
the
debugger.
1If any unresolved references
are encountered, the
linker searches the library MATHLIB.OLB before searching the
system
library.
The /CROSS_REFERENCE qualifier requests a
cross reference listing in the map file;
the
map
file
1is
named,
by
default,
WEATHER.MAP.
The
/EXECUTE qualifier
requests the linker to name the
output
file
DBGWEATH.EXE.
The
RUN
command
executes the image;
the message from the
debugger
1indicates
that
it
1is
ready
to
accept
debug
commands.

131

LINK/RSX11
Invokes the RSX-11lM Task Builder to build an RSX-11lM image.
Format

LINK/RSX11

file-spec,...

Command Qualifiers

Default

/BRIEF
/[NO]DEBUG[=file-spec]

/BRIEF
/NODEBUG

/[NO]EXECUTABLE[=file-spec]
/ [NO]EXIT[=n]
/FULL
/ [NO] HEADER
/[NOIMAP [=file-spec]
/[NO]OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION
/[NO]POSITION_INDEPENDENT
/ [NO] POST_MORTEM
/ [NO] SEQUENTIAL
/[NO]SYMBOL_TABLE

/EXECUTABLE
/NOEXIT
/BRIEF
/HEADER
/NOMAP
/NOOVERLAY_DESCRIPTION
/NOPOSITION_INDEPENDENT
/NOPOST_MORTEM
/NOSEQUENTIAL
/NOSYMBOL_TABLE

/ [NO]TRACE

/NOTRACE

/DEFAULT_LIBRARY=file-spec

/TKB_OPTIONS=file-spec

File Qualifiers

/CONCATENATED

[NO] CONCATENATED

,
...
/INCLUDE=module
/LIBRARY
/SELECTIVE_SEARCH

Prompts

File:

file-spec,...

Command Parameters

file-spec,...

File specifications of one or more input files. The input files
may be object modules to be linked or libraries to be searched
If multiple input files are specified,
for external references.
with commas (,) or plus signs (+).
either
separated
be
may
they
In either case, a single RSX-11M image file is produced.

task
the
type,
If a file specification does not contain a file
default file types, based on the nature of the
supplies
builder
All object modules are assumed to have a file type of OBJ;
file.
overlay
file type of OLB;
libraries are assumed to have a
descriptor files are assumed to have a file type of ODL.

132

LINK/RSX11

Command Qualifiers
/BRIEF
Requests
the
task
allocation)
file;

builder
to
produce
a
brief
map
(memory
/BRIEF
is the default if /MAP is specified.
The /BRIEF qualifier is valid only if /MAP is also specified.
A
brief form of the map contains:

)

A summary of

the

image

°®

A list of all segments

A summary of

attributes

in the image

task builder

statistics

/DEBUG [=file-spec]
/NODEBUG
Controls whether or not an image is bound with a
debugger.
The
/DEBUG
qualifier
optionally
accepts
the name of an alternate,

user-specified
entered,
and
assumes

debugging
aid.
If
a
file
specification
is
it
does not contain a file type, the task builder

the default

file

type of OBJ.

If you specify /DEBUG without a

file specification,

the

default

Defines an object module library to use in place of

the

default

debugger,

ODT,

used.

/DEFAULT LIBRARY=file-spec

system
library,
SYSLIB.OLB.
after all libraries specified
references

The specified library
as
input
files
when

is searched
unresolved

are encountered.

/EXECUTABLE [=file-spec]
/NOEXECUTABLE
.
Controls whether or not the task builder produces
image and optionally provides a file specification
file.

an
for

executable
the output

By default, the task builder creates an image with the same
file
name
as
the
first
input
file and a file type of EXE.
If the
first input file you specify is the name of a
library
qualified
with
/INCLUDE,
then the default file name for the object module
created is the same as the name of
the
first,
or
only
module
specified with

/INCLUDE.

Use /NOEXECUTABLE when you want to determine the outcome of
task
building
a
set
of
modules
without incurring the task builder
overhead required to create an image.
When you
specify
/EXECUTABLE,
you
can
ccntrol
the
defaults
applied
to the output file specification by the placement of the
qualifier in the command, as described in Section
6.3.3,
"Rules
for Entering Output File Qualifiers."” The output file type always
defaults

EXE.

/EXIT[=n]
/NOEXIT
Controls whether

the task builder exits after a specified
number
of error diagnostics.
By default, the task builder does not exit
because of diagnostic errors.
If you
specify
/EXIT,
the
task

builder
exits
after
n
diagnostic errors (n is assumed to be a
decimal number, by default).
If you specify
/EXIT
and
do
not
specify a value for n, it defaults to a value of 1.

133

LINK/RSX11

/FULL

Requests

the

task

builder

produce

full

map

(memory

allocation)
1listing.
The /FULL qualifier is valid only if /MAP
is specified.
A full map contains the following information:

°®

All the information included

in the brief map

A file contents section for each module in the

)

A list of global symbol definitions by module

)

A list of unresolved global symbol

image

references

/HEADER
/NOHEADER

Controls whether the task builder includes a task header
image and in the symbol table file.

/MAP [=file-spec]
/NOMAP

Controls whether

produced

not a

memory

allocation

1listing

and optionally defines the file specification.

1in

the

(map)

If /MAP

is
specified,
the
qualifiers
/BRIEF
or
/FULL
can
also
be
specified
to
control
the
contents
of the map.
If neither of
these qualifiers is specified, /BRIEF is the default.

When you specify /MAP, you can control the
defaults
applied
to
the
output
file specification by the placement of the qualifier
in the
command,
as
described
in
Section
6.3.3,
"Rules
for
Entering
Output
File
Qualifiers."
The output file type always
defaults

to MAP.

/OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION
/NOOVERLAY_DESCRIPTION
Indicates whether the

input

file describes an

overlay

structure

for
the image.
If the input file specification does not contain
a file type, the task builder uses the default file type of
ODL.
If
you
specify
/OVERLAY DESCRIPTION,
you
can
specify only a
single input file;
the input file must contain
the
input
file
specifications and an overlay description.

/POSITION_INDEPENDENT
/NOPOSITION_INDEPENDENT

Indicates whether or not the image being built contains
position
independent code.
By default, the task builder assumes that code
is not position

independent.

/POST_MORTEM
/NOPOST_MORTEM
Controls whether

the

task builder

sets the Post Mortem Dump flag.

If
you
specify /POST_MORTEM, the system automatically lists the
contents of memory when the image terminates abnormally.

/SEQUENTIAL
/NOSEQUENTIAL
Controls whether

the
task
builder
reorders
alphabetically
when
it
creates
the
image.
/SEQUENTIAL, the task builder
orders
program
order

in which

they are

input.

134

program
sections
If
you
specify
sections
1in
the

LINK/RSX11

/SYMBOL_TABLE [=file-spec]
/NOSYMBOL_TABLE
Requests the task builder to create a
separate
module
format
containing
symbol
definitions
contained in the image.

If /DEBUG is specified, the

task

builder

definitions
1in
the
1image
for
use
creates a separate symbol table file.
The symbol
LINK/RSX1l1l

table
file
can
be
commands,
to provide

file
for

includes

1in
all

the

the debugger,

object
symbols

symbol

and

also

used
as
1input
to
subsequent
the symbol definitions to other

images.
By default, the task builder does not create a symbol table file.
When
you
specify
/SYMBOL _TABLE,
you
can control the defaults

applied

the output

file

specification by the placement of
the
"Rules
always

qualifier
1in
the command, as described in Section 6.3.3,
for Entering Output File Qualifiers." The output file type
defaults to STB.

/TKB_OPTIONS=file-spec
Specifies the name of a file containing task builder options.
If
the
file specification does not include a file type, the default
file type of CMD is assumed.
You must
omit
the
1initial
slash
character
(/)
1in
an
options
file
specified
as input to the
LINK/RSX11l

command.

/TRACE
/NOTRACE
Indicates whether
a

when

File

the
trap occurs

trace

the

image

image is traceable.
If
following the execution

you specify /TRACE,
of each instruction

executed.

Qualifiers

/CONCATENATED
/NOCONCATENATED
Indicates
whether
the
associated
input
file
consists
of
concatenated
object
modules.
By
default,
the
task
Dbuilder
includes in the image all
the
modules
in
the
file.
If
you
specify /NOCONCATENATED, the task builder includes only the first
module in the file.
/INCLUDE=module-name,...
Indicates that the associated input
file
1is
an
object
module
library,
and
that
only
the
module
names specified are to be
unconditionally included as input to the task builder.
At least one module name must be
than
one
module name, separate
list in parentheses,

specified.
1If you specify
more
them with commas and enclose the

If you specify /INCLUDE, you cannot
specify
/LIBRARY;
if
you
want
the
1library to also be searched for unresolved references,
you must specify the library file specification a second time.

135

LINK/RSX11

/LIBRARY

Indicates that the associated input
is to be searched
library that

undefined symbols in the input files.

file 1is an object module
for modules that resolve any

If the associated input file specification does not include a
file type, the task builder assumes the default file type of OLB.

You cannot specify a library as the first input file.
/SELECTIVE_SEARCH

Indicates that the associated input file is an object module, and

any symbols defined in the module that are not necessary to

that

resolve outstanding references should be excluded from the symbol
table of the output image file and also from the symbol table
The binary code in the
file, if /SYMBOL_TABLE is specified.

object module is always included.

Examples

AVERAGE

¢ LINKA/RESX11
% RUN

AVERAGE

The object module AVERAGE.OBJ is linked to
image named AVERAGE.EXE.

create

the

task

The RUN command executes the task.

% LINK/ZRSXLL WEATHERMATHLIE Y»
E
s FRECTF
LUD
= (TEMP
oS TNC
$ MATHLIBALIRBREARY

4 SDERUG/EXECUTARLE=IRGWEATH

The task builder links the object module WEATHER.OBJ with the
1library MATHLIB.OLB;
from the
TEMP and PRECIP
modules
MATHLIB is respecified as an input file with the /LIBRARY
1indicate that MATHLIB should also be searched
qualifier to
for

any unresolved references.

The image includes the system debugging aid, ODT.
RSX-11M image file

¢ COROLARSX1L
$

RUN

is named DBGWEATH.EXE.

The output

PAYROLL

SYS$EYSTEMIMRG

FLEAGE ENTER FILE SPECIFICATION FOR QUTFUT FILE

. GIH.
FravyROL

$ LINK/RGXLL

FAYROL/DVERLAY

The COBOL/RSX11l command invokes the COBOL compiler to compile
a source program named PAYROLL.CBL. The LINK/RSX1l command
file,
description
overlay
specifies the name of the
PAYROL .ODL,

created by the MERGE program.

136

CTRL/C,
The
then

CTRL/Y,

Rather,
you
get
the
attention
of
the
intention
to access the system by pressing
carriage return on a terminal not currently in use.

system then prompts
validates them.

Specify qualifiers

you

for

your

user

following

the

entry of

name

your

and

your

password,

user

name.

and

Format

Qualifiers

/CLI=command-interpreter
/DISK=device-~name

Prompts

Username:

user—-name

Password:

password

Description
The

Validates
user

your

name

authorization

°®

right

and

based

the

against

system by
the

checking

entries

the

vyour
user

file.

Establishes the default
session

access

password

on your

characteristics

user

name

entry

the

your

terminal

authorization

file.
)

Executes either the command procedure file
if
one exists in your default directory or
defined in user authorization file, if any.

named
LOGIN.COM
the command file

Qualifiers

/CLI=command-interpreter
Specifies
the
name
of
an
alternate
command
interpreter
to
override
the
default
command
interpreter
1listed
1in the user
authorization file.

/DISK=device-name
Specifies the
logical

name
device

of a disk
SYSSDISK

specification overrides the
in the authorization file.

device to
be
associated
with
the
for
the
terminal
session.
This
default SYS$DISK
device
established

137

Examples

Username:
Fassword?

HUMPTY

CTRL/Y gets the attention of the operating system, which
immediately prompts for user name. After validating the user
name, the system prompts for the password, but does not echo
it.

Usernamed

FPassword?

HIGBINS/DISK=DRE2

UAX/UMS Version

1.0

$ SHOW DEFAULY

DRER2IIHIGGING]

the
for
The /DISK qualifier requests that the default disk
The SHOW DEFAULT command response
session be DBB2.
terminal
shows that DBB2 is the default disk.

138

LOGOUT
Terminates an

interactive

terminal

session.

Format

LOGOUT

Command Qualifiers
/BRIEF
/FULL

Prompts
None.

Description
You must

use the LOGOUT command to end a
terminal
session.
If
you
turn the power off at your terminal without using the LOGOUT
command from a direct line, you remain logged in.

Command Qualifiers

/BRIEF
Requests the brief form
of
the
1logout
message.
The
command
interpreter
displays
your
user
name
and the date and time at
which you logged out.
/BRIEF is the default for
an
interactive
job.
,
/FULL
Requests the long form of the logout message.
When
you
specify
/FULL,
the
command interpreter displays a summary of accounting
information for the terminal session.
/FULL is the default for a
batch job.

Examples

LOGOUY
HIGGING

logged

out

23-JAN-1978

17:48156.73

out

24-~-JAN-1978

14:123145.30

LOGOUT/ZFULL
HIGGING

Aceounting

Ruffered
Direct

lodgdged

informationt

I/70

I/0

cournt?

Fasge faults?d
Elarsed CPU time?

The

LOGOUT

statistics

command

for

the

Feak

working

set

Fealk

wvirtual

sizel

68
00:01:30,30

displays

terminal

139

session.

Mounted
Elarsed

summary

volumes?
time?d

size!

0
&9

0
04:1539:102.6

accounting

MACRO
Invokes the VAX-11l MACRO assembler to assemble one
language

source

assembly

programs.

the MACRO-11
invokes
the MACRO command
specify /RSX1l,
If you
assembler;
all the other qualifiers apply to both the VAX-1ll and the

MACRO-11

assembler.

For more information on the VAX-11 MACRO assembler,
see
the VAX-11
MACRO
User's
Guide.
For information on the MACRO-1l1l assembler, see
the RSX-11M MACRO User's Guide.

Format

MACRO

file-spec,...

Command Qualifiers

Default

/RSX11

File Qualifiers

/DISABLE=function,...
/ENABLE=function,...

/DISABLE= (AMA,DBG,FPT,LSB)
/ENABLE=
(GBL , TBK)

/LIBRARY

/INO]JLIST[=file-spec]
/ [NOJOBJECT [=file~spec]

/ [NO] SHOW [=function,...]

/SHOW=(CND,MC,MD)

Prompts

file-spec,...

File:

Command

Parameters

file-spec,...

Specifies one or
more
assembly
language
source
files
to
be
assembled.
If you do not specify a file type for an input file,
the assembler uses the default file type of MAR.
If you
specify
/RSX11, the MACRO-1l1 assembler uses the default file type of MAC.

the
separate
you
If
You can specify more than one input file.
file is assembled
each
(,),
commas
specifications with
file
specifications with plus
If you separate the file
separately.
the files are concatenated and assembled as a single
(+),
signs
input file, producing single object and listing files.
Command Qualifiers

/RSX11
Indicates
that
the
assembly
language
MACRO-11
source
statements,
and
that
should be invoked.

140

source

the

statements

are

MACRO-11 assembler

MACRO

File Qualifiers
/DISABLE=function,...
/ENABLE=function,...
Provides initial settings for the
functions
controlled
by
the
assembler
directives.
.ENABL
and .DSABL.
You must specify at
least one of the functions listed below.
You can use either
the
short
form (equivalent to the assembler directive syntax) or the
long form.
You can enable or disable:

AMA

ABSOLUTE

Assembly of relative

DBG

DEBUG

Inclusion of local
in the object file

FPT

TRUNCATION

Truncation
truncation

GBL

GLOBAL

Assumption

addresses

assembly

addresses

that

absolute

symbol
table
information
for use with the debugger

of
floating-point
is disabled, numbers

are

undefined

external

numbers
(if
are rounded)

symbols

1in

the

symbols

LSB

LOCAL_BLOCK

Local
symbol
boundaries, or

blocks
to
cross
PSECT
to contain nonlocal symbols

TBK

TRACEBACK

Providing
information
traceback mechanism

the

debugger

/LIBRARY
Indicates that the associated input file is a macro library.
If
you
do
not
specify a file type, the assembler uses the default
file type of MLB.
If you specify more than one macro library as
input
files,
the
libraries
are
searched
1in reverse order of their specification
when a macro call is issued in a source
program.
There
1is
no
forward searching;
when a macro library contains definitions for
macro calls in a source program, you
must
specify
the
1library
before you specify the name of the source program.

/LIST[=file-spec]
/NOLIST
Controls whether an output listing
1is
<created,
and
provides an output file specification for the listing

optionally
file.

If you issue the MACRO command interactively, the
assembler,
by
default,
does
not
create
a
1listing
file.
When
/NOLIST is
present, either explicitly or by default, errors are reported
on
the current output device.
If you execute the MACRO command in a batch
job,
/LIST
1is
the
default.
When
you
specify /LIST, you can control the defaults
applied to the output file specification by the placement of
the
qualifier
in
the command, as described in Section 6.3.3, "Rules
for Entering Output
File
Qualifiers."
The
default
file
type
provided for listing files is LIS (LST if /RSX1l1l is specified).

141

MACRO

/OBJECT [=file~spec]
/NOOBJECT
Controls whether an object module is created
by
the
It also defines the file specification for the file.

assembler.

By default, the assembler creates an object module with the
same
file
name
as the first input file and a file type of OBJ.
When
you specify /OBJECT, you can control the defaults applied to
the
output
file
specification
by the placement of the qualifier in
the command, as described in Section 6.3.3, "Rules
for
Entering
Output
File
Qualifiers."
The
default
file
type provided for
object files is OBJ.

/SHOW[=function,...]
/NOSHOW [=function,...]
Provides

initial settings for the
functions
controlled
by
the
assembler
directives
.LIST
and .NLIST.
You can specify one or
more of the functions listed below.
You can use either the short
form
(equivalent
to the assembler directive syntax) or the long
form.
If you specify /SHOW without any
functions,
the
1listing
level
count
is incremented.
1If you specify /NOSHOW without any
functions, the listing level count is decremented.
CND

CONDITIONALS

List
with

unsatisfied conditional code
.IF and .ENDC directives

CALLS

List macro

calls

DEFINITIONS

List macro

definitions

EXPANSIONS

List macro

expansions

MEB

BINARY

List binary code generated by
of macro calls.

For additional details on these
Language Reference Manual.

and

repeat

functions,

see

range

the

associated

expansions

expansion

VAX-11

MACRO

Examples

MACRO

ORION

The MACRO assembler assembles the file ORION.MAR and
creates
an
object file named ORION.OBJ.
If this command is executed
in a batch job, the assembler also
creates
a
1listing
file
named

ORION.LIS.

MACROZLIST

CYGNUSy

LYRAZOQRJECT=LYRAN

This MACRO command requests
two
separate
assemblies.
The
MACRO
command assembles CYGNUS.MAR to produce CYGNUS.LIS and
CYGNUS.OBJ.
Then it assembles LYRA.MAR and creates a listing
file named LYRA.LIS and an object module named LYRAN.OBJ.

142

MACRO

$ MACRO
MYLIB/LIEBRARY + ALFHA/LIST/0RJECT. + LTESTIOLDLIR/LIRRARY + LIRETA
% FPRINT ALFHA
The
MACRO
command
concatenates
the
files
ALPHA.MAR
and
BETA.MAR
to
produce
an
object .file named ALPHA.OBJ and a
listing file named
ALPHA.LIS.
MYLIB.MLB
(in
the
current
default directory) and OLDLIB.MLB (in the directory TEST) are
specified as libraries to be searched for macro
definitions.
When
macro
calls
are found in BETA.MAR, OLDLIB, MYLIB, and
the system library STARLET.MLB are searched, in
that
order,

for

the

ALPHA.MAR,

definitions.

MYLIB.MLB

not

searched.

The

PRINT command

and

prints

When

macro

STARLET.MLB

the

143

listing.

are

calls

are

searched;

found

OLDLIB

MCR
Provides a means of running RSX-11lM components in

that

Is the RSX-11M command used to invoke the desired component,
example,
MAC
or
TKB.
If
you do not specify a component,

for
MCR

compatible with the RSX-11lM operating system.

manner

Format

MCR

[component [command-string]]

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts

MCR>

Command

Parameters

component

prompts

for

a command.

The component name must be equivalent to the file name portion of
the
file
specification
for
the
component as it exists on the

VAX/VMS system disk, that is,
you must type MAC, not MACRO,

SYS$SYSTEM:filename.
For
example,
to invoke the MACRO-1l1l assembler.

command-string
Is a valid command string for
the
component.
If
you
do
not
specify
a
command string, the requested component prompts for a
command string.

Description
For information on how to use the MCR command
interpreter
under
VAX/VMS
and for a list of the RSX-11lM components available under
VAX/VMS, see the VAX-11l/RSX-11M User's Guide.

144

MCR

Examples

$ MOCR DSP

MYFILE.DAT

The MCR command precedes a single RSX-11M command.
command finishes, DCL prompts for another command.
$

When

the

MCR

MCR=FIF MYFILE.DAT/ZGF
MCR>"Z
$

The MCR command requests activation of MCR command mode.
The
MCR>
prompt
indicates
that
the MCR command interpreter is
ready to accept commands.
After the
PIP
command
executes,
MCR
continues
prompting
until
you use CTRL/Z to return to
DCL.
&

MOCR

PIF

FIFe

MYFILE.DAT/ZSF

The MCR command requests PIP, which in
turn
prompts
for
command string.
Pressing CTRL/Y returns control to DCL.

145

MOUNT
Makes a volume and
processing by

the

files

system commands

or
or

data

user

contains

available

for

programs.

Format

MOUNT

device-name, ...

[volume-label,...]

Command Qualifiers1

[logical-name([:]]

Default

/DATA_CHECK [=option,...]
/FOREIGN
/OVERRIDE=option,...
/OWNER_UIC=uic
—/PROCESSOR=0option
/PROTECTION=code

/ [NO]JWRITE

Qualifiers

/WRITE

for Disks

Default

/ACCESSED=n
/EXTENSION=n
/GROUP
/ [NO] SHARE
/SYSTEM
/UNLOCK
/WINDOWS=n

/NOSHARE

Qualifiers

Default

for Tapes

/BLOCK=n
/DENSITY=n
/ [NO] LABEL
/RECORD=n

/BLOCK=2048
/LABEL

Prompts

Device:

device-name

Label:

volume~-label

Log_Name:

logical-name

Command Parameters
device-name,...

Specifies the physical device name or
on which the volume is to be mounted.

logical name of the

device

tape
If you specify more than one device name for a
multivolume
file,
separate
the
device names with either commas (,) or plus
signs (+);
you can specify more volume labels than device names.

1
For
tapes

convenience qualifiers that are applicable only to disks and
are
listed
separately.
All qualifier descriptions appear
alphabetical order, however.

146

to
in

MOUNT

volume-label,...
Specifies the label on the volume.
For disk volumes,
the
label
can
have
up
to 12 characters;
for tape volumes, the label can
have up to 6 characters.

If you specify more than one volume label for a multivolume
tape
set, separate them with either commas (,) or plus signs (+).
The
volumes must be in the same volume set and
the
1labels
must
be
specified in the correct order.
The volume-label parameter is
not
required
volume
with
the
/FOREIGN
qualifier,
nor

when
you
mount
a
when
you
specify

/OVERRIDE=IDENTIFICATION.
To specify a
logical
name
when
vyou
enter
either
of
these
qualifiers,
type
any
alphanumeric
characters in the volume label parameter position.
logical—-name
Defines a 1- to 63-alphanumeric
be associated with the device.

character

string

logical

name

If you do not specify a logical name, the MOUNT
command
assigns
the default logical names DISK$volume-label and TAPES$volume-label
to disk and tape devices, respectively.
The MOUNT command places the
table,
unless
you
specify

name in
/GROUP

cases, it places
name tables.

names

the

logical

the
or
the

process
/SYSTEM.
group or

1logical
name
1In the latter

system logical

Description

When you

issue

the MOUNT command,

)

That

a volume

That

the

Your UIC
you have

label

physically

the

the MOUNT
loaded on

volume matches

command

checks:

the device
the

label

against the owner UIC on the volume
the right to access the volume.

specified

to ensure

For additional
information
and
examples
of
wusing
command, see Chapter 3, "Disk and Tape Volumes."

the

that

MOUNT

Command Qualifiers

/ACCESSED=n
Specifies,
for
disk
volumes,
the
approximate
number
of
directories
that
will
be
1in use, concurrently, on the volume.
You can specify a value
from
0
through
255
to
override
the
default specified when the volume was initialized.
The

user

privilege OPER

/BLOCK=n
Specifies,

for

tape

required

volumes,

use

/ACCESSED.

the default block

size.

Legal values are in the range of 18 through 65534.
By
default,
records
are
written
to
tape volumes in 2048-byte blocks.
For
foreign or unlabeled tapes, the default is 512-bytes.

147

MOUNT

/DATA_CHECK [=options,...]

Overrides the read-check and/or write-check options specified for
a volume when it was initialized.
You can specify either or both
of the following options:

’

READ

Perform checks following all read operations

WRITE

Perform checks following all write operations

If you specify /DATA_CHECK

without

system assumes /DATA_CHECK=WRITE.

specifying

option,

the

/DENSITY=n

Specifies, for foreign or unlabeled tapes, the density
(in bpi)
You can specify either 800 or
at which the tape will be written.

1600.
If you do not specify
a
density
for
a
tape
that
was
previously written,
the
density
defaults to that at which the
tape was written.

The specified density is used only if
you
specify /FOREIGN
or
/NOLABEL
and
the
first
operation
performed
on the tape is a
write.

If you specify /LABEL, or if the first operation on the tape is a
read or written at the density at which the
1is
tape
the
read,
first record on the tape

is recorded.

/EXTENSION=n

Specifies, for disk files, the number of blocks
by which
files
will
be
extended on the volume unless otherwise specified by an
individual

command or

program request.

You can specify a value from 0
through
65535
to
value specified when the volume was initialized.
/FOREIGN

Indicates that the tape or disk volume is

ANSI

not

format used by the VAX/VMS operating system.

override

the

standard

If you mount a volume with the /FOREIGN
qualifier,
the
program
you
use to read the volume must be able to process the labels on
the volume,

any.

For example, DOS

volumes

must

mounted

with

the

/FOREIGN

qualifier and processed with the File Transfer Utility (FLX) .1

The default protection applied to foreign volumes is RWLP for the
system and owner.
If /GROUP is also specified, group members are
also given RWLP (Read,
Write,
Logical
I/O
and
Physical
1I/0)
access.
If
/SYSTEM or /SHARE is specified, the group and world
are both given RWLP access.
If you mount a volume
currently
in
Files-11
format
with
the
/FOREIGN
qualifier,
you
must have
override the volume protection privilege (VOLPRO), or you must be
the owner of the volume.

PLX is an RSX-11M utility program;

RSX~11M utilities under VAX/VMS,

for information on how

use

see the VAX-1l1l/RSX-11lM User's Guide.

148

MOUNT

/GROUP

Makes the volume available to other users
with
the
number
1in
their
wuser
identification
codes (UICs)
issuing the MOUNT command.

same
group
as the user

The logical name for the device is placed in
the
group
1logical
name
table.
You must have the privilege to place a name in the
group logical name table (GRPNAM) to use the /GROUP qualifier.
/LABEL
/NOLABEL
Indicates,
labels.

for

tape volumes,

whether

the tape

contains

standard

If you mount a tape with the /NOLABEL qualifier,
an
end-of-file
condition
1is
returned
when
a
tape mark is encountered during
reading

the

tape.

The default protection for unlabeled tapes is all access
system and owner, and no access to the group and world.
/OVERRIDE=option,...
Inhibits one or more of
MOUNT command

the

following protection checks

the

that

the

performs:

ACCESSIBILITY

EXPIRATION

(For

tapes

only).

Allows

you

override

nonblank
VOL1
or
HDR1l accessibility field.
You
must have the user privilege
to
override
volume
protection (VOLPRO) or be the owner of the volume.

(For tapes only).
Allows you to write a tape that
has not yet reached its expiration date.
You must
have
the
user
privilege
to
override
volume
protection (VOLPRO) or be the owner of the volume.

IDENTIFICATION Allows you to mount a volume when you do not
know
what
the
volume
label
is.
If
you
specify
/OVERRIDE=IDENTIFICATION, you can specify anything
for the volume-label parameter or you can omit it;
the MOUNT command ignores whatever you enter.
The
volume must be mounted /NOSHARE (either explicitly
or by default).
)

SETID

(For tapes only).
Allows you to inhibit checks of
the
volume
set
identification
when
you switch
reels in a multi-volume tape set.

/OWNER_UIC=uic
Requests that the specified user identification code be
assigned
ownership
of
the
volume
while
it
1is mounted, overriding the
ownership recorded on the volume.
Or,
if
you
are
mounting
a
volume
/FOREIGN,
requests
an owner UIC other than your current
UIC.

Specify the UIC

the

format:

[g,m]
g

is an octal

number

range of

through

377

representing

the group number.

is
an
octal
number
1in
the
representing the member number.

The brackets are required.

149

range

through

377

MOUNT

You must have the user privilege to override volume protection to
use
this
qualifier
for a Files-1l1 volume;
or, you must be the
owner

the volume.

/PROCESSOR=option

Requests that the MOUNT command associate
an
ancillary
control
program
(ACP)
to
process
the
volume,
overriding the default
manner in which ACPs are associated with devices.
The
specified
option can be one of

UNIQUE

the

following:

Create a new process to
execute
a
copy
of
the
default ACP image for the specified device type or
controller.

SAME:device

Use the same ACP process currently being

file—-spec

Create a new process to execute the specified
ACP
image
(for
example, a modified or a user-written

the device

specified.

used

ACP)
.

You must have operator privilege to use the /PROCESSOR qualifier.
/PROTECTION=code

Specifies the protection code to be assigned to the volume.

Specify the code according

specifying protection.
of
the
SET
PROTECTION
category,

the

standard

syntax

rules

for

(These rules are given in the discussion
command.)
If
you
omit
a
protection

that category of user

is denied all access.

If you do not specify a protection code, the protection
defaults
to
that
assigned to the volume when it was initialized.
1If you
specify /PROTECTION when you mount a volume with the
/SYSTEM
or
/GROUP
qualifiers,
the
protection code specified overrides any
access rights implied by the other qualifiers.
If you specify /FOREIGN, the Execute and Delete access codes have
no
meaning;
you
can
however,
specify
the
access
codes
P
(Physical I/0) and/or L (Logical I/0) to restrict the
nature
of
input/output operations different user categories can perform.

You must have the user privilege to override volume protection to
use
the
/PROTECTION qualifier on a Files-1l volume, or you must
be

the owner

/RECORD=n

Specifies,

the volume.

for tape volumes,

the number

characters

each

block

size

record.

The record size must be less than or
specified or

used by default.

equal

the

Use /RECORD in conjunction with /BLOCK to de-block records.

150

MOUNT

/SHARE
/NOSHARE

Indicates, for a disk volume, whether the
volume
1is
shareable.
If
the
volume has already been mounted by another user, and you
request that it be mounted with the /SHARE qualifier,
any
other

qualifiers you enter are ignored.

1is
volume
a
that
assumes
command
By default, the MOUNT
shareable, and allocates the device on which it is mounted.

not

specify the
If you have previously allocated the device and
the MOUNT command deallocates the device so
qualifier,
/SHARE
that other users can access it.

/SYSTEM

Makes the volume available to all users in the system,
the UIC-based volume protection allows them access.

as long as

The logical name for the device is placed in the
system
logical
name
table.
You must have the privilege to place a name in the
system logical name table (SYSNAM) to use the /SYSTEM qualifier.
/UNLOCK

Requests,

for disk volumes, write access to the index file on the

volume.

The /UNLOCK qualifier is valid only

the

volume

1is

mounted

/NOSHARE.

/WINDOWS=n

Specifies the number of mapping pointers to be allocated for file
windows.
When a file is opened, the file system uses the mapping
pointers to access data in the file.

You can specify a value from 7 to
80
to
override
value specified when the volume was initialized.

the

default

You must have operator privilege to use the /WINDOWS qualifier.
/WRITE

/NOWRITE

Controls whether the volume can be written.

By default, a volume is considered read/write when it is mounted.

You

can

files.

specify /NOWRITE to provide read-only access to protect

It is equivalent to write-locking the device.

Examples

MOUNT

$.MATHOS

MTS:

STAT..TARFE

- 1-MOUNTEDy MATHOS6 mounted on .MTAO:Z
EMOUNT
COPY
STOS1178.DAT
STAT.TAFE:

The MOUNT command
requests
that
the
magnetic
tape
whose
volume
label
is
MATHO6
be
mounted on the device MTAO and
assigns the logical name STAT_TAPE to the volume.
Subsequently
ST061178.DAT

the

COPY

tape.

command

151

copies

the

disk

file

MOUNT

ALLOCATE

IiM:

ALLOCATED

SIMEBZ2E

DIMBZ2:

HMOUNT

TEST.FILES

UMOUNT
-1 -MOUNTELy

TEST.FILES mounted on OMB2S

The ALLOCATE command requests an available RK06 device.
in the response from the
After noting the device name
ALLOCATE command, the physical volume can be placed on the
Then, the MOUNT command mounts the volume.
device.
$

MOUNT/ZSHARE

OMAZ2:

FUBLFILES

FL/FROTECTION=(SYS
IRWED OUNRWED » GR ERWEXH

shareable
The MOUNT command mounts the volume PUB_FILES as a
The /PROTECTION qualifier allows all types of access
volume.
to the system, the owner, and to other members of the volume
All other users are denied all types of
owner's group.
access.

% MOUNT/FORETGN

NT
T -MOUNTEDRy
EMOU
$

MCR

MTAL:

TESTER mounted on MTALZ

FLX

foreign volume
The MOUNT command requests the mounting of a
The MCR FLX command invokes the RSX-1l1M
the device MTAl.
on
File Transfer Utility to process the volume.
$

MOUNT

IiMAL S

FURS..BACK

REYSTEM=F~INCVOLLAKEL» incorrect volume label
~MOUNT-T-VOLIDENTy label=’BACK.UF.GMR’y owner="MALCOLM’»
format=

"NECFILELLR’

The system response to the first MOUNT command indicates that
The second message from
the label was incorrectly specified.
the
label on the volume,
the
the MOUNT command displays
and the volume format (DECFILEl11lB indicates
volume owner,
2
that the volume is in DIGITAL's Files-11l, Structure Level
format).

152

ON
Defines the default courses
of
action
when
a
command
or
program
executed
within a command procedure (1) encounters an error condition
or (2) is interrupted by CTRL/Y.
The specified actions are taken only
if
the
command
interpreter
1is enabled for error checking or CTRL/Y
interrupts;
these are the default conditions.

Formats

severity-level

THEN

[$]

command

Command Qualifiers

Default

None.

CONTROL_Y

THEN

[$]

ERROR THEN

EXIT

command

Prompts

None.

Command

Parameters

severity—level
Specifies the severity
condition
that
will
indicated
to be taken.
The severity-level is
of the following keywords:

cause
the
represented

action
by one

WARNING
ERROR
SEVERE_ERROR

You

can

truncate

any of

these

keywords

one

command
Specifies the action to be taken when errors
than
the
specified
1level
of error occur.
valid command line after the keyword THEN;
precede the command line with a dollar sign.

characters.

equal to
You can
you
can

or
greater
specify any
optionally

Description

Error Handling:
When any command or
program
is
executed,
the
return
status
value
1is
<checked
with
the current ON severity
level.
1If you specify WARNING, the specified action is taken for
warning,
error, and severe error returns.
If you specify ERROR,
the specified action is taken for error and severe error returns;
the
default
action for warnings is to continue.
If you specify
SEVERE_ERROR, the specified action is taken only for
severe,
or
fatal,
errors;
the default action for errors and warnings is to
continue.
If you do not include an ON statement in a command procedure, the
command interpreter, by default, issues the EXIT command whenever
errors
or
severe
errors
occur
during
command
or
program
execution.
In all other cases, command execution continues.

153

Any ON statement in a command procedure overrides the effect of a
previous ON statement.
The effect of an ON statement is canceled
whenever the specified command is executed as
a
result
of
the
specified
error condition.
Then, the default action, to stop on
errors and severe errors, is reinstated.

The action specified by an ON command
applies
only
within
the
command
procedure
in
which
the
command
1is executed.
If you
specify an ON
command
in
a
procedure
that
executes
another
procedure,
procedure.

the

command

action does not apply to

the nested

You can request the command interpreter not to check
the
returned
from
commands
with
the
SET
NOON
command;
checking with the SET ON command.

status
restore

CTRL/Y Handling:
Normally, pressing CTRL/Y during the
execution
of
a command procedure causes the command interpreter to receive
control.
1In a command procedure, you can specify an action to be
taken
when
CTRL/Y
1is
pressed;
this action also applies when
CTRL/C
CTRL/C

is pressed to interrupt
handling routine.

a command or

program that

has

Any ON CONTROL_Y statement overrides the
effect
of
a
previous
statement.
An
ON
CONTROL_Y
action
remains
in
effect until
explicitly overridden by another ON CONTROL_Y action statement or
until the SET NOCONTROL_Y command is executed.

Note the following characteristics of CTRL/Y action handling:
e

If a procedure that
has
set
a
CTRL/Y
action
invokes
another
procedure, the default action for CTRL/Y for the
new command level is to exit.
If CTRL/Y is pressed while
this
level
1is
active, control returns to the procedure
that specified the CTRL/Y
action;
execution
continues
following the @ command.

If an image is executing when
CTRL/Y
1is
pressed,
exit
handlers
declared
by
the
image,
1if any, are executed
before the CTRL/Y action is taken.

If no image is currently executing, that is, the
command
interpreter
is
executing a command that does not invoke
an image, the command completes before the CTRL/Y
action
is

taken.

If the CTRL/Y action does not result
1in
a
transfer
of
control
in
the
procedure, then the procedure continues
executing following the CTRL/Y action.
Execution resumes
following
the
command
or
program
image
that
was
interrupted.

You

can

command.

disable

CTRL/Y

interrupts

with

the

SET

NOCONTROL Y

Then, neither a default nor
a user-specified action 1is

taken when CTRL/Y is
pressed.
Note
that
a
command
followed
by
a SET CONTROL_Y command
CTRL/Y condition handling.

154

SET
NONCONTROL_Y
resets the default

Examples

$ ON SEVERE_ERROR THEN CONTINUE

After this statement is
executed
in
a
command
procedure,
execution
of
the
procedure will continue when any warning,
error, or severe error condition occurs.
Once the
statement
has been executed-as a result of a fatal error condition, the
default action, EXIT, is reinstated.
$ ON ERROR THEN GOTO BYPASS
$ RUN A
$ RUN B

$ EXIT

BYPASS:

RUN C

If either program A or program B returns a status code with a
severity
level
of
error
or
severe
error,
control
is
transferred

the

statement

labeled BYPASS.

$ ON WARNING THEN EXIT

$ SET NOON

RUN

[SSTEST]LIBRA

$ SET ON

The ON command requests that
the
procedure
exit
when
any
warnings,
errors,
or
severe
errors occur.
Later, the SET
NOON command disables error checking before executing the RUN
command.
Regardless
of
any
status
code
returned by the
program
LIBRA.EXE,
the
procedure
continues.
The
next

command,
the

SET ON,

re-enables error checking and reestablishes

initial ON condition.

ON CONTROL_Y THEN GOTO CTRL_EXIT

CTRL_EXIT:

INFILE

OUTFILE

EXIT

The ON command specifies action to be taken

when

pressed

during the execution of this procedure.

closing

files and exits.

CTRL/Y

When CTRL/Y

is pressed, the GOTO command that transfers
control
to
the
line
1labeled
CTRL_EXIT
1is
executed.
At
this label, the
procedure performs
clean-up
operations,
in
this
example,

155

OPEN
Opens

file

for

reading

writing

the command

level.

Format

OPEN

logical-name

file-spec

Command Qualifiers

Default

/ERROR=1abel
/READ
/WRITE

/READ
/READ

Prompts

Log_Name:

logical-name

File:

file-spec

Command

Parameters

logical-name’
Specifies a

logical

name

file-spec
Specifies the name of
or
output.
If
the
type, the system uses

assigned

the

file.

the

file or device to be opened
for
file specification does not include
the default file type of DAT.

input

file

Description
A file can be opened for either reading or writing, but not both.
After
a
file
1is opened, it is available for input or output at
the command level with the READ and WRITE commands, or it can
be
accessed
within
a
program image for input or output operations
using the logical name.
The

1logical
devices
SYSSINPUT,
SYS$SOUTPUT,
SYSSCOMMAND,
and
SYSSERROR
do not have to be explicitly opened before they can be
cead or written at the command level.
All other
files
must
be
explicitly opened.

You can
assign

issue more than one OPEN command
it
different
logical
names.

for the same
file,
and
If
you specify the same
logical name on more than one OPEN command
without
closing
the
file,
no
warning
message is issued and the file is not opened.
If the file had been
previously
read,
the
next
read
request
returns the record after the record previously read.

Command Qualifiers

/ERROR=1label
Specifies a

label on a line in the command procedure
control
1if
the
open
request results in an error.
routine is specified and an error occurs during the
the
file,
the command procedure continues execution
line

the

file,

does

156

error

occurs.

to
receive
If no error
opening
of
at the next

OPEN

The error routine specified for this qualifier
takes
precedence
over
any action statement indicated in an ON command.
If /ERROR
is not specified, the current ON condition action is taken.
If an error occurs and
a
target
label
1is
successfully
given
control, the reserved global symbol $STATUS contains a successful
completion status.
/READ

Requests that the file
be
opened
for
reading.
default, if neither /READ nor /WRITE is specified.

This

1is

the

/WRITE
Requests that the file
be
opened
for
writing.
If
the
specification
does
not
contain
a
version number and the
already exists, a new version of the file is created.

file
file

Examples

1. | $
$
$

OPEN INPUT_FILE AVERAGE.DAT
READ_LOOP:
READ/END_OF_FILE=ENDIT
INPUT_FILE

NUM

$ GOTO READ_LOOP
$

ENDIT:

$ CLOSE INPUT_FILE
The OPEN command opens the file named AVERAGE.DAT as an input
file
and
assigns
it the logical name INPUT FILE.
The READ

command reads a record from the logical file INPUT_FILE

into

the
symbol
named
NUM.
The
procedure
executes the lines
between the labels READ_LOOP and ENDIT until the end
of
the
file
1is
reached.
At the end of the file, the CLOSE command
closes the file.
2. | $

OPEN/WRITE/ERROR=OPEN_ERROR
$ WRITE_LOOP:

OUTPUT_FILE

TEMP.OUT

$ GOTO WRITE_LOOP
$ OPEN_ERROR:
$ WRITE SYSSOUTPUT
$ EXIT

"Cannot open

The OPEN command opens

the

file TEMP.OUT"

file

TEMP.OUT

for

output

and

assigns
it
the
logical
name
OUTPUT_FILE.
The
/ERROR
qualifier specifies that if any error
occurs
while
opening
the
file, the command interpreter should transfer control to
the

line

the

label

OPEN_ERROR.

157

PASSWORD
Specifies the password associated with the
card for a batch job submitted through

JOB

user name
specified
on
the system card reader.

Format

PASSWORD

password

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts

None.

Command

Parameters

password

Specifies the 1- to 8-character password
name specified on the JOB command.

associated with

the

user

Description
The

PASSWORD

command

valid

only

batch

job

submitted

through
the
card
reader.
The $ is required.
The password is
checked against the password associated with user name
specified
on the JOB card, and must be correct or the job is rejected.
Note that you can suppress printing on the card when you keypunch
the
PASSWORD
<card
to
prohibit
other
users
from
seeing the
password.

Example
l.

$EOJ
———

command input stream
=

(

e
—

$ PASSWORD HENRY

/S JOB HIGGINS

The JOB and PASSWORD commands precede a batch
from
the
card
reader.
An EOJ command marks

job.

158

job
the

submitted
end of the

PRINT
Queues one or more files
printer

on a

for printing,

specified device.

either

default

system

Format

file-spec,...

Command Qualifiers

Default

/AFTER=absolute~time
/DEVICE=device—-name
/FORMS=type

/HOLD
/ [NO] IDENTIFY
/JOB_COUNT=n
/LOWERCASE
/NAME=job-name
/PRIORITY=n
/QUEUE=queue-name

/NOHOLD
/IDENTIFY
/JOB_COUNT=1
/NOLOWERCASE

File Qualifiers

/BURST
/COPIES=n
/DELETE

/NOBURST
/COPIES=1
/NODELETE

/FLAG_PAGE
/HEADER
/PAGE_COUNT=n

/NOFLAG_PAGE
/NOHEADER

/ [NO]1FEED

/FEED

/SPACE [=n]

/SPACE=1

Prompts

File:

file-spec,...

Command

Parameters

file-spec,...

Specifies one or more files to be printed.
1If you
specify
more
than
one
file,
separate
the
file
specifications with either
commas (,) or plus signs (+).
1In either case, the PRINT
command
concatenates the files into a single print job.
You can specify
cards (*).

the

file

name,

type,

version

fields

If you do not specify a file type for the first input
PRINT command uses the default file type of LIS.

wild

file,

the

Note that the PRINT command cannot print a file that resides on a
device that is allocated.

159

Description
A file or files queued by the PRINT command are considered a job.
The
system
assigns
a unique job identification (jobid) to each
job in the system and displays this jobid when the PRINT
command
completes execution.
Printer queues are identified by name;
if you do not
specify
a
gueue
name
with
the
/DEVICE
or /QUEUE qualifiers, the system
queues the job to an available queue.
If no physical printer
is
currently
available with required characteristics, or if the job
is in a hold status,
the
Jjob
1is
placed
in
the
queue
named

SYSSPRINT.
the queue

The

on which

PRINT command,
it entered

the

by default,

displays the name of

job.

Command Qualifiers
/AFTER=absolute-time
Requests that the

file

not

be printed until

Specify the time using
absolute time values.

the

standard

specific

time

day.

syntax

If the specified time has already passed,
printing immediately.

rules

the

for

file

specifying

queued

for

/DEVICE=device-name
Requests that the file(s) specified be queued for printing
specific
device to which queueing is allowed.
If /DEVICE
specified, files are queued,
by
default,
to
SYSSPRINT.
qualifier is synonymous with the /QUEUE qualifier.

/FORMS=type
Specifies

the

forms

type

required

Specify the forms type using
code.
Codes for forms types

for

the

specified

on
a
is not
This

file(s).

a
numeric
value
or
alphanumeric
are installation-defined.

/HOLD
/NOHOLD
Controls whether the file is available for printing
immediately.
When
you
specify
/HOLD,
the
file
1is not released for actual
printing until you use the SET QUEUE command to release it.
/IDENTIFY
/NOIDENTIFY
Controls whether the PRINT command displays a message
the
jobid of the print job and the name of the gueue
is entered.
By default, the PRINT command
a job is successfully queued.

/JOB_COUNT=n
Requests that the entire
decimal number from 1 to
/LOWERCASE
/NOLOWERCASE
Indicates
letters

and

that
and

lowercase

the
must

job be printed
255.

specified
be

displays

file(s)

printed

letters.

160

this

information

times,

contain
printer

indicating
in which it

where

lowercase
that

prints

whenever

alphabetic
uppercase

/NAME=job-name
Defines a 1- to 8-alphanumeric character name string to
identify
the job.
The job-name is displayed by the SHOW QUEUE command and
is printed in the top and bottom rows of the flag
page
for
the
job.

If you do not specify /NAME, the name string defaults to the file
name
(truncated to eight characters, if necessary) of the first,
or only, file in the job.
/PRIORITY=n

Specifies the priority of the print job.
The priority,
n,
must
be
in
the range of 0 through 31, where 0 is the lowest priority
and 31 is the highest.
By default, jobs are assigned the same priority as
your
current
process priority.
The user privilege ALTPRI is required to set a
priority
value
that
1is
higher
than
your
current
process's
priority.

)

/QUEUE=queue-name

Requests that the specified file(s)
be
printed
on
a
specific
device.
This qualifier is synonymous with the /DEVICE qualifier.

File Qualifiers

/BURST
/NOBURST
Controls whether

page

precedes

However,

a burst page

flag

page

is printed over

included

output.

and contains the same

burst

information.

the perforation between pages.

Use this qualifier to override the installation-defined
set up for printers when they are started.
/COPIES=n
Specifies the number of copies to print.
command
prints
a single copy of a file;
request up to 255 copies.

defaults

By default,
the
PRINT
you can use /COPIES to

If you specify /COPIES after the PRINT command name, each file
the parameter list is printed the specified number of times.
If you specify /COPIES following a file specification,
file is printed the specified number of times.

only

that

/DELETE
/NODELETE
Controls whether

files
are
deleted
after
printing.
If
you
specify /DELETE after the PRINT command name, all files specified
are deleted.
If you specify /DELETE after a file
specification,
only that file is deleted after it is printed.

The protection applied to the
the

current

file must allow

delete

access

UIC.

/FEED
/NOFEED
Controls whether the PRINT
command
automatically
inserts
form
feeds
when
it
prints
files
that do not have carriage control
characters.
By default, the PRINT command inserts
a
form
feed
when
the forms are within four lines of the end of the form.
On
standard 66-line forms, a form feed occurs
after
62
lines
are
printed.

161

/FLAG_PAGE
/NOFLAG_PAGE
Controls whether a

flag page

is printed preceding output.

If you specify /FLAG with
the
printed for the entire job.

command

name,

If you specify /FLAG with any file specification,
page is printed preceding the associated file.

flag

page

a separate

flag

/HEADER
/NOHEADER
Controls whether the name of the file is printed at
the
top
of
each
output page.
By default, the file specification is printed
only at the top of the first page of output.
/PAGE_COUNT=n
Specifies the number of pages of the
specified
file
to
print.
You
can only use /PAGE_COUNT to qualify file specifications;
it
cannot qualify the command name.
/SPACE [=n]
Specifies the number of spaces (that is, blank
1lines)
to
leave
between
1lines
of
output
on
the
specified
file(s).
You can
specify 1 or 2 to indicate the number of blank lines.
If you do not specify /SPACE, no extra lines are printed
between
lines
of
output;
if you specify /SPACE without a value for n,
output is double-spaced.

Examples

PFRINT AVERAOGE
236 entered on aueue

Jobh

LFPAL

The PRINT command queues the file AVERAGE.LIS for printing on
a system printer.
The system displays the jobid and the name
of the printer to which it queued the file.
2.

FRINT

ALFHA.TXT+EREETALGAMMA

Joo

entered

237

queuwe

LPALY

The PRINT command prints the files ALPHA.TXT,
BETA.TXT,
and
GAMMA.TXT as a single file.
The printer output file is named
ALPHA .TXT.

¢
$

ASHSIGN
LPADY
FRINT %.TXT

SYSSFRINT

Jobh

238

The ASSIGN

entered

command

aueue

creates

LFPAOY

an entry

the

process

1logical

name
table
for
the
logical name SYSSPRINT to override the
system
logical
name
definition.
Subsequently,
a
PRINT
command
translates the logical name SYS$PRINT and queues the
job on the queue LPAO.
This
3job
consists
of
the
highest
versions of all files with the file type of TXT.
4,

PFRINT/COFRIES=]10/0FTER=20
Jobr

237

entered

cueue

ALFHA
. TXT
LFALS

The PRINT command queues 10 copies of the file
ALPHA.TXT
to
the
printer,
but
requests
that
the copies not be printed
until after 8:00 P.M.

162

$ FRINT/LOWERCASE
ALFHA.TXT/COFIES=2y
BRETADOC/CORIES=3
Job

238

entered

aueue

LPALS

The print job queued by this print command
consists
of
two
copies
of
ALPHA.TXT
followed
by three copies of BETA.DOC.
This job
must
be
printed
on
a
printer
that
can
print
lowercase letters,

% FRINT/ZJOB.COUNT=3

ALFHA . TXT s BETA/NOIDENTIFY

This PRINT
command
concatenates
the
files
ALPHA.TXT
and
BETA.TXT
into a single print job, and prints three copies of
the job.
The /NOIDENTIFY qualifier requests that
the
jobid
not be displayed.

$ FRINT/HOLD
Job

$ SET

240

MASTER
. IIOC

entered on

aueue

SYS$SFRINT

QUEUE/RELEASE /ZENTRY=240

The PRINT command queues a copy of the file MASTER.DOC to the
default
printer
in
a
hold
status.
Later, the SET QUEUE
command releases the hold status on the
file
and makes
it
available for printing.

163

PURGE
Deletes all
but
the
highest
specified file or files.

numbered

version

versions

Format

PURGE

[file-specCc,...]

Command Qualifiers

Default

/KEEP=n
/ [NO] LOG

/KEEP=1
/NOLOG

Prompts
None.

Command

Parameters

file-spec,...
Specifies one or more files to be purged.
If
you
than one file, separate them with either commas (,)
(+).

If you do

not

command purges all

specify

files

the

file

specify
more
or plus signs

specification,

the

PURGE

current default directory.

The PURGE

command
does
not
provide
file
name
or
file
type
defaults;
version
numbers
are
not allowed.
You can use wild
cards in either the file name or type field.

Command Qualifiers

/KEEP=n
Specifies the
maximum
specified file(s).

number

versions

If you do not specify /KEEP, all but the most
of the specified file(s) are deleted.

retain

recent

the

n version(s)

/LOG
/NOLOG
Controls
whether
specifications of

the
files

By default, PURGE
files it purges.

does

not

PURGE
command
it deletes them.

display

164

the

displays

file

the

specifications

file

PURGE

Examples
l.

$ FURGE %.COM

The PURGE command deletes all but the most recent version
each file with a file type of COM.
$ FURGE

AVERAGE .FOR/KEEF=2

The PURGE command deletes all but the
versions of the file AVERAGE.FOR.
$

two

highest

numbered

FURGE

The PURGE command deletes all but the most recent versions of
all

files

$ PURGE

in the default directory.

[MALCOLM.TESTFILESI/ZLOG

YEURGE ~I~FILPURGEDy DRALICMALCOLM. TESTFIILESIAVERAGE.OBJ1 deleted
=T ~F ILFURGEDy DRALICMALCOLM. TESTFILESIRACKUF . ORJIZ deleted
APURGE

The
PURGE
command purges
all A files
cataloged
in
the
subdirectory named MALCOLM.TESTFILES.
The /LOG qualifier
requests the PURGE command to display
the
specification
of
files

it deletes.

165

READ
Reads a single record
record to a specified

from a
symbol

specified
name.

input

file

and

equates

the

Format

READ

logical-name

symbol-name

Command Qualifiers

/END_OF_FILE=label
/ERROR=Iabel

Prompts

Log_Name:

logical-name

Symbol:

symbol-name

Command

Parameters

logical-name
Specifies the logical name of the input file from which
is to be read.
The OPEN command assigns a logical name
and places the name in the process logical name table.

a
record
to a file

If the READ command is executed
interactively
and
the
1logical
name
1is
specified
as
SYSSINPUT,
SYSSOUTPUT,
SYS$SCOMMAND, or
SYSSERROR, the command interpreter prompts for input data.
symbol-name

Specifies a 1-to-255 alphanumeric character
symbol
name
to
be
equated
to the contents of the record being read.
The symbol is
always defined locally to the
current
command
level.
If
the
symbol
is
already defined, the READ command redefines it to the
new value.

Description
The READ command can read data
only
from
sequential
files
devices.
After each record is read from the specified file,
READ command positions the record pointer at the next
record
the file.
The maximum size

single

READ

Before a file can be written, it must be
opened
with
the
command and assigned a logical name.
The process permanent

OPEN

command

of any
is 255 bytes.

record

that

can be

read

in a

the
in

files
identified by the logical names SYSSINPUT, SYSSOUTPUT, SYSSERROR,
and SYSSCOMMAND do not have to be explicitly opened to be read.

l66

READ

Command Qualifiers

/END-OF-FILE=1label
Specifies the label on a line in
When the last record in the file
transfers control to the line at

the current
command
is read, the command
the specified label.

procedure.
interpreter

/END_OF_FILE is not specified, then control is
given
to
the
label spe01f1ed with the /ERROR qualifier, if any, when the
end-of-file is reached.
If neither /ERROR nor /END is specified,
then
the
READ
command that results in an end-of-file condition
returns with an error status code.

error

/ERROR=1l1abel
Specifies a label on a line in the command procedure
to
receive
control
if
the
read
request results in an error.
If no error
routine is specified and an error occurs during
the
reading
of
the
file,
the command procedure continues execution at the next
line in the file, as it does if no error occurs.
The error routine specified for this qualifier
takes
precedence
over
any action statement indicated in an ON command.
If /ERROR
is not specified, the current ON condition action is taken.
If an error occurs and the target
1label
is
successfully
given
control, the reserved global symbol $STATUS contains a successful
completion value.

Examples

OPEN

IN NAMES.DAT

$ LOOP:
S

READ/END_OF_FILE=ENDIT

IN NAME

$ GOTO LOOP

ENDIT:

$ CLOSE 1IN

The

OPEN

command

opens

the

file

NAMES.DAT

for

input

and

assigns
it
the
1logical
name
of
IN.
The
READ
command
specifies the label ENDIT to receive control
when
the
last
record
in the file has been read.
The procedure loops until

all

2. | $

records

in the file have been processed.

READ/ERROR=READERR/END
OF FILE=OKAY

MSGFILE

CODE

OKAY:
CLOSE

MSGFILE

EXIT
READERR:

MSGFILE

The READ command specifies labels to receive control
at
the
end-of-file and on error conditions.
At the end-of-file, the
procedure uses the CLOSE command to close the file and exits.
When an error occurs, the procedure closes the file.

167

READ

$ READ SYS$COMMAND

$ WRITE

OUTPUT_FILE

DATA_LINE

The READ command requests data from the current SYS$COMMAND
If the command procedure containing these lines is
device.

executed interactively, the command issues a prompt to the
and equates the data
accepts a 1line of data,
terminal,
entered to the symbol name DATA_LINE.

Then, the WRITE command writes the
identified
to the file
DATA_LINE

OUTPUT_FILE.

168

value of the symbol
by the logical name

RENAME
Changes the directory name,
an existing disk file.

file

name,

file

type,

file

version

specifications

are

Format

RENAME

input-file-spec

Command

output-file-spec

Qualifiers

Default

/[NO]NEW_VERSION

/NEW_VERSION

Prompts

From:

input-file-spec

To:

output-file-spec

Command

Parameters

input-file-spec
Specifies the names
to be changed.

You

file

can

file
whose

specify

the

one

name,

type,

specification
with
wild
specifications satisfy the

renamed.

files whose

cards.
fields

fields
of
the
case, all files
specified
are

version

In this
that

output-file-spec

Specifies the new file specification to be applied to
the
input
file.
The RENAME command uses the device, directory, file name,
and file type of the input file specification to provide defaults
for
nonspecified
fields
in
the
output
If you do not
specify a version number for the output file, the RENAME
command
increments the highest existing version, if any, by one.
You

can

specify

version

number

a wild

card

output-file-spec;

the

place

the

file

name,

the RENAME

type,

command

uses

the corresponding field in the input file specification
to
name
the output file.
Wild cards in corresponding fields of the input
and
output
file
specification
result
in
multiple
rename
operations.
If
you
are
renaming multiple files and specify a

wild

card

for

Command

for

the

file

version

name or

file

number

RENAME

command

type,

you must

specify a wild

well.

Qualifiers

/NEW_VERSION
/NONEW_VERSION
Controls

whether

the

version

number

name

file

and

type

the

output

already

file,

exists.

169

automatically

assigns

file with

the

new

same

file

RENAME

Examples
l.

% RENAME

AVERAGE.ORJ

OLDOAVE

The RENAME command changes the file name of the highest
existing version of the file AVERAGE.OBJ to OLDAVE.OBJ. If

no file named AVERAGE.OLD currently exists, the new

given a version number of 1.

$ RENAME/NONEW..VERSION

SCANLINE.ORJSZ

file

1is

5X
FP
« OB.J
BACKU

to
The RENAME command renames the file SCANLINE.OBJ;2
The /NONEW_VERSION qualifier ensures that, if
BACKUP.OBJ; 2.
BACKUP.OBJ:2 already exists, the RENAME command will not
rename the file, but report the error.

¥ RENAME

Kk TXTé%

X
K OLIG

The RENAME command renames all versions of all files with
file types of TXT to have file types of OLD. The file names
and version numbers are not changed.

$ RENAME

[HIGGINSICOMPLIR.OLE

[HIGGINS.LIBRARYI

The RENAME command changes the directory name of the object
module library COMPLIB.OLB. The library is now cataloged in
the subdirectory [HIGGINS.LIBRARY].

PENAME [MALCOLM. TESTFILESISAVE .DAT

CLITEST

The RENAME command renames the file SAVE.DAT in the directory/
in
MALCOLM.TESTFILES

to TEST.DAT.

the current default directory.

170

The new file is cataloged

REQUEST
Displays

a message

requests

they

perform;

particular

reply.

system

System

function,

operator's

operators

than

one

all

receive

the

are

terminal,

identified

operator

and

optionally

the

function(s)

designated

specified message.

for

Format
REQUEST

message-text

Command Qualifiers

Default

/REPLY
/TO[=operators,...]

/TO=ALL

Prompts
None.

Command

Parameters

message-—text

Specifies the text of a message
operator's terminal(s).

to be displayed

the

specified

The message text can have a maximum of 128
characters:;
if
type more than one word, enclose the text in quotation marks.

you

Description
When you

use

operator,

the

REQUEST

message

command

send

displayed

one

message

operators'

terminals, according to
the
keywords
specified
with
the
/TO
qualifier.
If
you
specify
/REPLY, the message is assigned an
identification number, so that the operator can
respond
to
the

message.

you

specify /REPLY,

you

AOFCOM-S-0FRNOTIFy

When ‘the

the

operator

orerator

responds

format:

receive

you

request

operator

reply,

responds.

you
you

REQUEST

Enteor

REQUEST

—~

Message?

cannot

messase

waiting...hhimmlss

request,

text

press

message:

notifiedy

to your

AQFCOM~S-O0FREFLY» messadge

the

entered

you

receive

orerator

enter

any

commands

CTRL/C,

you

receive

cancel

with

message

until
the

the

message:

<72

At this time, you can enter either a message to be
displayed
at
the
specified
operator(s)' terminal(s), or you can press CTRL/Z
to cancel the request.
If you enter a message, that
message
is
sent

All
the

the

operator

and

you

must

messages

continue

wait

are logged at the central operator's
system operator's log file, if initialized.

171

for

console

reply.

and

REQUEST

Command Qualifiers
/REPLY

Requests a reply to the specified message.

request

If you

message

the

reply,

wunique

assigned

identification so that the operator can respond.

/TO[=operators,...]

the
send
to
Specifies one or more operators to whom you wish
You can specify one or more of the following keywords.
message.
commas
If you specify more than one keyword, separate them with
By default, the message is
and enclose the list in parentheses.

sent

all

terminals

currently

designated

operators'

terminals.

ALL

Send the message to all operators.

CENTRAL

Send the message to the central system operator.

DEVICES

Send the message to operators designated to mount
Send the message to operators designated to

DISKS
OPER1

disk

and tape volumes.

mount

and

dismount disk volumes.

through OPER12

Send the message to an installation-specified
identified as OPR1l, OPR2,

PRINTERS

and so on.

Send the message to operators designated to respond

mount

and

printer

requests.

Send the message to operators designated to

TAPES

operator

dismount tape volumes.

Examples
1.

4
$

PRINT/ZCOPIES=2

Joab

401

ertered

REFORT
. QUT /FORME=H

aueue

REQUEST/ZREFLYZTO=FRINTERS

LFALS
-

carn o wou erint 10T
B "Mave aueued Job 401 ag forms=HE
YORFOOM-S~0FRNOTIFy orerator notifiedy waiting...10842116.10
HOPCOM-5-RASTCMPLTEy recuest comslete
HOPCOM-S-0FREFLYy

AFTER

11:00

be
The PRINT command requests that multiple copies of a file
After
type of paper (/FORMS=H).
printed using a special
a message
queueing the PRINT job, the REQUEST command sends
system operator designated to handle users' requests
the
to
the operator how long
The message asks
about print jobs.
before the file will be printed.

The reply shows the text entered by the operator.

172

REQUEST

$ REQUEST/REFLY
"ARE YOU THERE®
ZOFCOM-8-0FRNOTIFy orerator rnotifiedr

waiting...14154:30.33

I‘\C

REQUEST~Enter

messadge

cancel

recuest

with

<7Z>

REQUEST~-Message2
?
LZOFCOM~-S-0FRNOTIFy orerator motified, waiting...
ZOFPCOM~F~RASTCANy recuest was canceled

The REQUEST command issues a message to see
operators.
When
no response is received,
the request and then CTRL/Z cancels it.

173

14:59:01.38

if there are
any
CTRL/C interrupts

RUN (Image)
Places an

image

into execution

in the process.

You can truncate the RUN command to a single letter,

Format

RUN

file-spec

Command Qualifiers
/ [NO] DEBUG
Prompts

File:

file-spec

Command

Parameters

file-spec

Specifies an executable image to be
executed.
If
you
do
not
specify
a
file type, the RUN command uses the default file type
of

EXE.

Command Qualifiers
/DEBUG
/NODEBUG

Controls, for native VAX-1l images, whether the image
1is
to
be
run with
the debugger.
If the image was linked with the /DEBUG
qualifier and you do not want the debugger
to
prompt,
use
the
/NODEBUG
qualifier.
If
the
1image was linked with /TRACEBACK,
traceback

reporting

is performed when an error occurs.

If the image was not linked with the debugger,
you
can
specify
/DEBUG
to
request
the debugger at execution time.
However, if
/NOTRACEBACK was specified when the image was linked,
/DEBUG
1is
invalid.

Examples

RUN LIRRA

The

image LIBRA.EXE

starts executing

in the process.

MACROZENABLE=DERUG ORION

FOLINK/DERUG
$ RUN ORION
DERUG

ORION

Verasion

UNERUG-T-INITIALy

1.0

langusge

is MACROy

score and module set to

NERG:TM

RUNNODERUG

DRTON

A program is compiled, linked
and
run
with
the
debugger.
Subsequently,
a
RUN/NODEBUG
command
requests
that
the
debugger, which is present in the image, not prompt.
If
an
error
occurs
while
the
image
executes,
the debugger can
perform traceback

and

report

174

the error.

RUN (Process)
Creates a subprocess or a detached
process
to
execute
a
specified
image.
If
you specify any of the command qualifiers listed, the RUN
command creates a process.

Format

RUN

file-spec

Command Qualifiers

Default

/ [NO]JACCOUNTING
/AST_LIMIT=quota

/ACCOUNTING
/AST_LIMIT=10

/BUFFER LIMIT=QUOTA
/DELAY=delta-time
/ERROR=file-spec
/FILE_LIMIT=quota

/BUFFER_LIMIT=10240

/[NO]AUTHORIZE

/FILE_LIMIT=20

/INPUT=file-spec

/INTERVAL=delta-time
/IO BUFFERED=quota

/10_BUFFERED=6
/10_DIRECT=6

/10
_DIRECT=quota

/MAILBOX=unit
/MAXIMUM WORKING_SET=quota
/OUTPUT=file~spec
/PAGE_FILE=quota

/MAXIMUM_WORKING_SET=200

/PAGE_FILE=10000

/PRIORITY
=n

/PRIVILEGES=privilege-list

/PRIVILEGES=SAME

/PROCESS_NAME=process-name
/QUEUE LIMIT-quota

/QUEUE_LIMIT=8
/RESOURCE_WAIT

/[NO]RESOURCE WAIT

/SCHEDULE=absolute-time
/[NO]SERVICE FAILURE
/SUBPROCESS _LIMIT=quota
/[NO]SWAPPING
/TIME_LIMIT=1limit
/UIC=uic
/WORKING_SET=default

/NOSERVICE_FAILURE
/SUBPROCESS_LIMIT=8
/SWAPPING
/TIME_LIMIT=0

/WORKING_SET=200

Prompts

File:

file~-spec

Command

Parameters

file-spec
Specifies an executable
image
to
be
executed
in
process.
If the file specification does not include
the RUN command uses the default file type of EXE.

a
a

separate
file type,

Description
When you
command,

use any of
the
RUN

the qualifiers
1listed
above
with
the
command
creates
a
process and displays

RUN
the

process identification (PID) of the process on
SYSSOUTPUT.
The
process
executes the image specified in the file-spec parameter..
When the
image
completes
execution,
the
system
deletes
the
process.

175

RUN

(Process)

By default, the RUN command creates a subprocess
with
the
same
UIC,
current
disk
and
directory
defaults,
privileges,
and
priority of current process, and deducts resource quotas from the
current process to assign to the subprocess.
The /UIC qualifier requests the RUN command to create a
detached
process;
you
must
have
the user privilege DETACH to create a
detached process.

Input, Output, and Error Streams:
Use the
following
qualifiers
to
assign
equivalence
names
for
the logical names SYS$INPUT,
SYSSOUTPUT, and SYSSERROR for the process:
/INPUT
/OUTPUT
/ERROR

The equivalence names you
specify
for
these
process-permanent
files
are
interpreted
with
the context of the process you are
creating.
For example, file type defaults and logical
name
use
and translation are image- and language dependent.

Defining Process Attributes:

Use

override the default attributes

for

the

following

a process:

qualifiers

/BCCOUNTING
/PRIORITY
/PRIVILEGES
/PROCESS_NAME
/SERVICE_FAILURE
/SWAPPING

Assigning Resource Quotas:
When
you
1issue
a
RUN
command
to
create a process, you can define quotas to restrict the amount of
various system resources available to the process.
The following
resource
quotas
are
deductible
when
you create a subprocess;
that is, the values you specify are subtracted from your
current
quota and given to the subprocess:
Qualifier

Quota

/BUFFER_LIMIT
/FILE_LIMIT

BYTLM
FILLM

/PAGE_FILE

PGFLQUOTA

/QUEUE LIMIT

TQELM

/SUBPROCESS_LIMIT

PRCLM

The quota amounts are returned to your current process
subprocess

is deleted.

when

the

The system defines minimum values for each specifiable quota;
if
you
specify a quota that is below the minimum, or if you specify
a deductible quota that reduces your quota below the minimum, the
RUN command cannot create the process.
To determine your current
quotas, issue the SHOW PROCESS/QUOTAS command.

176

RUN

You

(Process)

can also specify limits

for

the

following,

non-deductible

quotas:

Qualifier

Quota

/AST_LIMIT
/IO_BUFFERED

ASTLM
BIOLM
DIOLM
WSQUOTA
CPULM
WSDEFAULT

/IO_DIRECT
/MAXIMUM_WORKING_SET
/TIME_LIMIT
/WORKING_SET

Hibernation and Scheduled Wakeups:
to schedule execution of the image:

Use the

following

qualifiers

/DELAY
/INTERVAL

/SCHEDULE
If

you

the

specify any

process

and

these qualifiers,

places

state

the

RUN

command

hibernation.

creates

The

process

cannot

execute the image
until
it
1is
awakened.
Time
values
specified
with
these
three qualifiers control when the process
will be awakened to execute the specified image.
You can schedule wakeups
for
a
specified
delta
time
(/DELAY
qualifier)
or
absolute time (/SCHEDULE qualifier).
Optionally,
you can
schedule
wakeups
for
recurrent
intervals,
with
the
/INTERVAL
qualifier.
If
you
specify
an
interval
time, the
created

fixed

process

time

process

awakened

intervals.
returned

scheduled

wakeup

execute

When
a

occurs,

the

state

the

image

the

image

specified

completes

hibernation.
is

the

/PROCESS_NAME

name.

You

CANCEL

can

command.

qualifier

use
A

STOP

this

to give

process

command

the

When

reactivated.

the image completes abnormally, for example, if it
system service, it does not return to hibernation.
Use

image

normally,

the

name

terminates

calls

«created
a

the

Note

the

STOP

the

Exit

process

subsequent

execution

that

a
or

image

in the process, and causes the process to be deleted.
The CANCEL
command cancels wakeup requests that are scheduled but
have
not
yet been delivered.
.

Command

Qualifiers

/ACCOUNTING
/NOACCOUNTING
Controls
created

whether accounting records are
to
be
process.
By
default,
all processes

system accounting

file.

You

user

must

have

the

privilege

/AST_LIMIT=quota
Specifies the maximum number
the

created

If you do
is used;

This

quota

process

not
the

can

have

ACNT

disable

of Asynchronous

logged
for
are logged in

the
the

accounting.

System Traps

(ASTs)

outstanding.

specify an AST limit quota, the default value of 10
minimum required for any process to execute is 2.

not deductible.

177

RUN

(Process)

/AUTHORIZE
/NOAUTHORIZE
Controls, when the image to be executed is
(LOGINOUT.EXE),
whether
login
searches
file to validate a detached process.

the system login image
the user authorization

By default, the login image checks the
user
authorization
file
whenever
a detached process is created.
Specify /NOAUTHORIZE to
create a detached
process
running
under
the
control
of
the
command
interpreter.
The
process permanent files specified by
the /INPUT and /OUTPUT
qualifiers
are
made
available
to
the
command interpreter for input and output.
The user privilege
DETACH
is
required
to
create
a
detached
process.
Any
nonspecified
attributes
of
the created process
default to the same as those of the current process.
/BUFFER_LIMIT=quota
Specifies the maximum
amount
process
may use for buffered
creation.

of
memory,
1in
I/0 operations or

bytes,
that
the
temporary mailbox

If you do not specify a buffered I/0 quota, the default value
of
10240 bytes is used;
the minimum amount required for any process
to execute is 1024 bytes.
This quota

is deductible.

/DELAY=delta-time
Requests that the created process be placed in
hibernation,
awakened after a specified time interval has elapsed.

Specify the delta-time according to
the
rules
for
delta
specifications (these rules are given in Section 6.8).

and

time

If you specify /INTERVAL with /DELAY, the
first
wakeup
request
occurs at the time specified by /DELAY and all subsequent wakeups
occur at intervals as specified by /INTERVAL.
/ERROR=file-spec
Defines a 1- to 63-alphanumeric character equivalence name string
for
the
1logical
device
name
SYSSERROR.
The logical name and
equivalence name are placed in the process logical name table for
the created process.
/FILE_LIMIT=quota
Specifies the maximum number
open at any one time.
If you do

not

the
system
required for
This

quota

specify an open

files that

file quota

for

uses
the
default
value of 20.
any process to execute is 2.

process

created

can

have

process,

The minimum amount

is deductible.

/INPUT=file-spec
Defines a 1- to 63-alphanumeric character equivalence name string
for
the
logical
device
name
SYSSINPUT.
The logical name and
equivalence name are placed in the process logical name table for
the

created process.

178

RUN

(Process)

/INTERVAL=delta~time
Requests that the created process be placed
awakened at reqularly scheduled intervals.
Specify the delta time
specified
entering delta times (these rules

hibernation

according
to
the
are given in Section

and

rules
6.8).

for

If you specify /DELTA or
/SCHEDULE
with
/INTERVAL,
the
first
wakeup
occurs
at the time specified by /DELAY or /SCHEDULE, and
all subsequent wakeups occur at intervals specified by /INTERVAL.

If
you
specify neither /DELAY nor /SCHEDULE with /INTERVAL,
first wakeup occurs immediately, by default.
If the image to be executed
qualifier
has
the
effect

is an RSX-1lM
image,
the
of
the
/DELAY qualifier.

the

/INTERVAL
Only one

wakeup occurs.

/10_BUFFERED=quota
Specifies the maximum number of
system-buffered
I/0
the created process can have outstanding at a time.
If you do not specify a buffered
6 is used;
the minimum required
This quota

I/0O quota, the default value
for any process to execute is

specify a direct

I/0 quota,

used;

the

minimum required

for

This quota

not deductible.

/MAILBOX=unit
Specifies

the

of
2.

not deductible.

/I0_DIRECT=quota
Specifies the maximum number of direct I/0 operations
process can have outstanding at a time.
If you do not

operations

unit

number

any

a mailbox

the

process

the created

default value
to

execute

receive

termination

message
when
the
created process is deleted.
If no mailbox is
specified, the creating process receives no notification when the
process is deleted.

Mailbox creation and use
described in the VAX/VMS

and process
termination
mailboxes
System Services Reference Manual.

/MAXIMUM_WORKING_SET=quota
Specifies the maximum size to which the image to be
the
process
can
increase
1its working set size.
increase its working set size by calling the Adjust
Limit

system

are

executed
in
(An image can
Working
Set

service).

If you do not
default value
to execute is

specify a working set
quota,
the
of 200.
The minimum value required
10 pages.

This quota

not deductible.

1is

system
uses
a
for any process

/OUTPUT=file~-spec
Defines a 1- to 63-alphanumeric character equivalence name string
for
the
1logical
device
name SYSSOUTPUT.
The logical name and
equivalence name are placed in the process logical name table for
the

created

process.

179

RUN

(Process)

/PAGE_FILE=quota
Specifies the maximum number of pages
the
paging
file
for
the
process;

secondary storage to use during

that can
be
allocated
in
that
1is,
the
amount of
the execution of the image.

If you do not specify a paging file
quota,
the
system
uses
a
default
value
of 10000 pages.
The minimum value required for a
process to execute is 256 pages.
This quota
/PRIORITY=n
Specifies

is deductible.

the base priority at which

the created

process

execute.

The priority, n, is a decimal number from 0 through 31, where
31
is
the
highest priority and 0 is the lowest.
Normal priorities
are in the range 0 through 15, and time-critical
priorities
are
in the range of 16 through 31.

You must have the user privilege to set any process
priority
to
set the base priority higher than your current process' priority.
If you specify a higher value when you do not have the privilege,
or if you do not specify a priority, the priority defaults to the
priority of the current process.
/PRIVILEGES=privilege-list
Defines user privileges for the created process.
The
privilege
list
consists
of one or more of the keywords listed below.
You
must have a user privilege to
give
a
process
you
create
any
privileges that you yourself do not have.

[NO]JACNT

Allow/disallow process
to
create
processes
for which no accounting messages are written

ALLPRIV

Give

[NO]ALLSPOOL

Allow/disallow
spooled devices

[NO]ALTPRI

Allow/disallow the process

the process all privileges

the

process

allocate

set

priority

values

[NO] BUGCHK

Allow/disallow the process to make bug
error log entries

[NO] CMEXEC

Allow/disallow the process
to executive

change

its mode

[NO] CMKRNL

Allow/disallow the process

to change

its mode

[NO] DETACH

check

kernel

Allow/disallow

the process to create detached

processes

[NO] DIAGNOSE

Allow/disallow
the
process
diagnostic I/0 requests

[NO] EXQUOTA

Allow/disallow

the

process

exceed

issue

its

quotas

[NO] GROUP

Allow/disallow the process to
processes in the same group

180

control

other

RUN

(Process)

[NO] GRPNAM

Allow/disallow the process to place
the group logical name table

[NO] LOG_IO

Allow/disallow the process
I/0 requests to a device

[NO] MOUNT

Allow/disallow the process
volume QIO request

[NO]NETMBX

Allow/disallow
network device

[NO]OPER

Allow/disallow
the
operator functions

[NO]PHY_IO

Allow/disallow the process
I/0 requests to a device

[NO] PRMCEB

Allow/disallow

the

process

permanent

event

flag

the

common

issue

Allow/disallow
permanent global

[NO] PRMMBX

Allow/disallow
the
permanent mailboxes

[NO] PSWAPM

Allow/disallow

process

mount

create

perform

issue

physical

create

clusters

the
process
sections
process

the process

1logical

issue

process

[NO] PRMGBL

names

create

alter

its

swap

the

same

mode

[NO] SAME

Allow/disallow the process to have
privileges as the current process

[NO] SETPRV

Allow/disallow the
privileges to other

[NO] SYSGBL

Allow/disallow the
global sections

[NO] SYSNAM

Allow/disallow the process to place
the system logical name table

[NO] TMPMBX

Allow/disallow
the
temporary mailbozxes

[NO] VOLPRO

Allow/disallow
protection

[NO]WORLD

Allow/disallow process
processes

process
to
processes
process

higher

create

system

process

the

give

names

create

override

control

all

volume

other

system

If you do not specify /PRIVILEGES, the created
process
has
the
same
privileges
as
your
current
process.
If
you
specify
/PRIVILEGES=NOSAME, the created process has no privileges.

/PROCESS NAME=process-name

Defines a 1- to 15-alphanumeric character name

process.
number of

The
process name
the process's UIC.

If you do not specify a process
null name, by default.

181

for

implicitly qualified

name,

the

the
by

created
the group

created process

has

RUN

(Process)

/QUEUE_LIMIT=quota

Specifies the maximum number of
timer
gqueue
entries
that
the
created
process
can
have
outstanding
at
any one time.
This
includes timer requests and scheduled wakeup requests.
If you do not specify a timer queue entry quota, the system
uses
the
default
wvalue
of
8.
A process does not require any timer
queue quota in order to execute,
This quota

is deductible.

/RESOURCE WAIT

/NORESOURCE_WAIT
Enables or disables resource wait mode for the

created

process.

By
default,
the
system places a process in a wait state when a
resource required for a particular function is not available.

If you specify /NORESOURCE_WAIT,
the
process
will
receive
an
error status code when a resource is unavailable.
/RESOURCE_WAIT
is

the

default.

/SCHEDULE=absolute-time
Requests that the created process be placed
awakened at a specific time of day.

1in

hibernation

and

Specify the absolute
time
value
according
to
the
rules
for
entering
absolute
time values (these rules are given in Section
6.8).

/SERVICE_FAILURE

/NOSERVICEFAILURE

Enables or disables system service failure exception mode for the
created
process.
By default, if an error occurs when a process

calls a system service, a status

code

indicating

error

returned.

If you specify /SERVICE_FAILURE, the process
will
encounter
an
exception
condition
if
an error occurs during a system service
request.

/NOSERVICE_FAILURE

/SUBPROCESS _LIMIT=quota

Spec1f1es the maximum number of

process

allowed

the

default.

subprocesses

that

the

created

create.

If you do not specify a subprocess limit,
the
system
uses
the
default
value
of
8.
A process does not require any subprocess
quota

in order

This quota
/SWAPPING
/NOSWAPPING
Enables or

execute.

is deductible.

disables process

swap mode

for

the

<created

process.

By default, a process is swapped from the balance set in physical

memory

allow other

processes

execute.

If you specify /NOSWAPPING, the process is not swapped out of the
balance
set
when
it
1is
1in
a
wait
state.
/SWAPPING is the
default.
You must have the user
privilege
to
disable
process
swapping

to specify /NOSWAPPING

182

for

a process you create.

RUN

(Process)

/TIME_LIMIT=1imit
Specifies the maximum amount of CPU
process,

process

time

1in

is not

l-millisecond

deleted.

A CPU

restricted;

time

units.

time

this

limit

allocated

When

the

the default.

that

the

created process

The specified uic defines a
user
created process, in the format:

to be

the

created

expires,

1indicates

If you restrict CPU time for a process, specify
according to the rules for specifying delta time

/UIC=uic
Specifies

time

the

that

the
time
values.

CPU

1limit

a detached process.

identification

code

for

the

[g,m]
g

is an octal number in range of 0
through
the group number of the process
is
an
octal
number
1in
the
range
of

representing
The

brackets

are

the

individual

member

377

representing

number

through
process

377

the

required.

/WORKING_SET=default
Specifies

the

default working

that

set

the

number

1is,

executed.

you

the

not

specify

default

required

for

value
a

process

pages

size
the

for

default working

200

pages.

execute

the

working

set

size,

quota

for

process;

the

1is

pages.

image

system

The minimum number

specified cannot be greater than the working
with the /MAXIMUM_WORKING_SET qualifier).
This

created

set

uses

of pages

The

set quota

value

(specified

not deductible.

Examples

RUNAFROGESS. NAME=SURA

ARUN=-S-PROCLITy

SCANL INE

ddentification

created

The RUN command creates a subprocess
the
1image
SCANLINE.
The
system
identification number of 00133404.

named
gives

RUNZINTERVAL=1240/FROCESS. NAME=GTAT

ARUN=G-FROC..ILy

CANCEL

didentification

srocess

00133404

SUBA
to
execute
the subprocess an

STATCHK

created

rrocess

00LDO123

STAT

The RUN command creates a subprocess named
STAT
to
execute
the
image
STATCHK.EXE.
The process is scheduled to execute
the image at
1l-hour-and-40-minute
intervals.
The
process
hibernates;
however, because neither /DELAY nor /SCHEDULE is
specified, the first wakeup occurs immediately.
The CANCEL
posted
by
currently

command subsequently cancels
the
/INTERVAL
qualifier.
executing

hibernates.

the

image,

183

the
If
completes

wakeup
requests
the
process
is
the

execution

and

RUN

(Process)

LYRA -

$ RUNAPROCESS..NAME=LYRA

S/ RUFFERLLLIMIT=1024 -

. /FTLELIMIT=4 ~
$APAGE FTLES=2546 -~
L IMIT=2 S /0UERE

$ . /BURPROCESS LLIMIT=2
HA0UTFUT= TTR3

% AERROR=TTRAS

- S-FROCLIIYy identification of created srocess is 00121089
wRUN

The RUN commamd creates a subprocess named

LYRA

execute

the image LYRA.EXE. The resource quotas assigned by command
qualifiers provide the subprocess with the minimum quotas
The /OUTPUT and /ERROR qualifiers assign
required to run.
names SYS$OUTPUT and SYSSERROR
logical
the
to
es
equivalenc
Any messages the subprocess writes to
for the subprocess.
its default output devices are displayed on the terminal
TTB3.

v
(SAME » NOPBWAFM)
E100
40/ FRIVILEGES=
F RUNZUIC=
OVERSEER

. ZNORESOURCE .LWALT

C. identitication of created rrocess is Q010002C
YRUN=-G-FROIOy
The RUN command creates a detached process to execute under
The
It executes the image OVERSEER.EXE.
([100,4].
the UIC
RUN command gives the process all the privileges of the
except the ability to alter its swap mode.
current process,

The /NORESOURCE_WAIT qualifier disables
for

resource

wait

mode

the process.

F AKGTENAGROUFE IMALCOLM. TESTFILES]
$ RUNSFROCEOSS=GUR
L/ INFUT=TESTIOUTL

L S0UTFUT=

TEST

F$LO0GTCAL CPSYSSOUTRUTY )

FROCUIDy

WATOH
-~

identification of created srocess is 001D002E

The ASSIGN command creates an entry in the group logical name

The RUN command creates a
the logical name TEST.
for
table
subprocess to execute the image WATCH.EXE.

The /INPUT qualifier defines SYSSINPUT for the

The

1logical

OUT1.DAT.

logical

name

TEST

defines

Because the logical name

name

table,

referred to by the

subprocesses.

the directory for the file
TEST

the

group

the logical name can be translated and

image WATCH.EXE.

The /OUTPUT qualifier uses the lexical function FSLOGICAL to
name of the current process's
logical
the
translate
name string is equated to
equivalence
The
device.
SYSSOUTPUT
the device SYSSOUTPUT for

the subprocess.

184

SET
Defines or changes, for the
characteristics
associated

current terminal
with
files
and

process.

session
devices

batch

owned

job,
the

Format:

SET

option

Options
CARD_READER

[NO] CONTROL_Y
DEFAULT

MAGTAPE

[NO] ON
PROCESS

PROTECTION

QUEUE

RMS_DEFAULT
TERMINAL

[NO] VERIFY
WORKING_SET

Prompts

option

Description
The
in

SET command options listed above are
this
manual.
Table 2 lists all of

including

those

operators

and

that

are generally

managers.

185

described
individually
the SET command options,
reserved
for
use
system
by

SET

Table

SET Command Options

Optionl

Function

ACCOUNTING

Initializes the accounting log file

CARD_READER

Defines the default ASCII translation mode

[NO] CONTROL_Y

Disables/enables interrupts caused by CTRL/Y

DEFAULT

Establishes

1
DEVICE

Defines device charac;eristics

LOGINS1

Allows or disallows users to log in to the system

MAGTAPE

Defines characteristics of a magnetic tape device

[NO] ON

card

for

reader

device

and/or

directory

current default for file specifications

the

interpreter checks
Controls whether the command
for an error condition following the execution of
commands in a command procedure

1
PRINTER

‘'Defines characteristics of a printer

PROCESS

Defines execution characteristics of

current

the

process

PROTECTION

Defines the protection status of a file

group

of files, or establishes the default protection to
be applied to all files subseqguently created
during the job

QUEUE

Changes the attributes associated with one or more
entries in a printer or batch job gueue

RMS_DEFAULT

multi-buffer
Provides default multi-block and
count values to be used by RMS for file operations

TERMINAL

Defines operational characteristics of a terminal

gici

Changes the UIC of the current process

[NO] VERIFY

Controls whether the command interpreter displays
lines in command procedures as it executes them

WORKING_SET

that
1Indicates
1
Operator's Guide.

Changes the current working set limit or guota
this

command

1is

186

described

the

VAX/VMS

SET CARD_READER
Defines

the default

reader.

All

converted

translation mode

subsequent

using

the

input

read

specified

for

into

mode.

cards
the

read

into

specified

system card

card

reader

the

translation

will

Format

SET CARD_READER

Command

device~name

Qualifiers

/026
/029

Prompts

Device:

Command

device—-name

Parameters

device-name
Specifies the
mode is to be
The

Command

name
set.

device must

not

the

card

reader

for which

currently allocated

any

other

user.

Qualifiers

/026

Indicates

that

the

cards were

punched on an

Indicates

that

the

cards were punched

AlLLOCATE

CR3

026

punch.

029

punch.

/029
on

Example
1.

SLGRAGE
ALLOCATED
$OEET CARDLREATER CRAQI/D29

COFY

The

CRAC

ALLOCATE

CMALCOLM. DATAFILESICARDS DAT

command
specifying
the

requests
generic

command

the allocation of a card reader
device name.
When the ALLOCATE

displays the name of the device, the SET
CARD_READER
command
sets
the
translation
mode at 029.
Then, the COPY
command copies all the cards read into the card
reader
CRAOQ
into the file CARDS.DAT in the directory MALCOLM.DATAFILES.

187

SET CONTROL_Y
Controls whether the command interpreter receives control when
is

CTRL/Y

pressed.

Format

SET

CONTROL_Y

[NO]

Command Qualifiers
None.
Prompts
None.

Description

it
The CTRL/Y function key provides a general—purpose escape;
can be used at any time during an interactive terminal session to
interrupt the current

command,

command

procedure,

program

image.

The SET NOCONTROLY command is provided for use in spec1a1
when the SET NOCONTROL_Y command is executed in a
applications;

system-specified command procedure for a particular wuser at
that user can communicate only with the application
login,

program that controls the terminal.

When SET NOCONTROL_Y is in effect, the CTRL/Y function key has
the same effect as a CTRL/U function followed by a carriage
return.

The effect of SET NOCONTROL_Y also applies to the CTRL/C function
for all commands and programs that do not have special action
routines to respond to CTRL/C.

Example

4 SET NOCONTROL.LY

After this command, the CTRL/Y function is disabled.

188

SET DEFAULT
Changes

the default device

process.

The

specifications
When you

new

that do

change

the

and/or

default

applied

not explicitly give

default

specified device with

directory

the

device

logical

name
to

the

SYS$DISK.

the

current

subsequent

file

directory

name.

a device or

assignment,

name

for

all

system

equates

the

Format

SET

DEFAULT

Command

device-name

Qualifiers

None.

Prompts

Device:

Command

device~name

Parameters

device-name
Specifies
default
If

you

with
it in
The

device

device
specify

a colon.
brackets

SET

DEFAULT

and/or
file

a physical

If you
([ ] or
command

directory

name

used

specifications.
device

name,

terminate

specify a directory
< >).
performs

entire
string
specified,
not
device name specified, as is the
not recursive.

logical

name,

name

the

device

you must

translation

the

name

enclose

on
the left-most portion of
usual case.
The translation

the

the
is

Examples

SET

COFY

The

DEFAULT
Mok

SET

DEFAULT

CARPENTER.

directory
directory
command

SET

LCARFENTERD

RoX

The

name
for

command

changes

the

default

directory

disk

device

does

not

change.

The

be
as

the
in

default

CARPENTER
subsequent

is
assumed
to
file
searches,

shown.

DEFAULT

default
the COPY

DRa23

This command changes the default disk device
default directory name does not change.

DBA2.

The

p———

SSET DEFAULT DBB2
{

d input stream

———

([TESTFILES]

—

SET DEFAULT

S PASSWORD HENRY

/S JOB HIGGINS

The
reader.
A batch user submits a job in the system card
all
first command in the batch job is a SET DEFAULT command;
file specifications will default to the directory TESTFILES
on the disk DBB2.

Y
$ SAVEDEF := 'F$DIRECTOR()
[122001.MALCOLM.TESTFILES]
$ SET DEFAULT
$ SET DEFAULT

'SAVEDEF'

This command procedure uses the F$SDIRECTORY lexical

save

the

current

function

default directory in the symbol named

default
The SET DEFAULT command changes the
SAVEDEF.
later the symbol SAVEDEF is used to restore the
directory;
original default.

190

SET MAGTAPE
Defines

the

default

characteristics

associated

with

specific

magnetic
tape device for subsequent file operations.
The SET MAGTAPE
command is valid for tape devices that do not currently
have
volumes
mounted on them, or on which foreign volumes.
are mounted.

Format

SET MAGTAPE

device-name

Command Qualifiers

/DENSITY=density
/REWIND

/UNLOAD

Prompts

Device:

Command

device-name

Parameters

device—-name
Specifies
the
characteristics
The device must

name
of
are to be
not be

the
set.

tape

device

currently allocated

for

which

the

any user.

Command Qualifiers

/DENSITY=density
Specifies the default density, in bpi (bits per
inch),
for
all
write operations on the tape device when the volume is mounted as
a foreign or as an unlabeled tape.
The density can be
specified
as either 800 or 1600.
/REWIND
Requests

the

that

the

beginning of

/UNLOAD
Requests that
unloaded.

volume

the

specified

device

the

specified

device

rewound

tape.

volume

rewound

and

Example

MOUNT

SET

The
The

tape

MTERILI/FOREIGN

MAGTAPRE

MTRLS

MOUNT command
SET
MAGTAPE

800

/ZDENBITY=800

mounts a foreign tape on the
device
MTBl.
command defines the density for writing the

bpi.

191

SET ON
Controls whether
the
command
interpreter
performs
error
following the execution of commands in command procedures.

checking

Format

SET

[NO]ON

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts
None.

Description

During
the
execution
of
command
procedures
the
command
interpreter
normally
checks the status code returned when a DCL
command or program image completes, and saves the
numeric
value
of this code in the reserved symbol named $STATUS.
The low-order
three bits of this value are also saved in
the
reserved
symbol

$SEVERITY.

The ON command establishes an action to be
taken
based
on
the
value
of
S$SEVERITY;
the
default
action
1is to exit from the
current procedure when errors or severe errors are encountered.

Use
the
SET
NOON
command
to
override
the
error
checking
procedure.
When
SET NOON is in effect, the command interpreter
continues to place the status
code
value
in
$STATUS
and
the
severity
level
1in
$SEVERITY,
but
does not perform any action
based

the value.

The SET ON or SET
NOON
command
applies
only
at
the
current
command
level.
If
you
use
the SET NOON command in a command
procedure that executes another procedure, the default,
SET
ON,
is established while the second procedure executes.

Example
1.

SET NOON

$ DELETE #*.SAV;=*
$ SET ON

$ COPY *,0BJ *.SAV
This command procedure routinely copies
all
object
modules
into
new
files
with file types of SAV.
The DELETE command
deletes all existing files with that file type, if any.
The
SET
NOON
command
ensures
that the procedure will continue
execution if there are not currently any files with that file
type.
Following
the
DELETE
restores error checking.
Then,
of all existing files with file

192

command,
the
SET ON command
the COPY command makes copies
types of OBJ.

SET PROCESS
Changes
current

execution characteristics
terminal session or job.

associated with

process

for

the

Format

SET PROCESS

Command

[process—-name]

Qualifiers

/IDENTIFICATION=process-id
/PRIORITY=n
/[NO]RESOURCE_WAIT
/ [NO] SWAPPING

Prompts

None.

Command

Parameters

process-name

Specifies the 1l- to 1l5-alphanumeric character string
name
of
a
process
whose
priority is to be changed.
The specified process
must have the same group number in
as
the
current
process.
This

/SWAPPING or

its user
parameter

/RESOURCE_WAIT qualifiers

are

identification
code
1is
1invalid
if the

specified.

If you specify /IDENTIFICATION,
the
process-name
parameter
is
ignored.
If
you specify neither the process-name parameter nor
the /IDENTIFICATION parameter,
the
priority
for
your
current
process

Command

changed.

Qualifiers

/IDENTIFICATION=process-id
Specifies the process
process

when

the

identification

process

was

created.

omit

leading

identification,

you

can

This qualifier
/SWAPPING.

1is

invalid

the

system assigned

When

you

specify

to
a

the

process

zeros.

you

specify

/RESOURCE_WAIT

/PRIORITY=n
Specifies the new base priority for
the
requested
process.
A
priority must be in the range of 0 through 31, where priorities 0
through

are

reserved

for

normal

through

are

reserved

for

time-critical

The

user

for

any process

privilege ALTPRI
to

value

required

higher

priority.
If you do not have
specify is compared with your
value is always used.

processes

than

to
the

and

priorities

increase
current

the

priority

process's

the ALTPRI privilege, the
current base priority and

193

processes.

base

value you
the lower

SET

PROCESS

You can use the /PRIORITY qualifier to
increase
or
decrease
a
priority.
Note
that if you decrease your own base priority and

you do not have ALTPRI privilege, you cannot restore its original
value.

The GROUP and WORLD privileges
are
required
to
control
other
processes
in
the
same
group or other processes in the systen,
respectively.

/RESOURCE_WAIT
/NORESOURCE_WAIT

Enables or disables resource wait mode for the
current
process.
By
default,
the
system places a process in a wait state when a

resource required for a particular function

not

immediately

available.

If you specify /NORESOURCE_WAIT,
the process
will
receive
an
error
status code when system dynamic memory is not available or
when the process exceeds one of the following resource quotas:
Direct I/0 limit
Buffered I/0 limit
Buffered I1/0 byte count

/RESOURCE_WAIT

(buffer

default,

removed

quota

the default mode.

/SWAPPING
/NOSWAPPING
Enables or disables process swap mode

space)

process

that

for

the

current

process.

1is not currently executing can be

from physical memory so that other processes can execute.

If you specify /NOSWAPPING, the process is not swapped out of the
balance
set
when it is in a wait state.
You must have the user
privilege PSWAPM to disable swapping for your process.

Examples

¢ RUNSPROCESS.ONAME=TESTER CALL

WERUN~G-FROCLINy
% BET

ddentification of crested rrocess is 00C0012F

PROCESS TESTER/FRIORITY=10

The RUN command creates a subprocess and gives
it
the
name
TESTER.
Subsequently,
the
SET PROCESS command assigns the
subprocess a priority of

10.

% SET FROCESS/NORESOURCE.WATT

The SET PROCESS command disables resource wait mode
current

process.

194

for

the

SET PROTECTION
Establishes

the protection

applied

particular

file

group
of
files,
or establishes the default protection for all files
subsequently created during the terminal session or
batch
job.
The
protection
for
a
file
1limits the type of access available to other
system

users.

Format

SET PROTECTION [=code]

Command

[file-spec,...]

Qualifiers

/DEFAULT

File Qualifiers

/PROTECTION=code

Prompts

File:

file-spec,...

Command

Parameters

code
Defines the protection to be applied to the file(s) specified,
any;
or
to
be
applied
to all files subsequently created,
/DEFAULT is specified.
The format
specifying

described
Codes."

if
if

for specifying the
code
is
the
same
a code with the /PROTECTION qualifier.

below under

Specifies one or

the

heading

files

for

"How

which

the

as
that
for
The format is
Specify
Protection

protection

changed.

A file name and file type are required;
number,
the
protection is changed for
version of the file.

You can specify wild cards
type, and version fields.
If you specify /DEFAULT,
the
specified
default
created.

you
1is

the

if you
only the

directory,

cannot enter
applied
to

195

omit
a
version
highest existing

file

name,

file

a
file
specification;
all
files subsequently

SET PROTECTION

Description

All disk and tape volumes have
access
to
the
volume.
You
INITIALIZE

protection
codes
that
restrict
can
assign
this protection with

and MOUNT commands.

For disk volumes, each file on the volume, including a
directory
file,
can
have
a different protection associated with it.
The
SET PROTECTION command, and
other
file
manipulating
commands,
allow you to define the protection for individual files.
How to
Specify Protection Codes:
Files
accessed by users in four categories:

can

potentially

SYSTEM -- all users who have group numbers
of
1
through
10
generally includes system managers,
category
This
(octal).
system programmers, and operators.
It also includes all users
who have either of the user privileges LOG_IO and PHY_IO.

OWNER -- the UIC of the
person who
created,
and
therefore
owns,
the volume or file, and all processes that execute with
that UIC.

GROUP -- all users who have the same
group
number
in
their
UICs
as
the
owner of the file.
This user category includes
the owner

the

file.

WORLD -- all users who do not fall into any of the other three
categories.
This category includes the owner of the file and
all users in the owner's group.

Each of these categories of user can be
types of

following

access:

allowed

denied

the

files

READ -- the right to examine, print, or copy a file

WRITE -- the right to modify the file or to write files

EXECUTE -- the right to execute files that contain
executable
program
images (when applying protection to an entire volume,
this field is interpreted as the right to create files on
the

a volume

volume

volume)

DELETE -- the right to delete the file or files on the volume

Any combination of access types can be specified for any category
of user.

The following syntax rules apply:

specify
When you
protection
types

entered in full or

®
e

abbreviate
a protection code, you must
to
1
character.
User
categories can be
truncated to any number of characters.

You can specify the user categories and

protection

If you omit a

user

any order.

protection

category of user

When

you

type

is denied that

specify

for

type of access.

protection

code,

category from access type with a colon.

196

types

category,

that

each

user

separate

SET

PROTECTION

If you specify more
than
categories
with
commas

one
and

user
category,
separate
enclose
the
entire
code

the
in

parentheses.

When you omit a

user
to an entire volume,

For

directory

device

availability
current node

counts

and

the
of

system
a

terminal

logical

size

limit

name

and

quota

SHOW DAYTIME
Displays the current date and time in the default output stream.
Format

SHOW

[DAY]TIME

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts
None.

Example
1.

SHOW

DAYTIME

18- JAN-1977

4%
001034

The SHOW DAYTIME command requests a display
date and time.

216

the

current

SHOW DEFAULT
Displays
defaults
from a

the
current
default
device
are applied whenever you omit
file specification.

and
directory
name.
These
a device and/or directory name

The default disk'and

directory are established
in
the
file.
You can change them during a terminal session or
with the SET DEFAULT command,
or
by
reassigning
the
SYSSDISK.

authorization
in a batch job
1logical
name

Format

SHOW DEFAULT

Command

Qualifiers

None.

Prompts
None.

Examples

4 sHow

oEFauULT

ODRALSCALPHA

OREY

$SHUW

OEFAULT

DEFa.T

DRADIEMIGE
. SOURCES)
ING

BEAZICHIGGIN
. SOURCES]
G

The SHOW DEFAULT command requests a display
default
device
and
directory.
The
SET
changes these defaults, and the
next
SHOW
displays that the defaults have in fact been

ABHTIGM DBAK!

of
the
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
changed.

current
command
command

GYSOTAK

B OCHOW T ALL
T
NRATECHTGETNGR

The ASSIGN command
changes
the
logical
name
SYSSDISK.
This
default, as
the
response
from

indicates.

217

equivalence
name
for
the
also changes the device name
the
SHOW
DEFAULT
command

SHOW DEVICES

Displays the status of all devices in the system, the status of a
particular device, or lists the devices that currently have volumes

mounted on them and/or are allocated to processes.
Format

[device-name]

SHOW DEVICES

Command Qualifiers
/ALLOCATED

/BRIEF
/FULL

/BRIEF
/BRIEF

/MOUNTED

Prompts
None.

Parameters

device-name

Specifies the name of a device for which information 1is to be
You can specify a complete device name or only a
displayed.
the SHOW DEVICES command provides
portion of a device name;
defaults for non-specified portions of device names, as follows:
e

If you truncate a device name, for example if you specify "D",
the command lists information about all devices whose device
names begin with D.

If you omit a controller designation, the SHOW DEVICES command
lists all devices on all controllers with the specified unit
number.

If you omit a unit number, the SHOW DEVICES command lists

devices on the specified controller.

all

If you specify the SHOW DEVICES command and specify neither a
device name parameter nor any qualifier, the command provides a
brief listing of characteristics of all devices in the systenmn.
To obtain information about a specific device or generic class of
devices,

specify a device name.

Use the /ALLOCATED or /MOUNTED qualifier for a list of devices
processes or mounted,
to
allocated
currently
are
that
respectively.

218

SHOW DEVICES

Command

Qualifiers

/ALLOCATED
Requests

display

all

devices

currently

allocated

processes.

If you specify a device name, the characteristics
of
only
that
device
are
displayed;
1if the device is not currently allocated
the command displays a message indicating that there is
no
such
device.
If
you
specify
a
generic
device
name,
the
characteristics
of
all
allocated
devices
of
that
type
are
displayed.

/BRIEF
Requests

a
specified.

brief

Requests

complete

Requests

display

mounted

display

information

about

the

device(s)

/FULL
listing

information

about

the

device(s).

/MOUNTED

If you
device

all

specify

a device
displayed;

are

mounted,

devices

that

currently

them.

the

device.

command

volumes mounted

are

only
however,

issues

you

characteristics

name,

message

specify
all

the

devices

characteristics
the device is not
indicating

generic

have

that

there

device

type

that

displayed.

volumes

of
that
currently
is

such

name,

the

currently

have

Examples

& sHOW novrens
Lisl

Devices

19-JUN~-1978

09345:42,86

Device

Dovicoe

levice

Name
IMAOD:

Err.

Status
am linme

Volume

Characteristics
MNT ALl

Free

Count

Trans

Mounmt

Count

Coumt

IMAalt

JTine

RBlocks
2938

OPAaod:

line

Label
AARDVARK

MNT

ALL

BRACKUFC

20196

MNT

FOR

CONSOLE

DXALY

lime

CRAO:

line

LFACT

lime

8PFL

LFRO:
TTAOY

line

all

Llirne

TTALY

lane

TTARE:

line

ALL

0
0

TTH?7:

off

XMAO:

lirme

ORALY

lime

MNT

DRAZ2T

line

SYSTEMUSERS1

MNT

17397

SYSTEMUSERSZ2

52630

This

line

command
®
®
®

0
0

displays,

Device
Device
line)
Device

name
status

for

each device

(indicates

characteristics

whether

the

system:

the

device

(indicates whether

the

1is

device

is
allocated
or spooled, has a volume mounted on
or has a foreign volume mounted on it)

Error

count

Volume label (for disk and tape volumes
Number of free blocks on the volume
Transaction count

only)

Number

volume

devices

mount

reguests

only)

219

issued

for

the

(disk

SHOW DEVICES

$ SHOW DEVICES DMAO!/FULL
19-JUN-1278 09:45:44,00

MAd S

levice

orn

line

Mounted

Error Lodgging Ensbled
Allocated

1
38
1

Evvroar count?
Orerations comeleted?
Reference count?
Volume label
Qurner UIC
Volume =rotection

Volume status
ACF srocess name

00010020
FACTOR
912

Owrer esrocess id
Owrner rrocess name
Iefault buffer size

2938
1
1
0O
2

Free blocks
Tramsaction count
Mount count
Relastive volume no.
Cluster size

AARTIVARK
COO1,0013
FFOO

DER2ACF

Max,

4000

files allowed

The SHOW DEVICES command requests a full
device DMAQ;
the RKO06/RK07
of
status

1listing of the
information
the

indicates:

Date and time of day
Device status
Error

count

Number of I/O operations completed
Reference

count

Process identification of the owner of the dev1ce
Process name of the owner of the device

Default buffer

For

devices

displays:

e
@
e

size

volumes

with

mounted

them,

the

command

Volume label

User identification of the owner of the volume
Protection code assigned to the volume
mounted
is
it
(indicates whether
Volume status
/SYSTEM, /GROUP, /SHARE, or /NOSHARE)
Name of the Ancillary Control Process

(ACP)

Relative volume number
Default cluster size

Maximum number of files allowed on the volume

For tape devices,

the

command

also

displays

the

density, the real volume label, and the recordsize.

220

default

SHOW LOGICAL
Displays all logical names in one or more
logical
displays
the current equivalence name assigned to
name

the ASSIGN,

ALLOCATE,

DEFINE,

MOUNT

name
tables;
or
specified logical

commands.

Format

SHOW

LOGICAL

Command

[logical~name]

Qualifiers

Default

/ALL

/GROUP
/PROCESS
/SYSTEM

Promp_ts

None.

Command

Parameters

logical-name
Specifies

a 1- to
63-alphanumeric
character
logical
name
for
which
the equivalence name is to be displayed.
The logical name
is translated recursively
a
maximum
of
10
times.
For
each
translation,
the
process, group, and system logical name tables
are

searched,

first match

that

found

order,

and

is displayed.

the

equivalence

name

for

the

If you do not specify a logical name, the
command
displays
logical names in one or more tables, based on the presence of
/PROCESS, /GROUP, or /SYSTEM qualifiers.
If
no
gualifiers

present

and

logical

names

Command

logical

all

1is

logical

specified,

name

the

command

displays

tables.

all
the

are
all

Qualifiers

/ALL
Specifies

that

table(s)

all

logical

names

displayed.
If
none
/SYSTEM is specified, all

/GROUP, or
tables are displayed.

the

specified

logical

name

the qualifiers /PROCESS,
names in
all
logical
name

/GROUP
Indicates, when a
the group logical

logical-name parameter is
present,
name table is to be searched.

you

the group logical

specify

/ALL

either

name

explicitly or

table

default,

are displayed.

that

all

/PROCESS
Indicates, when a logical-name parameter is specified,
the process logical name table is to be searched.
If you
in the

specify /ALL either explicitly or by default,
process logical name table are displayed.

221

entries

that

all

only

entries

SHOW LOGICAL

/SYSTEM

Indicates, when a logical-name parameter is
the

that

present,

system logical name table is to be searched.

only

If you specify /ALL either explicitly or by default, all names in
the

system logical name table are displayed.

Examples
l.

g BHOW LOGICAL/FROCESS

Comternts of srocess logical name tablel
SYSHEINFUT = TTRILZ
SYSHOUTPUT = TTRIL?
SYS$ERROR = LTTRLS
BYSHENIGK = L DRA3ZS
BYSECOMMAND = _TTABL:

The SHOW LOGICAL command requests a display

the

current

These are the default logical name
process logical names.
an
for
interpreter
command
the
by
assignments made
interactive process.

INFILE
XAT (grous)
INFILE = DIMEBIIFAYROLL

$ HHOW LOGICAL

The SHOW LOGICAL command requests a display of the current
equivalence name for the logical name INFILE. The response
indicates that the 1logical name was found in the group
logical name table.

& SHOW LOGILCAL/GROUP

Comterts of grous logical name tablesl
Grour logical

name Leble is emely

The SHOW command requests a display of
names in the group logical name table.
indicates that there

logical name table.

are

logical

all current logical
The message displayed
names

the

group

g SHOW LOGICAL/BYSETEM BYSEL TRRARY

SYSHLTRRARY

DRE2ICSYSLIRI

(sustem)

The SHOW LOGICAL command requests the equivalence name of
The response indicates that the default system
SYSSLIBRARY.
libraries are in DBB2: [SYSLIB].

4 GHOW LOGICAL/GROUP/SYSTEM SYSS$NISK
SYSHNIEK

(swatem)

1
DRAIICL

The SHOW LOGICAL command is qualified by both the /GROUP and
/SYSTEM qualifiers; the response indicates that the logical
hame SYSSDISK has an equivalence name in the system logical
name

table.

222

SHOW MAGTAPE
Displays
magnetic

the
«current
tape device.

characteristics

and

status

specified

Format

SHOW MAGTAPE

Command

device-name

Qualifiers

None.

Prompts

Device:

Command

device-name

Parameters

device-name
Specifies the name of the magnetic
to display the characteristics and

tape device
status.

for

which you want

Example

SHOW
MTAOQZ

MAGTAFE

MTAO?

UNKNOWNy

DENSITY=800s

The
SHOW
MAGTAPE
characteristics
of

type,
It

density,

and

can also display

FORMAT=Normal-11l

command
requests
the device MTAO0.

format
the

(default

following

Position Lost

a
display
1t displays

normal

Even

End-of-File
Beginning-of-Tape

0dd

223

Parity

FParitu

of
the
the device
PDP-11).

characteristics:

Write-Locked

End-of-Tape

Qdd

SHOW NETWORK
Displays the availability of the local node as a member of the network
and the names of all nodes that are currently accessible by the local
node.

Format

SHOW NETWORK

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts
None.

Command Parameters
None.

Example

4 guoW NETWORK
NETWORK STATUS A8 OF 06~-JUN-1978 12142
LOCAL NOUE NAMED
NUMBEER?
STATE:D

VAXI]

3
ON

LIME
NOXIE
MANTLA XMAQ
XMCO
CHT

and
number,
The SHOW NETWORK command displays the name,
status of the local node and lists available remote nodes.
If no remote nodes are available, the command displays:
NO REMOTES ACCESSIRLE

If the network is unavailable, the command displays:
NETWORK UNAVATILABLE

224

SHOW PRINTER
Displays
printer.

the default characteristics currently defined

for

system

Format

SHOW PRINTER

[device~name]

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts

Device:

Command

device~-name

Parameters

device~name
Specifies the name of
to be displayed.

the printer

for

which

characteristics

are

Example

% SHOW
LEFAG:

Devive

PRINTER
LEI1y

LPAOS

WINTH=132.

srovled

The
SHOW
PRINTER
characteristics of

PAGE=64y

NOCRy

FF»

LOWERCASE

display

DRR2?

command
requests
the printer LPAO.

225

the

SHOW PROCESS
Displays information about the current process.
Format

SHOW PROCESS

Command Qualifiers
/ACCOUNTING
/ALL
/PRIVILEGES
/QUOTAS
/SUBPROCESSES

Prompts
None.

Command Qualifiers
/ACCOUNTING

Displays

accumulated

terminal session.

/ALL

accounting

statistics

for

the

current

default
the
Displays all information available, that Iis,
well as the information displayed by the
as
information
/ACCOUNTING, /PRIVILEGES, /QUOTAS, and /SUBPROCESSES qualifiers.

/PRIVILEGES

Displays the user

privileges

that

have

been

granted

the

process.

/QUOTAS

The values displayed
Displays the process's current guotas.
reflect any quota reductions resulting from subprocess creation.

/SUBPROCESSES

Displays the process name(s) of any subprocesses owned by the
if a hierarchy of subprocesses exists, the
current process;
command displays the names in hierarchical order.

226

SHOW PROCESS

Examples

$% gHOW FPROCESS
19-JUN-1978
Fid

11:1359244.13

00160030

Frioritwe

DNevices

Froc.

~TTF3?
name

lefault

asllocated

The default output

MALCOLM

file

srec.

User

MALCOLM

uic

r122,0011

DEALSICMALCOLM.TESTFILES]

TTF3:

the

SHOW PROCESS

command displays:

Date and time the SHOW PROCESS command is issued
Device name of the current SYSSINPUT device
User

name

Process

identification

Process

name

number

User identification code (UIC)
Base execution priority
Default device
Default directory
Devices allocated to the process and

volumes

mounted,

any

% SHOW FROCESS/ACCOUNTING
19-JUN-1978

11:59:44.54

Accounting

information?

Buffered

I1/0

count

Direct I/0 count
Fade faults ¢
Elarsed CPU time
Conmect

time

User

2191

¢
¢

0
0

Fealk

working

MALCOLM

set

size

263
Feak virtual size
3131
Mounted volumes ¢
00:00825.67

180

196
0

01:17%47.76

% SHOW PROCESS/FRIVILEGES
19-JUN-1978
Frocess

11:159:44.71

sriviledges

GRFNAM
GROUF
FRMCER
FRMMEX
TMFMEX

~TTF32?

may
maw
maw
maw
may

~-TTF33

User

MALCOLM

insert
affect
coreate
create
create

im drour lodgical name tasble
other rrocesses in same dHrour
rermanent common event clusters
rermanent mailbox
temrorary mailbox

$ SHOW FROCESS/QUOTAS
19-JUN~-1978
Frocess

name!

limit

RBuffered
Timer

~TTF3¢

User

MALCOLM

Quota?

Accourt
CPU

11:159:44.846

DOCUMENT

1/0

queue

bute

count

auota

entry

aquots

Faging file quota
Ilefault radge fault

cluster

00:100:00.00

12480
10

227

2560000
127

DNirect

Buffered
Oren

file

I/0

limit

limit?

auota

Subrrocess quota
AST limit ¢

6
16

g
16

SHUW

P
e
)

PRUCESD

¢ SHOW FROCESS/SUBPROCESBES

19-JUN-1978 11:159140,.41
Subrrocesses owned
~

OQRION

CYGNUS
- LYRA

~-TTF33

228

User : MALCOLM

SHOW PROTECTION
Displays the current file protection to be applied to
all
new
files
created
during the terminal session or batch job.
You can change the
default protection at any time with the SET PROTECTION command.

Format

SHOW

PROTECTION

Command

Qualifiers

None.

Prompts

None.

Example
1.

¢
$

SHOW

FROTECTIOM

SYSTEM=RWEDy
BET

SHOW

OQWNER=RWEDy

GROUF=RE,

WORLD=ND

ACCESS

FROTECTION={GROUFI
s WORLDERE) Z/DEFAULT
RWED

FROTECTION

BYSTEM=RWELy

OQWNER=RWED:

GROUFP=RWELy

WORLI=RE

The SHOW PROTECTION command requests a display of
protection
defaults;
the SET PROTECTION command

the current
changes the
file access allowed to other users in the same group
and
to
miscellaneous system users.
The next SHOW PROTECTION command
shows the modified protection defaults.

229

SHOW QUEUE
Displays the current status of entries in the printer and/or batch job
queues.

Format

[gueue-name]

SHOW QUEUE

Command Qualifiers
/ALL
/BATCH
/BRIEF
/DEVICE
/FULL

Prompts

queue-name

Queue:

Command Parameters
queue-name

The
Specifies the name of a queue you want to display.
gueue-name parameter 1is required 1if you do not specify either
/BATCH or /DEVICE.

Command Qualifiers
/ALL

Displays the names of

default,

the

SHOW

all

jobs

the

specified

queue.

QUEUE command displays only current jobs and

pending jobs owned by the current process.

/BATCH

Displays entries in all batch job gqueues.

/BRIEF

Requests a brief listing of information about jobs in the queue.
When you specify /BRIEF, only the user name, job number and gueue
name are displayed.

/DEVICE

Displays the status of jobs in all device queues.

/FULL

Displays the file specifications of each file in each pending job
in

the

queue.

230

SHOW

QUEUE

Examples

SHOW
¥

QUEUE

/DEVICES

Device

Queue

SYSHPRINT

Holding

Job

261

Device

Queue

LFOO

Forms=0»r

MALCOLM

Gendev

RETA

Forms=0y

Gersrrt

Fladg

s
Lower

Fri=4y

19-JUN-1978

12156

Flag

Current

Job

260

CRAMER

ALFHA

Fri=4y,

19-JUN-1978

12155

FPending

Job

261

HIGGINS

TEMFO

Pri=4y

12159

Fernding

Job

262

HIGGINS

TEMFR

Fri=4y

19-JUN-1978
19-JUN~1978

lNevice

Queue

LIFRY

The

SHOW QUEUE

Forms=0y

command

Genrrt

displays

00!2:'

Fladg

the

status

the

printer

queues.
The
first queue, named SYS$PRINT, consists of jobs
that are being held.
The printer queue, LPAO,
is
currently
processing
a
job for the user CRAMER;
two jobs are pending
for

the

jobs

t HGHOW
¥

user

HIGGINS

(who

the queue LPBO.

QUEUE

Batelr

issued

the

command).

There

are

SYS$RATCH/FULL

aueue

SYSHRATCH

Joblim=6y

Imierriz4y

Swar

Curvernt

Jobh

263

MALCOLM

SLEEF

Fri=4y,

19-JUN~1978

Currernt

Jobh

2461

HIGGINSE

WAITF

Fri=4y

Currernt

19-JUN-1978

Job

260

13:02

CASEY

RECORD

Fri=4y

19-JUN-1978

12159

13:08

Currvent

Jab

289

MALCOLM

BATCHI

Fri=4y

Current

19-JUN-1978

Job

12158

258

CLAUDIUS

XRULE

FPri=4y

19-JUN~-1978

Current

Job

12:58

297

HAFPY

caLe

Fri=4y

Holding

19-JUN-1978

Jobh

262

12157

HIGGINS

FROCEDUR

Fri=4y

19-JUN-1978

13311

BATCHAVE

Pri=4y

19-JUN~1978

13812

ATTN

Fri=4y,

19-JUN~1978

1459

NEALFROCEDURE
.COMS 26

Fernding
Ll
Feriding

Job 265 MHIGGING
Intervering .obsl
Joty

DRIIT.COMFs1

267

MIGHINS

lelete

The SHOW QUEUE command requests
batch
job
queue.
The
/FULL
specifications of pending files

a display

of all jobs in
the
qualifier
requests the file
in
the
job.
The
response
indicates
a
held
job
and
t WO
pending
jobs for the user
HIGGINS.
The job ATTN, consisting
of
the
file
T.COM,
is

marked

for

deletion

after

processing.

231

SHOW RMS_DEFAULT
Displays the current default multi-block count and multi-buffer
that VAX-11 RMS uses for file operations.

count

Format

SHOW RMS_DEFAULT

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts

None.

Command

Parameters

None.

Example

SHOW RMS.OEFAULT

Frocess
Suetem

MULTI~

ELOCK

COUNT

16
4

H
'

MULTI-RUFFER

Indexed

COUNTS

Relastive

o)
4]

QO
4]

Seauential
Disk

Magtare

0
0

8
0

Unit

Record

4]
0

The SHOW RMS_DEFAULT command displays the current process and
system
default
multi-block
and multi-buffer counts for all
types of

file.

232

SHOW STATUS
Displays
if
any.
continue

the status of the image currently executing in
the
process,
The SHOW STATUS command does not affect the image;
you can
the execution of the image after displaying its status.

Format

SHOW STATUS

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts
None.

Example

IUN MYPRUG

",
¢ SHOW

STHaTUS

Gtotus

Buft.

170

Dir.

170

19-JUN-1978
¢

1544

143

13816132,.00
Cure.e

ws,

Fhws. Meme

Elarsed

CFU

Orern

files

Fadge

Foults

The RUN command executes the
image
MYPROG.EXE.
program is running, CTRL/C interrupts it, and the
command displays its current status.

Current

time

and date

Elapsed CPU time used by the current process
Number of page faults
Open file count
Buffered I/0 count
Direct I/0 count
Current working set size
Current amount of physical menory occupied

233

180

00:100318.37
¢

2881

While
the
SHOW STATUS

SHOW SYMBOL
are
Symbols
Displays the current value of a local or global symbol.
parameters
passing
by
command),
(=
statements
assignment
defined with
to a command procedure file, or by the INQUIRE or READ commands.
Format

[symbol-name]

SHOW SYMBOL

Command Qualifiers
/ALL

/GLOBAL
/LOCAL

Prompts

symbol-name

Symbol:

Command

Parameters

symbol-name

Specifies the 1- to 255-alphanumeric character name of the symbol

The symbol-name must begin with
whose value you want to display.
the
The SHOW SYMBOL command searches
an alphabetic character.
the current command level, then local
for
local symbol table
then the global
levels,
symbol tables for preceding command
for the specified symbol and displays the first
symbol table,
match

finds.

If you specify /ALL, you cannot specify a symbol-name.
Command Qualifiers
/ALL

of all symbols in the
Requests that the current values

specified

specify /ALL and do not
If you
displayed.
be
table
symbol
command
SHOW SYMBOL
THE
/GLOBAL,
or
/LOCAL
specify either
contents of the local symbol table for the current
the
displays
command

level.

/GLOBAL

Requests that only the global symbol table be

searched

for

the

symbol

table

are

specified symbol name.

If you specify /ALL, all names in the

global

displayed.

/LOCAL

Requests that only the local symbol table for the current command
level be searched for the specified symbol name.

If you specify /ALL, all names in the local symbol table for

current command level are displayed.

234

the

SHOW SYMBOL

Examples
l.

BHOW SYMROL FRINT
FRINT = FRINT/HOLD

The SHOW SYMBOL command requests that the
current
value
of
the
symbol name PRINT be displayed.
The command interpreter
searches the local symbol table for the current command level
then
1local
symbol tables for preceding command levels, then
the global symbol table.
$ooGHM

SYMB

SGLORAL AL

TIM

SHOW

TIME

LOG

@LOG

S TATUS

SEEVERITY

ZX00000001

The SHOW SYMBOL command requests a
display
defined
in
the
global symbol table.
Note

of
all
that the

symbols
symbols

$STATUS and S$SEVERITY,
are also displayed.

system,

BHOW
TIM

SyMEOL ALOCAL

which are maintained

the

TIM

The SHOW SYMBOL command requests that only the
table
be
searched
for
the symbol named TIM.

indicates

that TIM currently has

235

value.

1local
symbol
The response

SHOW SYSTEM
Displays a list of processes in the system and
status of

each.

information

about

the

Format

SHOW SYSTEM

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts

None.

Example
1.

¢ sHOWw SYSTEM
VAX/UMS

Pid
00010000
00010001
00030017
00050019
0006001E
00050023
0001003C

Processes

Frocess Name
NULL
SWAPPER
CRAMER
ORION
DEBUG
. JOR350
OFERATOR

19-JUN-1978

15:53:00.71

UIC
State Pri Dir. I/0
CrU
Page flts Ph.Mem
000,000 COM
0
0 02:54303,07
0
0
000,000 HIB
16
0 00:03$25,47
0
0
150,020 LEF
4
265 00800811,32
1275
58
124,001 COM
4
51 00300:06.86
721
144 8
274,010 LEFO
4
-gwarred
out
~57
262,020 COM
4
6272 00301308.82
6255
150 B
001,004 LEF
10
62 00$00:00.98
26
35

The response displays:
e

Process

identification

Process

name

User

Process

e
e
e

identification code
state

Current priority

Direct 1/0 countl
Elapsed CPU timel

Number of page faults
Physical memory occupied

Process

indicator?2

1l 7This information is
displayed
only
if
the
process
is
if the process is not in the
in
the balance set;
currently
balance set, these columns contain the message:
--

The

swapped

out --

letter

indicates

subprocess;

process

236

the

batch

letter

job;
the
indicates

1letter
S
a network

SHOW TERMINAL
Displays

the current characteristics

these
characteristics
can
the SET TERMINAL command.

of a

changed

specific

with

terminal.

corresponding

Each

option

Format

SHOW TERMINAL

Command

[device-name]

Qualifiers

None.

Prompts

None.

Command

Parameters

device-name
Specifies
the
characteristics

name

of
a
displayed.

terminal

for
1If you do not

the characteristics of the current
name SYS$COMMAND are displayed.

device

which
you
want
the
specify a device name,
assigned

the

logical

Example

% SHOW TLRMINAL
TTF3:

/VTS52y

WINDTH=80r

PAGE=24,

SFEED=(2400,2400)y
INTERACTIVE, ECHO»

LOWERCASEYy TAERs
NOEIGHTEITy

WRAF»

SCOPE,

BROAIMIAST»

The SHOW TERMINAL
current terminal.

OWNER=SELF

CRFILL=0y LFFILL=0s NO FARITY
TYPEAHEADy NOESCAFEs NOHOSTSYNCs

command

LOCALs

TTSYNCy

NOHOLDSCREENS»

NOREADSYNC»

displays

237

the

characteristics

the

SHOW TRANSLATION
in that
Searches the process, group, and system logical name tables,
order, for a specified logical name and returns the equivalence name
of the first match found.

Format

logical—-name

SHOW TRANSLATION

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts

logical-name

Log_Name:

Command

Parameters

logical—-name

Specifies a 1- to 63-alphanumeric character
which you want to display the translation.

logical name for
The translation is

not recursive.

Examples

SHOW TRANSLATION

FPAYROLIL

FAYROLL = IMALICACCOUNTS WORKINGIFACTORL.DATIZ?

(rrocess)

The SHOW TRANSLATION command displays the current eguivalence
name

of the logical name PAYROLL.

ABGTGEN DRALT

DISK

ASSTONAGROUT

DER3Y

SHOW

TRANSLATION

DISK =

IR&L2

DIGK

DISK

{rroeess?

in
ASSIGN commands place entries for the logical name DISK
SHOW
The
tables.
name
logical
group
and
process
the
both
TRANSLATION command shows the 1logical name for the first
entry

finds:

logical name table.

RUN

the equivalence name placed in the process

ORION

$
#

SHOW TRANSLATION

TEfeEINal

= JTTF3L

TERMINAL

(e rnress)

CONTLINUE

The RUN command executes the image ORION.EXE.

After

CTRL/Y

interrupts the image, the SHOW TRANSLATION command displays a
the
resumes
The CONTINUE command
logical name assignment.

execution of the

image.

238

SHOW WORKING_SET
Displays

the working

set quota

and

1limit

process.

assigned

the

current

Format

SHOW WORKING_SET

Command

Qualifiers

None.

Prompts
None.

Example

SHOW WORKING.SET

Workinsg

The

Set

limit=100

response

process

has

this

working

pages,

and

that

limit

(200

pages).

the

/Quota=200

command
set

current

239

limit

/Authorized

indicates

quota

of
is

100

that

pages,

equal

(hota=200

the
a

the

quota

current
of

200

authorized

SORT/RSX11

Invokes the PDP-11 SORT utility program to reorder the records in da
of the reordere
file into a defined sequence and to create a new file

records.

al
For complete details on the qualifiers discussed below and additionthe
information on how to define and control sort operations, see
PDP~11 SORT Reference Manual.

Format

SORT/RSX11

input-file-spec

Command Qualifiers
/DEVICE=device-name

/KEY=(field,...)
/PROCESS=type

output-file~-spec
Default

/KEY=(CNl.length)
/PROCESS=RECORD

/RSX11

/SPECIFICATION=file~spec

/WORK_FILES=n

/WORK_FILES=5

File Qualifiers
/ALLOCATION=n
/BLOCK_SIZE=n

/BUCKET_SIZE=n
/CONTIGUOUS

/FORMAT= (format,size)
/INDEXED=keys
/RELATIVE
/SEQUENTIAL

Prompts

File:

input-file-spec

Output:

output-file-spec

Command Parameters
input-file-spec

Specifies the name of the file whose records are to be sorted.
This file must be qualified with either the /FORMAT gualifier or
the /INDEXED gualifier to indicate the precise format of the
file.

output-file-spec

Specifies the name of the file into which the sorted records

are

parameter

with

to be written.

You can optionally qualify the

output-file-spec

the /FORMAT qualifier to indicate the desired output format.

240

SORT/RSX11

Command

Qualifiers

/DEVI CE=device-name
Specifies
sort

the

name

execution,

the

device

overriding

installed.

the

be used
device

for

work

specified

files
when

during

SORT

was

/KEY= field,...
Defines

the

the fields in each input record
sort.
This qualifier is required.

You

can

specify

specified

the

key

format:

fields.

that

Each

are

the

key

field

basis

for

must

[a]l [blm.n
a

defines the way that the data is handle
d
valid keywords and their meanings
are:
B
C
D

Two's complement
Alphanumeric
If

alphabetic,

FORTRAN

superimposed

above,

As D

but with

above,

but

with

above,

trailing

but

with

sign

Packed

ASCII

the

Ascending

Descending

leading

decimal

sign

binary

sign

overpunched

the

default

general

sorting

order.

You

1is,

can

field

specifies

This

field

is
the

the

sort

specify:

order

the default
ascending order.

decimal

that

order

specified,
in

number

defining

the

that

beginning

1is,

records

position

field
relative
to
the
beginning
of
each
indicating the first position in the
record.
This

The

zone

specifies

If not
sorted

with

If not specified,
alphanumeric.

numeric

numeric, convert
4-word floating point

interpreted.

binary

and

record,

the

are

key

with

required.
size

the

key

field,

bytes.

required.

If
you
specify
more
than
one
key
field,
specifications with commas and enclose
the list

241

separate
the
in parentheses.

SORT/RSX11

/PROCESS=type

Defines the type of sort.

following

the

You can specify one of

options:

produce

address

without

file

ADDRESS

Requests that SORT

INDEX

Requests that SORT produce an index file containing the
key field of each data record and a pointer to its

reordering the input file.

location in the input file.

RECORD

Requests SORT to

contents

each

TAG

Requests SORT to sort only on the record keys

each

sort

the

record in the input file.

entire

record in the input file.

By default, the SORT/RSX1ll command produces a record sort.
/RSX11

Requests the PDP-11 SORT program.

This qualifier is required.

/SPECIFICATION=file~spec

Specifies the name of a file containing SORT-11 specifications to
control the sorting process.

see

For details on the contents of this file,

the

SORT

PDP-11

Reference Manual.

/WORK_FILES=n

Defines the number of work files to be used

during

process, overriding the system-defined default.

You can specify from 3 to 8 work files.

the

)

sorting

The default is 5.

File Qualifiers
/ALLOCATION=n

Specifies the number of 5l2-byte blocks to allocate for the
This qualifier can only be used to gqualify the
output file.

output file.

If no allocation quantity is specified, SORT-11

uses

allocation quantity based on the type of sorting process.

default

/BLOCK_SIZE=n

Specifies, when the input and/or output file is a magnetic tape
If not
the size of the blocks to be read or written.
volume,
specified, the block size defaults to 512 bytes.

/BUCKET_SIZE=n

Specifies the RMS bucket size allocation
This qualifier can only be wused to

for the output file.
gualify the output file

parameter.

If no bucket size is specified, SORT-11 uses the bucket size of
the input file 1if the input and output file organizations are
similar. 1If the input file organization is different than the
organization requested for the output file, the default is 1.

242

SORT/RSX11

/CONTIGUOUS
Requests

the

output

file

allocated disk space.
This
the output file parameter.
By

default,

SORT-1l

does

written

qualifier

not

create

can

into

only

contiguous

contiguously

used

output

to qualify

files.

/FORMAT= (format,size)
Defines the format

and record size of
input
and
output
where
format is one of the keywords listed below and size
length, in bytes, of the largest record in the file.
The
record

formats

files,
is the
valid

are:

FIXED

VARIABLE

STREAM
UNKNOWN

This qualifier
not

‘specified

required

for

the

output

input

file

file,

the

defaults to the format of the input
processing).
For
ADDRESS_ROUTING

file

record

output

size

file

record

bytes;
size

for
1is

record.

file

format

(for

sort

INDEX

bytes

specification;

output

RECORD and TAG sort
processing, the output

sort

plus

the

processing,
size

the

the
input

/INDEXED=keys

Specifies that the
file and indicates

associated
the number

input file is an indexed sequential
of keys in each record in the file.

/RELATIVE
Requests

the

output

default,

file

the

output

file

to be in relative file
has the same format as

the
default,

output

file

the

output

organization.
By
the input file.

/SEQUENTIAL
Requests

file.

file

sequential

has

the

file

same

organization.

format

the

input

Examples

% SORT/RSXLL
CUSTOMER FILAFORMAT=(FIXFIIs80)
FALF
L, SRT/REY=
PHA
(1. 20)

BRT

MIELAPSED

SRT

MITOTAL

REAL

RECORDS

TIME:

00100217

SORTED:

1684

The

SORT command requests a default alphanumeric sort on
records in the file CUSTOMER.FIL.
The SORT program sorts

records

each

based

record

and

the

contents

writes

the

ALPHA.SRT.

243

the

sorted

first

list

into

characters

the

output

the

the
in

file

SCRT/RSX11

$ BORT/REXLL CUSTOMER.FIL/FORMAT= (FIXED,80)
29 23, 2)
B TENURE FIL/KEY= (29,2526,
GRT =~ MIELAFSED REAL TIMEY 60100125
3245
GRT ~— MITOTAL RECORDS SORTEDS

request that
the records be sorted first on the 2 characters beginning in
column 29, then on the 2 characters beginning in column 26,
then on the 2 characters beginning in column 23. If columns
23 through 30 of each record contain a date in the format:

The key fields specified for this SORT command

dd-mm-yy

Phis command creates an output file with
ascending order of date.

244

records

sorted

STOP
Terminates execution of:
e

A command,

image,

command

subprocess

CTRL/Y

command

procedure

that was

interrupted

procedure
or

detached

process

Format

STOP

[process—name]

Command Qualifiers
/IDENTIFICATION=process-id

Prompts

None.

Command

Parameters

process—name

Specifies

the

l5-alphanumeric character string name of
the
The specified process must have the same
identification code (UIC) as the current

process
to be deleted.
group number in its user
process.

If you specify /IDENTIFICATION,
you
specify
neither
the
/IDENTIFICATION

process

qualifier,
terminated.

the

the process name is ignored.
process—name
parameter
nor
image

executing

the

If
the

current

Description

The STOP command causes an
abnormal
termination
of
the
image
currently executing;
if the image has declared any exit handling
routines, they are not given control.

Note that when an image is interrupted by
CTRL/Y,
and
the
RUN
command is issued to execute another image, the interrupted image
is also terminated.
However, in this case exit handling routines
are
If

allowed
you

STOP

execute

interrupt
command,

procedure, all
to the command

before

the

image

1is

run.

command procedure by CTRL/Y and you issue
the
if
the STOP command is executed in a command
command levels are unstacked and
control
returns
interpreter.
or

If you specify a process name or process identification, the STOP
command terminates the image currently executing in the specified
process and deletes the process.
If the process is a
batch
job
process,
no
notification
of deletion occurs;
the log file for
the batch job does not print.

245

STOP

The user privilege GROUP is required to stop other
the same group.

process

processes

the

The user privilege WORLD is required to stop any

in the system.

Command Qualifiers

/IDENTIFICATION=process-id

Specifies the process identification the system assigned

When you create a process
process when the process was created.
displays the process
command
RUN
the
command,
RUN
the
with
identification number of the process it creates.

When you specify the process identification, you can omit leading
Zeros.

Examples
1.

RUN

MYPROG

GTOF

MYPROG.
image
the
executing
The RUN command begins
Subsequently, CTRL/Y interrupts the execution and the STOP
command terminates the image.

BTESTALL

STOM

command executes the procedure
The @ (Execute Procedure)
interrupts the procedure and the STOP
CTRL/Y
TESTALL.COM.
command returns control to the DCL command interpreter.
3.

RUN/PROCESHS. ONAME=LIBRA

YRUN-G-FROCDTIDy

a8TOF

LIBRA

ddentification of crested rrocess is 0013340D

LIBRA

The RUN command creates a subprocess named LIBRA to execute
Subsequently, the STOP command forces
the image LIBRA.EXE.
the image to exit and deletes the process.

| $ ON ERROR THEN STOP

In a command procedure, the ON command establishes a default
action when any error occurs as a result of a command or

The STOP command stops all command
program execution.
if this ON command is executed in a command
levels;
procedure that is executed from within another procedure,
control does not return to the outer procedure, but to the
command interpreter.

246

SUBMIT
Enters

command

procedure

the

batch

job

queue.

Format

SUBMIT

file-spec,...

Command

Qualifiers

Default

/AFTER=absolute-time
/HOLD
/ [NO] IDENTIFY
/NAME=job~name
/PARAMETERS=parameters,...
/PRIORITY=n
/QUEUE=queue-name
/REMOTE

/NOHOLD
/IDENTIFY

File Qualifiers

/DELETE

/NODELETE

Prompts

File:

file-spec,...

Command

Parameters

file-spec,...
Specifies one or more command
procedures
to
be
submitted
for
batch
job
execution.
You must specify a file name;
if you do
not

specify

type

COM.

file

1If

type,

you

the

them either

with

specification

the

file

/REMOTE

qualifier

SUBMIT

specify more

commas

must

(,)

command

than

plus

one

signs

contains

specified.

uses

the

default

file,

you

can

file

separate

(+).

network

node

name,

the

Description

file or files queued by the SUBMIT
command
are
considered
a
job.
The
system assigns a unique job identification (jobid) to
each job in the system.
When you submit a batch job, the
system
displays
both
the
jobid it assigned to the job and the name of
the

batch

job queue

Batch
Job
processing
procedure

in which

Output:
by
the
is

written

When
SUBMIT
to

entered

your

job.

you
submit
command
command, all output

file

called

name.LOG

procedures
for
from the command

where

name

and

deletes

the

file
name
of the first command procedure file in the job.
(Use
the /NAME qualifier to give the job a different name.)
This
file
is
initially
written
on your default disk;
when the batch job

completes,

the
If

file

the

after

multiple

procedure

system

queues

printed.

has

procedures

exits

with

are

the

file

submitted,

error

247

fatal

SYSSPRINT

the

job

error

terminates
status.

any

Command Qualifiers
/AFTER=absolute-time

Requests that the job be held until after a
the

time

specified

immediate processing.

value

Specify the time

already

has

according

time.

specific

Controls whether or not the job
immediate processing.

1is

If you specify /HOLD, the job is
until you specifically release

entering

the

rules

for

made

available

absolute times (these rules are given in Section 6.8).

/HOLD
/NOHOLD

passed, the job is queued for

for

not released for processing
it with the SET QUEUE/RELEASE

command.

/IDENTIFY
/NOIDENTIFY

Controls whether the command interpreter displays the jobid
assigned to the job and the name of the queue in which the job
-

was entered.

By default, the jobid and queue name are displayed whenever a job
is successfully queued.

/NAME=job-name

Defines a 1- to 8-alphanumeric character name string to identify
The job name is displayed by the SHOW QUEUE command,
the job.
log,
job output
and is printed on the flag page of the batch
replacing the file name of the log file.

If you do not specify /NAME, the name string defaults to the file
(truncated to 8 characters, if necessary) of the first, or
name

only,

file in the job.

/PARAMETERS=parameters

Specifies from 1 to 8 optional parameters to be passed to the
The parameters define values to be equated to the symbols
job.
named Pl, P2, P3, and so on, in each the command procedure in the
The symbols are local to the specified command procedures.
job.
If you specify more than one parameter, separate them with commas
and enclose them in parentheses.

The commas delimit the parameters.

contains

parameter

any

special

characters

in guotation marks.

To specify a

parameter

delimiters,

enclose

that

the

/PRIORITY=n

n,
Specifies the priority for the specified job. The priority,
in the range of 0 through 31, where 0 is the lowest
must be
priority and 31

is the highest.

current
By default, jobs are queued at the same priority as your
the user priviledge ALTPRI is required to set
process priority;

a priority value that

higher

priority.

248

than

your

current

process's

SUBMIT

/QUEUE=queue-name
Specifies

to be

the name of
submitted.

/REMOTE
Indicates
remote

node

that

node.

which

executed.

you

the

specific

specified

batch

file

specification

the

file

resides

/REMOTE,

you

queue

command procedure

The

specify

job

and

must contain

at which

cannot

to which

specify

the

any

the

executed
the

name

procedure

other

job

the

1is

qualifiers.

File Qualifiers

/DELETE
/NODELETE
Controls

whether

specify

/DELETE

files

are

after

deleted

the

SUBMIT

after

command

processing.

name,

all

files

job are
deleted.
If
you
specify
/DELETE
specification,
only
the
associated file is

following
a
deleted after

The protection

allow delete

processed.

the

code

default

submitted

the

wuser

the

job.

112

entered

input

file(s)

identification

must

code

(UIC)

the

you

the

file
it is

access

user

who

1in
log

the
file

Examples

Job

aueue

SYSSRATCH

The SUBMIT command enters the procedure
AVERAGE.COM
batch
job queue.
When the batch job completes, the

AVERAGE.LOG

% SUBMTT

queued

416

enlered

The SUBMIT command
single
job.
The
equated

string

MEM.

procedures

printing.

BACKUP/FORAMETE
CTXT o DOC
RS:=
s MEM Y +

*wfiUEHfiGfiy KUINMASTE R
Jan

for

the

aueue

enters
job
1is

string

After

TXT,

the

AVERAGE.COM

SYS$SRATEOM

three
given
P2

procedure
and

command
three

the

procedures
parameters:

string

BACKUP.COM

RUNMASTER.COM

are

DOC

and

1in
Pl

a
is

the

executed,

the

executed.

SUBMITANAME=RATOHL2A7HOLD TESTALL

Joby

The

447

SUBMIT

processing

ontered

ausue

SYSHERATOH

command

enters
the
procedure
TESTALL.COM
a
batch
job, but in a HOLD status.
The
released until the SET QUEUE/RELEASE
command
as

will not be
issued.
The
/NAME parameter
identified as BATCH_24.

249

requests

that

the

batch

job

for
job

1is
be

SYNCHRONIZE

Places the process executing a command procedure in a wait state until
a specified batch job completes execution.
Format

SYNCHRONIZE

[job-name]

Command Qualifiers
/ENTRY=jobid

/QUEUE=queue~-name

Prompts
None.

Command

Parameters

job-name

of the
the job
of
name
the
to
ds
correspon
job-name
The
batch job.
defined by /NAME qualifier when the job was submitted or to the

Specifies the l1- to 8-alphanumeric character string name
default job name assigned by the system.

The job must be associated with your current login user name.

If you specify /ENTRY, the job-name parameter

must specify either a job name or a jobid.

1ignored.

You

Description

The SYNCHRONIZE command provides batch job synchronization. If a
job specified 1is not currently in the system, the command
completes immediately with a warning message.

Command Qualifiers
/ENTRY=jobid

Specifies the system-assigned job identification of the batch
The system displays the job identification when it
job.
successfully queues a job for execution; the job identification
of

batch

job is also displayed when you issue the SHOW QUEUE

command.

/QUEUE=queue—name

Specifies the name of the gqueue on which the job was entered. If
not specified, the command assumes that the job is in the default
batch job queue, SYS$BATCH.

The queue-name specified is subject to one level of logical
translation.

250

name

SYNCHRONIZE

Example

SUBMIT/NAME=FREF

SUBRMIT

The

FHASER

first

SUBMIT

FORMAT.COM

for

FORMAT/FARAMETERS=(SORT
s FURGE)

command

execution

and

submits
gives

The second SUBMIT command queues
The procedure PHASER.COM contains

the

the
job

command

procedure

the

job name PREP.
procedure
PHASER.COM.

line:

$ SYNCHRONIZE PREP
When this line is
batch
job
named
procedure

PHASER

processed, the system verifies whether
PREP is currently executing.
If it is,

forced

execution.

251

wait

until

PREP

the
the

completes

TYPE
Displays the contents of a file or

group

files

the

current

output device.

Format

TYPE

file-spec,...

Command Qualifiers

Default

/OUTPUT=file-spec

/OUTPUT=SYS$OUTPUT

Prompts

file-spec,...

File:

Command

Parameters

file-spec,...

If you specify a
Specifies one or more files to be displayed.
file name and do not specify a file type, the TYPE command uses
the default file type of LIS.

you

specify

than

one

file,

separate

the

or plus signs (+).
(,)
specifications with either commas
either case, the files are displayed in the order listed.

file

1In

type,
You can specify wild cards in place of the file name, file
The TYPE command displays all files that
or file version fields.
satisfy the file description.

Description

When the TYPE

command

displays

output,

display in any of the following ways:

you

can

control

the

To temporarily halt the output, then resume it at the line
which it was interrupted, use CTRL/S followed by CTRL/Q.

use
To suppress the display, but continue command processing,
If you press CTRL/O again before the command
CTRL/O.
in command
terminates, output resumes at the current point
If you press CTRL/O when the TYPE command is
processing.
displaying files in a list, the TYPE command suppresses typing
the current file and begins typing the next file in the list.

issue
then
To stop command execution entirely, press CTRL/Y,
STOP command or any other DCL command that terminates the
the
image.

Command Qualifiers
/OUTPUT=file-spec

Requests that the output from the TYPE command be written to
specified file,

rather than SYSSOUTPUT.

252

the

TYPE

Examples:

TYFE

The

COMMONDAT

TYPE

displayed

command

the

requests

terminal.

that

the

file

COMMON.DAT

TYFE #JAT

l--.‘D

The TYPE command contains
name.
Files
with
file

CTRL/O
TYPE

is pressed,
command

interrupts

the

output

begins

command,

a wild
types
of the

displaying

the

command.

2353

STOP

card in place
of
the
of DAT are displayed;
current file stops
and
the

command

file.

When

terminates

the

file
when

the

CTRL/Y

TYPE

UNLOCK
Makes accessible a file that became inaccessible as a result of

being

improperly closed.

Format

file-spec,...

UNLOCK

Command Qualifiers
None.

Prompts

file-spec,...

File:

Command Parameters
file-spec,...

Specifies one or more files to be unlocked. If you specify more
than one file specification, separate them with either commas (,)
or plus signs

(+).

No wild cards are allowed in the file specifications.
Example

$ VYRE TESTFILE.QUT

WTYPEE-QFENTNy
s

error

orening

DERALICMALCOLMITESTFILE.QUTS3

irgeut

Y TEW~W-FILELOCREDy Tile is deasccess locked

$
$

UNLOCK TESTHFILE.OQUT
TYRFE TESTFILE.QUT

The request to type the output file, TESTFILE.OUT, returns an

error message that indicates the file is locked; the UNLOCK
command unlocks it. The TYPE command is used to verify the
contents of the file, which may be incomplete.

254

WAIT
Places

time

the

has

procedures

commands

current process

elapsed.
to

The

delay

a wait

processing

in a procedure

state

WAIT command

for

the

specific

until

is provided

specified

procedure

amount of

period

for

use

in command

set

time.

Format

WAIT

delta~time

Command

Qualifiers

None.,

Prompts

None.

Command

Parameters

delta-time
Specifies the time
according
to
the
rules are given in

time

can

contain

the days part must
Note

that

command

interval to wait.
The time must be
specified
rules for specifying delta time values (these
Section 6.8).
Note, however, that
the
delta

only

the hours,

omitted.

you

issue

does

not

prompt;

the

WAIT

minutes,

command

however,

and

seconds

interactively,

time

value

fields;

the

WAIT

required.

Description
If you

enter

is placed
(You

the WAIT

in a wait

can,

processes.)

however,
Press

command

state

interactively,

and you

receive
CTRL/C

interaction.

your

cannot enter

unsolicited
CTRL/Y

current

any more

messages
restore

process

commands.

from

normal

other

terminal

Example

l.]

LOOP:

$ RUN ALPHA
$ WAIT 00:10
$ GOTO LOOP
The command
procedure
executes
the
program
image
After
the RUN command executes the program, the WAIT
delays execution of the next command for 10
minutes.

ALPHA.
command
After

10 minutes, the GOTO command executes and the procedure
to the label
LOOP
and
executes
the
program
again.
procedure loops until interrupted or terminated.

If
the
procedure
1is
terminated
by pressing
command
process.

another
If

terminated

the

DCL

executed
CTRL/C or
command

procedure

with

the

interactively,
it
CTRL/Y and issuing

that

DELETE/ENTRY

255

runs

executed

new
a

command.

can
be
the STOP

image

batch

loops
The

job,

1in
it

the
can

WRITE
Writes a record to a specified output file.
Format

logical-name

WRITE

symbol-name,...

Command Qualifiers
/ERROR=1label

Prompts

Log_Name:

logical-name

Symbol:

symbol-name,...

Command

Parameters

logical-name

Specifies the logical name assigned to the file to which a record
The OPEN command assigns a logical name to a
is to be written.
1logical name
in the process
file and places the logical name
table.

symbol-name,...

output
the
to
record
symbol names, character
strings enclosed in quotation marks, or literal numeric values.
items specified in the symbol name list must be separated by
The

Specifies data to be written as a single
You can specify one or more
file.

the command interpreter concatenates the items
commas;
single record and writes the record to the output file.

into

The maximum size of any record that can be written is 255 bytes.
Description

The WRITE command can write records only to sequential files, and
cannot be used to append new records at the end of existing
files.

the OPEN
Before a file can be written, it must be opened with
The process permanent files
command and assigned a logical name.

identified by the logical names SYS$INPUT, SYSSOUTPUT, SYSSERROR,
and SYSSCOMMAND do not have to be explicitly opened to be

written.

256

WRITE

Command

Qualifiers

/ERROR=LABEL
Specifies a

label

control

the

line

write

the

request

command

results

procedure

error.

receive
no

error

routine is specified and an error occurs during
the
writing
of
the
file,
the command procedure continues execution at the next
line in the file, as it does if no error occurs.
The

error

over

any

not

routine
action

specified
statement

specified,

the

for

this

qualifier

indicated

current ON

takes

precedence

command.

condition action

/ERROR

taken.

If an error occurs and the target
1label
is
successfully
given
control, the reserved global symbol $STATUS contains a successful
completion status value.

Examples

1.1

WRITE

SYSSOUTPUT

The WRITE command
output device.

2. | $

$
$

"Beginning
writes

second

single

phase

line

tests"

text

the

current

OPEN/WRITE OUTPUT FILE TESTFILE

INQUIRE

"Assign Test-id Number"

WRITE/ERROR=END_LOOP
WRITE/ERROR=END_LOOP

OUTPUT_FILE
OUTPUT_FILE

$ !
$ WRITE_LOOP:

"Test-id
""

",ID

$ GOTO WRITE_LOOP
$ END_LOOP:
$ !
$

CLOSE OUTPUT_FILE

PRINT/DELETE

TESTFILE.DAT

The OPEN command
command requests

particular
equated

line

run

opens the file
TESTFILE.DAT;
an identification number to be

the

procedure.

symbol

concatenated

with

ID.

the

The

symbol

The
WRITE

name

number
commands

and

the
INQUIRE
assigned to a

entered
write

blank

is
text

line.

The lines between the label WRITE LOOP
and
END LOOP
define
processing
that
results
1in
additional data written to the
file.
The label END_LOOP is also used as the target
of
the
/ERROR
qualifier
on the WRITE command;
the CLOSE and PRINT
commands

the

this

file

TESTFILE.DAT

label

the

deleted

the

system
after

257

output

file

printer.

printing.

and

The

queue

output

copy

file

INDEX

Batch jobs (Cont.),
summary of commands,

in command procedures, 5-2
in first position of input
records,
prompt

1-16
synchronize execution, 250
using devices, 5-20

for

command

input,

1-1

$SEVERITY, 5-17, 3
$STATUS, 5-17, 3
define with EXIT

command, 91
special cases, 5-19
test in command procedures, 5-18
= (Assignment Statement) command,
5-8, 1
examples, 1-5, 5-10, 5-11

(Execute Procedure)

5-4,
how to

8
use,

5-4

specify,

rules

1-2

command,

VAX-11,

140

command,

examples,

Assignment

command,

COBOL/RSX11l command,
Colon,
specify in logical
Command interpreter,

DCL, 1-2
default,

MCR,

statements,
1-5,

5-24

specifying,

5-20,

2-11

examples,

for

6-12

6-8

alphanumeric, 6-8
delete input, 1-7
nonalphanumeric (summary),

Assembler,
MACRO-~-11l,

Characters,

3-3

command,

1-5,

Command

name,

2-12

1-2

1-2
login,

levels,

137

5-7

Command procedures, 1-5, 5-1
change verification mode,

5-4,

BASIC

command,

Batch

jobs,

210
for

errors,

5-18

creating, 5-1
disable error checking,

5-1

delete from queue, 57
display in queue, 5-6,
log file, 5-7
modify attributes, 199
mounting devices, 3-12

execute

5-18,

signal

end-of-data,

specify

end-of-job,

parameters,

230

5-12

specify password, 158
submit interactively,

through

card

5-5,

247

reader,

113

5-4

5-12

submit through card reader,
summary of commands, 1-16
terminate, 5~16, 245
transfer control,

Index-1

192

5-8

executing, 5-4, 8
exit from, 5-16, 91
handle CTRL/Y, 153
handle errors, 5-18, 153
input and output streams,
mounting devices, 3-12
nesting, 5-7

5-6,

6-9

144

select at

5-10

check

submit

1-8

4-7

substring expressions,

devices, 3-3, 12
in batch jobs, 5-20
Alphanumeric characters, 6-8

syntax,

execution,

Character strings,
comparison operators,
manipulate in command

Allocate

ASSIGN

program

4-7

input with CTRL/C,

procedures,

examples,

APPEND

execution,

copy file from, 37
set translation mode, 187
submit batch jobs, 5-6

the

number,

ALLOCATE

command
command

scheduled wakeups,
reader, 5-6

system, 1l-1
login procedure, 137

Account

Card

time values,

6-14
Accessing

CANCEL command,

Cancel,

command,

A
Absolute

5-16,

5-6

INDEX

(Cont.)

CTRL/I,
CTRL/K,
CTRL/L,
CTRL/O,

Commands,
comments, 6-2
continuable after CTRL/C
or CTRL/Y, 4-7

1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9

effect on image execution, 4-7

continue on more than one

when displaying multiple

line, 6-2

define synonyms for, 1-5
device handling (summary),

1-13

entering, 1-2

execute in command procedures,

files, 252
CTRL/Q, 1-9

effect on image execution, 4-7
resume output, 252

5~2
file manipulation (summary), 1-12

CTRL/R, 1-9
CTRL/S, 1-9

prompting, 1-3

CTRL/U, 1-9

program development (summary),
1-14
qualifiers, 6-4
rules for entering, 6-1

summary by function, 1-11
terminal control (summary), 1-11

to control batch jobs
(summary), 1-16

effect on image execution, 4-7
suspend output, 252

cancel a command line, 1-7
CTRL/X, 1-9
CTRL/Y, 1-9
disable, 188

interrupt program execution, 4-6
specify action to take, 153

CTRL/Z, 1-9
signal end-of-file from
terminal, 5-2

Comments on command lines, 6-2
Compare files, 65
Compilers,
BASIC, 22
FORTRAN, 93

PDP-11 COBOL-74/VAX, 28

Completion status values, 5-18
Concatenate files,

Data,

entering in command procedure,

Continuation character, 6-2

5-2

CONTINUE command, 31

submit in input stream, 48

target of ON command, 5-18

Date,

Continue,

display, 216

commands on more than one

entering in commands, 6-14
DCL command interpreter, 1-2
DEALLOCATE command, 41

line, 6-2
in command procedures, 5-2
image execution after

examples, 3-10
DEASSIGN command, 43
DEBUG command, 46

interruption, 4-7
in command procedures, 5-2
Control keys, 1-8

Debugger, 4-5

COPY command, 32

copy files to and from
tapes, 3-10

CREATE command, 38
create a file in a batch job, 5-2

CREATE/DIRECTORY, 2-4, 38

examples, 2-4, 3-8
Create,
command procedures, 5-1
directories, 38
files, 38
libraries, 116
logical names, 2-11, 18,
subdirectories,

CTRL key, 1-8

2-4,

summary of functions, 1-8
CTRL/C, 1-9
cancel command input, 1-8

compile program with, 4-5
information used by, 4-5
invoke after image
interruption, 46

request at run time, 4-5, 174

Debugging,
DEPOSIT command, 61
EXAMINE command, 88
Decimal values, 6-10
specify, 6-10
DECK command, 48
example, 5-3

Default,

disk and directory, 2-7

interrupt program execution, 4-6
relationship to CTRL/Y, 4-6

Index-2

change, 189
display, 217
file specifications, 2-7

after logical name
translation, 2-14

INDEX

Default,

file

specifications

(Cont.),
summary,

2-8

temporary,

2-16,

logical names,
process

list files in, 73
specify in logical names,
DIRECTORY

4-9

2-15

logical

names, 2-16
in batch jobs, 5-8
in command procedures, 5-4

protection,

Directories (Cont.),
hierarchies, 2-5

2-9

file types, 2-6
input, output, and error
streams,

(Cont.)

UIC

logical
DELETE

18,

files,
protection, 3-2
volumes,
allocate, 3-4
mounting, 146
private, 3-7
sharing, 3-8

symbol names,

command,

DELETE/ENTRY, 57
DELETE/SYMBOL, 59
DELETE

key,

1-7,

DISMOUNT

1-9

5-6,

input characters, 1-7
input command lines, 1- 7,
logical names, 43
print jobs, 57

(tape),

set,

command,

summary,

command,

EDIT

command,

191

2-3

4-4
invoke in command procedures, 10
invoking, 82
'
End-of-data,

signal with EOD command,

End-of-job,

specify
Entering,

Devices,

EOD

allocate,

3-3, 12
2-1
deallocate, 3-6, 41

display status of,

punch,

EOJ

command,

example,

default

mounting volumes,

146

2-3

3-8,

default, 2-7
change, 189
display, 217

3-5,

5-7

5-6

2-11,

18,

Errors,

1-13

command,

5-2

Equivalence names,

218

summary of commands,
how to specify, 2-2

create,

5-3

EOF

handling,

Directories,

command,

example,

classes,

DIFFERENCES

in batch job,

commands, 1-2
data in command procedures,

2-3

dismount volumes, 3-6,
display default, 217

5-4

Editors,

Device names, 2-2
assign logical names, 18, 50
generic, 2-3, 3-4
in file specifications, 2-2
logical, 2-12

physical,

DUMP

1-8

symbols, 59
Delta time values,
specify, 6-15

Density

3-10

Display,
files, 252
lines in command procedures,

DEPOSIT

command,

examples,

Delete,

batch jobs,
files, 53

217

select at login, 137
file structures, 3-8

names,
for

2-16

189

display,

Define,
values

2-4

2-7,

change,

229

command,

format,

Disk,
default,

set, 195
system logical names, 2-17
values for qualifiers, 6-5
DEFINE

2-15

Directory name, 2-3
in file specifications, 2-3
subdirectory format, 2-4

3-3

display,

command,

error

stream,

2-16,

4-9

for created process, 176
handling in command procedures,
5-18, 153

system messages,

ESCAPE
EXAMINE

key,

1l-4

1-9

command,

Exception conditions,
Execute, 5-4
command

Index-3

procedures,

4-8
5-4,

8§

INDEX

Execute (Cont.),
programs, 174
protection, 3-2
EXIT command, 91
examples, 5-16
Exit,
from command procedure, 5-16
handlers, 4-8
image exit, 4-6
Expressions,
arithmetic operations, 6-12
comparing arithmetic
values, 6-12

(Cont.)

comparing character strings, 6-12
containing lexical functions,
5-24

how to specify, 6-11
in assignment statements, 1
logical operations, 6-11
performing arithmetic
operations, 6-12
rules of precedence, 6-13
used in IF commands, 5-15

Files (Cont.),
open for reading or
writing, 5-20, 156
print, 159
protection, 3-1, 196
change, 195
display default, 229
set default, 195
purge, 164
read, 5-20, 166
rename, 169
sort, 240
tapes, 3-9
multi-volume, 3-10
type, 252
unlock, 254
write, 5-20, 256
Files-1ll Structure Level 1,

3-8, 105
Files-11 Structure Level 2, 3-8, 105
Format disk and tape volumes, 104
FORTRAN command,

Functions,

lexical,

how to specify,
summary, 5=22

5-22,

5-26

6-13

File names,

how to specify,
null, 2-9

2-6

File specifications,
defaults, 2-7
lists, 6-4

2-1

parameters,

6-3
rules for entering, 6-3
temporary defaults, 2-9
using logical names, 2-11
File types,
default, 2-6
how to specify, 2-6
null, 2-9
Files, 2-1
append, 14
close, 5-20, 26
commands (summary), 1-12
compare contents, 65
concatenate, 32
copy, 32

Generic device names, 2-3, 3-4
Global symbols,
in command procedures, 5-10, 1
in object module libraries, 117
GOTO command, 97
examples,

5-16

Group,

logical name table, 2-12
in UIC, 1-2
protection category, 3-2
qualify process names, 4-11
number

H
HELP command, 99
Hexadecimal values,
specify, 6-10
Hibernation and wakeup,

177

create,

CREATE command, 38
EDIT command, 82
delete, 53, 164
display, 252
dump, 79
editors, 4-4, 82
formats, 3-8, 3-9, 105
how to specify, 2-1
libraries, 4-3, 116
listing directories, 73
on private volumes, 3-1

command,

101

examples of expressions, 5-15
Image, 4-6
create with linker, 126
execute, 174
exit, 4-6
after CTRL/C or CTRL/Y, 4-6
exit handlers, 4-8
interrupt execution, 4-6

Index~-4

INDEX

Image (Cont.),
relationship to process,
RSX-11M,
stop

LINK

4-8

4-7,

245

Initialization of volumes,
104
INITIALIZE

command,

examples,
Input

3-8,

stream,

use

104

2-16,

4-9

logical names,

INQUIRE

command,

examples,

3-4,

3-9

for created process,
SYSSINPUT, 2-16
Input/output,
devices, 3-1

176

qualifier values,
specify, 6-6
Log file,
for batch jobs, 5-7,
Logical names, 2-11
assign, 18, 50
deassign, 43

2-17

111

5-14

output

entry,
to

program

terminal,

1-9,

execution,

252

default,

4-6

how

to specify, 2-12
specify as command input,
system format, 2-15
system-supplied,

113

Job,
batch jobs, 5-1
identification, assigned
patch jobs, 5-6
name,

specify

jobs,

for

batch

2-13

use

devices

to mount

execute

procedure,
job,

5-5

159

test
LOGOUT

1-7

Macro

in command procedures,
volume, 3-4
Lexical functions, 5-22

5-22
maintain,

command,

examples,

MACRO

6-8

and

command,

MACRO-11l,

4-4

maintain,

116

140

MCR,

command,
command

144
interpreter,

144

examine, 88
modify data in, 61
working set, 212, 239

116

1lle6

object module,
LIBRARY

1-6
to

Memory,

4-4

4-4,

in,

translation

libraries,

create

examples, 5-23 to 5-26
how to specify, 6-13

macro,

6-8

6-3

Labels,

and

139

1-6,

uppercase,

create

5-8

entering commands

Keywords,

5-8

interactive or batch
5-24

command,

suppress

file,

batch

1l-1

file,

for

Lowercase,

Keys,

truncating,

jobs, 3-12
Login, 137

Libraries,

2-14

2-17

2-11
translation,

mode,

summary,

2-15

in batch jobs, 5-7
in command procedures, 5-4
display equivalence, 221, 238

5-6

terminal,

command,

tables,

command,

example,

247

J
JOB

how to

deassigned with CLOSE

1-8

continue, 31
invoke debugger,
stop, 245

126

Interrupt,

command

command,

LINK/RSX11l command, 132
specify libraries, 4-3
Linking programs, 126
with the debugger, 4-5
Listing files in directories, 73
Lists,
of file specifications, how to
specify, 6-4

132

execution,

(Cont.)

4-3,

116

Messages,

116

send

4-4

to operator, 3-5,
format, 1-4

system,

Index-5

171

INDEX

Parameters (Cont.),
pass to command procedures,

MOUNT command, 146
examples, 3-5, 3-8

Mounting volumes,

3-5

5-12, 8
testing,

in batch jobs, 3-12
sharing, 3-8
Multi-volume tapes, 3-10

5-8

networks,

how to specify, 2-2
Null file names and file types,
2-9

6-10

display, 226
Process, 1l-1
cancel wakeups,

delete,

3-5,

identification number, 4-9
logical name table, 2-11
name, 4-9, 4- 11
quotas, 4-9
relationship to image, 4-8
set characteristics, 193

171

6-10

Program,

from command procedure,

debugging, 4- 4
development,
command summary,
commands, 4 -1

5-4

Owner,

execution,

for symbol values,

Protection, 3-3
codes, 3-1
how to specify,
default, 3-3

P
Parameters, 1-3
command,
file specifications, 6-3
rules for entering, 6-1

248

device allocation,
display, 229

file, 3-2, 19 5
tape volumes, 3-3
volumes, 3-1
PURGE command, l64

Index-6

4-4

1-14

interrupt,

updating, 4-4
Prompting, 1-3

of a subprocess, 4-11
protection category, 3-2
volume, 3-4

5-12,

4-4

compare versions,

2-16

Output,

233,

226,

236

specify in expressions, 6-l1
Output stream, 2-16, 4-9
for created process, 176

pass to batch job,

245

display information,

156

arithmetic, 6-12
arithmetic comparisons, 6-12
logical, how to specify, 6-l1

SYS$OUTPUT,

4-9

created with RUN command, 175
default logical names, 2-16

Operators,

radix,

225

created at login, 1l-1
created to execute the batch

116

ON command, 153
examples, 5-18
OPEN command, 5-20,

send message to,

change entries, 199
display, 23 0
Printers,
display characteristics,
queues, 159, 199 ! 230
Priority,
process, 4-9, 193
Privileges, 1-2

assigned to user processes,

Operator,

230

queues,

Node names,

Object module,
libraries, 4-3,
link, 126
Octal values,
specify, 6-10

2-3

Print,
files, 159
at the terminal, 252
jobs,
delete from queue, 57

display status,

display status, 224
how to specify, 2-2
submit batch jobs, 247

rules for entering,

5- 16

PASSWORD command, 158
Physical device names,
PRINT command, 159

Nesting command procedures,

Numeric values,

(Cont.)

4-6

5-14,
196
3-3

111l

INDEX

(Cont.)

Q
Qualifiers,
command

SET

1-3

qualifiers,

6-4

defaults,

6-5
file qualifiers, 6-4
in command procedures, 5-3
rules for entering, 6-4
specify values

for,

Queues,

Quotas,

batch

jobs,

resource,

display,

1-2,

SET

PROTECTION,

SET

QUEUE,

199

example,

5-6

193

SET

RMS

SET

TERMINAL,

READ

command,

read
Read,

210
5-5

SET WORKING_SET,
summary

4-9

SHOW

DAYTIME,

216

SHOW

DEFAULT,

217

SHOW DEVICES,
SHOW LOGICAL,

files,

5-20,

RENAME
REPLY

command,

169

command,
examples, 3-5

218

created

Resource wait mode,

counts,

4-9

process,

176

193

and multi-buffer

201,

Task

Rules
RUN

for

command,

create

execute

144

commands,

6-1

174

command,

SET

CARD

invoking,

returned

STOP

Y,
192~

NOVERIFY,

SET

ON,

210

192

example,

DCL

245

5-18

215

240

command,

commands,

command

5~17

batch

job,

execution

5-18

procedure,

57
of

command procedure,
5-16
file from printing, 57

create,

187

191

NOCONTROL

SET

image execution,

SET CONTROL Y, 188
SET DEFAULT, 189

NOON,

239

command,

executed

174

185

SET
SET

238

values,

Subdirectories,

READER,

MAGTAPE,

4-4

Status

175

image,

SET

SET,

of options,

4-4

SO0s,

S
SET

237

Stop,

process,

234

236

defined with EXIT
5-17, 91

(MCR),

132

entering

SYMBOL,

SYSTEM,

invoking, 82
SORT/RSX11l command,

232

interpreter

Builder,

SHOW

SLP,

232

233

SHOW

summary

RSX-11M,
command

224
225

DEFAULT,

SHOW WORKING

RK06/RK07 disk,
backup files on, 3-7
RMS (Record Management Services),
1-6
multi-block

223

SHOW TRANSLATION,

1-2,

3-8

221

SHOW TERMINAL,
SHOW TIME, 216

171

quotas,

RMS

SHOW STATUS,

3-11

REQUEST

assign

SHOW

3-2

command,

Resource

5-20

166

protection,

186

SHOW PROCESS, 226
SHOW PROTECTION, 229
SHOW QUEUE, 230

166

files,

212

options,

Sharing disk volumes,
SHOW command, 214

6-10

and write

201

203

SHOW MAGTAPE,
SHOW NETWORK,
SHOW PRINTER,

Radix operators,

195

DEFAULT,

example,

247

226

(Cont.),

PROCESS,

SET VERIFY,

6-6

batch job, 5-5
display entries, 230
modify entries, 199
printer, 159
submit

command

SET

188

how to
SUBMIT

specify,

command,

examples,

Submit,

batch
batch

Index-7

2-4

247

5-5

jobs
jobs

reader,
Subprocess,
create

4-7

2-4

interactively, 5-5
through the card
5-6

with

RUN

command,

175

INDEX (Cont.)

Subprocess
delete,

multi-volume files, 3-10

245

operator assistance required,

display current subprocesses,

3-11

226

rewind and unload, 191
use more than one drive,
Task Builder, invoke, 132

4-5

file specification defaults, 2-9

Terminal,

111
1

change characteristics, 203
display characteristics, 237

define synonyms for commands,
1-5

function keys,

display current values, 234

session,

initiate,

substitution,
5-8

SYNCHRONIZE command,

250

for DCL commands,

1-5

Synonyms,

2-16

SYS$COMMAND,

display,

139

216

entering in commands, 6-14
Traceback information used by
debugger,

4-5

Translate,

SYS$DISK, 2-16
change with SET DEFAULT
command, 189
SYSSERROR, 2-16, 4-9

logical names, 2-13, 221, 238
apply defaults, 2-14
order of search, 2-13
recursively, 2-14

defined for batch job, 5-7
defined for command procedure,
2-16,

1-1

terminate,

Time,

defined for batch job, 5-8

5-4

1-7

summary of commands, 1-11

using in command procedures,

SYS$INPUT,

1-8

summary,

delete,

3-12

Temporary,

assign values interactively,
5-14,
define,

3-3

protection,

relationship to owner, 4-11

Swap mode, 193
Symbol table, 4-5
used by debugger,
Symbols, 5-14

(Cont.),

Tapes

(Cont.),

Translation mode for card reader,
187

Truncating keywords, 6-3

4-9

TYPE command,

define as SYS$SCOMMAND, 10, 21
defined for batch job, 5-7
defined for command procedure,

252

Type-ahead buffer, 1-7
purged after CTRL/Y, 4-6

5-4

SYSSLIBRARY, 2-17
syssourpuT, 2~-16, 4-9

defined for batch job, 5-7
defined for command procedure,
5-4

SYS$SYSTEM,

UIC (user identification code),
1-2

2-17

Systemnm,

default logical names, 2-17
devices, display status of, 210
display all processes, 236

directory name, 2-4
UNLOCK command, 254

User authorization file, 1-2
obtain process defaults, 4-9

logical name table, 2-12
protection category, 3-2

VAX-11 FORTRAN IV-PLUS, 93

TAB key,

VAX-11 MACRO, 140
libraries, 4-4

1-9

Tables,

local and global symbol, 4-5,
5-10

logical name,
Tapes,

allocate,
mounting,

\'}

3-4
146

2-11

VAX-11l Record Management Services
(RMS),

1-6

Verification setting in command
procedures, 5-4
set on and off, 210
Version numbers, 2-6
on tape files, 3-10

Index~8

INDEX

Volumes,

3-4

dismount, 3-10, 77
display status of,
dump contents,

initialize,
mount, 3-5,
protection,

WAIT

command,

example,
Wait,
for batch

(Cont.)

Wait

current
Wakeups,

219

3-4,
146
3-1,

(Cont.),

put

job

in wait

104

cancel scheduled,
schedule with RUN

196

Wild cards, 2-10
input files, 2-10

24
command,

output files, 2-10
Working set, 212, 239
World,

255

WRITE

protection category,

5-20

command,

example,

256

5-21

Write,
job

termination,

250

Index-9

protection,

3-2

state,

3-2

177

255

VAX/VMS
Command

Language
Guide
AA-D023A~TE

User's

READER'S

NOTE:

This
use

form

for

comments

eligible
Report

document

submitted

discretion.

Did you

find

Did you
page

receive

(SPR)

one

service,

find errors

indicate

OOOoaod

comments
this

the

Assembly

type of

language

Occasional

DIGITAL will

company's

the

a written reply and are

under

Software Performance
comments on an SPR

submit your

usable,

improvement.

in this manual?

Higher-level

User with

for

only.

form

this manual understandable,

suggestions

number.

Please

If you require

form.

Please make

COMMENTS

reader

so,

and well-organized?

specify

the error

that you most nearly represent.

programmer

language programmer

programmer
little

(experienced)

programming

experience

Student programmer

Other

(please

specify)

Name

Date

Organization
Street

City.

State

and the

Zip Code
or

Countrv

—_—_——— = = -

— — — DoNot Tear- Fold Hereand Tape — — — — — — — — —

No Postage

dlilgliltiall

Necessary

if Mailed in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO.33 MAYNARD MASS.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

RT/C SOFTWARE PUBLICATIONS

TW/A14

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
1925 ANDOVER STREET

TEWKSBURY, MASSACHUSETTS

_ —

Do Not Tear - Fold Here

01876